DIY Science & Technology | Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/category/diy/ Awe-inspiring science reporting, technology news, and DIY projects. Skunks to space robots, primates to climates. That's Popular Science, 145 years strong. Mon, 27 Nov 2023 23:45:00 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.2.2 https://www.popsci.com/uploads/2021/04/28/cropped-PSC3.png?auto=webp&width=32&height=32 DIY Science & Technology | Popular Science https://www.popsci.com/category/diy/ 32 32 Sneak away for some arousing browsing … of the best Cyber Monday sex toy deals https://www.popsci.com/gear/sex-toys-sexual-wellness-amazon-deals-cyber-monday-2023/ Mon, 27 Nov 2023 23:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=592640
A Womanizer OG in a pattern on a plain background
Amanda Reed

Whether it's with your lover or by yourself, there's no better activity than ... shopping our favorite sexual wellness accessories on Amazon.

The post Sneak away for some arousing browsing … of the best Cyber Monday sex toy deals appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Womanizer OG in a pattern on a plain background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The holidays are stressful. Good thing having sex and/or masturbating reduces stress and helps you sleep. So drop what you’re doing and get on the gift of getting off with these Cyber Monday sex toy deals at Amazon.

Womanizer OG $159.99 (Was $199)

Amanda Reed

SEE IT

Our best overall sex toy pick, the Womanizer OG has lots of intensity levels, can be used for clitoral stimulation or on your G-spot, and its Smart Silent tech keeps things discreet. The Womanizer OG takes all that is good in a bullet vibrator and all that is good in a clitoral stimulation toy and combines it into a versatile, wunderbar vibrator that you can use on multiple erogenous zones. Twelve levels of Pleasure Air intensity and three vibration modes separately can lead you to all kinds of new highs. You’ll want to buy it over and over and over until the neighbors complain … about all the packages on the porch.

Lubricant deals

Toy deals

The post Sneak away for some arousing browsing … of the best Cyber Monday sex toy deals appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Powerful Cyber Monday deals: Solar generators from Jackery, Anker, and more up to 50% off https://www.popsci.com/gear/solar-generator-deals-anker-jackery-amazon-black-friday-2023/ Mon, 20 Nov 2023 21:45:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=590790
Jackery Explorer Plus solar generators arranged in a pattern on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

Some of the best solar generators on the market are currently at their cheapest prices ever for Black Friday at Amazon.

The post Powerful Cyber Monday deals: Solar generators from Jackery, Anker, and more up to 50% off appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Jackery Explorer Plus solar generators arranged in a pattern on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

A solar generator is a sizable investment, but can really save you in a pinch. These portable power stations store enough juice in their built-in batteries to keep your devices, appliances, and anything else that requires electricity going when the grid isn’t an option. Cyber Monday has brought some of the deepest discounts we’ve ever seen on brands like Bluetti, Jackery, Anker, and Ecoflow, so we’ve collected the best Black Friday deals on solar generators we’ve seen so far.

Anker SOLIX C1000 Portable Power Station, 1800W Solar Generator $649 (was $999)

Anker

SEE IT

This is Anker’s newest portable power station, and it’s cheaper than we’ve ever seen it for Black Friday. The super-fast battery charges to 100 percent from zero in just under an hour so that it can be ready on short notice. It offers six full-sized outlets (with ground), two USB-C ports, and two USB-A ports for powering devices. That’s more than you’ll find on many similar models. Plus, the internal battery has enough juice to charge an iPhone nearly 100 times or keep a camp light going for up to 60 hours.

Jackery solar generator deals

Ecoflow solar generator deals

Bluetti solar generator deals

Ugreen solar generator deals

The post Powerful Cyber Monday deals: Solar generators from Jackery, Anker, and more up to 50% off appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to open a QR code on your computer https://www.popsci.com/diy/qr-code-on-computer/ Mon, 27 Nov 2023 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=591442
Opening QR code on a laptop at the park
You don't need your phone to open a QR code. DepositPhotos

Scanning a QR code without your phone requires a little help from Google or a webcam.

The post How to open a QR code on your computer appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Opening QR code on a laptop at the park
You don't need your phone to open a QR code. DepositPhotos

You probably already know how to scan a QR code with your phone. It’s simple enough: just open the camera app, point your phone at the code, and tap the link. What if you’re on your computer, though? You could point your phone at the computer screen, but that inter-device dance isn’t necessary. You can open that code right from your laptop or desktop. 

Scan a QR code in Google Chrome

Google Chrome users have it the easiest, as the browser has a built-in feature specifically to handle this situation. Right-click the image containing the QR code and click Search Image with Google

QR code open in Google Chrome
Google Chrome allows you to seamlessly reverse image search by right-clicking on the QR code. Credit: Justin Pot

This will open a Google Lens panel to the right of your browser window. At the top you’ll see your image. Below that you will see the words QR code: Text, along with the text contained in the QR code. If the text is a link you will also see a button for opening the link. 

Google Lens panel
“Search Image With Google” opens up a Google Lens panel. Credit: Google/Justin Pot

Non-Chrome users can still access this feature, it just requires an extra step. Simply head to Google.com in your browser of choice and click the Search by image icon, which is in the right side of the search bar.

Google search reverse image search icon
Google Search allows you to search the image by clicking on the icon on the right. Credit: Google/Justin Pot

You can upload an image with a QR code, if you want, or provide a URL for the image. Either way Google Lens will open and let you know what’s in the QR code. 

Scan a QR code with your webcam

Sometimes you have a QR code on a sheet of paper but your phone isn’t handy. Your laptop has a camera, though, and you can use it instead. 

In Windows 10 and 11 you can use the Camera app, which is included with your operating system. You can find this application by opening the Start menu and searching for “Camera”. Scanning is simple: hold your QR code in front of your webcam and click the QR code button. 

Apple’s macOS does not have a built-in camera application capable of scanning QR codes. The good news: the free application QR Journal, which you can download in the Mac App Store, can use the webcam to scan QR codes. 

The post How to open a QR code on your computer appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Shop these Black Friday 3D printer deals and print all your holiday gifts https://www.popsci.com/gear/3d-printer-black-friday-deals-2023/ Sat, 25 Nov 2023 00:39:41 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=591966
The best 3D printers on-sale for black friday from Creality, Anycubic arranged in a grid on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

Whether you're an experienced printer or a total novice, these Black Friday deals on 3D printers offer discounts on your perfect machine.

The post Shop these Black Friday 3D printer deals and print all your holiday gifts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best 3D printers on-sale for black friday from Creality, Anycubic arranged in a grid on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Sure, you could buy a bunch of gifts for everyone you know this holiday season. Or, you could buy yourself an awesome 3D printer and manufacture everyone’s gift. Imagine marching into your boss’s office and plunking down a tiny statue of yourself. Or treating your mom to a tiny car spoiler she can attach to the back of her Crocs. It’s all possible and you can save money by taking advantage of these 3D printer Black Friday deals.

If you need help choosing a printer, check out some of our helpful guides including the best 3D printer for beginners and the best 3D printer under $1,000.

Anycubic 3D Printer Kobra 2 Max $499 (was $699)

Anycubic

SEE IT

This is a 3D printer you can grow into. It offers a total print size of 17.7 x 15.7 x 15.7 inches, which allows for all sorts of extra-large creations. You can churn out masks, lightsabers, or pretty much anything your heart desires. This model does come with a bit of a learning curve, but it’s a great machine if you don’t mind putting some work into it.

Creality 3D printer deals

Anycubic 3D printer deals

Anker 3D printer deals

Elegoo 3D printer deals

Flashforge 3D printer deals

Bambu Labs 3D printer deals

The post Shop these Black Friday 3D printer deals and print all your holiday gifts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to transfer your WhatsApp chats to a new phone https://www.popsci.com/diy/transfer-whatsapp-new-phone/ Fri, 24 Nov 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=591420
Hand holding phone with WhatsApp open. WhatsApp will help you move your messages between phones.
WhatsApp will help you move your messages between phones. Mika Baumeister/Unsplash

Don't leave your conversations behind when you switch devices.

The post How to transfer your WhatsApp chats to a new phone appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Hand holding phone with WhatsApp open. WhatsApp will help you move your messages between phones.
WhatsApp will help you move your messages between phones. Mika Baumeister/Unsplash

Billions of people currently use WhatsApp to chat on mobile, and with good reasons. The app is packed with features, offers end-to-end encryption for users, and provides a rich experience on multiple platforms.

If you’ve invested a lot of your messaging time into WhatsApp, then you’re not going to want to leave behind those chats when you upgrade to a new handset. Thankfully, WhatsApp has you well covered here, and the migration process isn’t difficult.

There’s even provision for making the typically difficult jump from Android to iOS or vice versa. The process of moving chats is different in each case, but no matter which devices are involved, it won’t take more than a few minutes.

Android to Android

WhatsApp can restore messages from a Google Drive backup.
WhatsApp can restore messages from a Google Drive backup. Credit: WhatsApp/David Nield.

You shouldn’t have much trouble restoring your WhatsApp messages on a new Android phone if your old phone is an Android device too. On your old phone, first make sure everything is backed up to Google Drive: Tap the three dots (top right), then Settings and Chats, then Chat backup. Hopefully you won’t need this backup, but you’ll be glad to have it if something goes terribly wrong.

Then, install WhatsApp on your new phone. Once you’ve signed in with your existing phone number, the app should recognize you have chats on another device that you might want to move over. Tap Transfer from the old device when you see the prompt to do this, follow the instructions, and you’ll get a QR code on screen.

You then need to go back to WhatsApp on your old phone, which will be ready to scan the QR code on your new phone. Once you’ve scanned it, accept the invitation to link the devices together, and you’ll see a progress bar on screen.  When you see the confirmation that the transfer is complete, tap Done and you’re ready to go on your new phone.

You don’t have to use this direct transfer method, but it does mean your chats don’t need to go to Google Drive and back. You can also restore a WhatsApp backup from Google Drive: This option automatically appears if you install (or reinstall) WhatsApp on an Android device, and log in with a phone number associated with an existing backup. Just tap Restore to bring your chats back.

iOS to iOS

There's a direct iPhone-to-iPhone option, no iCloud required.
There’s a direct iPhone-to-iPhone option, no iCloud required. Credit: WhatsApp/David Nield

As with Android-to-Android transfers, you don’t necessarily need a chat backup if you’re jumping from one iPhone to another, but we’d recommend that you set one up anyway.  On your old iPhone, open WhatsApp and choose Settings, Chats, and Chat Backup. Backups on iOS make use of Apple’s iCloud storage service.

Go back to the Chats screen, then choose Transfer Chats to iPhone and Start, and a QR code is shown on screen. Now you can turn your attention to your new iPhone, where you should install the WhatsApp app and set it up using your existing phone number. When that number is recognized, you’ll be prompted to carry on with the chat transfer process you’ve already initiated, so tap Continue to accept.

Scan the QR code that pops up on your old iPhone using your new iPhone. That gives WhatsApp all the information it needs to beam your conversations between devices, and you’ll see a progress bar shown on screen while this happens. When the transfer is complete, tap Next to carry on using WhatsApp on your new iPhone.

Should that not work as intended, you can restore a WhatsApp backup on iOS instead. The restore option only appears when you first install WhatsApp though (so you might need to uninstall and reinstall it): When you’ve registered your existing phone number, select the Restore Chat History message that appears on screen.

Android to iOS

The Move to iOS app includes a WhatsApp option.
The Move to iOS app includes a WhatsApp option. Credit: Apple

If you’re going from Android to iOS, then the only way to move your WhatsApp chats over is to use the Move to iOS app for Android. It takes care of transferring data across a whole range of apps, including WhatsApp—it can also move across all of your Google contacts and calendars as well, for example.

Load up the Move to iOS app and just follow the instructions on screen—you’ll need to enter the code displayed on your new iPhone to confirm that you want to link the devices. The important screen is the transfer data screen, where you want to make sure that the WhatsApp option is selected, alongside any other types of data you need to move across.

The Move to iOS app will take care of signing you out on Android, and when you get the confirmation that the data has been sent over, you can go ahead and install and open up WhatsApp for iOS. As long as you log in using the same phone number you’ve been using, you should see a prompt to finish the transfer of conversations.

There’s no way to restore WhatsApp messages from a Google Drive backup (on Android) to WhatsApp on an iPhone—the Move to iOS app is the only option. You can, if you want, export individual chats from Android to an email archive (via Chats, Chat history, and Export chat in Settings), and start fresh on the iPhone.

iOS to Android

Android can copy data over from iOS, via a cable.
Android can copy data over from iOS, via a cable. Credit: Google

If you’re heading the other way, from an iPhone to an Android device, compatibility issues still create hurdles. WhatsApp on Android can’t read WhatsApp backups in iCloud, so you can’t simply sign in on a new phone and restore a backup. You can export chats to email (Chats then Export Chat in Settings), but again these can’t be restored on an iPhone.

What you can do is use the more general iOS-to-Android transfer solution that Google has built into Android, which covers a host of apps, including WhatsApp. However, you must do this when you start up your new Android phone for the first time, during the initial setup—there’s no option to do it later.

As you go through the initial setup process, connecting to Wi-Fi and so on, you’ll see a prompt to copy data from another phone: Make sure you choose Next here and not Don’t copy. Follow the instructions on screen, making sure WhatsApp is selected as one of the entries in the Apps section (it should be by default).

You’ll then need to connect your two phones with a cable: USB-C to USB-C or USB-C to Lightning. The transfer utility will then take care of the process of moving all your apps and conversations over, though you’ll still need to log in using your existing phone number when you open WhatsApp on Android for the first time.

The post How to transfer your WhatsApp chats to a new phone appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to trap cosmic rays in a jar like it’s 1951 https://www.popsci.com/science/cosmic-rays-in-a-jar/ Thu, 23 Nov 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=482751
Projects photo
Popular Science

Wait! Before you recycle that peanut butter container, consider making a cloud chamber.

The post How to trap cosmic rays in a jar like it’s 1951 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Projects photo
Popular Science

ENERGY NEVER STOPS radiating through space, or on Earth. For more than a decade, hundreds of millions of samples from the never-ending deluge of protons, nuclei, and other atomic debris have collected in the International Space Station’s cosmic ray bucket—an instrument called the Alpha Magnetic Spectrometer. Here at home, cloud chambers—like those used by CERN, the Switzerland-based European Organization for Nuclear Research—illuminate the universe’s invisible cosmic storm.

In March 1951, longtime Popular Science contributor Kenneth M. Swezey treated space enthusiasts and DIYers to a step-by-step guide to making a cloud chamber, using a peanut butter jar. “The secret of any cloud chamber is a supersaturated vapor,” Swezey wrote. “As atomic particles dart through this vapor, they condense molecules in their path, leaving visible droplets—like vapor trails of high-flying aircraft.”

The first cloud chamber was devised by physicist Charles Thomas Rees Wilson in 1895 to reproduce the airborne puffs and study their behavior. By 1910, he’d begun spying the trails of charged particles, which ionized the supersaturated air and caused water droplets to form. At about the same time, physicist Victor Hess determined that charged particles, which he dubbed cosmic rays, were entering Earth’s atmosphere from space, a discovery that earned him a Nobel Prize in 1936.

Despite their ubiquity, the origins of those celestial sparks remain a mystery, although supernovas and ordinary stars like our sun are suspected to be prime sources. Beams of energy collide with atoms in Earth’s upper atmosphere, spawning charged subatomic particles like pions, muons, electrons, and positrons, whose ionized trails show up as spindly lines in cloud chambers. Radiation here on Earth also generates cosmic rays.

When Swezey offered up his home chamber in the 1950s, its use seemed somewhat practical. Fears of nuclear war, spurred by the worsening Cold War, dominated headlines. A homemade cloud chamber can detect atomic particles from nearby explosions, not to mention alpha particles, a product of radioactive decay from sources like radon gas, and gamma rays from radium, which was still being painted onto watch dials until the 1970s.

march 1951 magazine cover
Popular Science’s March 1951 magazine cover depicted a house being ravaged by the blast wave of a nuclear bomb. Popular Science

To view the cosmic ray storm, start with a glass or plastic jar—the bigger the better. A dark background, such as black felt glued inside the base and lid, will enhance the experience. Saturate the material at the base with rubbing alcohol, close the lid, and place the jar upside down on a bed of dry ice. As the apparatus cools, vapor forms. Turn off the lights, then shine a flashlight through the jar. Thin lines should appear, some perfectly straight (high-energy muons, big enough to plow through the jar), others zigzagging (electrons and positrons, so small they pinball off surrounding particles), and still others like eraser smudges (radon-spawned alpha particles, heavy and highly charged so they gather an ionic entourage).

Our 1951 cloud chamber recipe will still work today, although CERN offers an updated instructional video that uses the same essential ingredients. Can’t find dry ice? Ready-made cloud chambers will work at regular freezer temperatures. All you need is nearly pure ethanol and hot water to generate the cloud (and a few hundred extra dollars to cover the equipment costs).

This story originally appeared in the High Issue of Popular Science. Read more PopSci+ stories.

The post How to trap cosmic rays in a jar like it’s 1951 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
50+ sizzling Black Friday cookware deals you can get right now https://www.popsci.com/gear/kitchen-le-creuset-rubbermaid-oxo-cusinart-t-fal-amazon-deal-black-friday-2023/ Wed, 22 Nov 2023 18:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=591205
Le Creuset Enameled Cast Iron Signature Round Dutch Oven
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Save on cookware and kitchen tools from Le Creuset, Cuisenart, KitchenAid and more with these limited-time Black Friday deals.

The post 50+ sizzling Black Friday cookware deals you can get right now appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Le Creuset Enameled Cast Iron Signature Round Dutch Oven
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Are you looking to upgrade your tools when it comes to cooking? Black Friday is the ideal time to save big on appliances and kitchen gadgets you’ll rely on every day to get food on plates. But what if you’re feeling a little more analog when it comes to setting the kitchen mood and dining room table? We’ve found deep discounts on heritage cookware that’ll last a lifetime, from non-stick pots and pans that’ll save you time at the sink. This is a range for the range, so no outlet will be necessary to take advantage of any of the gear you’ll find below—just add stove, a counter, and an appetite. We’ve sussed out sales on staples and splurges, plus anything in between. These Black Friday deals are active now and will only be around for a limited time, so if you hunger for something, act fast.

Le Creuset Enameled Cast Iron Signature Round Dutch Oven $287.95 (was $359.95)

Le Creuset

SEE IT

No kitchen tool has become as iconic as Le Creuset’s Dutch ovens, lauded worldwide for their even cooking, extreme durability, and simple-yet-striking look. This Black Friday discount brings the 3.5-quart size down to its lowest price ever. The big appeal to using a Dutch oven from Le Creuset is its even heating, which will prevent sauces from scorching or the bottom of bread loaves from burning. The enamel coating on this French-made cookware piece is thick enough to prevent chipping, while its handles make it easy to transfer from the stovetop to your oven and vice versa. Le Creuset cookware is always a splurge, but this Black Friday deal makes it a little more accessible.

Le Creuset deals

Made In deals

OXO deals

Staub deals

Rubbermaid deals

All-Clad deals

T-fal deals

Our Place deals

Cuisinart deals

KitchenAid deals

The post 50+ sizzling Black Friday cookware deals you can get right now appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Bambu Labs Black Friday deals: Some of the best 3D printers and filaments are up to $160 off https://www.popsci.com/gear/bambu-labs-3d-printer-deal-black-friday-2023/ Tue, 21 Nov 2023 22:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=591092
Bambu Labs printer on a table with many colors of filament
Bambu Labs

Whether you're an advanced printer or a total novice, Bambu Labs has a machine that can get you manufacturing in minutes.

The post Bambu Labs Black Friday deals: Some of the best 3D printers and filaments are up to $160 off appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Bambu Labs printer on a table with many colors of filament
Bambu Labs

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

We’re big fans of Bambu 3D printers here at PopSci. Right now, the company is offering up to $160 off its excellent machines, in addition to bulk discounts on filament if you buy four, eight, or more rolls. Bambu’s printers are fast, accurate, and exceptionally easy to use pretty much right out of the box. Whether you’re an experienced printer or you’re just looking to print your very first lobster with the head of Dwayne “The Rock” Johnson, Bambu can crank it out.

Bambu Lab P1P 3D Printer $539 (Was $699)

Bambu Labs

SEE IT

It takes only fifteen minutes to go from taking the P1P out of the box to making your first print. If you’ve ever tried to put together another brand’s 3D printer, you know that’s a pretty impressive feat. This speedy printer cranks out high-quality prints in a hurry with help from creature comforts like automatic bed leveling and vibration compensation to prevent imperfections that pop up from the motion of the extruder. This is a great 3D printer for beginners, but it’s more than capable of churning out high volumes of high-quality work.

More Black Friday deals from Bambu Labs:

The post Bambu Labs Black Friday deals: Some of the best 3D printers and filaments are up to $160 off appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to use ChatGPT’s new image and voice options https://www.popsci.com/diy/image-voice-new-features-chatgpt/ Tue, 21 Nov 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=590772
New features ChatGPT
You can now interact with ChatGPT in different ways. DepostPhotos

The AI chatbot is expanding with a range of new prompts beyond text.

The post How to use ChatGPT’s new image and voice options appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
New features ChatGPT
You can now interact with ChatGPT in different ways. DepostPhotos

ChatGPT is rarely out of the news at the moment, and the engineers behind it are regularly pushing out new features and improvements to the generative AI chatbot—including, recently, new voice and image capabilities.

[ Related: ChatGPT can now see, hear, and talk to some users ]

In simple terms, as per the OpenAI blog post, these new capabilities mean ChatGPT can now see, hear, and speak. You’re no longer restricted to text prompts when interacting with the bot, although it’s worth noting that these features remain exclusive to paying ChatGPT Plus users for the time being. At first, only a limited number of users got the features as they were rolled out, but now every ChatGPT Plus user should have access. (On November 21, ChatGPT’s voice chat feature has been rolled out to all free users.)

As well as changing how you interact with ChatGPT, these new features also widen the scope of what it can do—read you a bedtime story, for instance. Here’s what’s new, and how to make the best use of it.

Chatting with ChatGPT

You've got five voice options for conversing with ChatGPT.
You’ve got five voice options for conversing with ChatGPT. OpenAI/David Nield

If you’re a ChatGPT Plus user and you want to talk to ChatGPT, you need to use the mobile app for Android and iOS (this functionality hasn’t yet been added to ChatGPT on the web). Once you’ve signed into your account and reached the main prompt screen, tap the headphones icon (lower right) to start a voice conversation with the bot.

You’ll get a splash screen explaining what the feature does, then you can tap Choose a voice to do just that. There are five to pick from, and if you select any of them you’ll hear a short preview. Tap Confirm when you’ve decided which one you want to converse with, and you’re then ready to start talking.

Speaking with ChatGPT is as simple as just talking to your phone. When you stop talking, the app will process what you’ve said and generate a response. You’ll often find that when it’s speaking, ChatGPT will end its response with a related question, to keep the conversation going—but you can always ask to talk about something else, or tap the pause button in the lower left corner to start a new chat.

If ChatGPT isn’t quite catching what you’re saying or recognizing your pauses as you talk, you can manually give it voice inputs, walkie talkie style, by tapping and holding the screen. Say what you need to say, then release your finger and the chat will be processed—it’s a more deliberate way of talking that you might find easier.

Think about ways in which spoken responses are better: You can get ChatGPT to tell you a bedtime story, for example, or a poem on a topic of your choice. As with text prompts, you can be as specific as you like about subjects or the tone. When you’re ready to go back to the main ChatGPT interface, tap the red and white cross icon, and you’ll see the responses you’ve been given in text format. 

Image inputs and outputs

ChatGPT can identify the contents of images for you.
ChatGPT can identify the contents of images for you. Credit: David Nield

You can now prompt ChatGPT using images, whether it’s on the web or via the apps for Android or iOS. On the web, click the paperclip icon to the left of the input box, then pick the image from your computer; in the apps, tap the picture icon to choose an image from your gallery or the camera icon to take a new photo (if you can’t see these icons, tap the + button to the left of the input box).

You’ll be invited to add a prompt alongside your image, and your options here are virtually unlimited. You can ask ChatGPT about what’s inside the image, for example. You can also take a photo of a problem—like a leaky faucet—and ask about the best way to fix it, or show ChatGPT the contents of your fridge and ask for suggestions on what meal to cook.

If you’re in the mobile apps, you can tap on the image before you add the accompanying prompt, and scribble around a particular part of it—this focuses ChatGPT’s attention on a particular part of the image, which can be useful for troubleshooting problems or getting clarity about something specific.

The image generator DALL-E (also developed by OpenAI) is now integrated inside ChatGPT as well. That means you can ask for new images to be generated, as well as using your own as prompts: Ask it to produce a landscape of rolling hills, or a grimy street scene at night, or a cartoon-style rendering of an interior location. You can also ask it to modify or build on an image you provide.

As with text prompts, the more specific you can be, the better—you can be really precise about what’s in your picture, and what style is used, and how color and shade is applied. So, you might say you want to see a cartoon-style picture of fields with a well in the foreground. Or, you might want a photorealistic portrait of a CEO-type figure, rendered in black and white. If you’re not happy with the first attempt at something, you can ask ChatGPT to make changes with further prompts. To save your creations, click or tap on the generated images to find the download option.

The post How to use ChatGPT’s new image and voice options appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to avoid binge-watching YouTube videos https://www.popsci.com/diy/youtube-binge-watching/ Mon, 20 Nov 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=590536
Woman binge-watching YouTube videos
This doesn't have to be you. DepositPhotos

Remove recommendations, get rid of comments, and just stop spending so much time on YouTube with these tips.

The post How to avoid binge-watching YouTube videos appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Woman binge-watching YouTube videos
This doesn't have to be you. DepositPhotos

Watching one quick video during a workday isn’t too bad—the problem is that YouTube, like chip companies, go out of their way to make sure you can’t have just one. There’s autoplay, a sidebar full of video recommendations, and so many more features designed to get you to keep watching all day. 

We’ve talked about how to avoid falling down a YouTube rabbithole in the past, but if those tips don’t go far enough, you can customize or even entirely replace the YouTube interface. These actions not only make it possible to hide all of those tantalizing features, they can also keep that adblocking warning from showing up to pester you. 

[Related: 3 ways to avoid falling down a YouTube rabbit hole]

Untrapp: Remove clutter from YouTube

Untrapp interface that allows you to make your YouTube browsing experience minimal.
The Untrapp browser extension allows you toggle off YouTube’s most annoying features. Screenshot: Untrapp

Untrapp is a free browser extension that lets you customize the YouTube user interface, allowing you to remove recommendations, comments, and more. To get started just install the extension—it’s free for Chrome and Firefox, while the Safari version costs $2. Install this extension and you can customize over 150 different things. For example: you can remove the recommended videos from showing up in the sidebar when you’re watching a video, or remove the comments from every video page. You can also set the YouTube homepage to be your subscriptions, instead of the algorithmic recommendations, allowing you to follow channels you want to watch instead of letting YouTube guess for you. You can blur thumbnails, you can disable UPPER CASE HEADLINES, and stop thumbnails from auto-playing when you hover your mouse over them. 

Untrapp even lets the truly hooked set up a schedule to block YouTube at a particular time every day or block particular channels altogether. If you’re not comfortable with your YouTube habit, Untrapp is well worth checking out. 

Invidious: Replace YouTube’s interface entirely

Invidious browser being used to view a YouTube video
Invidious allows you to view YouTube videos without spending any time on YouTube.com. Screenshot: Invidious

Invidious is an alternative user interface for YouTube. Basically, it’s a website you can visit to watch YouTube videos without having to spend any actual time on YouTube itself. The technology is open source and built to respect your privacy, meaning Google won’t be able to track which videos you’re watching. It also doesn’t have any ads.

There are a few downsides. Invidious is sometimes a little slower than YouTube, for example, and occasionally a video won’t work. You also can’t use Invidious with your YouTube account—it’s a completely different website. This means features like subscriptions, comments, and tracking watched videos won’t work. If you don’t care about that, though, Invidious could be a way to watch YouTube videos without letting YouTube get its hooks into you. 

Invidious is a free service hosted on multiple servers. It’s recommended that you try a few severs out and then bookmark one that works well for you—simply use that bookmark instead of heading to YouTube. You can use a browser extension like Privacy Redirect to open all YouTube links in Invidious instead of the YouTube URL with all its distracting, attention-grabbing functions. Either way, you’ll have a much less habit-forming way to use YouTube. 

Desktop players take things even further

Using VLC player to watch YouTube videos
You can use your VLC player to watch a YouTube video like any other video. Screenshot: VLC

VLC is one of the most popular video players on the planet, but did you know it can open YouTube videos? All you need to do is click File, then Open Network Stream, then paste the YouTube URL you want to play into the URL field and click Open. The YouTube video will play like any other video in VLC. You won’t see the sidebar, the comments, or any other feature of YouTube—just the video and the usual VLC playback controls. 

That method works, but takes quite a few extra steps. If you’d like a much simpler desktop application for watching YouTube videos check out MiniTube, which costs 10 euros (roughly $11 USD) for Windows or macOS and is free for Linux users. This application, which offers a demo you can try for free, lets you browse YouTube in a beautiful desktop client without any ads, tracking, comments, or recommendations.

Using MiniTube to play YouTube videos
MiniTube is a simpler alternative to a VLC player. Screenshot: MiniTube

This is probably the nicest YouTube interface you can get on a desktop computer, which is great, but I also find it much easier to use to watch one video without being pushed to immediately gobble up another. 

The post How to avoid binge-watching YouTube videos appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best ratcheting screwdrivers in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-ratcheting-screwdrivers/ Sat, 18 Nov 2023 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=590011
The best ratcheting screwdrivers
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Get it done and undone faster with one of these speedy and versatile tools.

The post The best ratcheting screwdrivers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best ratcheting screwdrivers
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Klein Tools 32305 Multi-bit Ratcheting Screwdriver Klein Tools 32305 Multi-bit Ratcheting Screwdriver
SEE IT

A tough, high-quality example that underlines all the features that make these such popular and flexible tools.

Best Kit Makita B-50289 47 Pc. Ratchet and Bit Set Makita B-50289 47 Pc. Ratchet and Bit Set
SEE IT

A comprehensive kit of screwdriver bits, sockets, and adapter all organized in a useful storage case.

Best Budget Amazon Basics 12 Piece in-1 Magnetic Ratchet Screwdriver Set Amazon Basics 12-in-1 Magnetic Ratchet Screwdriver
SEE IT

Offers many of the benefits associated with tools from top brands, and comes at a very affordable price.

A ratcheting screwdriver is one of those tools you didn’t know you needed and then wondered how you did without. They are simple yet effective and popular with engineers, electricians, model makers, DIYers, and anyone else who works with screws or small nuts and bolts regularly. They are faster than a standard screwdriver and usually more comfortable to use. In this article, we examine the wide variety of models available and talk about the key features that will impact choice. We also closely examine what we think are the best ratcheting screwdrivers on the market right now.

How we chose the best ratcheting screwdrivers

As a qualified engineer and keen DIYer, I know the benefits offered by ratcheting screwdrivers and have used them regularly. In addition to my experience with many types of different tools, we surveyed the market to get an understanding of what is available today. Finally, we checked what owners have to say to get some feedback on real-world performance and durability. What we ended up with are choices we’d be happy to have in our toolbox.

The best ratcheting screwdrivers: Reviews & Recommendations

After some consideration, we eventually chose six key categories that allowed us to showcase what we feel are the best ratcheting screwdrivers for a wide variety of purposes and different end users. Just be sure to operate all your tools safely.

Best overall: Klein Tools 32305 Multi-bit Ratcheting Screwdriver

Klein Tools

SEE IT

Specs

  • Length: 8.71 inches
  • Handle Material: Cushion grip plastic
  • Bits Provided: 14 plus nut driver
  • Bit Storage: Onboard

Pros

  • High-quality tool from a renowned US manufacturer
  • High-strength carbon steel barrel with rust-resistant finish
  • 14 heat-treated bits with storage in the handle

Cons

  • Storage dividers occasionally break
  • 1 bit needs to stay in the screwdriver

Klein Tools has been around since 1857, and most of its manufacturing, including its screwdrivers, is done in the US. They have a reputation for durable, high-quality equipment that is particularly popular with professional electricians.

The Klein Tools 3205 ratcheting screwdriver is a fine example of the elements that make these devices so useful. The main shaft is strong carbon steel with a bright coating to prevent rust. At the front of the handle is the ratchet mechanism with forward, reverse, and lock positions. The handle itself has what Klein Tools call a Cushion-Grip, which is soft plastic designed to maximize comfort and torque.

The 3205 has 14 heat-treated double-ended bits included. These are a mix of Phillips, slotted, square, combo, and Torx. They are held in place in the shaft by a ball-bearing detent rather than a magnet. Twelve of these can be carried inside the handle but two have to remain in the end of the screwdriver which not everyone cares for. When not occupied by a bit, the end of the shaft can be used as a 1/4” nut driver.

Best grip: Wera 05073661002 Slotted Ratcheting Screwdriver

Wera

SEE IT

Specs

  • Length: 9.06 inches
  • Handle Material: Bi-material Plastic
  • Bits Provided: 6
  • Bit Storage: Onboard

Pros

  • Ergonomic handle is comfortable and generates tremendous torque
  • 44-tooth ratchet allows fine adjustment
  • Stainless steel shaft is strong and will not rust

Cons

  • Comes with a premium price tag
  • Only 6 bits included

German manufacturer Wera Tools developed its unique screwdriver handle with the help of the Fraunhofer Institute for Industrial Engineering, a company that specializes in the interaction between humans and the equipment they work with. The ergonomic design has two functions. First, it allows maximum torque to be applied. It is rated for up to 50 Newton meters (Nm), which is equal to 37 foot-pounds (ft.lbs.). Second, it reduces stress and abrasion, thus helping to prevent tiredness and blisters. Usefully, it also stops the screwdriver rolling off a table or workbench.

Other aspects of the Wera ratcheting screwdriver underline its quality. The shaft is stainless steel, which is more expensive than other steels but strong and will not rust. A powerful magnet holds bits in place. The ratcheting mechanism has 44 teeth giving an 8-degree pitch, so small turns and therefore fine adjustments are possible.

The six slotted, Phillips, and Torx bits included are carried within the handle. Given the premium price, we’re a little surprised more aren’t supplied though bit sets are widely available and not expensive.

Best speed: Craftsman SpeedDrive Ratcheting Screwdriver

CRAFTSMAN

SEE IT

Specs

  • Length: 11.3 inches
  • Handle Material: Bi-material plastic
  • Bits Provided: 14
  • Bit Storage: Onboard

Pros

  • Patented SpeedDrive for rapid working
  • Positive locking bit holder
  • Bi-material handle textured for better grip

Cons

  • One bit stays in the screwdriver
  • A few people found bits hard to remove

Craftsman has been supplying tools in the US since 1927, and the company’s reputation has always been one of providing great value for money. This ratcheting screwdriver costs very little money and, along with the features found on many rivals, has a patented SpeedDrive mechanism that is claimed to be twice as fast as alternatives. For those who work with a screwdriver in production or repair environments, this can be a major benefit.

Another interesting feature was the locking bit holder that grips small slots in the Craftsman double-ended bits to prevent them from coming loose. Whether this is any more secure than detent ball bearings or a strong magnet is a matter of debate. A few people thought it a little too effective and found bits difficult to remove.

A combination of 14 double-ended bits is provided in slotted, Phillips, square, and Torx formats. Twelve can be stored in the soft-grip, textured handle, but one must stay in the shaft. At 11.3 inches, the Craftsman ratcheting screwdriver is quite long. A lot of that length is the handle, and while that does allow good torque, the shaft is relatively short, so it doesn’t offer particularly good reach.

Best kit: Makita B-50289 47 Pc. Ratchet and Bit Set

Makita

SEE IT

Specs

  • Length: 6.25 inches
  • Handle Material: Rubberized Plastic
  • Bits Provided: 46
  • Bit Storage: Case

Pros

  • Good variety of bits, sockets, and a quick-change adapter
  • Textured, rubberized handle provides excellent grip
  • Storage case gives easy access

Cons

  • Handle may not suit small hands
  • A few reports of mechanism breakages

For those who work on a wide variety of different devices, Makita’s 47-piece ratchet and bit set may well be the answer, especially given the very reasonable price. There are 38 screwdriver bits in slotted, Phillips, square, hex, and Torx formats, plus seven sockets ranging from 3/16-inch to 7/16-inch. There is also a quick-change adapter that can accept all of those items and allows them to be used in drills/drivers and impact drivers.

The ratcheting screwdriver itself has a steel shaft with a magnetic bit holder that will take bit lengths of up to 1- inch. The handle is a chunky item made of rubberized plastic with raised pimples. There’s also a lanyard/hanging hole that some might find useful. The handle does provide good grip, but is quite bulky and might be difficult for those with small hands.

The case is well made with everything laid out for easy access though a few people thought the bits could be awkward to remove.

Best T-handle: Williams WRST4 Ratcheting Screwdriver

Williams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Length: 2, 3-7/8, and 7-7/8 inches
  • Handle Material: High-impact plastic
  • Bits Provided: 1
  • Bit Storage: None

Pros

  • Impact-resistant handle applies good leverage
  • Three lengths available to suit different tasks
  • Stainless steel shaft will not rust

Cons

  • Relatively high price
  • Only one bit included

Williams Industrial Tools is another long-standing company, having been around for over 140 years. As the name suggests, the focus is on heavy-duty equipment for tough working environments. In the case of their ratcheting screwdriver, this means a handle made from impact-resistant plastic, a highly durable mechanism, and a shaft made from stainless steel, which won’t rust and has no need of a finish that might chip off over time.

T-handles offer good ergonomics, and as the bulk of the length is shaft, they can provide good reach in awkward places. They also make it easier to generate leverage than standard handles. The Williams ratcheting screwdriver is available in three lengths from a stubby 2-inch model, through 3-7/8-inch to 7-7/8-inch. Only one Phillips bit is included, and while others are readily available, a few more might have been expected for the price.

Best budget: Amazon Basics 12-in-1 Magnetic Ratchet Screwdriver

Amazon

SEE IT

Specs

  • Length: 9.3 inches
  • Handle Material: Non-slip plastic
  • Bits Provided: 12
  • Bit Storage: Onboard

Pros

  • Competitive specification for less money than most rivals
  • Corrosion-resistant chrome vanadium shaft
  • Single bits rather than double-ended

Cons

  • Ratchet mechanism occasionally jams
  • Magnetism can be weak

The Amazon ratcheting screwdriver might be called Basic, but it is anything but in many ways. The shaft is made of chrome vanadium steel which is a popular choice for making tools as it is strong, and corrosion resistant. It uses a common forward, reverse or fixed mechanism, and the plastic handle has enough grip to provide a confident hold. The base is free-spinning so fingers can be used to turn the handle while pressure is applied to the rear.

There are 12 single bits, which some people prefer to the double-ended type. They are slotted, Phillips, Torx, and hex. All of them can be stored within the handle. The shaft tip is magnetic to hold them in place, though some owners felt the strength was rather weak. The ratchet mechanism itself also came in for occasional criticism with a few owners experiencing jams or breakages.

What to consider when shopping for the best ratcheting screwdrivers

All the ratcheting screwdrivers we looked at have a similar mechanism, but there are a number of individual features that are likely to have an impact on your choice. The following section explains them in depth.

Operation & comfort

The benefit of a ratcheting screwdriver is that the mechanism allows force to be applied in one direction (either forward or reverse) but spins freely in the other. This allows screws or nuts to be tightened or loosened without breaking contact. The result is increased driving speed. Additionally, using a ratcheting screwdriver for long periods is often less tiring. Some have a spin cap that allows the main body to be turned with the fingers while the palm applies pressure. Most ratcheting screwdrivers have forward, reverse, and a central lock position where they act like a fixed screwdriver.

Handles are often made of a soft-grip or rubberized plastic that not only makes them more comfortable to work with but may also increase the torque (twisting force) that can be applied. T-handle ratchet screwdrivers have the same kind of mechanism, but some people prefer that style of grip. It also provides additional leverage.

Shape & reach

A quick check of the images of the different models in our top six will reveal that bodies have a number of different shapes. Some of this is to provide comfort or increase torque, but personal preference is equally important. If you don’t like the shape, you’ll struggle to use it effectively, whatever the supposed benefits.

Reach is another important area. Sometimes screws are buried deep within a device and a long shank is needed. At other times space is limited, so a ‘stubby’ ratcheting screwdriver will be required. Many people will end up with several to cope with all situations.

Bits & bit storage

We looked at several dozen different ratcheting screwdrivers when researching this article, and all of them take universal 1/4” bits. Some also take hex sockets, and there are adapters that allow other sizes to be used. The devices you work on will dictate how important each of these is.

There are also many styles of bit. Typically slotted, Phillips, and Torx (also called star) will be provided, but others may be included. While they can always be bought as extras, it’s useful to have the ones you need most supplied with the screwdriver.

Many ratcheting screwdrivers store bits within the screwdriver body. This provides convenient access and means they take up less space in your toolbox. Larger sets usually come in a storage case. It’s worth checking the quality of this because it can be frustrating if it breaks, and another way of keeping the bits together has to be found.

FAQs

Q: Do ratcheting screwdrivers take ordinary screwdriver bits?

Yes, all the ratcheting screwdrivers we found take the ordinary (also called universal) 1/4” bit. It’s also possible for them to take sockets.

Q: Are ratcheting screwdrivers magnetic?

Some ratcheting screwdrivers are magnetic. Others have detents—small indentations inside the shaft. A sprung ball bearing in the screwdriver bit fits into the detent when inserted and stops it dropping out.

Q: Is a ratcheting screwdriver worth it?

A ratcheting screwdriver is definitely worth it if you regularly work with screws because it enables you to tighten and loosen them more quickly and with less effort than a standard screwdriver.

Q: How much do ratcheting screwdrivers cost?

Our recommendations cost between $13.27 and $41.07.

Final thoughts on choosing the best ratcheting screwdrivers for you

Although all ratcheting screwdrivers work in basically the same way, construction quality and materials vary. Brand reputation had a bearing on our choices because some manufacturers are known for supplying premium tools, while others are recognized for their value for money. We also looked at the number and variety of bits provided; for convenience, it’s nice to have either onboard bit holders or a storage case. We believe that there is something in our selection above that can make the job easier for everyone.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best ratcheting screwdrivers in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save up to 50% on DeWalt power tools, batteries, and kits during Amazon’s early Black Friday sale https://www.popsci.com/gear/dewalt-tool-deals-amazon-early-black-friday-2023/ Fri, 17 Nov 2023 15:30:56 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=590234
DeWalt tools arranged on a white background. The pattern includes circular saws and impact drivers.
Stan Horaczek

You won't find better prices than these on DeWalt tools for the rest of the year.

The post Save up to 50% on DeWalt power tools, batteries, and kits during Amazon’s early Black Friday sale appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
DeWalt tools arranged on a white background. The pattern includes circular saws and impact drivers.
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Amazon’s Black Friday sale is already in full swing, and you can save huge amounts on DeWalt tools before the turkey even hits the table (though we’d recommend a different type of tool for carving it). The sale touches on just about every corner of the DeWalt tool world, from huge socket sets to replacement batteries and bread-and-butter power tools. Here are some of the stand-out deals if you’re ready to retool the storage shed arsenal. These tend to sell out quickly, though, so don’t wait if you see something you want.

DEWALT 20V MAX Drill And Grinder Kit, Power Tool Set, 2 Batteries and Charger Included $269 (was $349)

DeWalt

SEE IT

Buying tools individually is fine, but bundling them together can really save you some cash. This kit includes a powerful drill, a burly grinder, and a pair of batteries to keep them running until the job is done. You also get a carrying bag to bring them to and from the worksite.

DEWALT Mechanics Tool Set, SAE and Metric, 1/2, 1/4, 3/8 Drive Sizes, 192-Piece $154 (was $277)

DeWalt

SEE IT

With 192 pieces, this is like a sturdy stocking already stuffed with other gifts. This set includes all the familiar sizes of sockets that you could need. You also get three ratchets, a full run of hex keys, and extenders for reaching tough spots. This is one of the best tool gifts you can give and it’s heavily discounted, so snatch it up quick—don’t screw it up so you can screw more in.

DeWalt battery deals

DeWalt tool deals

The post Save up to 50% on DeWalt power tools, batteries, and kits during Amazon’s early Black Friday sale appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best hammer drills for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-hammer-drills/ Thu, 16 Nov 2023 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=589076
Four examples of the best hammer drills against a white background
Tony Ware

When the going gets tough, reach for a tough hammer drill to punch through masonry and concrete and make the job a whole lot easier.

The post The best hammer drills for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four examples of the best hammer drills against a white background
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best splurge DeWalt 20V MAX SDS Rotary Hammer Drill Kit over white background DeWalt 20V MAX SDS Rotary Hammer Drill Kit
SEE IT

The most impressive cordless model we’ve come across, this prosumer model should appeal to DIY enthusiasts taking on substantial remodeling jobs, and contractors looking for lightweight and versatility.

Best overall red Milwaukee 2804-20 M18 FUEL 1/2 in. Hammer Drill over gradient background Milwaukee 2804-20 M18 FUEL 1/2 in. Hammer Drill
SEE IT

It delivers the kind of performance and reliability that makes it a good investment for both keen amateurs and professionals.

Best budget red Skil 7.5-Amp 1/2-Inch Corded Hammer Drill over white background Skil 7.5-Amp 1/2-Inch Corded Hammer Drill
SEE IT

An ideal choice for the occasional user—it has all the necessary functions and is perfectly adequate for hanging pictures on a brick wall or putting up shelves in a cinder block garage.

Anyone who has ever tried hanging a shelf on a masonry wall will appreciate the benefits of a good hammer drill. They are a great addition to any DIY toolkit. At the entry-level, they are as easy to use as a standard drill driver but have the performance necessary to make light work of drilling holes in tough materials. For more challenging jobs we turn to rotary hammers. These powerful tools are not only capable of making holes large enough for pipework and electrical conduit but can also be fitted with chisels for light demolition duties. In this article, we explain all the key features to help you find the right tool for the task and offer recommendations for the best hammer drills for both DIY and professional users.

How we chose the best hammer drills

There are hundreds of electric drills available, and sometimes it can be difficult to tell what the important differences are. We wanted to focus on the distinct benefits of each type, while still offering as wide a choice as possible. I own a couple of these tools myself (not to mention many others), having remodeled two of our homes. So I know my way around saws and sanders and grinders, and as a team, we know drills and drivers. To supplement my experience, we researched all the leading manufacturers to ensure we were up-to-date with current technology.

Performance was obviously a key aspect while making selections, but we also looked at power source, ease of use, weight, and any useful extras. Brand reputation played a part because hammer drills are often used in harsh conditions, and reliability and durability are vital. Adding to that, we checked buyer feedback for a sense of how each one coped in real-world use.

The best hammer drills: Reviews & Recommendations

Each of the following is what we believe to be the best hammer drill currently available in its category and something we’d be proud to have in our storage shed. The wide range of models provided should mean there’s something for everyone, and the detailed descriptions will help potential buyers go beyond power drills and focus on the right tool for their needs.

Best overall: Milwaukee 2804-20 M18 FUEL 1/2 in. Hammer Drill

Milwaukee

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power Source: Cordless 18V
  • Chuck Size: 1/2”
  • Maximum Speed: 2,000 rpm
  • BPM: 32,000

Pros

  • Claimed to be the most powerful hammer drill in its class
  • Compact and lightweight making it easy to handle
  • Redlink technology maintains performance under load and maximizes battery life

Cons

  • Battery and charger cost extra
  • Premium price tag does not include a case

Milwaukee is one of the world’s leading power tool brands with a reputation for high quality, and durability. Their compact hammer drill takes our top spot for its all-around appeal. It delivers the kind of performance and reliability that makes it a good investment for both keen amateurs and professionals.

Milwaukee claims the 2804-20 cordless hammer drill is the most powerful in its class. For standard drilling operations, it offers 2,000 rpm, and its 100 ft.lbs. of torque on tap are sufficient to drive substantial augers and hole saws when drilling wood. Switching to hammer action provides 32,000 BPM for efficient drilling in masonry and concrete.

The Powerstate brushless motor combines with Redlink battery management to maximize power delivery and run time between charges. It also has overload protection to prevent damage when the drill is pushed to its limits. A drill of this power needs a high-capacity battery, and a 5Ah unit is recommended. However, as is common with cordless tools, neither this nor the charger are included. If a spare is added it will more or less double the initial price. Given that this is already a premium tool we would have expected a case but one is not provided.

Best budget: Skil 7.5-Amp 1/2-Inch Corded Hammer Drill

Skil

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power Source: Corded
  • Chuck Size: 1/2”
  • Maximum Speed: 3,000 rpm
  • BPM: 48,000

Pros

  • A good choice for the DIYer at a very competitive price
  • Has soft grip handle and two-finger trigger for comfort
  • Useful depth gauge included

Cons

  • Keyed chuck is less convenient than keyless
  • While normally reliable motor burnouts are not unknown

The Skill 7.5 amp corded hammer drill is an ideal choice for the occasional user. It isn’t big on features but has all the necessary functions, and is perfectly adequate for hanging pictures on a brick wall or putting up shelves in a cinder block garage.

The 1/2-inch chuck means it will take large drill bits, and with a maximum speed of 3,000 rpm, it will outperform most drill drivers. Skil gives an impact per minute (ipm) rate rather than the more common BPM but it means the same. In this case, it’s a surprising 48,000.

The two-finger trigger and soft-grip handle are nice touches that add a little comfort. A trigger lock means it doesn’t need to be held in all the time. There’s also a useful depth gauge. The power cord is only 6 feet which means you’re going to be using an extension cord most of the time, but that’s true of most corded power tools. It’s a shame they decided to save a few cents with a keyed chuck rather than keyless. Those keys are all too easy to misplace which can be very frustrating.

Best splurge: DeWalt 20V MAX SDS Rotary Hammer Drill Kit

DeWalt

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power Source: Cordless 20V
  • Chuck Size: 1” SDS Plus
  • Maximum Speed: 1,050 rpm
  • BPM: 4,600

Pros

  • Powerful cordless drilling, hammer drilling, and chipping
  • Vibration control for increased user comfort
  • Includes two high-capacity 5Ah batteries, charger and case

Cons

  • It’s hard to fault but it is a lot of money
  • No drill or chisel bits included

The DeWalt SDS rotary hammer drill is the most impressive cordless drill we came across during our research. It’s what is often called a prosumer model, appealing to DIY enthusiasts taking on substantial remodeling jobs, and contractors looking for lightweight and versatility. This drill set has drill, hammer drill, and hammer-only functions.

It is fitted with a 1-inch SDS Max chuck and runs at a maximum speed of 1,050 rpm. BPM is 4,600, and each blow comes with an impact force of 2.1 joules (1.5 ft.lbs.). Heavy hammering like that causes a lot of vibration, which soon becomes tiring. DeWalt employ Shock Active Vibration Control to dramatically reduce user discomfort, and extend working time.  

The DeWalt SDS rotary hammer comes with a charger and two high-capacity 5Ah batteries so there can always be a spare available to reduce downtime. Each has a useful 3-stage LED giving charge status. There’s a depth rod, and the whole kit comes in a durable plastic case. For professional users, the DeWalt SDS rotary hammer can be paired with DeWalt’s onboard extractor thus complying with OSHA Table 1 standards for protection against respirable crystalline silica.

Best corded: Bosch 11255VSR Bulldog Xtreme SDS-Plus Rotary Hammer

Bosch

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power Source: Corded
  • Chuck Size: 1” SDS Plus
  • Maximum Speed: 1,300 rpm
  • BPM: 5,800

Pros

  • A robust tool at a competitive price from a market leader
  • Ergonomic handle and modest weight aid working at all angles
  • Automatic clutch helps prevent wrist injuries

Cons

  • Requires periodic maintenance
  • No vibration suppression

You can tell by the appearance that the Bosch Bulldog Xtreme is made for serious work. The slender design allows you to lean into the tool when necessary, applying maximum pressure. Not that much effort will usually be required. Performance figures are impressive for a tool in this price range with a maximum speed of 1,300 rpm, 5,800 BPM, and impact energy of 2.0 ft.lbs.

The variable trigger allows slow starting, reducing the chances of the drill bit wandering. It also allows accurate positioning when chiseling. The large ‘D’ handle has plenty of room for a gloved hand and includes a metal plate at the front that flips down to create a useful hanging hook. There’s a depth rod, and Bosch Pro-Guard dust extraction can be added for those who need to comply with OSHA regulations.

An automatic clutch is fitted to the SDS Plus chuck, which is a great safety feature. If the bit jams the drive is disconnected thus preventing wrist injury. There isn’t any vibration control so although the Bosch Bulldog Extreme is only 6.7 pounds it can get tiring after a while. As with all brush motors, the brushes will eventually wear, and need replacing though the job is fairly straightforward.

Best DIY demolition: Eneacro 1-1/4 Inch SDS-Plus Rotary Hammer Drill

Eneacro

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power Source: Corded
  • Chuck Size: 1-1/4” SDS Plus
  • Maximum Speed: 820 rpm
  • BPM: 4,200

Pros

  • Kit includes drill and chisel bits, spare brushes, grease, wrench, and case
  • Exhaust protects motor from excess heat
  • Anti-vibration system and safety clutch

Cons

  • It’s heavy
  • Occasional breakdowns suggest inconsistent quality control

The Eneacro SDS Plus rotary hammer is remarkable both in terms of what you get for the money, and the performance it delivers. In addition to the drill itself the kit includes 3 drill bits, 2 chisel bits, grease, spare brushes for the motor, and a wrench. To keep everything organized, there’s a tough plastic case.

A top speed of 820 rpm isn’t as fast as some, but the 4,200 BPM is delivered with a powerful impact force of 5.5 ft.lbs. There’s an anti-vibration system and a soft grip handle for operator comfort. There’s also a safety clutch that disengages the drive if the bit jams to prevent injury. An exhaust helps stop the motor from overheating, and the base is designed to prevent dust from getting in. We’re a little surprised there isn’t a depth gauge, but it’s a minor gripe on an otherwise very good tool.

There’s really only one thing that prevents us from recommending the Eneacro rotary hammer for professional use, and that’s the weight. At 12.58 pounds it is heavy for a tool that is going to be used all day. DIYers can usually take a break, but contractors can’t afford to.

Best heavy-duty: Bosch 1-9/16-Inch SDS-Max Combination Rotary Hammer

Bosch

SEE IT

Specs

  • Power Source: Corded
  • Chuck Size: 1-9/16” SDS Max
  • Maximum Speed: 340 rpm
  • BPM: 2,750

Pros

  • Variable speed dial for consistent control
  • Vario-Lock mechanism provides optimum chisel angle
  • Service minder brushes indicate when maintenance is required

Cons

  • No drill-only option
  • Heavy, and no vibration control

The Bosch SDS Max rotary hammer is a heavy-duty tool that, according to the manufacturer, is aimed at concrete contractors and professional remodelers. Its focus is underlined by the fact that there’s no standard drill function. It is either hammer drill or hammer-only.

Maximum speed is a relatively slow 340 rpm, but when you are driving very large drill bits control is more important. Most hammer drills offer variable speed triggers that demand you keep your fingers steady. The big Bosch has a stepped speed dial instead so concentration can stay at the business end. BPM is 2,750 delivered with a class-leading 6.1 ft.lbs. of impact energy.

In addition to mode selection the Bosch SDS Max rotary hammer has a Vario-Lock mechanism that allows chisel bits to be fixed in one of 12 positions so users have the optimum working angle without having to contort hands and arms. Service minder brushes give a clear visual indication of when they need to be changed, taking the guesswork out of a vital maintenance operation.

What to consider before buying a hammer drill

When detailing each of our best hammer drill picks, we’ve highlighted performance specifications and key features. In the following section we look at exactly what each of these means, and the impact they can have on your choice.

Types of hammer drill

The term ‘hammer drill’ can cover a varied range of tools, so they are usually divided into two groups: standard hammer drills, and rotary hammers.

Standard hammer drills are the first step up from an ordinary drill/driver adding a hammer action to the drill function so that in combination with a masonry bit they can drill holes in tough materials like brick, concrete, paving, and stone.

Rotary hammers usually have three functions: drill, hammer drill, and hammer only (some heavy-duty tools don’t offer a drill-only option). Rotary hammers accept much larger drill bits, and as a result, are capable of making much larger and deeper holes. When switched to the hammer-only function and fitted with chisel bits, they can be used to strip tile and undertake light demolition tasks.

Demolition hammers are heavy-duty tools that are sometimes confused with hammer drills but they have no drilling function at all, and so fall outside the scope of this article.

Chuck

There are two types of chuck used in these tools.

Standard hammer drills have a three-jaw chuck, the same as those found in drill/drivers. It is usually tightened by hand, though some use a key.

Rotary hammers use SDS chucks. SDS stands for Slotted Drive Shaft, a system that interlocks the drill or chisel bit with a spring-loaded collar on the tool to prevent them from slipping under heavy load. There are three shaft types: SDS, SDS Plus, and SDS Max. The first two have a 10mm shaft, but the slots are slightly different. SDS bits will usually fit SDS Plus drills, but not the other way around. SDS Max has an 18mm shaft and therefore can take larger diameter and longer drill bits.

Although it’s not a precise measure, generally speaking, the larger the chuck diameter, the more powerful the tool.

Performance

Rotational speed is an important factor in any kind of power drill. Whatever the material, a faster speed usually means the bit cuts more quickly. This is equally true of hammer drills whether the hammer action is engaged or not.

BPM stands for blows per minute and is the impact speed of the hammer action. A faster BMP might be seen as delivering more destructive force but the figure can be deceptive. Standard hammer drills often have very high BPM but the energy behind each impact is limited. Rotary hammers have lower BPM but actually deliver more force (impact energy) with each blow. Impact energy figures are often unavailable for standard hammer drills but are usually provided for rotary hammers either in joules or ft.lbs. For those buying a tool for demolition work as well as drilling impact energy is a good way to compare performance.

Torque is the twisting force. The international standard is Newton-meters (Nm), but in the US, it’s usually given as inch-pounds (in.lbs.) or foot-pounds (ft.lbs.). There are 12 inch-pounds to the foot-pound. Torque is important when turning screws or bolts (drill/drivers and impact wrenches tend to have high torque figures) but is not a major factor when drilling holes, and irrelevant when chiseling.

Additional Features

  • Hammer drills create a lot of force so handling them can be challenging. In tough materials, the drill can sometimes jam momentarily sending a sharp reaction through the tool. This can cause painful wrist injuries. An auxiliary handle is fitted to provide a second grip, and should always be used.
  • When drilling large, deep holes, having a sliding depth gauge can be very convenient, and many hammer drills have them fitted.
  • Cordless hammer drills often have LED work lights that make it easier to see what you’re doing in poor light or dusty conditions.
  • It’s nice to have a case to protect your hammer drill, and have somewhere handy to store drill and chisel bits. Some manufacturers include them, some don’t.
  • Some of the best hammer drills have dust extraction systems available that fit right on the tool. These can be very efficient but do cost extra.

Note: Working with masonry, concrete, etc., can cause sharp fragments to be ejected and create a lot of dust. Always put on protective eyewear or a face shield, as well as some kind of dust mask.

FAQs

Q: Do I need special drill bits for a hammer drill?

Yes. Ordinary drill bits are not designed for tough materials like brick or concrete. They won’t make a hole, and the impact power of the hammer drill could easily break them. For non-SDS hammer drills, you should choose round-shanked, carbide-tipped masonry bits. SDS drills have different chucks to standard hammer drills. It’s important to get the right bit for the particular SDS type or they won’t fit.

Q: Can a hammer drill break masonry and concrete?

Lightweight hammer drills are designed for efficient drilling in masonry and concrete, but not actual breaking or demolition. You need to look for what is usually called a rotary hammer, or SDS rotary hammer. Importantly these have a hammer-only function, and accept chisel bits used to break masonry and concrete.

Q: What is the expected life of a hammer drill?

The expected life of a hammer drill will depend on how much it is used, the work environment, and how well it is maintained. Generally speaking, it could be 5 to 10 years, but a tool used in a dusty jobsite environment day after day might wear out more quickly.

Final thoughts on the best hammer drills

The hammer drill market is very competitive which is good news because we get a host of excellent tools to choose from. The Milwaukee 2804-20 that takes our top spot is a superb all-rounder that will suit both keen amateurs and pro users. The corded Skil is light, easy to use, and ideal for DIYers on a tight budget. At the other end of the scale the Bosch SDS Max delivers remarkable performance though weight, and the lack of an ordinary drill function might limit it to contractors and site workers.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best hammer drills for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to use Double Tap to control your Apple Watch without touching it https://www.popsci.com/diy/how-to-use-double-tap-to-control-your-apple-watch-without-touching-it/ Thu, 16 Nov 2023 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=589949
There's a new way to control your Apple Watch.
There's a new way to control your Apple Watch. Apple

The Apple Watch 9 and Apple Watch Ultra 2 have a cool new trick.

The post How to use Double Tap to control your Apple Watch without touching it appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
There's a new way to control your Apple Watch.
There's a new way to control your Apple Watch. Apple

If your hands are full with groceries or books, or hanging on to a subway car handrail or dog leash, then it’s not easy to operate your Apple Watch in the normal way—by reaching over to tap the screen or pressing the Digital Crown.

That’s the thinking behind Double Tap, a new gesture available with watchOS 10.1. As its name suggests, it lets you tap your forefinger and thumb together twice, with the same hand that your watch is on, to operate the wearable without touching it. It means you can answer calls and browse through screens with one hand rather than two, and it promises to be very helpful.

For Double Tap to work, you do need the latest Apple Watch 9 or Apple Watch Ultra 2, because the AI smarts of the S9 chipset inside these models is required to recognize the gesture you’re making. You also need watchOS 10.1 (tap My Watch > General > Software Update in the Watch app on your iPhone to look for updates).

Older Apple Watch devices can still make use of a similar feature called AssistiveTouch, which is a more comprehensive way of controlling everything that happens on an Apple Watch with one hand. AssistiveTouch is available on every Apple Watch since the Apple Watch 4, including the Apple Watch 9 and Apple Watch Ultra 2.

Using Double Tap

You can customize some aspects of Double Tap.
You can customize some aspects of Double Tap. Screenshot: Apple. Apple

As soon as you’ve upgraded to watchOS 10.1, Double Tap should be enabled automatically and ready to go. You can turn it off, if you ever need to, by opening up the Settings app on your watch, then choosing Gestures and Double Tap, and turning off the Double Tap toggle switch.

To double tap, lift up your Apple Watch first, as you would do if you were checking the time. On the hand attached to the wrist where your Apple Watch is, bring your index finger and thumb together twice in quick succession. The only times Double Tap won’t work is when a Sleep Focus mode is active, or when the watch is in Low Power Mode.

What the gesture triggers will depend on what’s on screen. If there’s a call coming in, it’ll answer the call. If there’s a timer running, a double tap will pause it (and restart it). If a notification has come in, it will open the notification so you can read it. In general, a double tap will perform what Apple calls the “primary action” for the screen you’re on.

For a couple of functions, you can customise what a double tap does: When music is playing you can choose whether a double tap pauses playback or skips to the next track, and when Smart Stack widgets are on screen you can choose whether a double tap advances through the widgets or opens the first available one.

To change this functionality, open the Settings app on your watch, then tap Gestures and Double Tap. Select Playback and you can pick between Play/Pause and Skip, or select Smart Stack and you can choose between Advance or Select.

Using AssistiveTouch

Use AssistiveTouch to use your watch with one hand rather than two.
Use AssistiveTouch to use your watch with one hand rather than two. Credit: Luke Chesser/Unsplash

Another way of using your Apple Watch with just one hand is to use AssistiveTouch, which is supported on every model back to the Apple Watch 4 from 2018 (including the Apple Watch 9 and the Apple Watch Ultra 9). It’s designed for people who are physically unable to use their other hand to operate their watch, but anyone can activate it.

AssistiveTouch covers a wider range of gestures, including a double tap, and is more comprehensive in terms of helping you operate the smartwatch. Activating it is more deliberate though: It doesn’t have the fluidness and ease-of-use of Double Tap, which uses machine learning algorithms to recognize wrist and finger movements. You can’t use Double Tap when AssistiveTouch is active.

To enable AssistiveTouch, open the Settings screen on your Apple Watch, then choose Accessibility and AssistiveTouch, then tap AssistiveTouch. On the same screen you can select Hand Gestures to change which gestures do what on the watch. AssistiveTouch can also be enabled from the Watch app on your iPhone, via Accessibility, then AssistiveTouch on the My Watch tab.

With AssistiveTouch enabled, raising your wrist will show a blue ring around the screen. You then need to clench your fist twice quickly to actually activate the gestures and switch to AssistiveTouch mode, where a focus ring appears on the first item on the screen (the ring indicates that something can be selected by AssistiveTouch).

The default actions include a thumb-and-index-finger pinch to move to the next item, a double pinch to move to the previous item, a fist clench to tap an item, and a double clench to bring up the action menu (where you can pick from actions like scrolling and pressing the Digital Crown). See here for a full guide to getting around all of the watch’s features and functions using AssistiveTouch gestures.

The post How to use Double Tap to control your Apple Watch without touching it appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best spark plugs of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-spark-plugs/ Wed, 15 Nov 2023 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586256
Four of the best spark plugs are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

Switch out a set of old, worn spark plugs to improve your engine's efficiency.

The post The best spark plugs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best spark plugs are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Autolite Iridium XP Automotive Replacement Spark Plugs over a white gradient Autolite Iridium XP Spark Plugs
SEE IT

This set of iridium spark plugs is top choice for compatible vehicles due to the impressive 100,000-mile lifespan.

Best value NGK Iridium Spark Plug on a white gradient background NGK Iridium Spark Plugs
SEE IT

Get high performance operation with this set of iridium spark plugs that boast enhanced anti-corrosion and anti-seizing features.

Best platinum Bosch 4417 Platinum+4 FGR7DQP Spark Plug over a white background with a gradient Bosch 4417 Platinum+4 FGR7DQP Spark Plug
SEE IT

Invest in this four-pack of platinum spark plugs for affordable, long-lasting fuel efficiency and engine reliability.

Combustion engines create a mixture of air and fuel that must be ignited to provide power to the vehicle, and spark plugs provide that trigger. Spark plugs are designed to set off this air and fuel mixture, allowing the engine to generate enough power to move the vehicle. Despite the small size of these components, without spark plugs, the vehicle would not be leaving the driveway under its own power. A brand new vehicle may not need new spark plugs for 50,000 to 100,000 miles, but when the existing spark plugs start to fail, the vehicle will begin to show signs, such as rough idling sounds, knocking engine noises, trouble starting the car, bad fuel economy, and engine misfires. In order to restore healthy operation to the engine, it’s necessary to invest in new spark plugs, and this guide will help you learn about the best spark plugs for your vehicle.

How we chose the best spark plugs

In order to select a list of the best plugs, it was necessary to conduct extensive research into a broad pool of products to find the top options based on several key product specs. The first factor that was taken into consideration was the type of plug, differentiated by the material. Premium iridium products were preferred, but not all vehicles are made to use this type, so the top list also makes room for alternate types, including copper, platinum, and double iridium.

The hex size, gap, and expected life of the products were also reviewed to find the best plugs for the vehicle. Additionally, the listed heat range for each spark plug was noted and compared against other products using a simple heat range cross-reference chart to get a clear idea of the performance of each product. Using this information, the top options were selected for this list of the best spark plugs. 

The best spark plugs: Reviews & Recommendations 

The list below comprises the top products based on thorough research and review. Take a look at this selection to find the best spark plugs for your vehicle. 

Best overall: Autolite Iridium XP Spark Plugs

Autolite

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Replace old, worn plugs with these high-efficiency iridium ones by Autolite.

Specs

  • Type: Iridium
  • Hex Size: ⅝-inch (16mm)
  • Life: 100,000 miles
  • Gap: 0.044 inches (1.1mm)

Pros

  • Lasts for up to 100,000 miles
  • Iridium design is made for optimal performance and fuel efficiency
  • High-alumina ceramic insulator for increased strength
  • Built-in platinum-protected ground wire and V-trimmed ground electrode

Cons

  • Nickel top can negatively affect performance

Vehicles are made up of a wide variety of parts that work together to make the car or truck function. If any parts are worn out or beginning to show signs of failure, then this can impact the operation of the vehicle, leading to minor issues that can grow into more serious problems if the parts are not replaced. This can be commonly seen when the tread on tires starts to wear down.

Similarly, spark plugs can wear out over time, leading to ignition problems, reduced fuel efficiency, and engine issues, so it’s important to replace old, worn ones as soon as possible. This set of iridium plugs is a great choice for compatible vehicles because they can last for up to 100,000 miles before they need to be replaced.

The iridium design increases engine performance and fuel efficiency for the vehicle, though it should be noted that the performance may be slightly reduced by the nickel top. This is made up for with the inclusion of platinum-protected ground wires and V-trimmed ground electrodes, which greatly improve efficiency and ignitability. Additionally, the plugs have a high-alumina ceramic insulator that increases the strength and durability. 

Best value: NGK Iridium Spark Plugs

NGK

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Take advantage of this six-plug value pack to get new iridium plugs for compatible vehicles.

Specs

  • Type: Iridium
  • Hex Size: ⅝-inch (16mm)
  • Life: 50,000 miles
  • Gap: 0.043 inches (1.1mm)

Pros

  • Anti-corrosion and anti-seizing properties
  • Superior strength and heat transfer
  • Iridium design offers high performance and efficiency
  • Triple-sealed to prevent leakage

Cons

  • Short 50,000-mile lifespan

Replace old or faulty plugs with this set of six iridium ones by NGK. The six-plug value pack is a great way to get high-performance iridium spark plugs without overspending. Each plug is made with trivalent metal plating, which provides superior anti-corrosion and anti-seizing properties, ensuring that the plug functions effectively for the duration of its lifespan.

The plugs also have pure alumina silicate ceramic insulators, which improve strength and heat transfer, and a copper core intended to aid in heat removal. Additionally, the plugs are triple-sealed to prevent leakage so drivers can feel confident in the durability of these replacement parts for their vehicle. However, these spark plugs are only rated for about 50,000 miles before they need to be replaced.

Best platinum: Bosch 4417 Platinum+4 FGR7DQP Spark Plug

Bosch

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Opt for these platinum plugs for reliable performance and affordable cost. 

Specs

  • Type: Platinum
  • Hex Size: ⅝-inch (16mm)
  • Life: N/A
  • Gap: 0.063 inches (1.6mm)

Pros

  • Yttrium alloy ground electrodes reduce wear and oxidation
  • Last two times longer than standard copper spark plugs
  • Multiple spark paths increase spark power and longevity
  • Enhanced ground electrodes improve combustion efficiency

Cons

  • Performance levels may not be as high as iridium spark plugs

Some manufacturers are wary about providing specific lifespans for spark plugs and similar automotive products due to the range of factors that can affect the overall life of these components. With this in mind, Bosch does not state a specific lifespan but does note that these plugs will typically last about two times longer than standard copper ones.

Additionally, these platinum plugs may not have the same high level of performance as iridium products, but the cost is generally lower, and platinum plugs still outperform copper products. These Bosch plugs boast yttrium alloy ground electrodes, which reduce gap wear and oxidation, as well as improving combustion efficiency. Also, the plugs feature multiple spark paths that allow them to increase the spark power output and spark longevity, improving the reliability of the ignition system. 

Best copper: E3 Powersports Spark Plug

E3 Powersports

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Older cars and some motorcycles are made for use with copper plugs, like this product from E3 Spark Plugs.

Specs

  • Type: Copper
  • Hex Size: ⅝-inch (16mm)
  • Life: 100,000 miles
  • Gap: 0.043 inches (1.1mm)

Pros

  • Dual-leg ground electrode design helps facilitate heat transfer
  • Long 100,000-mile lifespan
  • Unique side wire increases power and reduces fuel consumption
  • Suitable for use in cars, snowmobiles, bikes, and more

Cons

  • Only one spark plug in the package

Copper spark plugs are still widely in use for a range of vehicles. This plug by E3 Spark Plugs is made for cars, trucks, snowmobiles, motorcycles, boats, ATVs, and even some chainsaw or lawnmower engines. Before investing in this copper plug, check the manufacturer’s information to determine if the spark plug is compatible with the specific engine.

This plug is rated for 100,000 miles before it needs to be replaced. The long life and increased power are primarily due to the unique side wire design, which also helps to reduce fuel consumption and improve hydrocarbon emissions. The spark plug also features a ground electrode with two legs to help facilitate heat transfer and withstand high vibrations. However, it should be mentioned that only one plug is included in this package, so you may need to purchase more than one depending on the engine’s needs. 

Best double iridium: BOSCH Fine Wire Double Iridium Spark Plug

BOSCH

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: When standard iridium plugs aren’t quite enough, double iridium plugs may be the solution to improve performance, fuel efficiency, and reliability.

Specs

  • Type: Double Iridium
  • Hex Size: ⅝-inch (16mm)
  • Life: N/A
  • Gap: 0.043 inches (1.1mm)

Pros

  • Increased durability due to 360-degree continuous laser welding
  • Iridium firing pin and ground electrode offer superior performance
  • Lasts four times longer than standard copper spark plugs
  • Pre-gapped design with nickel-plated threads for quick installation

Cons

  • Package only comes with one spark plug

In most cases, iridium spark plugs are the top option, offering superior performance and efficiency, but if a standard iridium plug isn’t enough, then this double iridium plug may be a suitable replacement for compatible vehicles. The double iridium design includes an iridium firing pin and an iridium ground electrode, which greatly improves the performance of these components.

This plug also comes pre-gapped for easy installation and features a copper core to increase heat resistance during use. Additionally, the plug is made with a fine wire design that requires up to 24 percent less voltage for ignition. It also boasts a 360-degree continuous laser welding design for enhanced durability. Though, it should be noted that the package only includes one plug, so you may need to purchase more than one package to complete the replacement. 

Things to consider when buying the best spark plugs

Purchasing spark plugs is a good idea if the current set of plugs in the vehicle has started to show signs of significant wear. However, it’s important to find the right plugs for the vehicle, so before shopping around for new products, it’s necessary to check the manufacturer’s directions to determine the correct spark plug type, hex size, heat range, and gap for the vehicle.

Type

Spark plugs are generally available in the following five types, each differentiated based on the material:

  • Iridium spark plugs are the go-to option for performance cars because they have high reliability, performance, and life span. These plugs also improve fuel efficiency, but the material quality of iridium plugs can increase the cost of these products. 
  • Platinum spark plugs are less costly than iridium plugs and still boast a considerably higher performance, fuel efficiency level, and lifespan than copper plugs. This combination of affordability and superior performance makes platinum plugs one of the more popular options. 
  • Copper spark plugs are the most inexpensive choice, though they are also the least reliable. However, many older vehicles require copper plugs to operate with optimal performance, so make sure to check the needs of the specific engine before purchasing replacements. 
  • Double platinum spark plugs are essentially a reinforced version of regular platinum plugs, allowing these products to improve efficiency and performance. Though, the drawback is the double platinum plugs cost more than standard platinum plugs.
  • Double iridium spark plugs are made for high-performance vehicles. These are the most costly option available, but they significantly improve over other options, with a lifespan that typically lasts four times longer than copper plugs. 

Hex size

When selecting a new set of spark plugs for the vehicle, it’s essential to find products that fit the vehicle. With this in mind, you need to check the vehicle manual or review the manufacturer’s website to determine the hex size compatible with the car, truck, or van. Alternatively, you can remove one of the existing plugs and take it to a local automotive store to find a suitable replacement.

The hex size is one measurement you must pay close attention to to find compatible replacement parts. This measurement is generally noted in inches, though it may also be listed in millimeters. Typically, you can find this information on the product package, though if it isn’t noted, you will need to look up the product specs before purchasing the new spark plugs. 

Heat range

Spark plugs generally operate within a specific heat range, though the way this range is communicated in the product specs can get confusing because different manufacturers represent this factor in different ways. Ideally, you want a plug that can get up to the operating temperature as quickly as possible to prevent soot from forming on the plug. 

However, you also need to ensure that when you run the vehicle for extended periods, the plugs will not heat up beyond the allowable operating temperature. Essentially, you want to find plugs that heat up quickly but operate at a cool enough temperature to avoid overheating. The best way to do this is to check the existing plugs and the manufacturer-provided information to find compatible components.  

Gap

Another factor to consider when looking for new plugs is the gap. Spark plugs are made with a calculated spark plug gap that can be adjusted using a gapper tool. However, many plugs are sold with a pre-set gap, so if you find a product with the right gap size, you may be able to replace the existing plugs without using a gapper tool. 

For cars and similar vehicles, spark plug gaps generally range between 0.024 inches and 0.071 inches. These numbers can be provided in millimeters, ranging from 0.6mm to 1.8mm. Before purchasing new plugs for the car, make sure that the gap falls into the specified range for the vehicle’s engine. If the gap is slightly off, you may be able to use a gapper tool to adjust the gap for the correct fit, though this is only recommended for experienced automotive DIYers and professionals. 

FAQs 

Q: How often should spark plugs be changed?

Generally, copper spark plugs should be changed about once every 30,000 to 50,000 miles, while platinum and iridium spark plugs can last substantially longer. For cars that use platinum or iridium spark plugs, plan to replace these parts about once every 60,000 to 150,000 miles.

Q: How do I know if my spark plugs are bad?

When the spark plugs are not functioning properly, there are a few signs that can serve as an indicator. The most common signs include issues starting the car, rough idling, slow or stilted acceleration, bad fuel economy, engine knocking, and misfires.

Q: Are spark plugs easy to change?

Automotive DIYers who already tackle car maintenance projects, like replacing the brakes or changing the oil, should be able to replace the spark plugs in the vehicle without professional help. However, for those who have never looked under the car’s hood, it’s best to entrust the job to an experienced individual.  

Final thoughts on the best spark plugs 

Vehicles are necessary for driving kids to school, commuting to work, picking up groceries, heading out on a road trip, and many other purposes. The driver and passengers entrust their safety and security to the vehicle during use, so it’s essential to ensure the vehicle is in good working order before starting the ignition. With this in mind, replacing old or worn spark plugs as soon as possible is important.

Making this change will reduce the chance of ignition problems, engine issues, and lower fuel efficiency, allowing the driver to feel confident in the safety and functionality of the vehicle. When replacing spark plugs, make sure to check the manufacturer’s information to determine the correct spark plug type, gap, hex size, and heat range for the vehicle. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best spark plugs of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best gifts for DIYers https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-gifts-for-diyers/ Tue, 14 Nov 2023 15:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=589179
A top row of red Craftman cordless drills, a second row of screwdrivers by Klein Tools, a third row of circular saws by DeWalt, and a fourth row of the Ryobi Multi Tool.

Treat the person in your life who has a way with tools.

The post The best gifts for DIYers appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A top row of red Craftman cordless drills, a second row of screwdrivers by Klein Tools, a third row of circular saws by DeWalt, and a fourth row of the Ryobi Multi Tool.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best cordless drill A yellow and black DeWalt Cordless Drill and Driver in front of a DeWalt bag and next to a battery charger. DEWALT 20V Cordless Drill
SEE IT

This powerful drill can reach speeds of up 1,500 rpm and features an LED light for added visibility.

Best pressure washer A green and black pressure washer by Greenworks with a black cord, water bottle, and hose in the foreground. Greenworks Electric Pressure Washer
SEE IT

This tool can not only wash the outside of your house, but is great for washing your car, driveway, and patio.

Best stackable toolboxes A stack of three black tool storage cases with orange clasps and handles stacked on a black wheeled cart. beyond by BLACK+DECKER Stackable Storage System
SEE IT

This ingenious storage system helps DIYers organize their tools, protect them from theft, and easily transport them.

DIY is more popular than ever, with 73 percent of millennials identifying as do-it-yourselfers, according to the market research firm The Farnsworth Group. Whether your favorite DIYer is into home renovation, woodworking, or tinkering with their car, you can show your appreciation for their handiwork by rounding out their tool set with some new models. Or give them the gift of bins and boxes to help them organize all those tools (and the storage shed). These are the best gifts for DIYers our writers have used this year.

Best cordless drill: DEWALT 20V Max Cordless Drill

DEWALT

SEE IT

This cordless drill is rugged and powerful enough to be worthy of a pro job site while remaining affordable enough for a gift for a DIYer. Powered by a 20-volt battery, DEWALT’s cordless drill can reach speeds of up to 1,500 rpm, making it fast enough to handle jobs that require a lot of fasteners. A slower speed option with a max of 450 rpm adds versatility and maximizes the drill’s torque output. 

At 8-1/2 inches long and weighing 3.6 pounds, this is one of the bulkier drills on the market, but DEWALT makes up for that with an ergonomic handle that makes it comfortable to hold for longer jobs. DEWALT’s drill has other useful features, including a ratcheting chuck that makes it easy to secure bits by hand and an LED light with a 20-second delay for added visibility. — Tony Carrick

Best cordless drill-driver set: CRAFTSMAN V20 Cordless Drill Combo Kit

CRAFTSMAN

SEE IT

If you want to fill out a DIYers entire power tool library in one fell swoop, you should start with CRAFTSMAN’s V20 Cordless Drill Combo Kit. This drill set comes with all the essentials, plus a carrying case and impact driver. The star of the show is its powerful 20-volt drill, which can rotate at speeds of up to 3,400 rotations per minute. An impact driver may look like a drill, but it wraps around a screw or lag bolt to rotate them and is best suited for heavy-duty tasks. This isn’t the type of tool DIYers are likely to have in their garage already, and while you may be unfamiliar with it, its applications will become apparent as projects arise. Both of CRAFTSMAN’s tools have an LED light, which will help in dark areas—think attics or nooks and crannies in a basement or garage. — Brandt Ranj

Best power drill: Craftsman CMCD710C2 Power Drill

Brandt Ranj

SEE IT

We could tell the quality of Craftsman’s CMCD710C2 from the moment we took it out of its packaging, and our expectations were exceeded the first time we used it for a project. It drove screws through plaster and a wooden beam during a TV wall-mounting project like a hot knife running through butter. 

This was the most powerful power drill we tested, but it was also the heaviest. Despite its increased power, it made roughly the same amount of noise as other drills we tested—if not a little less. There’s no technical downside to using this power drill beyond its weight, but you should also consider its price. The CMCD710C2 is expensive, though it does come with a battery and charger. If you want to gift the DIYer in your life the absolute best performance from a power drill and to be safe in knowing they’ll never need to upgrade again, this is the one to get. — Brandt Ranj

Best mechanics tool set: DEWALT Mechanics Tool Set

DEWALT

SEE IT

If you never want to buy a socket set ever again, then this is a good place to start. The sturdy carrying case includes three 72-tooth ratchets, more than 150 sockets, and a full run of hex keys. Made of steel and hand-stamped for easy identification, this set is designed to endure. It’s great for people who enjoy tinkering around with their vehicles. — Stan Horaczek and Jen McCaffery

Best power tool kit: BOSCH Power Tools Combo Kit

BOSCH

SEE IT

If someone in your life is just getting started with DIY projects, a basic tool combo set like this one from Bosch is a great place to get started. The 12-volt set features a compact yet powerful 3/8-inch drill/driver that operates at a range of speeds up to 1,300 rpm, a lightweight reciprocating saw, a bright worklight that lasts for three hours on a single charge, two batteries, and a charger. And they all fit back nicely into the included bag. — Jen McCaffery

Best multi-tool: Ryobi 18V Multi Tool

RYOBI

SEE IT

While it’s easy to get excited about a garage full of tools, sometimes it’s helpful to have some options that are capable of performing more than one function well. Ryobi’s 18-volt Multi-Tool is a great tool for DIYers working with various materials. Capable of up to 20,000 OPM (oscillations per minute), this tool comes with plunge cut and flush cut blades and can be used to cut metal, wood, plastic, and drywall. At 1.5 pounds, it’s relatively lightweight, and it vibrates less than comparable models. The Multi-Tool also comes with a sanding pad to help your DIYer put the finishing touches on their projects. — Jen McCaffery

Best screwdriver set: Klein Tools 80031 Screwdriver Set

KLEIN TOOLS

SEE IT

Tools don’t get much more basic than the humble screwdriver. This five-piece set from Klein Tools, which has been making tools since 1857, includes the most commonly used types: two Phillips head, two slotted, and one square-tipped screwdriver. The shanks are chrome-plated, and the tips are cut for precision. And the handles are cushioned for an easier grip. — Jen McCaffery

Best impact driver: Milwaukee M18 Fuel Hex Hydraulic Driver Kit

MILWAUKEE

SEE IT

Technology sets the Milwaukee M18 Fuel impact driver apart from the rest. Its hydraulic drive sustains torque better than other impact drivers, allowing it to drive faster and with more power. With so much torque, impact drivers always risk stripping out a screw head. The Milwaukee M18 solves this problem by featuring a self-tapping screw mode that helps to start the screw without stripping it out. With its four drive modes, the user can tailor the speed of this driver to suit any job. We also like the small profile of this driver. At less than 5 inches long, this driver is compact enough to fit into tight spaces, and it’s one of the quieter models on the market. Its hydraulic drive technology eliminates the metal-on-metal contact that makes other impact drivers scream like a jackhammer. — Tony Carrick

Best angle grinder: DEWALT 4-1/2” Angle Grinder

DEWALT

SEE IT

DEWALT’s 4-½-inch angle grinder is a tough, high-quality tool aimed at those who need consistent, trouble-free performance. The 11-amp motor is the most powerful in its class, with a speed of 11,000 rpm. With the correct wheel fitted, this angle grinder will cut concrete or steel with equal ease. Although fairly slender, the tool is 12 inches long and relatively heavy, so it isn’t as maneuverable as some. It’s more a professional tool than one for the average DIY user, but keen home auto restorers and anyone taking on major remodeling could well find it worth the investment.  — Bob Beacham

Best jigsaw: CRAFTSMAN V20 Cordless Jig Saw

CRAFTSMAN

SEE IT

A jigsaw allows users to cut curved lines, circles, and other shapes into a range of materials, including wood, metal, plastic, laminate, and more. This 20-volt model from Craftsman operates at speeds from zero to 2,500 spm (strokes per minute). It comes with three orbital settings that let the user control the aggressiveness of the cut and works with both T and U shank blades. Its beveled shoe also allows the user to cut at 45-degree angles. Plus, it features a contoured handle for a more comfortable grip. — Jen McCaffery

Best chainsaw: ​​Worx Nitro 40V Chainsaw

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Worx offers a number of very versatile tools in its Nitro series, and the chainsaw is no exception. The 16-inch bar is ideal for most typical users who don’t need to go chopping through Middle Earth-style forests. A pair of sturdy grips give both hands a comfortable place to rest and lots of control over the tool. During our testing, we chopped through tons of 3- to 4-inch sticks and some larger, full-grown trees.

With two powerful batteries installed, it quickly gets up to speed, and we barely had any issues with kicking or getting stuck. Installing and adjusting the chain is simple, and it self-lubricates as users run it, so it doesn’t require much in the way of maintenance. We spent several hours cutting away with this tool and ran into almost no issues, which is exactly what we’re looking for.  — Stan Horaczek

Best circular saw: DEWALT DCS573B Flexvolt Advantage 20V Circular Saw

DEWALT

SEE IT

The DEWALT circular saw offers numerous user-friendly features that suit both professionals and amateurs who are prepared to invest in quality. This powerful 20V cordless model runs at 5,500 rpm, providing faster cutting than many rivals. The brushless motor maximizes battery life. Thanks to the Flexvolt Advantage system, this saw can also use DEWALT’s high-capacity 60V batteries, which the manufacturer claims can result in a 77-percent power increase. An LED light makes it easier to see cut lines and improves accuracy in low-light conditions. An electric brake stops the blade quickly, so it’s safe to put the saw down after a cut. A rafter hook, favored by framers and other carpentry trades, is also included. — Bob Beacham

Best random orbital sander: beyond by BLACK+DECKER Random Orbit Sander

BLACK+DECKER

SEE IT

For those people who want to strip old furniture before repainting, sand lumber, or perhaps ease a sticking door, the Black+Decker could be the ideal tool. This random orbital sander may not be especially powerful, but it will get the job done. The fixed speed doesn’t give it great versatility, but it is fast enough for ripping through old paint or varnish and good for sanding store-bought softwoods. Weight is under 3 pounds, and rubberized areas make it easy to use at different angles. It comes with three sanding disks of different grits, which won’t last very long but will get the new user started, and acclimate them to how each type cuts if this is their first sander. — Bob Beacham

Best heat gun: DEWALT Heat Gun Kit

DEWALT

SEE IT

A heat gun is a versatile tool that can help with a range of DIY and pro tasks, from thawing frozen pipes and removing tiles to repairing electrical equipment. This compact model from DEWALT comes with an LCD display that allows users to adjust the temperature within 50-degree increments. It also features built-in overload protection, and hang ring for storage, a cord protector, and a kickstand for stability. The heat gun comes with a range of attachments to fine-tune work, including a cone nozzle and fishtail surface nozzle. At 2.3 pounds, this tool is lightweight, and the handle is ergonomically designed for more comfortable use. Note that the battery and charger have to be ordered separately. — Jen McCaffery

Best smart tape measure: LEXIVON 2 in 1 Digital Laser Tape Measure

LEXIVON

SEE IT

Smart DIYers subscribe to the maxim, “Measure twice, cut once.” Lexivon’s 2-in-1 Digital Laser Tape Measure allows them to do just that. This device combines a traditional 16-foot tape measure with a laser that measures out to 130 feet. It features an LCD screen that displays measurements and is accurate up to 1/16th of an inch. Powered by two AA batteries, this tool also allows users to make stud center markings and comes with a rubberized case and belt clip. — Jen McCaffery

Best laser level: DEWALT Line Laser

DEWALT

SEE IT

DEWALT is known for constructing well-designed, durable tools; this laser level is no exception. Like many other options, it offers both horizontal and vertical leveling. What sets this model apart is the durable construction that ensures you won’t be buying another one should it happen to take a tumble or spend time out in the rain. That’s because DEWALT protects this level with an over-molded housing that can endure drops from heights of up to a meter. It also has an IP54 rating, which means it will withstand being splashed with water. 

In addition to being ruggedly built, this laser level is also easy to use, thanks to its self-leveling capability and a versatile mounting system that’s compatible with a tripod. Its 100-foot range is ample distance for most indoor and outdoor applications. — Bob Beacham

Best work table: WORX WX051 Pegasus Folding Work Table & Sawhorse

WORX

SEE IT

With all these tools, a DIYer also needs a reliable workspace. This folding work table from WORX that converts into a sawhorse fits the bill. Made of durable ABS plastic with steel reinforcements, it supports up to 300 pounds as a work table and up to 1,000 pounds at a workhorse. Yet at just 25 pounds, this work table is relatively lightweight and easy to store. It features two integrated clamps and a lower shelf that’s great for storing power tools. If your DIYer needs more workspace, these tables can also attach together to expand the work surface. — Jen McCaffery

Best work light: Craftsman LED Portable Work Light Bundle

CRAFTSMAN

SEE IT

DIYers also need dependable lights that can illuminate dark corners when fixing things around the house or under the hood. This Craftsman work light features an LED light that provides up to 2,000 lumens of light. At just three pounds, this cheery red light is easily transportable, and it has a 5-foot power cord. The head rotates 360 degrees, so DIYers can point it in whatever direction they need light. It’s also rated IP65, so it’s safe to use in wet locations. And when the project is completed, this lamp is also great for camping, fishing, and hiking.

Best work gloves: Ironclad General Utility Work Gloves

IRONCLAD

SEE IT

Reliable safety protection is essential for DIY projects. These classic work gloves from Ironclad are made of synthetic lever and feature thermoplastic protection on the fingers to protect the knuckles from impact and abrasion. The gloves have a hook-and-loop closure for a secure fit and even include a terrycloth sweat wipe at the back of the thumb. When the job is completed, these gloves are also machine-washable. 

Best toolbox: DEWALT Tough System

DEWALT

SEE IT

The DEWALT Tool Box is a medium-sized hand-carry case that’s a great choice for home use or on a busy job site. This toolbox comes with a deep storage compartment that is large enough to fit a drill, saw, or a cordless tool battery and a charger. Sitting on top of this compartment is a removable tray where users can store hand tools, like screwdrivers, wrenches, or a hammer. 

This box is made with durable structural foam that protects against impact damage, cuts, slices, dust, and water. Made with metal locking brackets and awarded an IP65 water- and dust-resistance rating, this is an excellent option for DIYers and pros alike. — Tim Dale

Best stackable toolboxes: beyond by BLACK+DECKER Stackable Storage System

BLACK+DECKER

SEE IT

Tools can get heavy and disorganized, especially when a DIYer needs everything from a cordless drill, hammer, tape measure, and nails to complete a job. BLACK+DECKER provides an ingenious solution with its stackable storage system. The three-piece set features a rolling tote with rubber wheels designed for power tools, a deep toolbox for hand tools, and a small organizer toolbox divided into compartments. The stackable set is designed with lockable latches, and DIYers can roll the whole set together to a job or easily remove one of the toolboxes. This unit can also double as storage, so DIYers can also set the boxes against the wall in the garage and use them there. — Jen McCaffery

Best cordless vac: DEWALT 20V MAX Hand Vacuum

DEWALT

SEE IT

When it comes time to clean up, an easy-to-use vac is indispensable. This hand vacuum from DEWALT is designed with 20 volts of power, making it capable of removing debris and removing water. This versatile wet-dry vac comes with a half-gallon tank, a utility nozzle for targeting messes, and an extendable rubber hose. Powered by a DEWALT battery pack, this cordless vacuum is easy to transport and lightweight at 4.5 pounds. It also features a washable HEPA filter that traps more than 99 percent of dust.

Best shop vac: Bissell MultiClean Wet Dry Vac

BISSELL

SEE IT

There’s the fun of working on a DIY project … and then there’s the cleanup. If they’d appreciate a wet-dry shop vacuum that handles anything, the Bissell MultiClean vac covers all the bases. This versatile cleaning tool comes with a variety of features and functions, including a blowing function for clearing leaves or blowing up inflatables, a wet suction tool, and a toolkit of different brushes for vacuuming various surfaces and crevices. The tank is on wheels for easy movement while vacuuming, and its balanced body keeps it from tipping over when it’s pulled. This machine is sleek and easy to use for both small at-home messes and bigger shop cleanups. — Amanda Reed

Best leaf blower: DEWALT Cordless XR Leaf Blower

DEWALT

SEE IT

DEWALT’s cordless leaf blower offers an excellent combination of both power—courtesy of its 20V motor—and cost. This battery-powered model can push out air at up to 125 miles per hour, covering an area of 450 cubic feet per minute. A flat concentrator nozzle helps blow away heavier debris. At 5.4 pounds, this leaf blower is lightweight, and it’s designed with an ergonomic handle and also quieter than most at about 68 decibels. It is worth noting, however, that the battery generally only lasts from 15 to 20 minutes per charge — David King and Jen McCaffery

Best log splitter: Fiskars IsoCore 36-Inch Maul

FISKARS

SEE IT

This manual log splitter is built to last with a forged, heat-treated steel head with a rust-resistant coating. Plus, the sculpted, soft-grip handle fits the contour of your hand and promises to transfer two times less shock and vibration than wood handles. The wedge-shaped maul head is specifically designed for, and highly efficient at, splitting—significantly better than the thin, relatively lightweight head of an axe. At only 7.43 pounds and requiring almost no storage space, this tool punches well above its weight. — Mark Wolfe

Best pressure washer: GreenWorks Pressure Washer

GREENWORKS

SEE IT

Does your resident DIYer start to turn green when they notice the outside of the house needs a good wash? They’ll appreciate the range of the Greenworks Electric Pressure Washer. The pressure hose can extend up to 20 feet, and the 35-foot power cord is safe to use with exterior outlets. It also comes with two nozzle tips, a soap applicator, and an attachable detergent bottle for added convenience at clean-up time. This GreenWorks pressure washer blasts at an impressive 1,600 PSI to dislodge dirt and get your house looking primo once again. This pressure washer is also great for cleaning your car, fence, patio, and more. — Jeremy Helligar and Jen McCaffery

The post The best gifts for DIYers appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best outdoor motion sensor lights in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-outdoor-motion-sensor-lights/ Mon, 13 Nov 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586281
Four of the best outdoor motion sensor lights are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

Security is worth every penny you pay for it. So is convenience.

The post The best outdoor motion sensor lights in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best outdoor motion sensor lights are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall white LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light on a white background LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light
SEE IT

Easy to install with good waterproofing at a really strong price point, you can get all you need from the LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light.

Best value HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED on a white background HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED
SEE IT

A solar-powered model at a super reasonable price, these lights don’t offer must customization in terms of where they points but do offer great detection within 26 feet.

Best smart Philips Hue Outdoor Motion Sensor and box on a white background Philips Hue Outdoor Motion Sensor
SEE IT

This smart device-compatible motion sensor can interface with Alexa, Google, or Apple HomeKit, giving you tons of customizability and control to existing light fixtures.

Nothing lights your way better than a motion sensor light. Plus, these lights are huge deterrents for home dangers. Coming home to a dark driveway or path to the front door can be sad and somewhat dangerous, with it easy to miss a step and take a tumble. Plus, not only will prowlers or burglars be put off by motion sensor lights, but local wildlife will be less likely to stick around if their movements are met with a bright flash of light. If the area around your domicile can get easily dark, you will want an outdoor motion sensor light. There are tons of them on the market, so which one should you choose? Don’t worry; like the gentle glow of your new light, we’re here to guide you on the best outdoor motion sensor lights.

How we chose the best outdoor motion sensor lights

We’ve looked at a wide variety of reviews from real-world users, as well as in-the-field experts. We consulted colleagues and friends who have used these brands around their own homes. We then took the general consensus and distilled it down into categories to give you a better sense of what might be a good choice for your personal use. The difference in quality between any of our choices is quite small. So, if there are particular features you’re looking for, it may be the best choice not to go for our “best overall” model. Instead, look for something more specific to your needs, like a smart sensor or one with a camera. All of them equally can be considered the best outdoor motion sensor lights.

The best outdoor motion sensor lights: Reviews & Recommendations

There are a wide variety of motion sensor lights on the market, making it hard to sort through. Which brands are reliable? What ones produce a strong and consistent glow? Which have cool smart features or cameras that increase security even further? We’ve researched from the lawn to the landings so we can let you know and lead you to the best outdoor motion sensor lights.

Best overall: LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light

LEONLITE

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 8.07 inches long x 7.48 inches wide by 5.9 inches high
  • Range: 70 feet
  • Detection angle: 180 degrees
  • Watts: 20

Pros

  • Strong range
  • Reasonable price
  • IP65 waterproofing
  • 50,000-hour lifespan
  • Easy installation

Cons

  • Lights can block sensor if not properly adjusted
  • Look doesn’t really blend with most homes
  • Gasket seals are lowest-quality part

Offering a lot of features and easy installation at a low price, the LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light is appropriate for a lot of situations, even if its styling leaves something to be desired. One of the nicest features is the ability to adjust the motion sensor’s range out to about 70 feet. However, if your area of worry is closer, you can slide a dial to shorten that range. That way, your neighbor’s dog cavorting in the backyard won’t set it off. There are additional modes, including just turning the light on all the time, and having it automatically come on at night and turn off during the day.

Being an LED light, the low-wattage bulbs produce just as much light without using as much energy as traditional bulbs. If you’re purchasing your motion sensor light with the intention of lowering your power consumption, the LEONLITE LED is a good choice. Even if you live in an area with a lot of rain or other inclement weather, the light’s IP65 waterproofing and solid aluminum construction can hold up to a lot of punishment from the elements. The fixture has a lifespan of 50,000 hours, meaning you’ll be using it for years to come.

The main drawback of the LEONLITE LED is its rather industrial styling. It’s not a particularly fashionable light. It comes in black and white, but as of writing, the black model is more expensive than the white one. The included gaskets, which seal the bulbs in their casings, are a bit weak, so don’t screw too tight when installing. You can find replacement parts made of sturdier metal at any hardware store if needed. Speaking of installing, the LEONLITE LED installs very easily. Just make sure you adjust the lamps so that they don’t cover any of the spots you want to be monitored with the motion sensor.

For its reasonable price and many features, the LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light is our best overall outdoor motion sensor light.

Best smart: Philips Hue Outdoor Motion Sensor

Philips Hue

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 2.5 inches long by 3 inches wide by 3 inches high
  • Range: 39 feet
  • Detection angle: 160 degree horizontal / 80 degree vertical
  • Watts: n/a

Pros

  • Can integrate existing fixtures if you use specialized bulbs
  • Small and unobtrusive
  • Smart features allow you to control lights from your phone or smart device
  • Can change the color of the Philips Hue bulbs
  • Lots of other smart light devices that can work alongside it

Cons

  • Expensive to fully kit out
  • Specialized bulb are expensive to replace
  • Smaller range than dedicated motion detection lights

If you’re into connecting your home’s electronic devices to a smart hub like Amazon’s Alexa, Google’s Google Assistant, or Apple’s HomeKit, Philips—a longtime trusted name in home electronics (and smart light bulbs)—has an excellent line of bulbs, fixtures and, most importantly, a motion sensor.

This Philips Hue motion sensor doesn’t include any built-in lighting. But you can purchase compatible lighting devices or special Philips Hue bulbs to connect your existing fixtures to your motion sensor and your smart-home network. However, this all requires the additional purchase of a Hue Bridge. So make sure you buy everything you need if you’re going to go smart, or you might end up with a useless device.

Once you connect and set up your network of smart bulbs and motion detector(s), you’re going to have more options than you ever expected. You can change the color of your bulbs, creating ambient light or different lighting for different functions. That includes softer light when you arrive home at night and stronger light when you’re asleep to deter animals and criminals. You can use a phone app to adjust your settings, or turn your lights on or off at any time.

The motion detector device is easy to install and doesn’t have to be anywhere near the light fixture that it’s connected to. It offers tons of flexibility in terms of the area of coverage. It’s also small enough and innocuous enough that it doesn’t drastically change the look of your home area. It may even be hard to spot unless you’re quite close to it. This can be good or bad. Your home won’t have an eyesore on it, but criminals may not sit it and decide that it’s not worth trying to case your place (though the lights turning on as they get close hopefully will do the trick).

Choosing the Philips Hue means you’re going to have more options than ever before, but it also requires wading into an expensive and extensive world of smart devices. If you’re already a smart home devotee, it makes sense to have your motion sensor work with it, but if you’re not, think long and hard before committing. However, once you decide to go smart, the Philips Hue Outdoor Sensor is the best smart outdoor motion sensor (once you add a) light.

Best LED: LEPOWER LED Security Light

LEPOWER

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 14.05 inches long x 5.38 inches wide x 8.24 inches high
  • Range: 72 feet
  • Detection Angle: 180 degrees 
  • Watts: 38

Pros

  • Each of the three lights is independently adjustable
  • IP65 Waterproof
  • Light time adjustable from 10 seconds to 10 minutes
  • Relatively easy to install
  • Very bright

Cons

  • No overnight feature
  • No solar power
  • Larger power consumption than our best overall

If you’re looking for brightness, our best LED outdoor motion sensor light is the LEPOWER LED Security Light. This large, three-part motion sensor light has a range of up to 72 feet, though it works better within 24 at a height of 7.5 to 10 feet.  Like our best overall model, it’s IP65 Waterproof and aluminum, but the lights are built-in with a different style of bulb that is not replaceable. It uses almost twice the power of our best overall, but you get that power in the light. This thing is BRIGHT, maybe too bright if you’re close to your neighbors. That strength makes this perfect for larger-lot homes and garages.

You’re not going to get an overnight feature, meaning you can’t use it dusk-to-dawn, but you can set the duration of the motion sensor light from 10 seconds all the way to 10 minutes, or simply turn it on. Each of the three lights is independently adjustable, as is the motion sensor unit. You can either bend all three of the light areas to focus on one spot, or widen them out to cover the most area possible. This unit is relatively easy to install, no more so than expected with an outdoor light fixture.

While it doesn’t have all the features of some of our higher-rated units, the LEPOWER LED Security Light lives up to the POWER in its name, making it the best LES outdoor motion sensor light.

Best solar-powered: Sunforce Triple Head Solar Motion Light

Sunforce

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12.9 inches long x 6.7 inches wide x 9 inches high
  • Range: 30 feet
  • Detection Angle: 180 degrees
  • Watts: 1.8 

Pros

  • No wiring or power needed
  • Solar powered
  • Small and compact
  • Three adjustable light panels
  • Includes rechargeable batteries

Cons

  • Low light output and short maximum duration
  • Short range
  • Needs direct sunlight to fully charge

If you want an outdoor motion sensor light that doesn’t require you to wire it into your home’s electrical system, you want a solar-powered light. The best we found is the Sunforce Triple Head Solar Motion Light. It’s a relatively small three-panel flood light with an attached solar-powered panel that can be mounted separately, up to 15 feet away, in order to gather the maximum amount of light during the day.

These are all excellent and convenient features, but this light does come with some drawbacks. It’s simply not as powerful as other models due to it running not on electricity but on batteries that are recharged with the solar panel. (The batteries are included, which is nice.) The range is much lower than other models, less than half, and the maximum time the light will stay on is lower too. Therefore, this model is better for tighter lots or convenience rather than crime deterrence. However, the price is reasonable, so you can also simply set up more than one of the Sunforce Triple Head Solar Motion Light.

While there are some drawbacks, there are also a lot of benefits to the Sunforce Triple Head Solar Motion Light, making it the best solar-powered outdoor motion sensor light on the market.

Best with camera: Ring Floodlight Cam Wired Pro

Stan Horaczek

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 12.82 inches long x 7.77 inches wide x 8.5 inches high
  • Range: 30 feet
  • Detection Angle: 270 lights, 140 degrees camera
  • Watts: Not listed

Pros

  • Tons of features
  • Camera can follow motion
  • Wide motion sensor range for lights
  • Connectivity to Alexa
  • HD images

Cons

  • No compatibility with Google Assistant or Apple HomeKit
  • Relatively short range
  • expensive

If you want to step your security up, you’ll want to pair a camera with your lights, so when they’re triggered, you can know what happened to cause it. If you use Alexa in your smart home, the best option is Amazon-owned company Ring’s Floodlight Cam Wired Pro, a good light paired with an incredible security camera. 

As a light, the Ring Floodlight Cam Wired Pro isn’t quite as powerful as a dedicated outdoor motion sensor light. The lights only have a range of about 30 feet, though the camera can see and follow motion beyond that in daylight. However, the motion sensor itself has a great radius, more than 180 degrees, which is better than many other models.

The camera is excellent. It outputs 1080p HD video, which is really clear. The camera can identify if motion is human, animal, or mechanical and be set to only record in the event of the kind of motion you’re interested in. Integrating with Alexa, you can have the camera trigger other smart devices, like locks or alarms. Night videos are clearer in black and white than in color. All the footage is available on the Ring app.

However, you must subscribe to the Ring’s service to use all these features. Multiple plans determine how much footage you can store for later viewing, starting at $3 a month. There’s also a built-in alarm, which means if your camera catches a prowler or robber about to attempt to enter your home, you can hopefully scare them away.

While it costs a pretty penny both initially and over time, the Ring Floodlight Cam Wired Pro offers an incredible amount of features that can really add to your peace of mind, or simply help you monitor what’s happening around you. That makes it the best outdoor motion sensor light with a camera. You can learn even more in our full review.

Best value: HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED

HMCITY

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 3.23 inches long x 6.06 inches wide x 4.02 inches high
  • Range: 26 feet
  • Detection Angle: 120 degrees
  • Watts: 4.5

Pros

  • IP65 Waterproof
  • Solar Powered
  • Two-pack
  • Excellent price

Cons

  • Short range
  • Limited detection angle

Our best value proposition for outdoor motion sensor lights is a double deal: you get two for one price. The HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED are two wide-angled light panels that are self-contained and solar-powered. You can install them anywhere because you do not need wires (we’re big fans of on a deck, maybe one with some nice furniture). The housing contains the solar cells, though, so make sure wherever you place them gets adequate sunlight during the day. There’s even a dusk-to-dawn mode that turns the lights on all night.

The HMCITY Solar Lights are better as ambient and night-use home lights than they are as security lights, but they can do the job. You can either set the lights to be off until they sense motion or to have low light until they sense motion and then get brighter. The lights themselves have a wide angle that they cast: 270 degrees. Even though the light itself isn’t powerful, it fills an area well.

Some of the drawbacks of the HMCITY Solar Lights are standard to solar-powered lights. They simply don’t produce as much light as wired lights can, and they tend to have sensors that can’t detect quite as far out. The HMCITY Solar Lights have a maximum range of 26 feet for detection, so it’s better on a smaller lot. They do have standard IP65 waterproofing, though the casing itself can collect a bit of moisture on the top, so it may be better to install it under an eave if possible.

The price is excellent, with two lights retailing for around $30 without a sale or coupon. For that price, the HMCITY Solar Lights Outdoor LED gives you a convenient and useful package to add ambient light to your backyard, convenient light to approach to your door, or deter criminals and wildlife from getting near your property. That’s what makes it the best-value outdoor motion sensor light.

Best budget: Beams Wireless Battery Operated Powered Motion Sensing Spotlight

Beams

SEE IT

Specs

  • Dimensions: 6.5 inches long x 3.5 inches wide x 4.42 inches high
  • Range: 30 feet
  • Detection Angle: 120 degrees
  • Watts: Not listed

Pros

  • Excellent price
  • No wired connection needed
  • Small and easy to install

Cons

  • Batteries need replacing every year
  • Low light output
  • Narrow angle of motion sensing

If you don’t need a lot of light and don’t want to worry about wires, Beams offers a battery-powered motion-sensing spotlight that does a good job for a small price. At only $20, the Beams Wireless Battery Operated Powered Motion Sensing Spotlight can be installed anywhere, no need to worry about patching into your house’s electrical system. Instead, the Beams Spotlight runs on 3 D-cell batteries (not included). You’ll get about a year of use out of each set.

The light’s motion sensor is a bit limited, which is typical of battery-powered motion sensor lights, offering only 120 degrees. The range is surprisingly strong, besting our best value model by 4 feet. The spotlight is quite small, meaning it’s excellent for side doors, pet areas, or as a supplemental light when the main light is turned off.

The weatherproofing is about the same as other models, hitting IPX6, though it doesn’t have a rating for contact or dustproofing. The aesthetic is actually a bit nicer than more powerful models, with it blending in better than the large multi-panel floodlights.

While there are not a lot of options with the Beams Wireless Battery Operated Powered Motion Sensing Spotlight, and some of its benefits (small size, install anywhere) come with drawbacks (weaker light, need for batteries), the $20 price and overall good performance makes it the best budget outdoor motion sensor light.

What to consider when choosing outdoor motion sensor lights

The first thing you should consider is the range and angle that you’ll need for your property—and your property only! It’ll be highly annoying for your neighbors if they can easily trip your motion sensor lights from their yard or, even worse, from their home! So, if you live on tighter lots, a shorter range might actually be better, while if you live on a large piece of property, you’ll want something that extends a long way out.

You’ll also need to consider the angle of detection for the motion detector. If you’re putting your lights flush against a wall of your home and want detection on all sides, you’re going to want 180 degrees, while if you’re affixing it in a corner, you may not need to worry so much about having such a wide angle.

You’ll want to consider the power source. Some of these lights are solar powered and store up their batteries during the day so that they may be used at night, but that also requires they be placed on the side of your house that gets a lot of sunshine to be most effective.

Lastly, consider any additional accessories or features you want alongside your lights. Do you want a camera? Do you want smart home features that let you control the lights from your phone or with your voice from a connected device? Not every light is going to feature those.

FAQs

Q: What is the best motion sensor light for outside?

Every light from our list is in some way the “best,” but our overall favorite light was the LEONLITE LED Motion Sensor Flood Light.

Q: What is the disadvantage of outdoor motion sensor lights?

The biggest disadvantage is these lights are made to throw a lot of light quickly, which can be annoying to neighbors if they get tripped late at night (either by a late-arriving member of your household, a pet or other animal, or anyone else). You can inadvertently create conflict when installing one of these, so consult with your neighbor on the side where you plan to place it, and if possible, adjust the way the light is pointed so as to put the least possible light pollution into your neighbor’s property. Also, keep in mind that motion sensor lights are not going to be warm and inviting like a porch light. They click on and off in a pretty aggressive way, even when you are the person who triggers them. They can actually be quite stressful to encounter, even when you’re expecting them.

Q: What is the lifespan of a motion sensor light?

A good motion sensor with built-in lights should last 10-15 years. If you use a separate smart sensor to make your existing fixtures motion sensor lights, you’ll simply have to replace the bulbs when they burn out.

Q: How many lumens should a motion sensor light be?

Individual motion sensor lights should be between 300 and 700 lumens for soft, porch-like light. Floodlights should be 1000 or more.

Q: Are motion sensor lights a good idea?

In terms of being used as a practical light, motion sensor lights have the ability to save you money and conserve energy compared to an always-on porch light. They are also known deterrents for criminals and wildlife, and when paired with a camera, can get you a sense of what happened in the event of an accident or incident at night. In this regard, they’re a smart purchase.

Q: How does a motion sensor light work?

Motion sensors use passive infrared sensors, which monitor any infrared energy changes, turning on an associated electrical switch when they are engaged. The electrical switch is attached to the light, which then illuminates. Infrared sensors can be tripped by any individual, animal, or object that has a heat signature at a certain level but can be interfered with if you have a heat vent or other heat source near the sensor. 

Final thoughts on the best outdoor motion sensor lights

You should probably get an outdoor motion sensor light if you’re considering them. You’ll feel more secure, they’ll give convenient, energy-saving light, and you might even have a lower power bill. Which of our recommended units you buy will depend entirely on your needs, but all can confidently be called the best outdoor motion sensor lights.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best outdoor motion sensor lights in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The unintended side effects of popular weight loss drugs https://www.popsci.com/health/semaglutide-side-effects/ Mon, 13 Nov 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=588661
Ozempic weight loss drug injectable on red background
Semaglutides like Ozempic and Wegovy have weight loss benefits, but also some possibly harmful side effects. Jaap Arriens/NurPhoto via Getty Images

Know what you're in for before taking the risk.

The post The unintended side effects of popular weight loss drugs appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Ozempic weight loss drug injectable on red background
Semaglutides like Ozempic and Wegovy have weight loss benefits, but also some possibly harmful side effects. Jaap Arriens/NurPhoto via Getty Images

You’ve probably heard a lot about Ozempic and Wegovy, the semaglutide wonder drugs for weight loss. Their newfound popularity with prescribers and online pharmacies has sparked a global shortage. Other diabetes medications are now also being repurposed for weight loss: On Wednesday, the FDA approved Zepbound, another version of Mounjaro, for chronic weight management.

While Ozempic and Wegovy have different ingredients than Mounjaro and Zepbound, they work in a similar way. Semaglutide mimics a hormone called GLP-1 that’s usually released when the body detects carbohydrates, proteins, and other lipids after a meal. This sends a message to the brain that you’ve eaten, changing hunger signaling activity. When the body thinks it’s full, GLP-1 activates other systems to slow down muscle contractions that would usually move food out of the stomach.

A weekly injection might seem like an easy option to shed pounds, but doctors warn these medications are not a perfect weight-loss solution. Semaglutide carries a number of side effects that range from uncomfortable to life-threatening, which can be even worse with off-label use of Wegovy or Ozempic.

What are the common side effects of semaglutide?

Since semaglutide has a direct effect on the GI tract, a majority of the side effects are gastrointestinal-related. Mir Ali, a bariatric surgeon and medical director of MemorialCare Surgical Weight Loss Center in California, says about 50 percent of people taking Wegovy or Ozempic experience nausea. Other common side effects include constipation, diarrhea, or cramping. People who overeat while on the regimen might experience more severe nausea and even vomiting. Additionally, while not as common as the other GI side effects, Ali mentions there is a chance of dizziness while taking Ozempic. This may stem from the blood sugar-lowering effects of the drug. 

“These symptoms tend to go away with time as the patients continue their medications. The body adapts to [the drug],” says Ali. He adds that people prescribed Ozempic or Wegovy often start off on a lower dose and eventually work their way up to avoid jarring side effects.

If you experience nausea, Ozempic’s makers advise eating more slowly and switching to bland, low-fat foods such as crackers and plain toast. People should also eat soups and gelatin, which contain high amounts of water. After meals, drink ice-cold water and avoid lying down.

What are the more dangerous side effects?

Since large numbers of people started using semaglutide for off-label weight loss, doctors have been documenting more troubling reactions. New research published in the Journal of the American Medical Association links Ozempic to gastroparesis, a chronic condition that severely weakens the muscles in the stomach wall, making it harder to push food over to the small intestine. The inability to empty stomach contents can delay the digestive process and induce regular episodes of nausea and diarrhea. While there are surgical and non-surgical ways to manage gastroparesis, there’s currently no cure for it. 

Considering that there have only been a few documented cases of gastroparesis with Ozempic use, Ali says the chances of this happening are relatively rare and “not something you typically see in patients.” But as demand for the drug continues to soar, more cases may come to light. Along with stomach paralysis, other limited but severe side effects of Ozempic involve pancreatitis, kidney issues, and gallbladder issues.

Can semaglutide cause suicidal thoughts?

A growing number of people worldwide have also reported suicidal thoughts while taking Ozempic. After receiving 150 reports of suicidal ideation and self-injury, the European Medicines Agency is reviewing the safety data on the diabetes drug. The United Kingdom is also reviewing all drugs classified as GLP-1 agonists, including Ozempic, after an uptick in incidences of self-harming thoughts. In the US, individuals have spoken out about experiencing suicidal ideation while taking Ozempic, despite having no history of self-harm. 

Overall, cases of suicidal ideations are largely anecdotal and relatively rare.

Some of the mental health concerns have precedent. The US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) requires any chronic weight management medication that works on the central nervous system to carry a warning about suicidal behavior and ideation. Wegovy has a warning for suicidal ideation but Ozempic—intended only to control blood sugar levels in people with type 2 diabetes—does not. It’s not clear what the link is between these drugs and suicidal thoughts, but it’s assumed the neuropsychiatric side effects emerge when semaglutide interacts with the brain to control appetite. 

“The question becomes, should the same medication under a different name carry the same caution regarding suicidal ideation?” says Joseph Barrera, an endocrinologist and associate medical director of Providence Mission Hospital in California. He adds that the likelihood of developing self-harming thoughts while taking Ozempic seems to occur more in people with a history of depression or other psychological issues—a possible safety concern as some psychiatrists are now prescribing Ozempic for depression

Overall, cases of suicidal ideations are largely anecdotal and relatively rare. As of September 2023, of the 23,845 reports of adverse reactions with semaglutide in the US, there have been 144 cases of suicidal ideation and 2 deaths by suicide. As Barrera points out, it’s still unclear how many of these cases involved Ozempic versus Wegovy.

What to consider if taking Ozempic or Wegovy for weight loss

Barrera has one piece of advice for people considering using Ozempic or Wegovy off-label: Don’t. The risks of taking the drug, including suicidal ideation, are too high. What’s more, Barrera warns some individuals have been paying providers and clinics for “compounded semaglutide,” which involves mixing multiple medications together. According to the FDA, people making compounded semaglutide are using a salt form, such as semaglutide sodium or semaglutide acetate, that doesn’t contain the same active ingredient as Ozempic and Wegovy. 

Another factor to consider is affordability, as insurance companies are unlikely to pay for off-label use of either drug. Ozempic requires weekly shots and can cost about $900 per injection without coverage. It’s also designed to be taken long-term, so skipping out on the drug for even a week can cause food cravings and a rebound in weight. 

Overall, semaglutide can be helpful in managing weight and improving your health if you’ve been diagnosed with a chronic condition. “It’s another tool to help with living a healthy lifestyle, and like any other tool, it works well if used properly,” says Ali. He advises people using weight loss drugs to think of it as a supplement, not a replacement to diet and exercise. Without combining the two, people will not see much of the desired results, he adds. “They are better medications than we’ve had previously, but nothing is perfect.”

The post The unintended side effects of popular weight loss drugs appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
All the ways you can use your phone as a mobile hotspot https://www.popsci.com/diy/how-can-i-use-my-phone-as-a-hotspot/ Sun, 12 Nov 2023 14:00:51 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=588992
Person sitting outside of a coffee house on a sunny day, drinking from a green cup and reading from an open MacBook.
Make sure you can get stuff done regardless of how much your local coffee shop wants you to talk to other people. Antoni Shkraba / Pexels

Share your connection with all your devices everywhere you go.

The post All the ways you can use your phone as a mobile hotspot appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Person sitting outside of a coffee house on a sunny day, drinking from a green cup and reading from an open MacBook.
Make sure you can get stuff done regardless of how much your local coffee shop wants you to talk to other people. Antoni Shkraba / Pexels

You only realize WiFi is not as ubiquitous as you thought it was when your boss wants to hop on a last-minute video call and the coffee shop you’re at has no guest network. That’s when you’d better know how to use your phone as a hotspot.

That type of urgent scenario is not the best moment to figure out how to connect your laptop or tablet to your mobile network, so you might as well learn now. That way, the next time you find yourself in a tricky situation, you’ll be ready to hop online. 

A quick note: some mobile plans do not support hotspotting, so even though your phone has the ability to share data, nothing will happen unless your mobile service provider allows it. So before you start trying to tether your device, confirm that your plan has a dedicated hotspot quota or that you are allowed to use your phone’s data on another device. 

How to use an iPhone as a hotspot

On iOS, you’ll find the hotspot menu by opening the Settings app, and tapping Personal Hotspot. If you’re using an older version of iOS, you may need to go to Settings > Cellular > Personal Hotspot. Enabling it is as easy as toggling on the switch next to Allow others to join, but don’t do that yet unless you know you’re alone.

[Related: The best mobile hotspots of 2023]

You don’t want just anybody to piggyback on your data plan, so make sure you set up a secure password before you create a hotspot. From the Personal Hotspot menu, tap Wi-Fi password and type in a safe one—think a semi-long combination of letters (upper- and lowercase), numbers, and special characters. 

Now that your hotspot is ready to go, choose how you want to connect. Apple’s mobile devices provide some options.

Connect to your iPhone hotspot using WiFi

This is the easiest way to use your personal hotspot, as it turns your iPhone into a router. Doing so allows you to connect your tablet or laptop to it as you would to any other WiFi network. You can also connect via USB or Bluetooth (those sections are below), but those methods are a little more complicated.

1. Make sure you’re ready to use your phone as a hotspot by toggling on the switch next to Allow others to join.

2. On your laptop or tablet (or whatever other device you want to use your mobile data), open the WiFi settings and search for a signal. 

You can do this on a Mac by clicking the WiFi icon in the top right corner of your screen. Your system will automatically detect nearby networks and list them for you. If you don’t see the name of your iPhone (that’s the name of your hotspot), click Other networks

On a PC, open the System Tray by clicking the three icons to the left of the clock in the bottom right corner of your screen. Make sure the WiFi icon is blue (that means it’s on), then click the arrow next to it to open your computer’s WiFi settings—you’ll see a list of the available networks containing your iPhone’s name. 

3. Regardless of the make of your device, once you find your iPhone on the list of WiFi networks, select it, type in the hotspot password, and you’ll be all set.

How to use your Android as a hotspot

Series of screens showing the menus for internet, networks, mobile hotspots on an Android phone.
Before you turn on your WiFi mobile hotspot make sure to protect it with a safe password. Android

Before you hook any device up to your Android phone’s mobile data, you’ll need to set up your personal hotspot. Swipe down with two fingers from the top of your screen to open the Quick Settings menu, then tap the cog icon in the bottom right corner of the screen to open Settings. Go to Network & internet, then Hotspot & tethering

Here you’ll find a toggle switch for every way to connect a device to your hotspot: Wi-Fi hotspot, Bluetooth tethering, USB tethering, and Ethernet tethering. The last two options will be blurred out unless your phone is already connected to a device via a USB or Ethernet cable. WiFi will likely be the easiest, but if you’re interested in trying something else, you can skip to the sections on USB tethering and Bluetooth tethering below.

Connect to your Android hotspot using WiFi

1. Tap Wi-Fi hotspot to set it up. Start by giving your hotspot a name—by default, it’ll be the name of your device, but you can change it to anything you want. 

Next, set up a Hotspot password to secure your connection and prevent strangers from draining your data plan. Make sure to choose a good one—a semi-long series of letters (upper- and lowercase), numbers, and special characters. 

You have two other options you can set up. Toggle on the switch next to Turn off hotspot automatically, and your Android phone will disable the feature whenever there are no devices connected to it. You can also tap the switch next to Extend compatibility, so your phone makes more of an effort to be discoverable to other devices. This will use up more battery power, so make sure to turn it off if you’re running out of juice. 

Once you’re done setting up your personal hotspot, hit the toggle switch next to Use Wi-Fi hotspot to turn it on. 

Screen showing macOS WiFi quick settings with a connection to a mobile hotspot.
Using your phone as a WiFi hotspot is the easiest way to share your mobile data. Apple

2. On your laptop or tablet (or whatever device you want to connect to your hotspot), open 

the WiFi settings. 

On a Mac, click the WiFi icon in the top right corner of your screen. Your system will find nearby networks automatically and list them for you. If you don’t see the name you gave your hotspot, click Other networks

If you’re using a PC, click the three icons to the left of the clock in the bottom right corner of your screen to open the System Tray panel. Make sure the WiFi icon is on (it should be blue), and open your computer’s WiFi settings by clicking the arrow next to it. There, you’ll see a list of available networks containing your hotspot’s name. 

Use your phone as a hotspot over a USB cable

You can connect your tablet or laptop to your phone’s hotspot via a USB cable, but it’s a lot easier with an Android. When it works, though, the connection between your phone and hotspot-using device is smooth as silk. 

Connect to your iPhone hotspot through a USB cable

There’s a catch here: You may only be able to easily do this between Apple products, so you might not be able to share your iPhone’s data with your PC or Chromebook, for example. 

1. On your iPhone, make sure your hotspot is active (from the Personal Hotspot menu, toggle on the switch next to Allow others to join) and connect your phone to your Mac using a USB cable. 

2. An alert will appear on your Mac—click Trust this device. You should see your iPhone appear as a drive on your computer’s Finder and you should be able to go online. 

If you’re not connected, go to your Mac’s System Settings and Network. You should see iPhone USB on the list of services—open it, click Make inactive, then Make active, and you should be good to go.

If you don’t see iPhone USB on the list, you’ll need to set it up as a new network. Scroll down all the way, click the three-dots dropdown menu, and choose Add service. Then follow Apple’s instructions to finish the setup.

Connect to your Android hotspot using a USB cable

Screen showing the connectivity icons on a Windows computer home screen.
When your computer is running on your phone’s data, you’ll see this icon change on the Windows task bar. Windows

Tethering your Mac or PC to your Android phone is surprisingly easy, and the connection is seamless. 

1. Connect your Android phone to your Mac or PC with a USB cable.


2. Go to the Hotspot & tethering menu (Settings > Network & internet > Hotspot & tethering) and toggle the switch next to USB tethering. The option will only be available if there’s a cable connecting your phone to another device. 

3. On a PC, Windows will offer to set up the connection between your phone and laptop, but you’ll realize you don’t have to do anything—as soon as you turn on the USB hotspot, your computer will connect to the internet. 

Screen showing macOS's network settings and a connection to a USB hotspot.
As soon as you turn on your phone’s USB hotspot, your Mac computer should be able to use your mobile data. Apple

Something similar happens on a Mac—when you connect your phone, macOS will ask if you trust it. Click Trust this device and you should automatically have an internet connection. If you don’t, go to Settings and Network, and under Other services find your phone’s name. Open the item and click the button Make Inactive, which will change to Make active. Click it again and you should be good to go. 

How to create a phone hotspot with Bluetooth

You can share your phone’s cellular data with another device over Bluetooth, but connectivity tends to be slower and more finicky than WiFi- or USB-driven hotspots. In fact, we had so much trouble getting this to work that it might only be useful as a last resort.

Connect to your iPhone hotspot using Bluetooth

For this, you’ll need to pair your phone to whatever device you want to connect to the internet—how you do that will depend on your device. 

1. On your iPhone, make sure your hotspot is on (from the Personal Hotspot menu, toggle on the switch next to Allow others to join).

2. If you’re connecting your Mac to your hotspot, go to System Settings and on the left sidebar go to Bluetooth. If you’ve ever connected your iPhone to your Mac via Bluetooth, you’ll see your phone’s name under My devices—just hover the mouse over its name and click on the Connect button that appears. If you’ve never connected your gadgets, you should find your phone’s name under Nearby devices—you may have to scroll down a bit to see it. Hover the mouse over your phone’s name, click Connect, and follow the instructions on screen. 

If you’re trying to tether your iPhone to a PC, open the System Tray by clicking on the three icons to the left of the clock in the bottom right corner of your screen. Make sure the Bluetooth icon is blue (that means it’s on) and click the arrow next to it to open your computer’s Bluetooth settings. If you’ve connected your iPhone to your PC in the past, you should find your phone’s name under Your devices, but if you haven’t, you’ll find it under New devices. Either way, just click on it and follow the instructions on screen to establish a connection. 

Once the devices are paired, you’ll need to connect to the internet on your laptop. It’s very different depending on the make of your computer, and it’s definitely not as intuitive as hopping on a WiFi network.  

On a Mac, click the Control Center icon (two toggle switches) in the upper right corner of your screen. From the emerging menu, click Bluetooth to see a list of connected devices. Find your phone and hover the mouse over it—click Connect to Network when the option appears. 

On a PC, open Settings and go to Network & Internet. Scroll all the way down and under Related settings, pick More network adapter options. On the emerging window, you should see an item called Bluetooth Network Connection—open it, find your phone, and right-click on it. On the menu, hover over Connect using and choose Access point to connect to the web.

Connect to your Android hotspot using Bluetooth

If your devices play nice with each other over Bluetooth, you can use your mobile data plan with your laptop. Just keep in mind that some Android phones, like the Pixel 7, may have trouble connecting to a Mac computer. If that’s the case for you, we suggest you save yourself some grief by choosing the easier WiFi approach. 

Screen showing Windows network settings.
Choosing your Bluetooth-paired device as your internet connection on your PC is anything but intuitive. Windows

1. Make sure your laptop is discoverable through Bluetooth. On a Mac, open the Control Center and ensure the Bluetooth icon is blue—if it’s not, click it to turn it on. On a PC, open the System Tray by clicking the icons to the left of the clock (bottom right corner of your screen) and make sure the Bluetooth icon is blue. If it’s not, click it to enable it.

2. On your phone, swipe down with one finger from the top of your phone screen to open the notification drawer, and on the tiles at the top of your screen, long-press on Bluetooth.

3. If you’ve tethered your phone and laptop before, find your laptop’s name under Saved devices, tap the cog icon next to it, and choose Connect on the next screen. If you’ve never paired your gadgets, choose Pair new device. Wait until your laptop appears in the list of discoverable nearby devices, and select it to start the pairing process. You’ll see prompts with five-digit codes on both screens—make sure they match and confirm the pairing. 

[Related: How to find free WiFi when you really need it]

Once the devices are paired, you’ll need to connect to the internet on your laptop. This will work differently depending on the make of your computer, and it won’t be as intuitive as hopping on a WiFi network.  

On a Mac, open the Control Center by clicking its icon (two sliders) in the upper right corner of your computer screen. On the emerging menu, click Bluetooth to see a list of connected devices. Find your phone and hover the mouse over it—click Connect to Network when the option appears. 

On a PC, open Settings and go to Network & Internet. Scroll all the way down and under Related settings, pick More network adapter options. On the emerging window, you should see an item called Bluetooth Network Connection—double-click to open it, find your phone, and right-click on it. On the menu, hover over Connect using and choose Access point.

The post All the ways you can use your phone as a mobile hotspot appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best jumper cables of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-jumper-cables/ Sat, 03 Sep 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=467189
Best jumper cables stock image header
Daniel @ bestjumpstarterreview.com/Unsplash

This simple tool can save the day when you find your car’s battery lets you down.

The post The best jumper cables of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best jumper cables stock image header
Daniel @ bestjumpstarterreview.com/Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall A pair of CARTMAN jumper cables on a blue and white background CARTMAN 4 Gauge 20 Feet Jumper Cables
SEE IT

The Goldilocks of specs and value, these provide enough for most without breaking the bank, and they’re rated for cold weather too.

Best Budget Energizer Jumper Cables Energizer Jumper Cables
SEE IT

Though you might be on a budget, you can still get enough length and thickness to make the task less miserable.

Best Heavy-Duty AUTOGEN Heavy Duty Jumper Cables AUTOGEN Heavy-Duty Jumper Cables
SEE IT

Dealing with big diesel engines and heavy equipment? These should handle all you can throw at them.

Jumper cables may be the perfect example of a tool that you’d want to have and not need rather than need and not have. Though most of us can often go years in between using them, jumper cables are an indisputably invaluable tool that uses the electrical energy from another car to jump-start a weak or completely flat battery in another vehicle. The telltale “click click click” of a starter is a sure sign you may need a “jump” to get going. Though some good samaritans might carry jumper cables, it’s usually easiest to carry a set yourself and not rely on chance when you may be stranded. This list of the best jumper cables will help you get the right tool for your specific needs.

How we chose the best jumper cables

I’ve used more than a few sets of jumper cables in my life, and one particular set quite a few times when I owned a Square Body Chevy. My personal affinity for older—arguably, poorly maintained—project cars has led me to have plenty of personal experience jumping different vehicles in a variety of parking locations. That being said, I’ve made selections that reflect a balance of my personal experience alongside products that have been favorably reviewed online. You want to buy as much length and cable size as your budget can afford, and these picks definitely reflect that mantra. Additionally, though spending a fortune isn’t necessary, you want to buy some that are rated for the kinds of conditions you may encounter, especially on the colder side, since cold weather often takes the highest toll on a car’s starting system. Each pick in this guide would be a good choice, but some—like the motorcycle options—are going to be best for a powersports application. These selections were made at the nexus of length and cable size, as well as construction and temperature ratings, which means they should serve you well no matter the type of weather you encounter.

The best jumper cables: Reviews & Recommendations

Best overall: CARTMAN 4 Gauge 20 Feet Jumper Cables

CARTMAN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: These versatile jumper cables are a wonderful intersection of value, just-right capacity, more than enough length for most situations, and are rated to -13°F.

Specs

  • Weight: 5 lbs
  • Length: 20 feet
  • Gauge: 4 gauge

Pros

  • Rated up to a 6.0L gas engine
  • Enough length means less vehicle maneuvering
  • Rated to remain flexible down to -13°F

Cons 

  • 4 gauge not suitable for biggest engines
  • Unique tooth shape might be challenging on some cars

These cables meet right at the intersection of value and capability. The 20-foot length means you can pull up alongside just about any other vehicle and not worry if you’ve got the cars positioned close enough. Sure, 8- to 10-foot-long cables take up less space, but it’s convenient to have more when these things happen. 

Next, that handy rating down to -13°F means these should remain flexible for any of the nasty inclement weather you encounter. I’ve worked outside in -20°F and, let me tell you, there are a lot of things that just aren’t “rated” for cold weather and it shows when you go to use them. 

The only downsides I can think of for this might be the fact that 4-gauge wiring just may not be heavy-duty enough for your application (see my heavy-duty choice instead) or that those unique teeth might actually hinder more than they help in some cases. The clamps have a unique design that combines a traditional jumper cable clamp with a slightly longer protruding portion. It looks like it’s perfect for the right vehicle, but the elongated section might just make it a bit harder to get a nice sturdy connection on some vehicles. Give ’em a dry run and practice hooking them up when the pressure is off.

Best heavy-duty: AUTOGEN Heavy-Duty Jumper Cables

AUTOGEN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Remember, lower is thicker when we’re talking about gauge, so these 25-foot-long 0-gauge jumper cables earned the top spot for heavy-duty applications.

Specs 

  • Weight: 12.6 lbs
  • Length: 25 feet
  • Gauge: 0 gauge

Pros

  • 0 gauge suitable for jumping RVs and big trucks
  • 25 feet enough length to make hookup a cinch
  • Cable and coating rated down to -40 F

Cons 

  • At 12.6 pounds, these aren’t small
  • That much copper isn’t cheap

Now, we’ve been through a good overall that will suit most drivers, but what about the guy—or gal—driving a big diesel and needing to jump-start heavy equipment from time to time? I bring you the AUTOGEN Heavy Duty 0-gauge jumper cables. These are the heaviest cables I could find outside of getting deep into triple-digit prices. 

The trouble when you’re working with big batteries, lots of amperage, and small cables is heat management. Or a lack of it. If you hook up a big battery that can push out a lot of amperage to smaller cables they could get hot. Really hot. And they can fail. The amount of power needed to turn an engine over and start it is tremendous, and even more so on larger and more powerful engines. If you’re driving or will be jump-starting a large RV or heavy equipment, 1- or 0-gauge cables are a smart choice.

The only con to heavy-duty cables is the corresponding weight increase. My budget pick weighs in at a paltry 2 pounds, while these heavy-duty jumper cables weigh in at more than 12.5 pounds! They’re bigger and longer than the others—and more expensive too—but when you’re dealing with heavy equipment, the tools do get bigger.

Best portable: Lifeline AAA Premium Road Kit

Lifeline

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: When you’re talking about portability, a carrying case is good, but having a few extra bits can make the difference when you really do need to use them for a jump.

Specs

  • Weight: 2.6 lbs
  • Length: 8 feet
  • Gauge: 8 gauge

Pros

  • Kit designed with emergencies in mind
  • Just enough length on the jumper cables to be useful
  • Extras that can help in an emergency

Cons 

  • With just 8-foot cables, your cars will have to be positioned perfectly
  • A 42-piece kit might be more than you’re looking for if you have the other 41 pieces already

For years the American Automobile Association (AAA) has been helping motorists with their maps, roadside assistance services, and curated emergency car kits. At least, that’s how it looks to me. I’ve used their towing services a few times and was a member for years, so when I came across their Premium Road Kit it seemed like the perfect way to take jumper cables and make them portable. Though jumper cables are generally a fairly lightweight tool, they aren’t always the easiest to leave in the corner of your trunk. The cables can become tangled and the alligator clamps can snag on other items, making them a bit of a nuisance. Though many come with a storage bag, something like this kit can really keep things neat and tidy until they’re needed. Just make sure to open it up and get familiar with the contents before it’s dark and rainy and you’re trying to find out which pocket the flashlight batteries got off to.

The only downsides to a 42-piece kit, especially when we’re talking just about jumper cables, are if you don’t happen to need the other 41 pieces. If you don’t, then you might be best served buying a small storage bag and a cheaper (longer) set of jumper cables and making your own portable bag. Though the 8-foot-long cables in this kit will get the job done for most small-to-midsize vehicles, you won’t have much extra room to work with, so vehicle positioning is key. 

Best for motorcycles: Yuasa Jumper Cables

Yuasa

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The idea behind these motorcycle jumper cables is simple: like motorcycle batteries, take what you know and make it smaller. 

Specs 

  • Weight: 1 lb
  • Length: 8 foot
  • Gauge: 8 gauge

Pros

  • Smaller clamps are perfect for fitting onto small battery terminals
  • Compact enough to stow in saddle bags or on bike

Cons 

  • Short length and smaller diameter not suitable for cars
  • Some reviewers didn’t get the storage bag

Though you can probably get by with automotive jumper cables to jump-start your motorcycle, there’s a good chance the big chunky clamps will be too big to fit in and connect to your bike’s battery for a jump start. That’s why Yuasa, among others, sells a compact set of jumper cables designed specifically for motorcycles. These cables are the perfect size to slip in and clamp onto a motorcycle’s battery terminal without coming loose. On most of the bikes that I’ve had the battery lived beneath the seat, and the terminals were so close to the sides of the battery box they would have been impossible to get a traditional automotive jumper cable onto. 

The only downside I noticed for these is that some of the reviewers didn’t get the storage bag that’s advertised with these jumper cables. Instead of a loose pair of cables getting hung up on all your stuff in your saddle bag a storage bag is really handy, so make sure yours comes with what’s advertised as well. 

Best budget: Energizer Jumper Cables

Energizer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Sometimes you’re on a budget, and that’s okay! What’s not okay, however, is having to compromise unnecessarily. These sell for less than $20, are long enough to do the job, and are thick enough for most cars and small SUVs.

Specs

  • Weight: 2 lbs
  • Length: 12 feet
  • Gauge: 10 gauge

Pros

  • 10 gauge should be enough for cars, small SUVs
  • Just enough length to not be a pain to hook up
  • Rated down to -40 F

Cons 

  • 10 gauge not suitable for larger vehicles
  • 12 feet may require some maneuvering to get hooked up

Sometimes it can be hard to justify spending $50 or more on something you might need, so you start looking cheaper. Honestly, a lot of the cables in this guide are less than $50, but they’re well worth the investment. The Energizer 12-foot 10-gauge jumper cables are about the smallest, and shortest, you’ll want to get, and they’re right in line with the price of even shorter cables. Now, they do offer these in different lengths and gauges, so if you’re looking for the absolute best deal you can get, make sure you size these (gauge/thickness) for your particular use. If you’re driving around an old Square Body Chevy truck like I was and needing a jump far too often, then 10 gauge is not going to be enough. But, if you drive a 10-year-old compact Honda or Toyota sedan, then these will stow nicely in the corner of the trunk for a day they’re needed. That, and the -40 F flexibility rating, are what cinched the recommendation from me since the AmazonBasics ones in this size/capacity did not carry that rating.

All that being said, 12 feet sure can feel pretty short if you find yourself parked head-first in a spot with no room to bring a car alongside you. For the majority of situations, it’s plenty, but if you know you have a problem and aren’t able to address it right away—hey, I’ve been there too—then park accordingly, with the engine bay toward the driving lane if possible.

Things to consider before buying jumper cables

Jumper cables have been around for years and, as such, the vast majority of them are incredibly simple devices. There have been some recent advances in the space in the form of jump packs, which are small battery packs—similar to the type you’d use to charge a phone that’s low on juice—that have a pair of the distinctive alligator clips hanging off the end to attach to your car’s charging system. Though you can get a simple set of jumper cables for around $15, getting a quality jump pack will often run you $100 or more. These devices truly do a good job but, for some, the cost can be hard to get over, so a traditional set of jumper cables will do just as well, just add another helpful driver.

Use caution

Remember when I said that jumper cables are simple devices? Well, unlike many of the systems that have been improved over time to be safer than ever, applying 12 volts of power directly into the engine bay of a car can be done incorrectly. Anyone who’s ever done the task can likely tell you about accidentally throwing a few sparks when they inadvertently touched the red clamp against a piece of bare metal in the engine bay, which completes the circuit and allows electricity to flow from the running vehicle through whatever it’s now touching. If this happens to be sensitive automotive electrical components, or if you wire the system up “backwards” with the positive and negative sides switched, some serious damage can happen. That being said, if done properly, jump-starting a car can be a drama-free experience that gets you on your way quickly and without too much fuss.

Shop for what you’ll encounter

When you start shopping for jumper cables you’re going to notice that there are lots of options, each with its own advantages. The only notable disadvantage is going to be cost and portability. Not everyone has enough room for 30 feet of 1-gauge jumper cables that’ll safely carry enough current to jump-start a big truck. Then again, the cheapest 10-foot jumper cables you can buy online may not be adequate if you drive a midsize SUV, or truck either. The other factor to consider is what sorts of weather the cables are rated to. Some of the picks are rated to remain flexible—and, thus, useful—down to -40 F, while others would freeze and possibly crack when unrolled after your car fails to start on an icy morning. This doesn’t necessarily mean one set is better than another—because many people will never encounter temperatures well below zero—but it just means that you should think about what you’re likely to encounter and buy accordingly.

Longer can be more convenient

When you get a set of jumper cables, the biggest two drivers of cost are the thickness of the cables themselves and their length. The lower the gauge, the thicker the cables are: the 1-gauge heavy-duty cables can handle enough current to jump-start a big truck, while an 8-gauge set might be smaller and easier to handle, it would only be best for jump-starting a compact car or small SUV. 

Jumper cables also come in a wide variety of lengths, from eight feet, all the way up to 30 feet and likely beyond. The longer ones take up more space, but if you find yourself with a shorter pair (like I have many times) then you often need to park both vehicles side-by-side with the batteries as close as possible together. A longer set means you could pull up behind a stranded vehicle without having to pull alongside, especially if the stranded car isn’t in the safest location.

FAQs

Q: What gauge is best for jumper cables?

The best gauge is going to depend on your use, not the vehicle jump-starting you. Though bigger trucks and SUVs have a more powerful battery and electrical system than a compact car, the smaller starter on a Honda Civic is going to pull far less energy than that found on a big diesel truck engine. That being said, aim for between 4 and 6 gauge for most uses, and 1 or 0 gauge for heavy-duty applications.

Q: What’s the difference between jumper cables and battery jump-starters?

Battery jump-starters offer a number of distinct benefits over the traditional jumper cable, though with some downsides too. On the positive side, it allows drivers to jump-start a car without needing to find another vehicle to supply the needed power. They also often double as flashlights and power banks for mobile devices, allowing you to top off your tech if you get stranded. On the flipside, the lithium-ion batteries in them heat up significantly when used and can only be cranked for several seconds before needing to cool off between uses. That, and they have a finite capacity and could run out of “juice” before you get your car going.

Q: What happens if I connect the cables incorrectly?

Bad things, most of the time. Though you might get lucky and just blow a few fuses, it’s possible the errant electrons could do irreversible damage to your car’s computer. Make sure you connect the positive cable on the working car to the positive terminal on the car with the dead battery, and that the cable hooked to the negative battery terminal likewise goes to a properly grounded place on the dead car.

Q: Can I jump my car battery without jumper cables?

Well, there are only a few ways around this: if you’ve planned ahead and spent the money on a battery jump starter, then you’re in luck! You can jump-start your car with one of those. Aside from these, there isn’t a safe way to jump-start a car without jumper cables. Call roadside assistance or a tow truck, or wait for another motorist to come by who happens to be carrying a set of jumper cables.

Q: Can I jump-start my electric vehicle?

In an electric vehicle, there are two battery systems: a high-voltage battery that provides the power to drive the car down the road, and a traditional 12-volt system that powers the accessories when you initially turn the vehicle on. The high-voltage battery cannot be jump-started: don’t try, you could be hurt or killed. The 12-volt battery, on the other hand, can be! The process is identical to a regular car, except that it can only be done to “jump” the EV, and should not be used to export power to another vehicle. They typically have a pair of posts you can hook the jumper cables up to, which can be found by looking through the owner’s manual.

Final thoughts on the best jumper cables

Jumper cables are one of those tools that you hope you’ll never need, but are invaluable when a problem does crop up. Batteries can, and do, fail, so it’s good insurance to get a set and keep them handy for the day they’re needed. Chances are, even if you never encounter an issue, you’ll be able to help someone else at work, or at home, when a dome light gets left on and your car battery is drained.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best jumper cables of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
6 ways to customize your Mac’s Menu Bar, and another to make it disappear https://www.popsci.com/diy/menu-bar-mac-settings/ Fri, 10 Nov 2023 20:06:51 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=588927
Person laying on a gray couch in a living room, working on a MacBook
Don't settle for the default look on macOS, when you can customize it as you like it. Vlada Karpovich / Pexels

You have more control over macOS's Menu Bar than you think.

The post 6 ways to customize your Mac’s Menu Bar, and another to make it disappear appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Person laying on a gray couch in a living room, working on a MacBook
Don't settle for the default look on macOS, when you can customize it as you like it. Vlada Karpovich / Pexels

The Mac menu bar is iconic. With the Apple logo in the top-left and the text menu for the current application to the right, this feature has been at the top of the screen of every Apple computer since 1981. The last big update came 10 years later when the Cupertino company added icons to the right side. The menu bar has more-or-less looked the same ever since. 

But just because Apple hasn’t really changed the menu bar in the last 40 years doesn’t mean you can’t change it now. There are all kinds of subtle ways you can take control of how the menu bar looks and functions, starting with the order of those icons in the top-right corner. Here’s how you can customize the Mac menu bar to work just the way you want. 

Organize your Icons

It’s definitely not obvious or intuitive, so it’s ok if you didn’t know that you can rearrange your menu bar icons: Just hold the Command key and drag your icons into whatever order you like. This works for every icon except three: the Control Center icon, Siri, and the clock. Those stay in the top-right corner no matter what, but everything else is fair game. 

Customize your system icons

Screen showing the System Settings
If your Mac computer is suffering from Menu Bar overpopulation, you can fix that over at System Settings. Apple

By default, the Mac includes icons for Siri, Wi-Fi, and your battery in the menu bar. If you’d rather not see those icons all the time, don’t worry: just head to System Settings. You can get there by opening the dock icon with the gears, or clicking the Apple logo in the top-right corner and then choosing System Settings in the emerging menu. Head to Control Center on the sidebar to configure which system icons you want to show up in the menu bar. This can be a quick way to remove clutter or add relevant information. 

[Related: 4 tips and hidden settings that will speed up macOS]

You can also customize the clock from here, allowing you to add the date, day of the week, and even the seconds. You could also replace the text showing the time with an icon of an old-school analogue clock, if you like. 

Screen showing the Menu Bar customization options in macOS
If you’re masochistic enough, you might like your system clock to also show you all the seconds that are going by while you’re trying to work. Apple

What you can’t tweak here is icons for your applications.

Stop the transparency

The menu bar, by default, is slightly transparent, allowing a little bit of your desktop wallpaper to bleed through. If you don’t like this effect (and the other transparency in the macOS operating system) head to System Settings, Accessibility, and click Display. Check Reduce transparency and your menu bar will be solid white in light mode and solid black in dark mode. 

You can also customize the size a little bit—beside Menu bar size check Large and the text in the menu bar will be a slightly bigger. 

Hidden Bar is a free application for hiding the clutter

Way too many applications insist on putting something up in the menu bar, so the top-right corner of your screen can quickly look cluttered. The worst part is that there’s no native way to hide icons in macOS the way you can in Windows, for example, where you can move them to a secondary tray. On the Mac, meanwhile, the only way to hide an icon for a given application is to dig around in the app settings and hope it offers a solution—it’s a hit or miss sort of situation.

Screen showing the option menu on the Hidden Bar app for macOS
If you’ve worked on a PC before, you know you can stash icons into a secondary tray. Hidden Bar for macOS gives you the same possibility. Apple

Fortunately, there’s a free application called Hidden Bar that brings this feature to the Mac. Download it from the App Store so you can hide icons by dragging them to the left while holding Command. You’ll be able to see all hidden icons by clicking the right-pointing arrow. 

It’s a very simple application that gets the job done. Why Apple hasn’t built something like this into the operating system, I will never understand. 

Bartender hides icons and changes how the menu bar looks

For many the free Hidden Bar will do the job, but Bartender ($16) offers customization options the former doesn’t have. 

Yes, you can hide icons by dragging them to the left, just like you can with Hidden Bar. But you can also create a custom rule for when to display certain icons. Want to see the battery icon, but only when you’re not plugged in? Bartender can do that, and also show you the Wi-Fi icon only when you’re not connected to a network.

Screen showing the customization options of the Bartender app for macOS
This bartender won’t come to serve you a cocktail, but it’ll help you customize your Mac’s menu bar exactly how you like it. Apple

You can also change the look of the menu bar with this application—apply a color tint or add a border. You can bring back the drop shadow that Apple recently removed, or even round the corners of the menu bar so it looks less like a block. 

[Related: Master your Mac by creating custom keyboard shortcuts]

Basically, if you want to tweak every aspect of how your menu bar works, Bartender is the application you’re looking for. 

Hide the menu bar altogether

System Settings options on macOS showing how to remove the menu bar
And if your Mac’s Menu Bar doesn’t cooperate, you can just hide it from view. Apple

Customizing the menu bar is all well and good, but what if you just wish it would go away? You can hide the menu bar in System Settings. Head to Control Center and scroll down to the bottom. In the dropdown menu next to Automatically hide and show the menu bar, select Always. From now on, the menu bar will only show up when you move your mouse to the top of the screen. The rest of the time, it’ll stay out of the way. This means you get a bit more screen real estate, allowing you to focus on the task at hand instead of whatever the icons the menu bar displays. 

The post 6 ways to customize your Mac’s Menu Bar, and another to make it disappear appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snow shovels for seniors in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-snow-shovels-for-seniors/ Sat, 24 Sep 2022 13:15:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=472327
Best Snow Shovels for Seniors
Mike Epstein

Nobody wants to shovel snow, but you do want access to your driveway so always be prepared.

The post The best snow shovels for seniors in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best Snow Shovels for Seniors
Mike Epstein

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall True Temper 18-inch Ergonomic Mountain Mover is the best overall snow shovel for seniors. True Temper 18-inch Ergonomic Mountain Mover
SEE IT

True Temper’s Mountain Mover features a wide blade, ergonomic handle, and a lightweight, durable blade.

Best with wheels Snowcaster 70SNC 36-inch Bi-Directional Wheeled Snow Shovel on a plain background Snowcaster 36-inch Wheeled Snow Shovel
SEE IT

A wide blade affixed to a pair of sturdy wheels make this handy tool a manual snow plow.

Best ergonomic Blue Snow Joe Shovelution shovel leaning against a house Snow Joe Shovelution Strain-Reducing Snow Shovel
SEE IT

With a spring-assisted handle, the Snow Joe Shovelution takes it easy on your back.

If you live in a region that gets any amount of snow in the winter, then you need a good snow shovel. While shoveling snow is hard work, particularly for senior citizens and people with chronic joint or muscle pain, it is the best (and most affordable) means of digging out after a snowstorm. Frankly, there are health risks associated with shoveling, and we’d advise older homeowners with underlying health concerns to hand the responsibility to someone else. If you have to, though, the best snow shovels for seniors will minimize the pain as you safely clear your walkways and driveways.

Before you buy: The health risks of shoveling snow

Shoveling snow is strenuous labor. If you aren’t regularly working out or at least working around the house, it should not be the one physically taxing chore you do every year. With poor form, poor fitness, or poor equipment, you can hurt your back and put yourself at an increased risk of a heart attack

In our guide to the best snow blowers for elderly people, we spoke to Dr. Claire Ankuda, assistant professor of Geriatrics and Palliative Medicine at the Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai hospital in New York, who warned that clearing snow is always risky for older people with physical limitations, and that same advice applies here.

Colder temperatures and the intense physical exertion of shoveling snow can push your cardiovascular system, specifically your heart, potentially leading to a cardiac event. It is even more dangerous if you have a pre-existing condition like coronary disease, according to the American Heart Association.

The cardiovascular demands of snow shoveling are akin to an intense workout. As you raise and lower your arms, your blood pressure will increase and put more strain on your heart. The cold air you inhale may also contribute to the problem by constricting blood vessels, including your coronary arteries.

We highly recommend that anyone with muscle, joint, or coronary health issues consider hiring professionals to clear the snow from their homes. If that isn’t an option, buy a snow blower and use it as much as possible before picking up a snow shovel. As any homeowner will tell you, though, a snow blower can’t clear every nook and cranny of your outdoor space, so using a shovel may be necessary from time to time. If you have to shovel, take precautions before stepping outside: Stretch before you begin to warm your body up and take frequent breaks.

How we chose the best snow shovel for seniors

I’ve been writing about gear for over a decade for sites like TechnoBuffalo, CNN Underscored, and Popular Science. During that time, I’ve covered everything from the best snow blowers to the best energy-efficient air conditioners. To put this guide together, I drew on PopSci’s past research and personal insight for recommending the best snow blowers for elderly people and the best snow shovels in general. I also considered recent reviews from experts and users to ensure our recommendations for what to keep in the storage shed are current as we get closer to the snow season.

The best snow shovels for seniors: Reviews & Recommendations

The snow shovel isn’t a complicated tool, but it’s worth buying the right one. Above all, keep safety in mind, and choose a shovel that will make things easier on your body. The best snow shovels for seniors come in a surprising variety of shapes and sizes, which we hope will help you have an easier winter season.

Best overall: True Temper 18-inch Ergonomic Mountain Mover

True Temper

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: True Temper’s Mountain Mover features a wide blade, an ergonomic handle, and a lightweight, durable blade.

Specs

  • Weight: 3 pounds
  • Type: Combo
  • Material: Plastic, metal
  • Handle length: 37.4 inches
  • Blade width: 18 inches

Pros

  • Comfortable design
  • Lightweight
  • Strong, wide blade

Cons 

  • We wish a second grip on the handle came standard

The True Temper 18-inch Ergonomic Mountain Mover features a durable design, a curved aluminum handle, and an 18-inch-wide plastic blade. It’s light for its size—just 3 pounds—and the wide combo-style blade makes it a versatile option for clearing small patios and long walkways. The oversized grip is big enough to accommodate hands wearing big winter gloves, and it works with a handle attachment, providing users with improved leverage when scooping snow. The blade even features a plastic wear strip, which will extend its lifespan and keep it from gouging your hardwood deck.

Best ergonomic: Snow Joe Shovelution Strain-Reducing Snow Shovel

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a spring-assisted handle, the Snow Joe Shovelution takes it easy on your back.

Specs

  • Weight: 3.3 pounds
  • Type: Combo
  • Material: Aluminum
  • Handle length: 50 inches
  • Blade width: 20 inches

Pros

  • Second handle
  • Combo blade
  • Lightweight and durable

Cons 

  • Metal wear strip isn’t suitable for wood or stone surfaces

The Snow Joe Shovelution is the most novel snow shovel we’ve seen in a long time. It’s a 20-inch combo-style shovel with a secondary “spring-assist” handle for your lead hand. This allows you to lift a shovel full of snow while only barely bending your back. When you pull the snow free, the bendable front handle snaps back to position, flinging the snow forward without any effort. The Shovelution is very lightweight and suited for tackling all kinds of jobs.

It isn’t perfect for every situation: The hard edge will scuff up wood and tile. The snow-flinging action forces you to pile snow in front of you, which may impact how you shovel. Still, the Snow Joe Shovelution is far and away the most interesting snow shovel we’ve looked at.

Best pusher: The Snowplow 36-inch Wide Model

The Snowplow

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Snowplow’s 36-inch blade makes it a breeze to uncover wide surfaces.

Specs

  • Weight: 5.84 pounds
  • Type: Pusher
  • Material: Plastic, fiberglass
  • Handle length: 47 inches
  • Blade width: 36 inches

Pros

  • Wide blade
  • Works well on various surfaces
  • Great for breaking up ice

Cons 

  • Expensive

The ultrawide Snowplow shovel is ideal for cutting paths in unpacked snowfall on sidewalks and driveways. It features a 36-inch plastic blade, allowing users to create a huge path in a single pass. It also features a sharp edge when flipped over that you can use to scrape and break up clumps of ice. 

It’s worth noting that you will need to assemble the Snowplow before using it, and some reviewers have noted the bolts on the shovel can come loose if not installed correctly. If you don’t mind doing a little prep, though, it can make clearing paths a whole lot easier.

Best with wheels: Snowcaster 70SNC 36-inch Bi-Directional Wheeled Snow Shovel

Snowcaster

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The snow pusher’s wide blade and contractor-grade construction make it ideal for clearing light to medium amounts of snow in a hurry.

Specs:

  • Weight: 11.21 pounds
  • Type: Pusher
  • Material: Plastic, steel
  • Handle length: 45 – 50 inches
  • Blade width: 36 inches

Pros

  • Heavy duty design
  • Large tires
  • Adjustable handle

Cons 

  • Expensive

If you’re willing to clear snow more regularly rather than letting it pile up, then a wheeled shovel may be a great option for you. This pusher boasts a blade that’s 36 inches wide. That’s considerably wider than a typical shovel. A pair of sturdy wheels on the back of the blade allow you to simply push it along a hard surface while it scrapes the snow off. The technique is nearly identical to how a snow plow would move. It’s not meant to clear feet of snow at a time, but if you’re clearing a couple of inches, it’s as simple as pushing it back and forth along the driveway. That saves you from having to lift the snow, which is how many injuries happen. The steel handle and thick plastic blade are built for contractor use. That gives it a relatively high price tag, but it also means it will last for years and years, even with heavy use. And even though it has a very wide blade, it’s still relatively light. At just over 11 pounds, it’s a solid pound lighter than most of its competition. That results in easier pushing and less grumbling when it’s time to go clear the driveway.

Best budget: True Temper 16-inch Poly Snow Shovel

True Temper

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: True Temper’s affordable snow shovel is simple but effective.

Specs

  • Weight: 2.14 pounds
  • Type: Combo
  • Material: Plastic, steel
  • Handle length: 36 inches
  • Blade width: 16 inches

Pros

  • Very affordable
  • Lightweight
  • Good for shoveling and pushing

Cons

  • Straight handle isn’t great for your back

True Temper, the company behind our top pick, also makes a basic but solid combo-style snow shovel. As the name suggests, this model features a 16-inch plastic blade suited for shoveling and pushing snow. The plastic blade won’t scratch your deck or patio, and its steel grip is made for gloved hands. This shovel’s best asset is its weight: At only 2.14 pounds, it’s easy to maneuver. This shovel is smaller than many of our other picks, and it lacks a curved handle, so it isn’t exactly ideal. That said, it’s close enough that we’d recommend it over picking up the first thing you can find at a store.

What to look for when picking the best snow shovels for seniors

A snow shovel should be light, durable, and offer an ergonomic design that puts less strain on your back. Everything from the material to the shape of the handle and the scoop will significantly impact the overall experience. You shouldn’t just grab the first one you can find at the hardware store the day before a blizzard. Take your time, and keep these things in mind while shopping for a new snow shovel.

Blade type

You’ll come across three main types of snow shovels, which are mostly designed by the shape of their blades, or the part you use for scooping, pushing, and lifting the snow. Some shovels are designed to lift snow, others to push it. Some aren’t actually designed for snow removal at all.

A corn scoop shovel, or grain shovel, features a straight handle and a flat blade in the shape of a spade. While they’re often heavy enough to cut through heavy, ice-covered snow, they’re rarely the best choice for shoveling. The flat, narrow blade can’t hold very much snow and isn’t designed for pushing it around.

A snow pusher shovel is, as the name implies, designed to push snow out of the way rather than scooping it up. The wide, curved blade is excellent for moving light, unpacked snow, especially from long walkways and driveways. A pusher blade takes less effort to use, especially in drier snow, but they’re not as easy to maneuver on narrow paths and stairs.

A combo shovel splits the difference between a corn scoop design and a pusher. They generally feature a bent or curved handle and a wide blade with a deep well that can scoop and push dense snow. Thanks to the ergonomic handle, you can scoop more snow without straining your back.

Realistically, we’d recommend anyone who gets snow multiple times a year have a combo shovel and a pusher. The combo shovel is the best universal option—it can handle all kinds of snow well. Depending on the layout of your home, you may be able to use a pusher to clear some pathways without lifting much snow, which is both easier and safer.

Handle design

The handle design of a snow shovel is also essential. Many basic shovels have a traditional, straight handle, which allows you to dig deep into a snowbank. But you don’t want a straight handle: It forces you to bend over more, putting strain on your back and making the act of shoveling harder.

Instead, look for a shovel with a curved handle. An ergonomic curve in the handle positions your leading hand higher, guiding you to better posture and less back pain. They’re just as stable and durable as any other shovel, so there’s no downside here.

Some snow shovels offer a more pronounced bend close to the blade, which does come with a tradeoff. The deep-bend handle makes things even easier on your back, but the more pronounced bend requires more effort for users to lift snow and toss it aside.

Materials

Manufacturers will make shovel blades from all kinds of materials, including plastic, steel, and aluminum. For the average homeowner, a lighter shovel is almost always better, so plastic is the way to go. It’s lightweight yet still offers excellent durability when scooping and pushing. Shovel blades made of steel or aluminum are better for breaking down icy snow, but they’re much heavier, so you’re more likely to hurt yourself. Metal shovels may also scratch or damage delicate surfaces like wood patios or stone tiles.

Extras

Most of us think of the snow shovel as a very simple piece of equipment, but there are some bells and whistles that you may find on a more expensive model. Some shovels feature a wear strip, which is a small plastic or metal strip that protects the end of the blade. If possible, we recommend looking for a plastic wear strip with a rounded edge. 

There are also useful third-party accessories: If you buy a shovel with a straight handle, you can get an attachable front-hand grip for about $10, which can improve your posture just like a curved handle.

FAQs

Q: How much do snow shovels cost?

Snow shovel prices vary depending on the blade type, materials, and additional features. That said, they aren’t especially expensive. Our best overall pick costs just under $30. Some more expensive options, like the Orientools Heavy Duty Rolling Snow Pusher costs as much as $70, while our budget pick costs only $12. Snow shovels are very durable, so all of them should last many years.

Q: Is a plastic or metal snow shovel better?

As we explained, plastic snow shovels are lighter, easier to use, and won’t damage delicate surfaces. That said, metal shovels can help you push deeper into frozen snowbanks, and break up solid ice. We recommend a plastic snow shovel for seniors with back, joint, or heart problems who should minimize their effort as much as possible.

Q: How can you keep snow from sticking to the snow shovel?

According to AccuWeather, coating your shovel blade in a lubricant like vegetable oil or cooking spray can keep snow from sticking to your shovel.

Q: How do you make snow shoveling easier?

Beyond buying the right snow shovel, we recommend making a plan before you start shoveling, so you spend less time working out in the cold. We also recommend stretching before shoveling: It won’t make the work “easier,” but you’re less likely to get hurt or feel aches and pains afterward. Lastly, if you’re using a shovel with a straight handle, consider buying a front handle attachment. Having a better, more ergonomic grip on your shovel will ease the strain on your back.

Q: Should you shovel while it is still snowing?

If you’re expecting a light snowfall, you might want to consider shoveling while it’s still coming down. It may sound counterintuitive, but the snow may freeze if you let it sit, especially if snow falls overnight. That said, shoveling multiple times per day may be too exhausting for some people. Use your best judgment and only shovel if you feel up to the task. In heavy snowstorms, it’s better to wait until the sky clears.

Q: At what age should you stop shoveling snow?

There’s no specific age for when you should stop shoveling snow. If you have chronic health conditions, particularly any issues with your heart, you should not shovel snow. Likewise, if you have muscle or joint pain, you should avoid shoveling snow. If you’re unsure, talk to your doctor before picking up your shovel.

Final thoughts on the best snow shovel for seniors

If you’re unsure if your body can handle the stress and strain of a hard workout, you should think twice about shoveling snow. For seniors with chronic health issues, it can be a serious health risk if you push yourself too hard. If you have the option, consider hiring someone to shovel for you. We know that’s not practical for everyone, though. If you have to do it yourself, buying one of the best snow shovels for seniors will make things at least a little bit easier on you.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow shovels for seniors in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to use Bard AI for Gmail, YouTube, Google Flights, and more https://www.popsci.com/diy/bard-extension-guide/ Thu, 09 Nov 2023 13:30:11 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=588290
A person holding a phone in a very dark room, with Google Bard on the screen, and the Google Bard logo illuminated in the background.
Bard can be inside your Google apps, if you let it. Mojahid Mottakin / Unsplash

You can use Google's AI assistant in other Google apps, as long as you're cool with it reading your email.

The post How to use Bard AI for Gmail, YouTube, Google Flights, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A person holding a phone in a very dark room, with Google Bard on the screen, and the Google Bard logo illuminated in the background.
Bard can be inside your Google apps, if you let it. Mojahid Mottakin / Unsplash

There’s a new feature in the Google Bard AI assistant: connections to your other Google apps, primarily Gmail and Google Drive, called Bard Extensions. It means you can use Bard to look up and analyze the information you have stored in documents and emails, as well as data aggregated from the web at large.

Bard can access other Google services besides Gmail and Google Drive as well, including YouTube, Google Maps, and Google Flights. However, this access doesn’t extend to personal data yet, so you can look up driving directions to a place on Google Maps, but not get routes to the last five restaurants you went to.

If that sets alarm bells ringing in your head, Google promises that your data is “not seen by human reviewers, used by Bard to show you ads, or used to train the Bard model,” and you can disconnect the app connections at any time. In terms of exactly what is shared between Bard and other apps, Google isn’t specific.

[Related: The best apps and gadgets for a Google-free life]

Should you decide you’re happy with that trade-off, you’ll be able to do much more with Bard, from looking up flight times to hunting down emails in your Gmail archive.

How to set up Bard Extensions, and what Google can learn about you

Google Bard extensions in a Chrome browser window.
You can enable Bard Extensions one by one. Screenshot: Google

If you decide you want to use Bard Extensions, open up Google Bard on the web, then click the new extensions icon in the top right corner (it looks like a jigsaw piece). The next screen shows all the currently available extensions—turn the toggle switches on for the ones you want to give Bard access to. To revoke access, turn the switches off.

Some prompts (asking about today’s weather, for instance) require access to your location. This is actually handled as a general Google search permission in your browser, and you can grant or revoke access in your privacy settings. In Chrome, though, you can open google.com, then click the site information button on the left end of the address bar (it looks like two small sliders—or a padlock if you haven’t updated your browser to Chrome 119).

From the popup dialog that appears, you can turn the Location toggle switch off. This means Google searches (for restaurants and bars, for example) won’t know where you are searching from, and nor will Bard.

Google Bard settings, showing how to delete your Bard history.
You can have Google automatically delete your Bard history, just like you can with other Google apps. Screenshot: Google

As with other Google products, you can see activity that’s been logged with Bard. To do so, head to your Bard activity page in a web browser to review and delete specific prompts that you’ve sent to the AI. Click Choose an auto-delete option, and you can have this data automatically wiped after three, 18, or 36 months. You can also stop Bard from logging data in the first place by clicking Turn off.

There’s more information on the Bard Privacy Help Hub. Note that by using Bard at all, you’re accepting that human reviewers may see and check some of your prompts, so Google can improve the response accuracy of its AI. The company specifically warns against putting confidential information into Bard, and any reviewed prompts won’t have your Google Account details (like your name) attached to them.

Prompts reviewed by humans can be retained by Google for up to three years, even if you delete your Bard activity. Even with Bard activity-logging turned off, conversations are kept in Bard’s memory banks for 72 hours, in case you want to add related questions.

Tips for using Bard Extensions

A browser window displaying a Google Bard prompt related to YouTube, and the AI assistant's response.
In some cases, Bard Extensions aren’t too different from regular searches. Screenshot: Google

Extensions are naturally integrated into Bard, and in a lot of cases, the AI bot will know which extension to look up. Ask about accommodation prices for the weekend, for example, and it’ll use Google Hotels. Whenever Bard calls upon an extension, you’ll see the extension’s name appear while the AI is working out the answer.

Sometimes, you need to be pretty specific. A prompt such as “what plans have I made over email with <contact name> about <event>?” will invoke a Gmail search, but only if you include the “over email” bit. At the end of the response, you’ll see the emails (or documents) that Bard has used to give you an answer. You can also ask Bard to use specific extensions by tagging them in your prompt with the @ symbol—so @Gmail or @Google Maps.

[Related: All the products Google has sent to the graveyard]

Bard can look up information from emails or documents, and can read inside PDFs in your Google Drive. For example, tell it to summarize the contents of the most recent PDF in your Google Drive, or the contents of recent emails from your kid’s school, and it will do just that. Again, the more specific you can be, the better.

A browser window showing a Google Bard prompt related to Gmail, and the AI bot's response.
Bard can analyze the tone of emails and documents. Screenshot: Google

In terms of YouTube, Google Maps, Google Flights, and Google Hotels, Bard works more like a regular search engine—though you can combine searches with other prompts. If you’re preparing a wedding speech, for example, you can ask Bard for an outline as well as some YouTube videos that will give you inspiration. If you’re heading off on a road trip, you could combine a prompt about ideas on what to pack with Google Maps driving directions.

We’ve found that some Bard Extensions answers are a bit hit or miss—but so are AI chatbots in general. At certain times, Bard will analyze the wrong emails or documents, or will miss information it should’ve found, so it’s not (yet) something you can fully rely on. In some situations, you’ll get better answers if you switch over to Google Drive or YouTube and run a normal search from there instead—file searches based on dates, for instance, or video searches limited to a certain channel.

At other times, Bard is surprisingly good at picking out information from stacks of messages or documents. You can ask Bard “what’s the most cheerful email I got yesterday?” for example, which is something you can’t do with a standard, or even an advanced Gmail search. It’s well worth trying Bard Extensions out, at least briefly, to see if they prove useful for the kinds of information retrieval you need.

The post How to use Bard AI for Gmail, YouTube, Google Flights, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to make the keyboard bigger on an iPhone, so you can finally see what you’re doing https://www.popsci.com/diy/how-to-make-keyboard-bigger-on-iphone/ Thu, 09 Nov 2023 10:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=587076
A young man wearing an orange plaid shirt focusing intently on an iPhone he's holding in front of him, as if he needs to make the keyboard bigger to see what he's typing.
For some, the default keyboard size on an iPhone may be too small, resulting in frequent typos and frustration. Depositphotos

Increasing the size of your iPhone keyboard is easy, but you can customize it further.

The post How to make the keyboard bigger on an iPhone, so you can finally see what you’re doing appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A young man wearing an orange plaid shirt focusing intently on an iPhone he's holding in front of him, as if he needs to make the keyboard bigger to see what he's typing.
For some, the default keyboard size on an iPhone may be too small, resulting in frequent typos and frustration. Depositphotos

Making the iPhone keyboard bigger is one of the easiest ways to make Apple’s phones easier to use. Doing so will allow you to see the keys more clearly, providing a more comfortable typing experience and reducing your chances of pressing the wrong characters. This is particularly helpful if you have larger fingers or visual impairments.

Follow along with our step-by-step instructions on how to enlarge the keyboard on your iPhone, and stick around for additional iPhone keyboard settings tips and tricks that should improve your ability to interact with your iOS device.

How to make the iPhone keyboard bigger, instantly

The bigger iPhone keyboard, or what happens when you put your phone in landscape mode.
If your phone isn’t locked to portrait mode and you turn it sideways, you’ll automatically make the iPhone keyboard bigger. Screenshot: Apple

The quickest way to get a larger iPhone keyboard is to rotate your device until it’s horizontal. This will automatically switch the screen orientation to landscape, providing a wider, more spacious keyboard for easier typing.

If the keyboard won’t turn sideways, your phone is locked in portrait orientation. To remedy this on an iPhone without a Home button, swipe down from the top right corner to open the Control Center. If you have a phone with a Home button, swipe up from the bottom edge of your screen to get to the same place. Then tap the Portrait Orientation Lock button (a padlock with an arrow around it) to ensure it’s off—it will display in red if on and locked.

The iPhone's Control Center, showing what it looks like when the portrait orientation lock is enabled and when it's disabled.
On the left, you can see that this phone is locked in portrait mode. On the right, the lock has been disabled. Screenshot: Apple

Set the keyboard to display only uppercase letters

The iPhone keyboard alternates between lowercase and uppercase letters depending on the shift setting, but the lowercase characters can be harder to see. To make each key easier to identify, you can tell your iPhone to always display uppercase keys, simulating a physical keyboard with all keys printed in capital letters. You will still be able to type in lowercase letters as long as shift or caps lock is off.

[Related: 24 iPhone settings that feel like secrets]

To see only uppercase letters, go to Settings, tap Accessibility, then Keyboards. Toggle off the switch next to Show Lowercase Keys, and you’ll make the keyboard letters bigger.

The iOS Settings app, showing how to make the letters on an iPhone keyboard permanently uppercase.
Follow the steps from left to right and you’ll be able to ban lowercase letters from your iPhone’s keyboard. Screenshot: Apple

Make your iPhone keyboard bold

A side-by-side comparison of the iOS Notes app, with the left-hand example being normal, and the right-hand example featuring bold font.
There’s a slight difference between default font (left) and bold font (right), but it may still make a difference for you. Screenshot: Apple

Bold type is easier to see, making text and letters stand out. To make your iPhone keyboard more bold, and therefore, bigger, go to the Settings app and select Display & Brightness. From there, tap Text Size and hit the toggle switch next to Bold Text. Now, the letters on your keyboard and the text you type and see on your phone will be bold.

The iOS Settings app, showing how to make text bold.
Some may consider this a bold decision, but we think it’s a wise one. Screenshot: Apple

Switch to Zoom view

The iPhone’s Zoom function will allow you to magnify the entire screen, making it easier to see and interact with the content. Just be warned: enabling Zoom will activate it immediately, and you may struggle to go back to normal. If you need to turn Zoom off, double-tap the screen with three fingers. Now that we’ve hopefully prevented a stressful situation, you can enable the feature: Go to the Settings app, select Accessibility, and turn on the toggle switch next to Zoom.

The iOS Settings app, showing how to activate Zoom.
Zoom will make things bigger, including your keyboard. Screenshot: Apple

From there, you will see instructions for controlling magnification with finger taps.

You can also adjust the Zoom level according to your preference:

  • Follow Focus: Stays focused on typed and selected text.
  • Smart Typing: Zooms into the text box to make it easier to see when typing.
  • Keyboard Shortcuts: If you’ve connected an external keyboard to your iPhone by enabling full keyboard access, this will let you use shortcuts on that keyboard to control Zoom.
  • Zoom Controller: Lets you slide your finger around the screen to choose what Zoom focuses on.
  • Zoom Region: Allows you to use Full Screen Zoom or Window Zoom (partial screen zoom).
  • Zoom Filter: Customizes the color of your screen when Zoom is enabled. Choose from: None, Inverted, Grayscale, Grayscale Inverted, or Low Light.
  • Maximum Zoom Level: Drag the slider to adjust the level of Zoom.

Use a third-party keyboard app

Maybe the iPhone keyboard just doesn’t cut it, and you’d prefer something else. Thankfully, customizing your iPhone by adding a third-party keyboard is simple. First, go to the App Store and search for one of the best keyboard apps. After you install the one you want, go to the iPhone’s Settings app, tap General, Keyboard, and hit Keyboards.

The iOS Settings app, showing how to access third-party keyboards.
Goodbye, default iPhone keyboard. Screenshot: Apple

Next, select Add New Keyboard. Find the third-party keyboard app on the list and tap on it to add it to your active keyboards. To use your new keyboard, open the app itself and make any modifications that will make the keyboard bigger.

The iOS Settings app, showing where to add a new keyboard to your iPhone.
Once you install the keyboard app you want, you’ll find it here. Screenshot: Apple

Boost your iPhone’s text size

A side-by-side comparison of the iOS Notes app, showing default text size on the left, and increased text size on the right.
You may find bigger text (right) easier to see than the default iPhone font (left). Screenshot: Apple

Increasing the size of the text on your iPhone’s screen can make it easier to see what you’re typing (and reading). To change your iPhone’s text size, go to the Settings app and select Display & Brightness. There, tap Text Size and adjust the slider to make the text larger.

The iOS Settings app, showing how to make the font size bigger.
You can also use the slider to make the text size smaller, if you have, like, super vision or something. Screenshot: Apple

This won’t change the size of the keyboard, but it’s still a useful tip if you’re struggling to see what’s written on your iPhone’s screen.

[Related: Best iPhone 14 cases]

Change your iPhone keyboard sensitivity

If you’re having trouble typing on your iPhone, you may want to consider adjusting the keyboard’s sensitivity. This will determine how your phone responds to how long you press and hold your finger on the screen. To find it, got to Settings > Accessibility > Touch, then tap Haptic Touch.

The post How to make the keyboard bigger on an iPhone, so you can finally see what you’re doing appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Android games for unlocking new worlds https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-android-games/ Thu, 09 Nov 2023 02:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586913
A man and a woman sitting next to each other playing games on their phones.
Whether you're playing with others or alone, these Android games provide plenty of challenge. Afif Ramdhasuma / Unsplash

Indulge in a little healthy competition with some of the best Android games.

The post The best Android games for unlocking new worlds appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A man and a woman sitting next to each other playing games on their phones.
Whether you're playing with others or alone, these Android games provide plenty of challenge. Afif Ramdhasuma / Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

With hundreds of thousands of Android games on the Google Play Store, it can be tricky to find ones that are suitable to play. Often, the games we see advertised the most for Android phones and tablets are also the most predatory. Avoiding games designed more to take our cash than to entertain us is difficult, but we can help by recommending five of the best Android games that break the mold and still provide plenty of fun.

 Super Auto Pets

An early-game fight showing mice, ducks, fish, and other creatures facing off in the Super Auto Pets Android game.
Assemble a team of cute creatures with super powers. Screenshot: Super Auto Pets

Super Auto Pets is an answer to auto-battling games like Hearthstone: Battlegrounds, Riot’s Team Fight Tactics, and Marvel Snap. The game has a clear monetization scheme and instantaneous unlocks, yet still holds onto the addictive gameplay loop the aforementioned auto-battlers have. But the obsession comes from fun and achievements, not grinding out currency and unlocks.

During gameplay, you’ll assemble a team of cute animals (including a dinosaur or two), feed them, and head off to battle. As the primary game mode is asynchronous, it’s a perfect game for busy adults. You won’t have to hurry through turns if you dip into play intermittently throughout the workday. If you have time, however, you can sit down for a ranked match, which plays like more typical multiplayer online games. What animals (and food) you play with are determined by sets, which can be purchased in full with a single direct purchase, no “gems” or other in-game currency required. The first set is free and you can eventually play with all animals for free via weekly random and/or curated sets.

Super Auto Pets is free, and you can buy additional packs in the app.

2. Vampire Survivors

One of the many level-up screens in the Vampire Survivors' journey, featuring the Magic Wand, Santa Water, and Knife options.
The interface may look dated, but this game is still engrossing. Screenshot: Vampire Survivors

Vampire Survivors became a cult classic on PC during the summer of 2023. With graphics that can be described as “1998 DOS freeware” and a user interface defined by only one word—chaotic—this is definitely a stylized game. The effect is outstanding, however, and a satisfying game loop quickly seals players within its grasp.

Each session starts with a character and a weapon or two, automatically flying about the screen. As your weapon hits enemies who increasingly crowd around you, numbers begin to fly everywhere, levels rise, and resources accumulate. Regular pauses in the action give you a chance to breathe and plot, while also giving you access to items that will improve your build. As time progresses, so does the intensity of the opposition, with the final bits of action proving the true power of your build and if you’re worthy of unlockables.

Vampire Survivors is free with in-app purchases.

3. Dominion

An early-game hand in the base game of Dominion, which displays playing cards for a militia, moneylender, artisan, and more, as well as a tally of your points.
Collect enough cards to create your own world. Screenshot: Dominion

Dominion is a classic board game. Now, it has a new Android app edition, suitable for both new and recurring players. Dominion is a deck-builder that emphasizes trade-offs and long-term planning. Each turn, you collect cards that either boost your score or your potential to grab even better cards later. Grabbing early-game, high-point cards while you can will always feel good, for example, but seeing those cards (dead weight in your hand) again and again throughout a match can feel exhausting.

As mentioned, this game originates from older source material. However, this digital rendition is a fairly new implementation of the game, and at the time of this writing, it remains in early access. As a result, if you’ve been put off by other mobile implementations of board and card games of this era, you should strongly consider coming back for Dominion to see if a new generation of graphics, UI innovations, and controls can get you in the game.

Dominion is free, and you can buy expansions in the app.

4. Peglin

A screen displaying a forest and points in the Android game Peglin.
Vanquish monsters and other enemies in this RPG. Screenshot: Peglin

Take PopCap’s Peggle, toss in a Slay the Spire overworld and character development system, and throw in some unique thematic arcs of its own and you have Peglin. Essentially, the game’s core loop is you—depicted as a green goblin with pointy ears—throwing rocks and orbs through a board to hit pegs. To oversimplify greatly, the more pegs you hit, the more damage you do to oncoming monsters. It’s a hit-or-be-hit world. After battles end, you get to add a new rock or orb to your backpack and, potentially, get the chance to attend an event or obtain a game-changing artifact.

While the opening act of the game, set in a forest, feels like Peggle with RPG mechanics on top, that feeling doesn’t last. By the time you’ve prevailed past a castle and into the void, gravity and gameplay will both be significantly different. Mastered all the areas? You’ll still have the “cruciball” challenge, which tilts the odds against you, and new characters to play with as well. Plus, the developerss keep updates coming, both improving upon the game and adding new orbs to fight with. Peglin is a fully-contained offline adventure.

Peglin is free with in-app purchases.

5. Shattered Pixel Dungeon

A gray dungeon depicted in the Android game Shattered Pixel Dungeon.
This dungeon-crawler is easy at first, but difficult to master. Screenshot: Shattered Pixel Dungeon

If you want a traditional, adventure roguelike Android game, then Shattered Pixel Dungeon is worth your time. Ditching awkward numpad controls and step-by-step movement, Shattered Pixel Dungeon takes you on a finger-accessible journey with mobile sensibilities. Collecting items, discovering the unknown, and bashing enemies with swords and spells are all still there in all their traditional roguelike glory for you, though.

[Related: The best Android apps for your Chromebook]

You may already be familiar with part of the title of the game, and that’s because it comes as a fork, or separate branch, of the open-source code of Pixel Dungeon. While other forks of this game exist, Shattered Pixel Dungeon is generally favored above others for its consistent development, plethora of extra items and entities, and nearly 10 years of independent history. If you like this game, other Pixel Dungeon variants may also be worth a spin.

Shattered Pixel Dungeon is free to play.

While these games are meant to be best enjoyed on an Android phone, the fun doesn’t have to stop there. If you’d like to get them on a bigger screen, check out our guide on how to use Android games on PC.

The post The best Android games for unlocking new worlds appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
12 hidden Android features you should be using https://www.popsci.com/hidden-android-tricks/ Fri, 15 Apr 2022 16:12:54 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/hidden-android-tricks/
A hand holding a Pixel phone with the home screen unlocked.
Supercharge your Android experience. Sebastian Bednarek / Unsplash

Be the master of your Google-powered device.

The post 12 hidden Android features you should be using appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A hand holding a Pixel phone with the home screen unlocked.
Supercharge your Android experience. Sebastian Bednarek / Unsplash

The Android versus iPhone debate continues to rumble on. But one thing is certain: Google’s phone software is still more versatile and customizable than Apple’s offering. Dig into the settings and discover Android’s secret capabilities, including a host of hidden features and useful tools. We’ve collected 12 of them here.

A quick note before we begin: Android has a wide variety of makes, models, and versions, which makes it difficult to find features that will be consistent across all devices. We only verified the following tips on stock Android 14—they should also work on related systems, but some of the menus and procedures may vary slightly.

1. Enable flash notifications for silent updates

The Android settings app, showing how to activate flash notifications.
No sound, only light. Screenshot: Google

Loud notifications are annoying, but have you ever heard a phone vibrating on a glass table? Somehow, it’s even worse. So whether you want to stay up to date with your texts in a quieter way or you’re hard of hearing, Android now allows you to set flash notifications, where your phone’s screen or built-in flash will blink to let you know there’s something new requiring your attention. 

To set it up, go to Settings, Accessibility, and Flash notifications. You’ll get two options: toggle the switch next to Camera flash to have the light on the back of your phone flash three times when you get a notification; or toggle the switch next Screen flash so that your device lets you know of any new messages by flashing a yellow overlay on your screen. You can enable either or both of them to get an even more effective visual alert. 

To see how they work, make your preferences and hit Preview

2. Run apps side-by-side

Android's split screen feature showing Spotify on the upper half of the screen and Twitter on the bottom half.
For those days when multitasking is a must. Screenshot: Google

This feature has been around since Android 7.0 Nougat, but it’s one of the few users tend to forget about. This side-by-side or top-and-bottom app view (depending on the orientation of your screen) comes in handy when you want to display photos, optimize your social networking, or multitask.

To set it up, make sure both apps you want to see are already open. Then, open the app carousel by doing a short swipe-up gesture from the bottom of your screen. Find the recent app you want to use and press on the circular icon at the top of its preview. On the emerging menu, you should see a Split top option. Keep in mind that not all apps support this feature (like Instagram, for example), so if you don’t see this option, it’s because you can’t use it like this. If you see it, tap Split top, and the app will automatically position itself at the top or left of your screen. On the other side, you’ll see the app carousel, from where you can open a second app. This time, just swipe your way to it and tap on the preview to open it.

You’ll notice a thick black line separating both apps—from the middle drag it up or down to re-distribute your screen. To exit Split Screen mode, just drag the black line all the way up or down.

3. Lock phone borrowers inside one app

Android's app carrousel with app pinning options open.
Make sure “I want to listen to a podcast” doesn’t turn into “Who’s that texting you?” Screenshot: Google

This is one of those Android tricks you need to know if you find yourself constantly lending your phone to a friend or young family member. Because if you do, you probably know that sudden anxiety that comes with the possibility of them going through your private information or posting to your social media accounts. 

App pinning lets you be generous without giving up your privacy and will lock one app to the screen until someone unlocks your device. Essentially, the user won’t be able to access any other parts of your phone without your credentials.

[Related: How to safely share your phone with others]

Screen pinning is easy to set up. Open Settings, go to the Security & privacy menu, scroll down to choose More security settings, and tap App pinning. Once you’ve turned on the feature, launch the app your friend needs to use and open the app carousel by making a short upward swipe from the bottom of the screen. Swipe your way to the app you want to pin and tap on the circular icon at the top of the preview. On the emerging menu, tap Pin. To unpin the app, swipe from the bottom of your screen and hold. This will lock your phone and you’ll have to enter your pattern, password, PIN, or biometrics to use it.

4. Activate one-handed mode

Android's messaging app with the one-handed keyboard activated
Don’t pull a muscle in your thumb—you can make your keyboard adapt to you. Screenshot: Google

As today’s phones continue to grow in size, they become harder and harder to operate one-handed. So Google’s custom keyboard, which is the default option on certain Android phones, has a solution: A special one-handed mode that you can switch to with a simple shortcut. If you own a Pixel phone, this keyboard will be your default typing option. If you’re on a Samsung or LG phone, you’ll have to first download Google’s version and set it as your default keyboard (as demonstrated in Tip 7).

Open up the keyboard as normal and tap and hold on the comma key. Drag up to the right-hand icon to enable one-handed mode. The arrow lets you switch this smaller keyboard from side to side, the bottom icon lets you reposition it, and the top icon restores the full-size keyboard. Other phone keyboards may also have one-handed modes, but they can be harder to access than Google’s. Try looking up your phone model and searching “one-handed keyboard” to learn more.

5. Customize your experience with regional preferences

The Android settings app, showing how to set your regional preferences for temperature and other aspects of your phone interface.
This post made by Celsius gang. Screenshot: Google

If you live in a foreign country either permanently or temporarily, you might find it frustrating that all apps and services are built to work according to that area’s specifications—metric units, calendar settings, etc. Some apps allow you to change these settings one by one, but that takes a while and you’ll have to do it all over again if you change phones, for example. 

This is why Android 14 debuted Regional preferences, a menu where you can change these settings at a system level so you don’t have to dive deep into each individual app. Find this feature by going to Settings, System, and then Languages. Once you’re there, open Regional preferences—you’ll be able to pick temperature units, number preferences, and the first day of the week. These changes will apply wherever possible within your device.

6. Choose new default apps

The Android menu showing how to set up new default apps
You don’t have to settle for the default. One of Android’s hidden features is the possibility to fully customize your experience. Screenshot: Google

One of the differences between Android and iOS is that Google’s mobile operating system lets you choose different default apps for web browsing, texting, viewing photos, etc. A default app is the one that opens automatically when you try to do something on your phone—so when you click a link, for example, your default web browser app will automatically open it.

Take advantage of this flexibility by setting up the defaults as you want them. Head to Settings, go to Apps and choose Default apps. Select any of the categories on screen to see a list of installed apps that can take over default duties. For example, if you’d prefer to chat with friends via Facebook Messenger, rather than your phone’s built-in SMS app, you can make Facebook’s product your default messaging app.

7. Cast your Android screen

Android's screen cast option
This native option lets you beam your phone’s content to a bigger screen. Beware of your notifications, though. Screenshot: Google

For a number of years, you’ve been able to broadcast your Android phone or tablet’s display to the larger screen of a television using a Chromecast. In addition to beaming video from all the usual movie and TV apps, this streaming device can mirror your phone. Take advantage of a shortcut in the Quick Settings pane especially made for this feature, which you can access by dragging down from the top of the screen with two fingers. You should find a Screen Cast option in this menu. If it doesn’t show up, swipe left on the Quick Settings menu for more options, or tap the pencil icon at the bottom to add the shortcut.

[Related: How to put video calls on your TV]

There’s also another way to set up mirroring. First, check to make sure you’ve installed the Google Home app for Android—you probably already used this program to set up your Chromecast. Open the app and choose your Chromecast and your device’s display should appear on the big screen. On your phone, tap Media and choose from Music, Video, Podcasts, or Radio and select a service to start streaming.

8. Make text and images more visible

Android's display and text size options.
Among the cool Android tricks you’ll find is being able to make everything bigger. Screenshot: Google

If you’re struggling to see what’s on the screen—or, alternatively, if you want to cram as much content as possible onto the display and don’t mind doing a bit of squinting along the way—you can zoom in or out on text and objects. Not all apps will respond to these adjustments, but most of them will.

To change size settings, open Settings and go to the Display heading. From there, tap the Display size and text and drag the slider under Font size to make text larger or smaller as needed. Android 13 introduced a new slider on this menu—Display size. You can play around with it to make icons and the Google search bar chunkier.

9. Disable the lock screen at home

The Android menu showing the on-body detection options.
Finally home, shoes off, phone unlocked. Screenshot: Google

To keep your device safe, you need to set up a PIN code or biometrics scan to unlock your phone. But this makes it more inconvenient to access your apps. Google’s Smart Lock feature lets you remove this obstacle, giving you instant access to your phone—but only when you’re safely at home.

From Settings, tap Security & privacy, go to More security settings and choose Smart Lock. As well as disabling the lock screen when you’re at home (that’s the Trusted Places option), you can also disable the screen when your phone’s Bluetooth is connected to a trusted device, such as your car stereo unit, or when it detects you have it on you.

10. Change volume settings independently

Android's menu showing independent volume sliders for phone calls, ringtones and notifications.
Don’t forget to set your alarm volume correctly so that you can actually hear it in the morning. Screenshot: Google

Your device plays several different types of audio—including ringtones, notifications, alarms, phone calls, and media. If you’ve ever gone to the Settings menu and opened Sound & vibration, you’ll have seen that you can use individual sliders to adjust these audio types individually.

However, Android gives you a quick-and-easy shortcut. Tap the physical volume buttons on the side of your device to make whatever’s currently playing quieter or louder (if no media is playing, this action will adjust your ringtone volume). When you do, a small box will pop up on the screen, showing which volume setting is changing and how. At the bottom of that box, you should see three dots. Tap them, and the box will expand to show multiple volume sliders at once. This can save you a trip to Settings.

11. Bring back lost notifications

The Android menu to install a settings widget
Once you drag the icon, you’ll instantly see a confusing menu that will make you think something went wrong. Fret not—choose Notification log and you’re set. Screenshot: Google

So you accidentally swiped away one of the notifications that you wanted to read fully and now you have a nagging sense someone emailed you, but are not sure. It happens. If you want to review all of your recent notifications on Android, you’re in luck. This ability is possible—though the option isn’t easy to find.

[Related: Switching from iPhone to Android has never been easier]

Tap and hold on an empty part of the home screen, and a screen-adjusting mode will pop up. Choose Widgets, and find the Settings shortcut. Drag this icon to an empty space on one of your home screens, drop it in place, and a list will automatically pop up. Choose Notification log from the list and tap the icon to open up Android’s notification history.

12. Get an always-handy magnifying glass

The Android settings app, showing how the magnification tool works and how to enable it.
Zooooooooooooooooooooom. Screenshot: Google

Other than changing display options and making icons and text bigger, Android 14 introduced a new feature that lets you magnify specific parts of your screen. To enable it, go to Settings, Accessibility, and Magnification. Start by toggling on the switch next to Magnification shortcut, which will introduce a red magnifying glass button to the right of your screen.

Whenever you need a little help looking at text, pictures, or animations, you can summon the Magnification tool by tapping the red icon. An orange frame will appear on screen, zooming into the display portion underneath it (just like a magnifying glass), and you’ll be able to move it wherever you need it. If the default zoom is not enough, use your thumb and index fingers to expand the view even more. Tap the red icon again to disable the tool.  

This story has been updated. It was first published in 2017.

The post 12 hidden Android features you should be using appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Turn your iPhone into a bedside clock with StandBy mode https://www.popsci.com/technology/standby-mode-ios/ Tue, 07 Nov 2023 16:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=587092
A sunny wooden desk where an iPhone is propped up and showing StandBy Mode on screen.
StandBy mode makes use of your favorite iPhone widget. Apple

Don't waste your time waking up your phone to check the weather, time or your schedule.

The post Turn your iPhone into a bedside clock with StandBy mode appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A sunny wooden desk where an iPhone is propped up and showing StandBy Mode on screen.
StandBy mode makes use of your favorite iPhone widget. Apple

One of the new iPhone functionalities ushered in with the arrival of iOS 17—like offline Apple Maps support—is StandBy mode. This feature turns your iPhone into a small smart display that will show you everything from calendar appointments to your favorite photo albums.

Perhaps the obvious use of StandBy mode is to turn an iPhone into a bedside clock, displaying the current time and even dimming the display once the lights go out. But there are plenty of other ways to use it.

StandBy mode is available on iPhones running iOS 17—that’s the iPhone XR, iPhone XS, and iPhone XS Max launched in 2018, and every handset that’s appeared since.

If you have a Pro or Pro Max version of the iPhone 14 or 15, your device can display StandBy permanently on screen. On other models, you’ll need to wake the display to see it: You can do this by tapping the display or waving your hand in front of it.

How StandBy mode works

Screen showing the StandBy mode menu on iOS 17
You can enable or disable StandBy from the iOS Settings menu. Apple

You can enable StandBy mode by going to StandBy on the Settings screen and turning on the StandBy toggle switch. If you’re using an iPhone with an always-on display, use the Always On toggle switch to determine whether StandBy mode stays permanently on the screen.

[Related: 6 great features to try out on iOS 17]

To have StandBy mode activate automatically, charge your iPhone and prop it up on its side and at an angle (so not flat on a surface). Once your device meets all of these conditions, StandBy mode turns on—the first time that happens you’ll see a message explaining what StandBy mode is. By default, you’ll see clock and calendar widgets appear first. To quit StandBy mode, simply pick up your phone, lay it down flat, or remove it from the charger.

The feature works with both wired and wireless charging, but MagSafe chargers have a bonus functionality: StandBy mode remembers how you’ve configured it on each separate charger, so you can have different setups for different rooms (the bedroom and the kitchen, for example).

Customizing StandBy mode

Swiping left or right on the StandBy mode screen cycles through the different views available to you. There’s a widgets screen, a photos screen, and a clock screen, and on each one you can swipe up and down for different configurations.

On the widgets screen, the display is split in two so you can swipe up and down on them separately to scroll through the available widgets. You can pick from the weather forecast, your upcoming calendar appointments, and any active reminders.

Screen showing the options menu of the widget screen of the iPhone's StandBy Mode.
As on the home screen, you get a choice of widgets to pick from. Apple

Long press on the widgets screen to remove add-ons from the list (via the minus button) or add new ones (via the plus button). The widgets you see will depend on the apps installed on your phone, but there are a bunch of native ones built into iOS to get you started.

Other than the widgets available to you, you’ll see other options similar to the ones you have for widgets on the home screen. Smart Rotate will intelligently change the available widgets based on the time of day and your usual habits, and Widget Suggestions will add in widgets based on the apps you already use a lot.

A long press also unlocks options on the photos screen, allowing you to choose a particular album in your gallery that’s different to the images StandBy mode chose for you.

A long press on the clock screen brings up the available options of that particular view, but as of yet, there’s no option to add a new clock face.

Screen displaying the night mode options menu for the iPhone's StandBy mode.
Night Mode adapts the display in low light so your device won’t blind you or wake you up. Apple

Back on the StandBy screen in iOS Settings, you can customize the StandBy feature in a few more ways. The Show Notifications toggle switch determines whether incoming notifications appear in StandBy mode—enable the Show Preview on Tap Only option underneath if you’d rather not have previews (like the first lines of messages) appear on screen.

[Related: Hand gesture reactions are one of macOS Sonoma’s coolest new features]

You can also tap Night Mode and enable the Night Mode toggle switch. This feature dims the display and turns everything on it red whenever your iPhone detects it’s in a dark environment. That way, StandBy doesn’t stop you from getting to sleep. The same screen has a Motion To Wake toggle switch: Keep it on if you want to be able to wake the screen with a wave, or turn it off if you find your nightly tossing and turning is constantly lighting up the display while you’re in bed.

The post Turn your iPhone into a bedside clock with StandBy mode appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best resin 3D printers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-resin-3d-printers/ Tue, 30 Aug 2022 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=465854
the best resin 3D printers composited
Stan Horaczek

Build the Warhammer army of your dreams with these 3D printers.

The post The best resin 3D printers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
the best resin 3D printers composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall ANYCUBIC Photon Mono X resin 3D printer product image ANYCUBIC Photon Mono X
SEE IT

The Mono X’s feature set is a cut above the usual suspects in the 3D printer game, especially in the build volume department.

Best for beginners Elegoo Mars 3 resin 3D printer product image Elegoo Mars 3
SEE IT

Due to its popularity, the Mars 3 has an absolutely ridiculous number of tutorials on Reddit and YouTube, and that’s what gives it a slight edge in the “beginner-friendly” department.

Best budget Creality Halot One resin 3D printer product image Creality Halot-One
SEE IT

A robust feature set makes this printer perfect for fresh hobbyists or beginners looking to cut their teeth in the 3D printing game.

From role-playing game miniatures to tool prototypes, resin 3D printers have changed the nature of many time-intensive hobbies. While they have a (somewhat unfair) reputation for being unwieldy and expensive, resin printers in recent years have become smaller, cheaper, and surprisingly easy to use. Whether you’re a Warhammer fiend who wants a top-of-the-line machine to print an entire opposing army or just a casual Dungeons & Dragons player who wants to dip your toe into the hobby, there’s a model that will work for you. Still, it’s best to familiarize yourself with the options before you commit to anything, as there’s a lot to learn on the hunt for the best resin 3D printer.

How we picked the best resin 3D printers

As a tech journalist with almost a decade of experience, I know how to determine which products are best for every level of consumer, from entry-level to industrial. I’m also a longtime RPG enthusiast and game-master with my own collection of tokens, so I know what discerning fans are looking for in their 3D printers. In putting together these recommendations, we consulted personal testimonials, consumer reviews, and tests conducted by top-quality professionals to determine which resin 3D printer is right for you, regardless of your priorities.

The best resin 3D printers: Reviews & Recommendations

Ultimately, it’s up to you to determine which of the above features is more important to you. The following resin 3D printers each excel in one area or another, often in multiple. Regardless of whether or not you plan to go all out for an industrial-grade solution or save a bundle in order to try crafting for yourself, one of these resin printers will probably suit your needs. (And, to make sure you consider all your options, you can check out our guides to filament-based 3D printers, as well.)

Best overall: ANYCUBIC Photon Mono X

ANYCUBIC

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The ANYCUBIC Photon Mono X offers the best vital features per cost of any consumer-grade resin 3D printer out there.

Specs

  • Build volume: 192mm x 120mm x 250mm
  • Resolution: 3840×2400 (4K)
  • Printing speed: 60mm/h
  • Printing accuracy: .01mm
  • XY axis resolution: .05mm
  • LCD: 6.23 inch Mono
  • MSRP: $480

Pros

  • Premium feature set
  • Reasonable price
  • Very fast

Cons

  • Not as easy to use as entry-level models

If you’re looking for the best overall bang for your buck in the resin 3D printer space, the ANYCUBIC Photon Mono X is your ticket. Though it’s technically the big brother of true entry-level machines like the Elegoo Mars 3—more on that later—ANYCUBIC is an extremely well-known manufacturer in the space, and there are plenty of online tutorials on how to use its devices on enthusiast forums like Reddit. 

The Mono X’s feature set is a cut above the usual suspects in the 3D printer game, especially in the build volume department. At 7.5 inches by 4.7 inches by 9.8 inches, the Mono X’s build area is more than big enough for any miniature you’re likely to want to build, except maybe Cthulhu. It also offers fast speeds, 4K resolution, and better Z-axis support than similar models.

Its price may be several hundred dollars more than other options, but in our opinion, the difference is more than worth it.

Best for miniatures: ANYCUBIC Photon Mono 4K

ANYCUBIC

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The ANYCUBIC Photon Mono 4K excels at creating standard miniatures quickly and easily, and it’s not hard to master.

Specs

  • Build volume: 132mm x 80mm x 165mm
  • Resolution: 3840×2400 (4K)
  • Printing speed: 50mm/h
  • Printing accuracy: .01mm
  • XY Axis Resolution: .035mm
  • LCD: 6.23 inch Mono
  • MSRP: $250

Pros

  • Extremely competitive price
  • Fast, easy-to-use
  • Rich online community

Cons

  • Standard build volume
  • Touch screen issues

It might be smaller than its big brother, the Mono X, but it still packs a punch. The Mono 4K is the latest model of the ANYCUBIC Photon, one of the original resin 3D printers. Though it’s solidly in the entry-level price of $250 to $300, the Mono 4K is extremely similar to the X in terms of feature set. 

The 4K’s great resolution and standard build volume make it a very good option for users who want to make a large number of standard miniatures without much fuss. It’s quite easy to set up even for newbies, and its compact size means that it can sit on a small end table without calling a lot of attention to itself. At 50mm an hour max speed, the 4K will spit out miniatures very quickly once you get it set up, which is quite easy thanks to its online popularity.

If you’re an average user who wants to build an army of detailed orcs as fast as possible without breaking the bank, the Mono 4K is a great option.

Best for beginners: Elegoo Mars 3

Elegoo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Arguably the most famous resin 3D printer out there, the Elegoo Mars 3 is a great option for both beginners and experts alike.

Specs

  • Build volume: 143mm x 89mm x 175mm
  • Resolution: 4098×2560 (4K)
  • Printing speed: 50mm/h
  • Printing accuracy: .01mm
  • XY axis resolution: .035mm
  • LCD: 6.66 inch Mono
  • MSRP: $380

Pros

  • Very popular and intuitive
  • Good resolution
  • Slightly larger build volume

Cons

  • Somewhat expensive for what it is

As the follow-up to arguably the most popular resin printer of the last few years, the Mars 2, the Mars 3 has big shoes to fill. In fact, if you search “resin 3D printer” on any search engine, the Mars 3 will probably be the first one to show up. Overall, the Mars 3 lives up to its reputation as the easiest resin printer to use out there, and it offers a robust feature set, too.

The Mars 3’s specs are a little bit better than its main competitor, the Mono 4K, in almost every meaningful category, especially its build volume. However, reviews suggest that it’s not quite as fast as the Mono 4K over time. However, due to its popularity, you can find an absolutely ridiculous number of tutorials on Reddit and YouTube on how to use the Mars 3, and that’s what gives it a slight edge in the “beginner-friendly” department.

Overall, the Mars 3 is comparable in price to more premium resin 3D printers, but its ease of use and reputation make it a great 3D printer for beginners, especially if you’re intimidated by the hobby as a whole.

Best high-end: Original Prusa SL1S Speed Bundle

Prusa

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Prusa SL1S Speed might be expensive, but it’s the choice for resin-crafters who want to turn their hobby into a serious side hustle.

Specs

  • Build volume: 127mm x 80mm x 150mm
  • Resolution: 2560×1620 (2K)
  • Printing speed: 1.3 to 2.4 seconds per layer
  • Printing accuracy: .01mm
  • XY axis resolution: .049mm
  • LCD: 5.96 inch Mono
  • MSRP: $2,000

Pros

  • Extremely fast
  • Truly professional-grade
  • Supports easy post-processing

Cons

  • Very expensive
  • Some dated features

In the world of resin 3D printing, there are hobbyists, and there are small businesses. If you’re looking to make a serious buck selling your miniatures or other products on a storefront like Etsy—and you already have some experience with resin printing—the Prusa S1LS Speed is a strong option. Thanks to its vat tilting support and ultra-fast scanning speed, the Prusa is suitable for both precise industrial work (such as dental molds) and cranking out miniatures as fast as possible. Testing suggests it’s nearly double the speed of the Mars 3, for example.

However, you get what you pay for. At $2,000, the SL1S Speed is about eight times more expensive than an entry-level resin printer like the Mars 3. While that is certainly quite a pill to swallow, this is a “prosumer” model that’s intended to compete with industrial scanners in the $5k to $6k range. (You can even get it bundled with the CW1S, a curing and washing machine that makes post-processing much more efficient.) For a $2,000 machine, you could certainly argue that the SL1S’s lack of 4K support and small build volume are major stumbling blocks, but many small businesses aren’t going to miss those features compared to the volume it can spit out.

If you’re in the market for a high-end resin printer, the SL1S Speed is a great option. It’s definitely not suitable for your average consumer, however.

Best for large prints: ANYCUBIC Photon M3 Max

ANYCUBIC

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The ANYCUBIC Photon M3 Max is a high-end resin 3D printer that supports massive builds at a fairly reasonable price.

Specs

  • Build volume: 300mm x 298mm x 164mm
  • Resolution: 6480×3600 (6K)
  • Printing speed: 60mm/hr
  • Printing accuracy: .01mm
  • XY axis resolution: .040mm
  • LCD: 13.6 inch Mono
  • MSRP: $1,300

Pros

  • Incredible build volume
  • Very high resolution
  • Massive screen

Cons

  • Large and unwieldy
  • Expensive

If “bigger is better” is your favorite mantra, the Photon M3 Max might be the resin 3D printer for you. Boasting a ridiculous foot-tall build volume and better than 6K resolution, this is a machine that can print a heck of a final boss for your D&D campaign. It’s also surprisingly speedy for its size, posting significantly better build times than smaller alternatives like the Mars 3 and the Photon 4K Mono.

However, its size has some downsides. The Photon M3 Max weighs more than 57 pounds, it has a much larger footprint than entry-level models, and its ultra-large builds are going to cost you a small fortune in resin. Also, its rated power of 120 watts is almost double that of smaller models, so watch that electricity bill. Its price point of $1,300 is definitely a step up from other printers, but considering everything it brings to the table, it’s fairly reasonable.

Overall, the Photon M3 Max is a serious machine for serious hobbyists and you probably already know if it’s the right resin 3D printer for you. If you’re in the market for a more newbie-friendly machine, you should look to its smaller cousins.

Best budget: Creality HALOT-ONE

Creality

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Creality HALOT-ONE is the perfect starter machine for price-conscious customers who want to try out a new hobby.

Specs

  • Build volume: 130mm x 82mm x 160mm
  • Resolution: 2560×1620 (2K)
  • Printing speed: 1-4 seconds per layer
  • Printing accuracy: .01mm
  • XY axis resolution: .050mm
  • LCD: 5-inch Mono
  • MSRP: $200

Pros

  • Ultra-low price
  • Decent specs

Cons

  • Can get better features for $100+ more

When you consider that even the cheapest 3D printers cost $400 to $500 only a few years ago, the $200 price tag of the Creality HALOT-ONE is pretty staggering to consider. But while it’s definitely a budget model, the HALOT-ONE has a robust feature set that’s perfect for fresh hobbyists or beginners looking to cut their teeth in the 3D printing game. Its 2K resolution is more than enough for most projects, and its standard build volume can fit a standard miniature. It’s not the biggest or the fastest, but for many users, the price probably matters more.

The main argument against the HALOT-ONE is that you can get 4K resolution and significantly faster speed from a Mars 3 or Mono 4K for around $100 to $150 more. However, that might be the difference in purchasing a resin printer or not if you’re on a tight budget, so it’s ultimately up to you to decide whether those features are worth it to you.

The HALOT-ONE is a nice little machine, and its price can’t be beaten. For many budding hobbyists, it’s a great place to start.

Things to consider before buying the best resin 3D printers

Buying a 3D printer can be pretty intimidating, especially if you don’t know much about the hobby. The best resin 3D printers cost anywhere from $200 to $2,000, so one is not a casual pickup. Before making your purchase, you’ll need to consider what exactly you want to use it for, as that will have a big impact on what printer you choose. For example, if you’re planning on creating intricate and/or oversized pieces for cosplay or substantial figures for RPG campaigns, you will need a printer with a larger build volume. You’ll also need to decide what level of detail you need from the printer, as that has a big impact on its cost. While a 4K capable printer is fairly affordable these days, 6K will raise the price substantially.

Regardless of what printer you ultimately buy, you’ll need to determine how comfortable you are working with resin, as you’ll need special tools and gear (such as a UV light and nitrate gloves) as part of your production process. If you’re willing to shell out, you can buy a washing-and-curing machine, like the Elegoo Mercury, in order to save yourself some legwork. Finally, you’ll need to reckon with the fact that resin itself is much more expensive than the alternatives, such as filament. However, the final product is more than worth it.

Size matters

Build volume is a measure of how large a product a resin 3D printer can produce. For example, a common build volume is about 5.5 inches by 3.5 inches by 7 inches, which is well within the typical range of a Dungeons & Dragons miniature. If you’re looking to make something bigger than that, you will need to purchase a printer with a large (or even extra-large) build volume. Generally speaking, printers with large build volumes require a bit more fiddling (and can be more prone to user error) than their standard-volume equivalents, but you can learn the ropes with a bit of effort.

4K, 6K, or 8K, oh my

The resolution of the 3D printer’s LCD will determine the level of detail it can inscribe on your beautiful miniatures. A 4K printer is considered the standard these days for all but ultra-budget models, and it’s more than sufficient for most projects. Still, if you want those details to really sing, you may want to consider a 6K (or even 8K!) option.

Mono is better than RGB

Yes, it may seem counterintuitive, but a 3D printer with monochrome LCD masking is better than one with RGB (or color) LCD masking. Monos are better at letting the UV light pass through than their colored alternatives, which means that each layer is scanned that much faster. RGB 3D printers are cheaper than monos, but even mono printers are fairly affordable these days. As such, unless your budget is extremely constrained, we recommend you get a mono, as they’re between 3-5x faster on average.

FAQs

Q: What’s the highest resolution resin 3D printer?

The current highest-resolution resin printer on the market is the Phrozen Sonic Mini 8K and the Mighty 8K. However, while they have great resolution, both of these printers have significantly worse consumer reviews than the above picks, which is why they did not make the cut.

Q: Can you reuse resin from failed prints?

Unfortunately, no, you can’t. Once the resin has been hardened, it will remain hard forever. You cannot melt it down and reuse it like you can with a filament 3D printer.

Q: Is resin printing toxic?

While resin printers are perfectly safe to use, you must use caution, especially when you’re first starting with the hobby. Yes, untreated resin is toxic to the touch—you must use nitrate gloves while handling it. You should also wear safety glasses or goggles when working with the machine to avoid eye damage from splashing.

Q: How long can a resin print sit before cleaning it?

Provided that it’s kept away from UV light—and from any action that might break it, such as a pet—a resin print can sit for as long as you need before curing or cleaning it. However, you should not get in the habit of leaving them lying around, as they can easily break.

Q: Are resin prints stronger than PLA?

No, resin prints are more brittle and breakable than their filament counterparts. However, resin as a material allows for far more detail than filament, so it’s a better choice for RPG miniatures and the like.

Final thoughts on the best resin 3D printers

3D printing is one of the fastest-growing hobbies out there and, while there’s certainly a learning curve, it won’t take you long to make the wizard of your D&D dreams. In general, newbies to resin 3D printers should stick to well-known brand names like Elegoo and ANYCUBIC due to their very large online communities and tutorial support. It might seem intimidating, but if you work at it, it’s not as hard as it looks.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best resin 3D printers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to use 3D glasses from 1954 today https://www.popsci.com/diy/vintage-3d-glasses/ Tue, 07 Nov 2023 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586632
3D viewing glasses on blue background of vintage PopSci magazine images; illustration

This old-school idea on how to repurpose 3D viewers shows us how much—and how little—the technology has changed.

The post How to use 3D glasses from 1954 today appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
3D viewing glasses on blue background of vintage PopSci magazine images; illustration

WHEN THE HOLOGRAM of Princess Leia, projected by the little droid R2-D2, appeared in the first Star Wars movie in 1977, the hopes and dreams of 3D-viewing enthusiasts likely soared. Even though the hologram was fictional, it was a glimpse of 3D’s supposed glasses-free future—never mind that the hologram itself was viewable only in 2D (later plans to reproduce the Star Wars films in 3D fell flat after just one remake). At the time, the typical way to view images in 3D was with cardboard-stock anaglyph glasses—the type with different-colored lenses: one red, the other green, cyan, or blue. 

The problem in 1977 was that 3D glasses were utterly useless other than in theaters and with specially produced movies. (This is still true today despite past attempts to sell 3D TVs and an increase in 3D video games.) Of course, in the 1970s, multicolored shades might have jived with bell-bottoms and beads, but the glasses’ effect would have triggered a headache in bright sunshine. That’s because the lenses would interfere with what our eyes and brain already know how to do—see the world three-dimensionally, or stereoscopically.

Still, as longtime Popular Science contributor Walter E. Burton explained in a July 1954 do-it-yourself story that described how to reuse these single-use items, discardable 3D viewers can offer “lots of entertainment value” even after the movie ends. Burton’s instructions were timely. Interest in 3D films was surging in the 1950s—so much so that the decade has since been referred to as the golden age of 3D cinema. After the 1950s, enthusiasm waned, experiencing brief resurgences in the early 1980s and 2010s, the latter inspired by James Cameron’s 3D release of Avatar. But between 1952 and 1954 (when the Popular Science tutorial was published), Hollywood released more than fifty 3D films, including Westerns like Devil’s Canyon (1953), monster movies like The Creature from the Black Lagoon (1954), and the popular horror film House of Wax (1953) starring Vincent Price. By 1954, spare 3D viewers would have been easy for DIYers to come by.

3D explained

Today we associate 3D viewers with movies, but they actually got their start nearly two centuries ago, in 1838, when British scientist Charles Wheatstone debuted his stereoscope—a cumbersome tabletop contraption that rendered 2D drawings (photography was still in its infancy) in 3D. The first portable 3D viewer was invented several years later by another British scientist, David Brewster; his device resembled a clunky version of the View-Master that debuted at the New York World’s Fair in 1939 and soon became a popular children’s toy that is still available today. It would be another century after Brewster, however, before 3D viewing made it into motion pictures in earnest. Before 1952, only one major 3D movie had been produced—a black-and-white silent movie, The Power of Love, in 1922. 

To create a 3D illusion on a 2D screen, the goal is to mimic what occurs naturally in the brain. Researchers are still working out the biological mechanism that enables us to perceive depth, but it’s based on the different views from our eyes, or binocular disparity. When the brain assembles the separate 2D images, it interprets them as one image with depth.

July 1954 cover of Popular Science magazine has man on personal flying gadget
The cover of the July 1954 issue featured a ride-along “kite” and an introduction to color TVs. Popular Science

The effect is reproduced in a theater by slightly offset simultaneous projections. For movies that rely on polarized eyewear, the projected images use polarized light. Light is an electromagnetic wave that travels primarily along two planes—vertical and horizontal. A polarized filter, or lens, blocks one of the planes, or phases. In polarized glasses, one lens blocks the vertical phase, the other the horizontal. As Burton explains in his 1954 instructions, “The two polarizers are set at right angles to each other. Cut the viewer apart, place one eyepiece in front of the other, and you’ll find that little or no light gets through.”

Light also travels in a spectrum of colors—remember ROYGBIV? For anaglyph 3D, the dual images are projected using colored filters so each image is viewable only through its matching lens (red filters will project red images viewable by the red lens, likewise for the other filter lens, which can be cyan, green, or blue), creating the same illusion of depth that our brains achieve on their own. The most common anaglyph lenses tend to pair red with cyan and magenta with green.

How to reuse 3D viewing glasses

Since the same 3D viewing glasses that were popular in the 1950s are still used in theaters today (the frames might be plastic instead of cardboard), DIYers can follow Burton’s instructions nearly seven decades later, although you might need substitutes for some household products. For instance, a pair of glasses can be turned into a kaleidoscope with the aid of two 1950s-style bouillon cube containers (tea cans might work in modern times). Cut a hole in each container cap and paste one polarized lens over each hole. Then cut a hole in the bottom of one can (you won’t need the second can for anything, only its cap) and cover that hole with clear cellophane (or plastic wrap) so light can shine through from the bottom. Drop bits of hard clear plastic inside. When the caps are stacked on top of each other as eyepieces and rotated, the bits of clear plastic will appear to change colors. 

What’s new on the 3D scene

Even though the 3D viewing experience has required the same polarized or anaglyph lenses for more than 70 years, 3D technology has advanced, especially in the last decade. One reason Avatar sparked a surge in 3D movies in the 2010s was that the film crew used new tools to ratchet up the illusion of depth, including motion-capture attire worn by the actors to offer multiple views of the same action, video game–quality computer-generated graphics designed for 3D depth, and stereoscopic cameras that captured scenes with dual images, one for each eye. Of course, on the viewing end, movie-goers still required the decades-old polarized lenses to see the effects, but the results were stunning. 

Virtual reality headsets like those from Meta, HTC, and Microsoft also offer 3D viewing. While the VR experience may be immersive and realistic, the cyborg-style headsets are not exactly practical apparel. You’re better off wearing polarized or anaglyph specs in public. Of course, 3D nirvana means no viewing accessory required. Instead, the tech would be in the displays, designed and built to render images stereoscopically. Computer makers Acer and Asus have developed such displays, but so far the effect hasn’t been compelling enough to catch on.

For now, hang on to those 3D movie specs. Burton’s instructions will still work for DIYers interested in optical projects. Perhaps you have your own contemporary ideas.

Read more PopSci+ stories.

The post How to use 3D glasses from 1954 today appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Our evolving ideas about friendship can help fight loneliness https://www.popsci.com/health/how-to-make-friends/ Tue, 07 Nov 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586747
Men making friends and fishing together with thermal cups
Despite stereotypes to the contrary, men can prefer close, one-on-one friendships. DepositPhotos

Friendship research is getting an update.

The post Our evolving ideas about friendship can help fight loneliness appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Men making friends and fishing together with thermal cups
Despite stereotypes to the contrary, men can prefer close, one-on-one friendships. DepositPhotos

This article was originally featured on The Conversation.

The benefits of friendship go far beyond having someone to confide in or spend time with–it can also protect you from physical and mental health problems. For example, people with good friends recover more quickly from illnesses and surgeries. They report higher well-being and feel like they live up to their full potential. Additionally, people with good friends report being less lonely across many life stages, including adolescencebecoming a parent and old age.

In fact, friendships are so powerful that the social pain of rejection activates the same neural pathways that physical pain does.

Behavioral scientists like me have tended to focus our research about friendships on their benefits. How to cultivate these powerful relationships hasn’t been as deeply researched yet. Understanding more about what people look for in a friend and how to make and sustain good friendships could help fight the loneliness epidemic.

Traditional conceptions of friendship

Previous generations of behavioral scientists traditionally focused on the notion that people form friendships with those who are similarfamiliar and in close proximity to them.

When you look at all the friendships you’ve had over your life, these three factors probably make intuitive sense. You’re more likely to have things in common with your friends than not. You feel an increased sense of familiarity with friends the longer you know them–what psychologists call the mere exposure effect. And your friends are more likely to live or work near you.

Researchers in this field have also typically divided friendship preferences based on gender. The dichotomy suggests that women prefer one-on-oneemotionally close and face-to-face friendships, while men prefer multi-person, task-oriented and side-by-side friendships, with the focus on a shared activity.

Again, when looking at your own friendships, these findings may seem intuitive. Women on average prefer to engage in activities that allow for self-disclosure and sharing secrets, such as spending time one-on-one talking about their lives. Men, on the other hand, tend to prefer to engage in activities that are group-based and have a clearly defined outcome, such as playing sports together. Findings such as these show that gender and preferences on how to connect are important in friendships.

But these explanations of friendship do not address the most important aspect of making friends–choosing the individual people you want to turn into your pals. Friendship decisions are not random. There are many people who are similar, familiar, in close proximity and have similar preferences as you. Yet few of these individuals end up being your friends.

So, in a world full of possibilities, how do people pick those who will become their friends?

New ways to think about friendship

Within the last decade, researchers have begun investigating the roots of friendship preferences beyond the classic descriptions.

For example, social scientists see there are strong preferences for friends to be loyal, trustworthy and warm. Additionally, researchers find there are preferences for friends who help you solve specific kinds of problems and are generous and caring with you instead of others. These preferences help people navigate making friends, given limited reserves of time and effort. In short, they help you find the best possible friends you can in a world full of friendship possibilities.

Social scientists have also learned that, while there are some important gender differences in what people want in friends, it is not accurate to say that men and women want one kind of friendship over another. In fact, when we take a more holistic approach and consider broader categorizations of emotional closeness and tasks, the gender differences in these preferences are reduced. And of course, people don’t exclusively pick between face-to-face and side-by-side friendships. Instead, it is more likely that they focus on what they want from their friends and let these needs guide how friendships form.

Ultimately it’s your individual preferences that guide you toward the people who will best meet your particular social needs. With a little luck, you’ll find buddies who can lend a hand when you need one and support you in reaching your goals. In all, your preferences are the key to finding friends who can buffer against feeling lonely and provide you with the social, emotional and health benefits of friendship.

When you’re looking for friends

It’s hard to provide clear guidelines for improving friendships because the research about friendship preferences is still developing. But there are some clear points for consideration:

  1. Determine what you value in friends. Do you want one-on-one, emotionally close friendships or multi-person, task-oriented friendships? Depending on your preference, different kinds of activities will be helpful for finding others who fit the bill and cultivating these friendships.
  2. Know that it will take time to make close friendships. Research suggests that it takes 30 hours of interaction to make a casual friend, 140 hours to make a good friend and 300 hours to make a best friend.
  3. Consider what you bring to the table. Everyone has unique strengths they bring to their friendships. Research shows that, when you’re able to demonstrate that you have characteristics people want in friends, you’re able to make more satisfying friendships.

Understand friendships to understand loneliness

Considering the nuances of friendship preferences will be extremely important in reducing not only loneliness, but other related public health crises. For example, loneliness is associated with likelihood of attempting suicide. Recent surveys have found that men are suffering big declines in the number of close friends they have, as well as experiencing higher rates of suicide compared to women.

The U.S. Surgeon General’s recent recommendations for fighting the loneliness epidemic focus on public policies and infrastructure. But fostering community spaces for connection–such as parks, libraries and playgrounds–prioritizes the preferences of those who favor the one-on-one, emotionally close and face-to-face connections more often preferred by women. These places are less beneficial for people with more typically masculine preferences, as there is no guarantee that these spaces will foster side-by-side, task-oriented connections unless areas for sports and other team-based activities are also included.

To counter this inequity, researchers and public health officials first need to understand what makes friendships satisfying. Then they can ensure that recommendations to curb loneliness address all of the pathways that people use to cultivate high-quality friendships.

The post Our evolving ideas about friendship can help fight loneliness appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best 3D printer resin in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-3d-printer-resin/ Tue, 07 Nov 2023 01:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586316
3D printer resin sliced header
Tony Ware

No matter what you want to print, there’s a resin for you.

The post The best 3D printer resin in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
3D printer resin sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Elegoo 8K 3D Printer Resin bottle with a figure next to it over a white background Elegoo 8K 3D Printer Resin
SEE IT

This resin works wonders with today’s best resin 3D printers.

Best value Sunlu ABS-Like Resin (3000G) bottle with a silver warrior figure in front over a white background Sunlu ABS-Like Resin (3000G)
SEE IT

A giant bottle of resin that has an excellent dollar-to-gram ratio.

Best for models black Anycubic 3D Printer Resin bottle with figurine next to it over a white background Anycubic 3D Printer Resin
SEE IT

It is a customer favorite that consistently displays sharp details.

You’ll need 3D printer resin for 3D resin printing if you have a resin 3D printer. It sounds like a tongue twister, but it is just a simple fact. Your printer almost certainly came with some resin, giving you an initial feeling of what your printer is capable of. But did you know that there are tons of styles and colors of resin that can completely redefine your builds? To help you make your next print a true work of art, we compiled a list of the best 3D printer resin bottles you can get, all with different styles and functions.

How we chose the best 3D printer resin

3D printer resin is the base of your prints. As a result, changing up your resin can have a giant effect on the look of your prints. Some resin holds shapes better and is made for premium details, while other resins come in cool colors or can be flexible. The variety is truly surprising, which is why we wanted to bring forward a variety of styles to you, giving you a wide variety of inspiration and intrigue for your next print.

The best 3D printer resin: Reviews & Recommendations

The following 3D printer resins represent the best in their respective categories. Each resin presented is unique in the way that it prints, but similar in that it has been used successfully by hundreds (if not thousands) of customers just like you. The resins here can be thought of as both superior in some way and a means of expression by the printer.

Best overall: Elegoo 8K 3D Printer Resin

Elegoo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 1000g
  • Colors: Space Grey
  • Characteristic: Opaque model

Pros

  • Supports high-details models
  • Low shrinkage
  • High compatibility
  • Non-brittle, low odor

Cons

  • On the expensive side

If you have an 8K 3D printer, which is considered the top-of-the-line for commercially available products, then you should check out this best-selling resin from Elegoo. It’s designed to be non-brittle and essentially non-shrinking so you can get the most out of detailed print projects. And while you should still ventilate, there will be reduced odors with this product.

While the Elegoo 8K 3D Printer Resin is specifically designed to work with their Saturn 2 8K LCD 3D Printer, it is widely compatible. It should work with nearly any DLP or LCD printer that uses 405nm light. Instead of compatibility, we find the main flaw of this resin to be the price. While not “expensive” it is a bit pricier than most, so it’s best to only grab this if you have a printer that can make use of its talents.

Best transparent: Siraya Tech Craft Ultra-Clear 3D Printer Resin

Siraya Tech

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 1,000g
  • Colors: Ultra-Clear
  • Characteristic: Transparent

Pros

  • Completely see-through
  • Anti-yellowing formula
  • Smooth and glossy after processing

Cons

  • Takes some experimentation

If you’re into painting your models, it doesn’t really matter what the base coloration is. But if you want to peer into your model or use lighting with it, transparent styles are the best 3D printer resin for you. Siraya makes an ultra-clear resin that has an ice-like appearance, becoming even more clear after processing. While the general consensus is that you will need to practice with this resin to get the effect perfect, it does turn out great results. A person with a 3D resin printer for cosplay can really run wild if they’re concentrating on smaller objects, such as baubles and lenses, as can jewelry makers. If you want other cool effects, Siraya Tech Craft Glow-in-the-Dark 3D Printer Resin is a cool alternative.

Best for models: Anycubic 3D Printer Resin

Anycubic

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 1,000g
  • Colors: Gray, black, white, green, clear
  • Characteristic: Opaque

Pros

  • Sharp details
  • Low shrinkage
  • Customer favorite
  • Highly affordable

Cons

  • Easiest to use with Anycubic printers

Our guide to the best 3D printers for miniatures includes at least a couple of Anycubic printers. With resin like this, perfect for miniature makers, it makes sense, too. Anycubic’s 3D Printer Resin has low shrinkage, which might seem odd for miniatures, which you want to be small. However, shrinkage can be unpredictable, causing slight changes to models. As a result, this combined with the Anycubic resin’s ability to hold sharp details, makes it great for small figures. Customers love it for its quality and affordability, too, making it hard to find negatives. We can say, however, that the resin will work best with Anycubic printers, if only for the extensive ideal parameters charts the company provides.

Best color kit: Sunlu 3D Printer Resin Bundle 

Sunlu

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 4 x 500g
  • Colors: Multi-pack (Dark grey, black, clear, clear green)
  • Characteristic: Varies

Pros

  • Lots of variety
  • High (395 to 405nm) compatibility
  • Inspires creativity
  • Other options available

Cons

  • Smaller 500g individual bottles

Committing to a whole bottle of clear or colored resin when you aren’t sure you’ll like it can be costly as well as disappointing. As a result, we recommend getting kits with several bottles of different resins to experiment with. This particular kit has an assortment of solid and transparent colors, though other options exist on the store page, including a set of cute pastel colors. The only thing we don’t love about this set is what comes standard for such packs; the individual packs are smaller.

Best dual color: RepRapper UV Dual Color 3D Resin

RepRapper

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 500g, 1000g
  • Colors: Various
  • Characteristic: Dual color

Pros

  • Cool lighting effects
  • Water washable resin
  • Makes printing an art again

Cons

  • Awkward bottle design

As we get obsessed with the finer points of 3D printing, such as resolution, build area, and print speed, the cool factor can be totally forgotten. The two-tone effects of RepRapper resin bring back the inner artist in the 3D printer, however. Each bottle (coming in 500 or 1,000g, depending on color set) prints in a single resin style. When viewed, however, the two colors will appear in a spectrum depending on the amount of light present. Different angles will also make opposing colors pop out, producing a truly mesmerizing effect.

Best flexible: Superflex 3D Printer Resin

Superflex

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 500g, 1000g, and 5000g
  • Colors: Clear
  • Characteristic: Flexible, transparent

Pros

  • Combines transparent and flexible effects
  • Playful, rubberlike material
  • Maintains durability

Cons

  • Quite expensive

If you want a floppy, rubbery finish to creepy crawlies, tentacles, or unexpected creations like towers, the Superflex 3D Printer Resin is a good choice. While different thicknesses will have it behaving in somewhat different ways, nearly everyone describes it as giving their prints a tough rubber feel. There are some pretty good (and successful) experiments with mixing this resin with other, more standard, resin among community members as well. To be fair, this is a pretty logical thing to do as the Superflex 3D resin does run on the more expensive side.

Best environmentally friendly: Elegoo Plant-Based 3D Printer Resin

Elegoo

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 500g and 1000g
  • Colors: Gray, clear green, and white
  • Characteristic: Opaque or clear

Pros

  • BPA- and benzene-free
  • Soy-based design for less chemicals
  • Highly affordable

Cons

  • Hit or miss on the odor

When we think of environmentally friendly or “green” options, we usually expect to pay a huge price hike. Luckily, Elegoo’s Plant-Based 3D Printer Resin remains affordable while eliminating many chemicals typically found in resin and replacing them with soybean-derived substances. For example, this resin is BPA- and benzene-free so you can feel somewhat safer as you are working with it. One interesting thing about this product is the odor, which customers seem to have strong opinions about. Some report that it has a very low odor, while others completely detest it. No matter your opinion, this remains the best 3D printer resin for reducing your exposure to chemicals.

Best for large batches: Sunlu ABS-Like Resin (3000G)

Sunlu

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 3000g
  • Colors: Black, dark gray, gray, white
  • Characteristic: Opaque

Pros

  • Great cost per gram
  • Tough, non-brittle resin
  • Secure packaging
  • Highly-reviewed product

Cons

  • Mixing can be a challenge

There are a ton of things to like about Sunlu’s ABS-Like resin, as it is a fan favorite in its own right. What we wanted to highlight, however, was the incredible affordability of the 3,000-gram jug of this resin, which is perfect for printing larger sets that need the same characteristics. Its bottle is very secure and easy to use, but mixing large quantities of the resin is known to be a challenge.

Best budget: Monoprice Rapid 3D Printer Resin

Monoprice

SEE IT

Specs

  • Sizes: 250g
  • Colors: Black and gray 
  • Characteristic: Opaque

Pros

  • Small, affordable bottles
  • Wide compatibility
  • Perfect for small projects

Cons

  • Bulk buys may be cheaper

While large jugs of resin are great for large projects, if you just print occasionally, the best 3D printer resin for you likely comes in a smaller bottle. We find the Monoprice Rapid 3D Printer Resin to offer the smallest bottles of decent quality resin. While, if your goal is to save money in the long term, large bulk buys may be better, the 250-gram bottle of Monogram Rapid 3D Printer Resin is a fantastic deal for casual printers and is compatible with all UV resin printers.

What to consider before buying 3D printer resin

If you’ve read through our guide to picking the best 3D printer filament for FDM printers, you may already suspect that picking the best 3D printer resin is more difficult. In actuality, it isn’t that difficult. There are some common sense compatibility checks, but there’s a lot of freedom in resin choices you might not expect. Here’s what we looked at and why:

Brand

Brand loyalty isn’t necessarily something to encourage. 3D printers aren’t like home office printers, with companies like HP locking you into using their ink. Even the best 3D printer resin is just a fluid, after all.

That all being said, when a company makes printers and resin, they obviously test them out together. And they’ll tell you which of their printers will work with which resin, including optimal settings that they’ve discovered through large-scale testing. Just look at the Anycubic resin compatibility chart. If you have an Anycubic printer, you know the exact settings to use with this resin. This is one reason why we have resin from most major printer makers represented on the list.

Still, most resin has wide compatibility. If you have a 405nm spectrum printer, you will be able to find a variety of products compatible with it.

Bottle size

If you just want to make just a few prints in a given color or style, a small bottle will do. But what if you want to make a set of figures with the same character? Min-maxing bottle size or buying in bulk makes more sense.

The bottle sizes represented here are usually for 1,000 grams of product. However, bottles as small as 250 grams exist. Similarly, you can find large bottles for 2,000 grams or even 3,000 grams.

Ultimately, it is up to you to figure out what is the best 3D printer resin bottle size for your specific circumstances. However, in much the same way as you should get an extra can of wall paint for later touch-ups, consider grabbing an extra bottle of resin for long-term projects. You never know when your resin of the moment will get discontinued.

Character

Character, texture, color, call it whatever you like, but there is a distinct feel to each type of resin available. While even standard opaque resins will differ from each other in subtle ways, you can find extreme differences if you’re willing to search. With our list of 3D printer resin, you will be able to find something that can make your next project shine.

FAQs

Q: How much does 3D printer resin cost?

3D printer resin can cost as much as $50 per 1,000-gram bottle. Depending on the characteristics, brand, special qualities of the resin, and bottle size, you can find resins for considerably less. If you see a bottle for over $50, we highly recommend pausing and considering if you truly want it.

Q: Is resin or filament better?

Neither resin nor filament is better; rather, they do different things well. Resin 3D printers are good for details, smooth exteriors, and cool effects but use more hazardous materials and require curing. FDM printers, which use filament, are easier and generally safer to use but are typically of a lower resolution and are more likely to show “z-layers” after printing.

Q: What is the best type of resin printer?

The best resin 3D printers typically come from Anycubic or Elegoo. Just about anybody will be happy with the Anycubic Photon Mono X, though absolute beginners should go with the Elegoo Mars 3. If you’re on a budget, try the Creality Halot-One.

Final thoughts on the best 3D printer resin

The preceding list includes opaque, transparent, glow-in-the-dark, two-tone, and flexible resins. Though there are certainly others, we feel like these should give you a chance to open your creativity in the near future. 3D printing isn’t only a way to create copies of things entered into a printer, it is a craft and a way to express your true creativity. From standard, solid resins to neat light tricks, it really does feel that a resin 3D printer can do it all.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best 3D printer resin in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best compost bins of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-compost-bin/ Tue, 20 Jul 2021 15:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=380913
Detail shots of compost bins made by Vitamix, Redmon, Vivosun, and Vermihut.

Help guarantee a greener tomorrow by investing in one of the best compost bins available.

The post The best compost bins of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Detail shots of compost bins made by Vitamix, Redmon, Vivosun, and Vermihut.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A slate-colored food composter from called the Eco 5 from Vitamix against a plain background. Eco 5 FoodCycler by Vitamix
SEE IT

This pick from Vitamix allows you to convert your food scraps overnight into usable, nutrient-rich powder for your plants. 

Best countertop The NEW OXO Good Grips compost bin is the best for apartment dwellers. OXO Good Grips Compost Bin
SEE IT

This sleek composter is perfect for apartment dwellers who want to save their scraps but not attract bugs.

Best worm bin The VermiHut Plus is the best compost bin for yard owners VermiHut Plus Worm Compost Bin
SEE IT

Take composting to a new level with this worm compost bin.

Whether you’re looking to nourish your potted plants, foster a prized vegetable garden, or do your part to reduce food waste, an indoor composter is an environmentally friendly and effective way to turn your food scraps into usable dirt. But if you’re new to composting, it can be confusing to find the best compost bins. The good news is that composting at home is easier than you think, and it’s a great way to put your inedible and leftover food to good use. The canisters and bins on this list help initiate the process of breaking down food into nutrient-dense soil in which plants can thrive. 

How we chose the best compost bins

As a year-round home composter (yes, even through New England winters), as well as a vegetable gardener, I know how valuable the rich, nutrient-dense soil in a compost pile is as a fertilizer. And as a chef and home cook, I want to do everything I can to reduce the massive amounts of food waste in America. So, my list of best compost bins reflects personal experience, product testing, and research, including customer reviews and product specs. These composters are eco-friendly and easy to use. They’ll minimize smells in your kitchen and help your family turn regular food scraps into nourishing soil for your next produce crop.

The best compost bins: Reviews & Recommendations

According to the National Resources Defense Council, composting “adds nutrients and organic matter back to the soil,” a.k.a. black gold. This “benefits agriculture, reduces our reliance on synthetic fertilizers, diverts methane-producing organic materials from landfills, and improves soil’s water retention capacity so you don’t need to water as much.” Plus, composted soil is said to produce more delicious fruits and vegetables.

Despite how complicated it may sound, all you really need is the right composting bin or compost barrel and the desire to help the environment. Beyond that, according to the EPA, just find a shady, dry spot for your bin and moisten dry materials before you add them to the heap.

Best overall: Eco 5 FoodCycler by Vitamix

Vitamix

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Capacity: 5 liters
  • Dimensions: 10.9 inches L x 13.5 inches W x 13.8 inches H
  • Weight: 29 pounds

Pros

  • Turns compost into soil-grade material you can immediately use
  • Quiet
  • Large capacity

Cons

  • Expensive

Vitamix is known for making high-functioning kitchen appliances, and this indoor electric composter is no exception. Though it’s not cheap, this quiet and thorough food cycler does the job well every time and will last for years of regular use, making it one of the best compost bins. To operate the Vitamix machine, dump food scraps (including poultry bones, fruit rinds, and coffee grounds) into the interior bucket. Press the power button and walk away. The machine will first dehydrate, then grind your leftovers into a dry powder that’s compact, light, and easy to transport to the garden. 

The machine stays quiet and keeps smells at bay, thanks to interior carbon filters. This model also features reusable filters that you can fill with new carbon pellets for even more sustainability.  

Vitamix FoodCycler FC-50
Jen McCaffery

We’re also a fan of Vitamix’s smaller (and more affordable) FoodCycler FC-50, shown here. Just toss your vegetable peelings, egg shells, coffee grounds, and even chicken bones into the 2-liter container and press the on button. About four hours later, your scraps are turned into nutrient-rich soil you can use for your houseplants or in your garden.

Best tumbling: VIVOSUN Tumbling Compost Bin 

VIVOSUN

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Plastic, metal
  • Capacity: 43 gallons
  • Dimensions: 26.25 inches L x 23.6 inches W x 36.5 inches H
  • Weight: 21.7 pounds

Pros

  • Large capacity
  • Two chambers allow for different stages of composting
  • Air vents allow for circulation
  • Affordable

Cons

  • May be too large for small households
  • Expensive

This rotating batch compost bin is easy to use and mess-free. Two chambers let you alternate dual batches of compost, while the convenient tumbler lets you mix without getting your hands dirty. Adjustable air vents provide aeration for oxygen-rich soil, and a pair of garden gloves (included) let you excavate and plant your yard safely.

Best countertop: OXO Good Grips Compost Bin

OXO

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Capacity: 1.75 gallons
  • Dimensions: 8.3 inches L x 10.15 inches W x 12 inches H
  • Weight: 1.63 pounds

Pros

  • Attractive
  • Combats odor
  • Easy to clean

Cons

  • Small capacity

Though it has a small footprint, this OXO style gets the job done. Oxygen flows through the soft-close lid to combat odor and insects. It can also be switched to stay-open mode for ease when tossing in scraps. The internal bucket is removable and can be popped in the dishwasher, and its handle makes it easy to carry outside. 

Best pallet: Redmon Compost Bin 

Redmon

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Capacity: 6.62 liters
  • Dimensions: 13 inches L x 13 inches W x 8 inches H
  • Weight: 15 pounds

Pros

  • Large capacity
  • Weather-resistant
  • Composter and turning tool in one
  • Aeration built in

Cons

  • May be too large for small households

Four access doors plus a top-lid make it easy to get scraps in and compost out. At 15 pounds empty and 26-by-26-by-30.75 inches, set it and forget it. Plus, this Redmon compost bin is made of post-consumer, UV-stabilized material that’ll stand up to all sorts of weather. 

Best worm bin: VermiHut Plus Worm Compost Bin 

VermiHut

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Plastic
  • Capacity: 40 liters
  • Dimensions: 17 inches L x 17 inches W x 33 inches H
  • Weight: 15 pounds

Pros

  • Large capacity
  • Incorporates worms
  • Easy to set up

Cons

  • Some users say some worms escape

This 17-by-17-by-33-inch multi-tray option has additional components like an ant trap, plus multiple boards made of different materials (e.g., coconut fiber) for moisture control, fruit-fly deterrence, and odor removal.

Best budget: EPICA Compost Bin

EPICA

SEE IT

Specs

  • Material: Stainless steel
  • Capacity: 40 liters 
  • Dimensions: 7.16 inches L x 7.16 inches W x 11 inches H
  • Weight: 12 pounds

Pros

  • Made of stainless steel
  • Features charcoal filter to fight odor
  • Affordable

Cons

  • No active composting function
  • Not very large capacity

This rust- and leak-proof Epica composting bin option controls odor with an airtight lid and replaceable charcoal filter. Plus, it won’t leach any toxic chemicals into your compost. 

What to consider when shopping for compost bins

Depending on how green (or not so green!) thumb your thumb is, ease of use should be the first consideration when choosing the best compost bin. The good news is that most models are relatively simple to operate. The right mix of materials—greens like foodstuffs and browns like newspaper and leaves—guarantees a nearly odor-free process. Beyond that, the process comes down to how much space you have and whether you’re comfortable adding insects to the mix.

Do you want an indoor compost bin or an outdoor compost bin?

The biggest variable between indoor and outdoor styles is odor. Composting—which, in essence, is accomplished by decay—can get stinky. Indoor composters tend to be smaller and more airtight, and they sometimes come with built-in filters. You could use your indoor bin as a layover for the backyard, i.e., a place to store scraps that eventually and quickly go into the bigger bin out back, assuming you don’t want what is essentially dirt and decay sitting on your countertop for weeks.

Would you prefer a nice and neat composting bin that fits on your countertop?

The upside to a countertop compost bin is that it’s small and tidy-looking, and you won’t have to schlep to the backyard every time you need to deposit a banana peel. The downside is, well, it’s small. Not just that, but without the tumbler feature of many outdoor models, you’ll either eventually have to transfer the contents of your countertop contraption to an outdoor one or do the tumbling yourself, i.e., using your hands or tools to mix the compost components together. Think of a countertop style as an add-on, not a fully functional composting system in and of itself (especially since it takes weeks for compost to fully develop).  

If you want an outdoor compost bin, how many chambers would you like?

Compost barrels and bins tend to come in two varieties: single- and multiple-chamber. The main difference is that a multiple- or dual-chamber composter allows you to compost multiple batches on a rolling basis. For example, you can keep adding waste to one chamber while the other cooks). Technically, you don’t even need a bin to compost (though it certainly makes it easier). Those with greener thumbs can create a compost pit or trench in the yard, no bins or barrels required. If ease is what you’re after, a dual-chamber tumbler—so you don’t have to manually mix the compost—is the way to go.

Are you cool with worms?

If you said, “Heck yes, I’m cool with worms!” that’s great news. The addition of worms can speed up the composting process in multiple ways. The worms eat all the food scraps you’ve put in the bin, and when they come back out again, voilà, it’s compost now! Also, their penchant for tunneling creates a naturally aerated environment for the decay to happen. If you’re down with worms, invest in a batch of red wigglers, a particularly efficient type of worm, at your local nursery or through Amazon. If you have an open-bottom composting bin in your backyard, no need to buy your own worms. The earthworms already in your yard will naturally gravitate to it. And if you’re more than just a little interested in worms, you could try creating your own wormery, a.k.a. vermicomposting. 

How do I know what’s compostable and what’s not? 

Eventually, you’ll get a natural sense for what you can and cannot compost. Until then, just defer to a trusted source, like the NRDC. As a general rule, avoid anything treated with pesticides, feces, dairy, charcoal, or fats. Do opt for leaves, shredded newspaper, coffee grounds, tea bags, and fruits and veggies. 

FAQs

Q: What is the best composter for beginners? 

The great news is that all composters are beginner-friendly! The choice comes down to whether you want to store your scraps inside, throw it all in a continuous composter outside, work on multiple compost batches with a multiple-chamber model, and whether you’re interested in a tumbling option. All are easy; they just require the right ingredients, tools, time, and expectations.

Q: How often should you turn your compost? 

Answers vary: Some sources say every four to five weeks. Others say two or three times a week. Others still say every seven to 14 days. Talk to the people at your local gardening center to get an answer. The key is not to over-turn. Too much tumbling will wreak havoc on your compost. It’ll disperse the heat inside the chamber, which is needed for the compost to cook.

Q: How do I choose a compost bin? 

Think about the space you have (a giant backyard or no outdoor real estate?), how much you want to spend, whether you want a compact style you can place on the countertop, whether you want the option to tumble, and if you want to cook more than one batch of compost at a time. You can always start with an affordable, small countertop version. If you find yourself loving the compost life, upgrade to a bigger, hardier backyard style. 

Final thoughts on the best compost bins for you

A composter is a can’t-lose proposition! Just deciding to give composting a go means you’re on your way to living more sustainably and potentially growing more delicious food for your family. Composting reduces the need for chemical fertilizers and lowers your carbon footprint. Which particular bin, barrel, or tumbler you choose comes down to your comfort level, personal taste, and aesthetic. Just pick the one that speaks to you, and you’ll be on your way to eco-hero status in no time. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best compost bins of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Grab ridiculously cheap mechanics tool sets before Black Friday at Amazon and Lowe’s https://www.popsci.com/gear/lowes-amazon-tool-set-deals-early-black-friday-2023/ Mon, 06 Nov 2023 14:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586466
An array of DeWalt mechanics tool sets arranged in a pattern on a plain background.
Stan Horaczek

Jump on these absurd deals on DeWalt and Kobalt tool sets before they get sucked up in the Black Friday frenzy.

The post Grab ridiculously cheap mechanics tool sets before Black Friday at Amazon and Lowe’s appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An array of DeWalt mechanics tool sets arranged in a pattern on a plain background.
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Black Friday is looming, but there are already some truly absurd deals out there if you know where to look. Both Amazon and Lowe’s have massive mechanics tool sets on sale for their cheapest prices ever. These make great gifts and often sell out, so don’t hesitate if you’re thinking about buying one.

DEWALT Mechanics Tool Set, SAE and Metric, 1/2, 1/4, 3/8 Drive Sizes, 192-Piece $154 (was $277)

DeWalt

SEE IT

If you never want to buy a socket set ever again, then this is a good place to start. The sturdy carrying case includes three 72-tooth ratchets, more than 150 sockets, and a full run of hex keys. Dominick Toretto would let you work on his 10-second car with these.

Kobalt 277-Piece Standard (SAE) and Metric Polished Chrome Mechanics Tool Set with Hard Case $99

Lowe’s

SEE IT

If you’re looking for something even more versatile, this 277-piece set from Kobalt offers multiple ratchets, a full set of sockets, hex keys, and 82 screw-driving bits. The whole thing comes in a very nice, layered case that makes pieces easy to locate. This is a perfect gift for just about anyone. It doesn’t have a “regular” price since Lowe’s put this kit together specifically for the season, but comparable sets sell from well over double this price.

DEWALT 20V MAX Power Tool Combo Kit, 10-Tool Cordless Power Tool Set with 2 Batteries and Charger $549 (was $1,049)

DeWalt

SEE IT

If you’re in need of some power tools, Amazon currently has this kid of 10 DeWalt tools with two 20v batteries for a ridiculous price that’s half of retail. This sale has been going for a little while, though, so it likely won’t last that much longer.

More tool kit deals from Lowe’s and Amazon

The post Grab ridiculously cheap mechanics tool sets before Black Friday at Amazon and Lowe’s appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
It’s time to make your Venmo transactions private https://www.popsci.com/diy/how-to-make-venmo-private/ Mon, 06 Nov 2023 13:12:18 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586181
A hand holding a phone over a wooden table. The phone screen is blue and shoes the logo for the Venmo app.
There are definitely better ways to show the work you're a big spender. Tech Daily / Unsplash

No one has to know how many times you went for pizza last week.

The post It’s time to make your Venmo transactions private appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A hand holding a phone over a wooden table. The phone screen is blue and shoes the logo for the Venmo app.
There are definitely better ways to show the work you're a big spender. Tech Daily / Unsplash

Money transfer apps are incredibly useful, which is why they’re so ubiquitous. But Venmo, one of the most popular of the bunch, has a problem: by adding a social element to our spending, the platform makes all transactions public by default. 

This means that all of the internet (or, best-case scenario, your friends and their friends) knows you’ve been ordering pizzaPeruvian food for breakfast at least twice a week. Or that you bought a statue of questionable taste from some person on Facebook Marketplace. Or something beyond what we can put to print. Venmo keeps some things private, but certainly discloses enough information to let other people know who you’re spending with, and potentially on what, so finding out your friends went for brunch without you is only a matter of scrolling.

This is why you should make your Venmo private right now. Thankfully, accessing and changing the platform’s settings is easy. 

How to change your privacy settings on Venmo

Mobile privacy settings for the Venmo Android app.
Finding Venmo’s privacy settings is easy. Venmo

1. Open Venmo and tap your profile picture in the bottom right corner of your screen. 

2. Tap the cog icon in the top right corner to open the settings menu. 

3. Go to Privacy. 

4. Under Default privacy settings, make sure you select the bubble next to Private. This will make sure transactions are only visible to you and the person who’s paying or receiving money from you. 

[Related: The 7 best apps for sending money]

There’s also a Friends option, which will make your activity visible to your friends and their friends, but we’d discourage you from going that way. Venmo is an extremely practical app people usually only use to transfer money, which is why we don’t usually think too much about who we befriend on there. Think about that one time you went out for drinks with a large group of people and one person picked up the check so everyone paid them instead. You may not even know that person well, but if they’re your friend on Venmo, they, along with all of their friends, can see how you spend your money. 

Screen showing Venmo's privacy settings and how to turn them to private
You can stop your name from appearing on other users’ friends list. Venmo

If you’ve been using Venmo for a while, you should know that changing your privacy settings doesn’t work retroactively, and will only keep your future transactions private. To protect everything from the past, tap Past transactions on the privacy menu and select Change all to private. 

To go even further, and since you’re already in the privacy menu, tap Friends list and set it to private. This will prevent people from knowing who you’re friends with on the app. To finish, toggle off the switch next to Appear on other users’ friends lists. This will ensure that, even if your friends can’t be bothered with their privacy settings, at least you won’t show up on their lists.

More Venmo privacy tips

Maybe you like the social element of Venmo and prefer to keep things between friends (and their friends). That doesn’t mean you can’t still take care of your privacy. 

Make individual transactions private

You should know that you can always make individual transactions private. This is easy to do but not very intuitive, so you might’ve missed it. 

After completing a payment, open the transfer on your timeline or profile. Under Transaction details and to the right of the date and time, you’ll see the transaction’s privacy settings in blue—tap it to change it. You’ll get the same options as on the app’s privacy menu, and you’ll be able to make your activity visible only to you and the other person, your friends and their friends, or the entire world wide web. 

Opt for nondescript descriptions

As we mentioned before, Venmo doesn’t disclose the amounts of money you transfer on the app, but it says who you’re paying, and who you’re friends with, if applicable. 

That’s a lot of information as it is, but most importantly, the platform shows everyone the description of each interaction, which usually gives away the nature of the transaction and the context. So, for example, if you see someone paying somebody else and posting a pizza or drinks emoji, you can easily assume they ate or drank together, which can easily fuel gossip or, in the worst cases, “conspiranoia.” 

[Related: It’s time to start paying for everything with your phone]

If you’re keeping things between friends, give your transactions a non-obvious description. Since this is a required field to finalize payments, you can type gibberish or anything else that doesn’t give away what the payment or request was for. If you think you might need a receipt in the future, text that person directly confirming tha transaction. 

Check your friends list often

When you search someone on Venmo or scan their account QR code, the app will immediately take you to their profile page. You’ll be able to see their picture and their name, but you’ll also be able to spot somewhat of a dark pattern—it’s easier to add them as friends than it is to just make or request a payment. 

This is because the Add friend button is immediately below a person’s account details, whereas the transfer button (a white coin and a pencil against a blue background) is all the way down in the bottom right corner of your screen. You probably know this, but you can easily miss it, especially in the “We gotta pay and go” mindset after a meal. 

Again, if you set your privacy settings to Friends, make sure you take a moment, maybe once every few months, to revise your friends list. Make sure you know everybody on there and delete anyone you might not interact with on the app again. That way you’ll have a good idea of who your audience is and keep some control over it. 

The post It’s time to make your Venmo transactions private appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Clear some space for more projects by building this wall-mounted paper dispenser https://www.popsci.com/diy/paper-roll-holder-diy/ Sun, 05 Nov 2023 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=586397
A wall-mounted paper roll holder attached to a wood-framed wall near a low ceiling in a workshop.
No more rolls of paper unfurling all over your workspace. Jean Levasseur for Popular Science

If you've got rolls of paper, give them a home with this space-saving project.

The post Clear some space for more projects by building this wall-mounted paper dispenser appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A wall-mounted paper roll holder attached to a wood-framed wall near a low ceiling in a workshop.
No more rolls of paper unfurling all over your workspace. Jean Levasseur for Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Wood glue is a wonderful thing, but it makes quite a mess if you get it all over your workbench. I like to lay masking paper down before I glue, but it’s a bit awkward to have the roll lying around the shop. To free up some space, I built a wall-mounted paper-hanger, and it’s a design you can modify to store wrapping paper, craft paper, or really any paper that comes on a roll. Now I can pull down a sheet whenever I need one.

Not only that, but I made it entirely out of scrap wood I had leftover from our ongoing garage addition. Because it’s a perfect use for random pieces of wood, you can use any material you have that’s close to the measurements listed below—it doesn’t have to be exact. It’s also built as a shop tool—no frills or nice designs—but there are plenty of ways to fancy it up if you so desire.

Stats

  • Time: 1 to 2 hours
  • Cost: $0 to $30 
  • Difficulty: easy

Materials

Tools

Because my workshop is mostly packed up while we build an addition, I primarily used a circular saw and drill for this project. Absolutely feel free to use a miter saw and/or table saw instead, but it’s good to remember that you can still build things with minimal tools. 

How to build a wall-mounted paper roll holder

1. Cut the side boards to size. These side boards hold the dowel that the paper roll slides onto. I made mine out of 2-by-10 material, but scraps of ¾-inch plywood will work as well.  Using a circular saw, cut the boards down to equal dimensions. I cut my 2-by-10 material in half, which gave me two 8-by-9.5-inch rectangles. 

2. Drill holes in the side boards to mount the dowel. Use a ⅞-inch Forstner bit to drill these holes—you want a little bit of play around the ¾-inch dowel so it slips in and out easily. Measure each hole’s location from the front-bottom corner of each side board.

For my roll, which is 6 inches in diameter, I went up 3.5 inches from the bottom, then 3.5 inches in from the front edge to keep it entirely within the frame of the holder. If you’re using a different sized roll, adjust the measurements accordingly.

A piece of wood for a DIY paper roll holder, with a mark on it for where a hole will need to be drilled to hold the dowel that holds the roll.
Put the hole in the right spot and your roll will sit within the edges of the side boards. Jean Levasseur for Popular Science

3. Cut the stretchers that connect the two side boards. The stretchers need to be long enough to leave enough room between the side boards for the paper roll to fit. You don’t want it to be a tight fit, so cut them long.

My roll, for example, is 36 inches long, and the side boards are each 1.5 inches thick, so the stretchers needed to be a minimum of 39 inches long. I cut my 1-by-4 boards to 40 inches to leave a half-inch of breathing room. A quarter-inch would’ve been fine, but any less might cause the frame to squeeze the roll and make it difficult to pull.

[Related: A woodworker’s guide for choosing the right saw for each cut]

Mark the lengths of the cuts with the speed square, then cut them out with the circular saw. 

  • Pro tip: After marking the cut line with your speed square, position your circular saw at that mark. Then put your speed square back on the board, flush with the edge and pressed against the saw plate. Use the speed square as a straightedge to get a perpendicular cut that doesn’t wobble.
A man in a workshop using a circular saw and a speed square to make a square cut on a small piece of wood.
If you need a visual for the tip above, here you go.

4. Screw and glue the stretchers to the side boards. Pre-drill the screw holes to avoid splitting the ends of the wood. You’ll want to install one stretcher on the top of the side boards, pushed all the way to the front, and the second on the back of the side boards, pushed all the way to the top. This back board will double as a nailer strip when you hang the unit.  

5. Cut the thin front boards that will hold the paper. Cutting boards this thin (40 inches long, ½ inches wide, and ¼ inch thick, in my case) with a circular saw is a little bit tricky to do well, because the vibration of the saw can cause small boards to bounce and vibrate.

One trick is to set your saw blade barely deeper than the thickness of the boards you want to cut, and then put the workpiece on top of some scrap wood rather than hanging off the edge of a work table. When you make the cut, the blade will score the board at the bottom, so make sure it’s not anything you treasure. But it will keep the thin board stable for a safer, cleaner cut.

Or you can do what I did, and cut them with a hand saw. 

6. Install the front boards. The purpose of these two thin front boards is to let the paper slide between them. They’ll hold it in place, making it easier to position the sheet while you’re cutting. You can also pull and tear the paper against them if you aren’t particular about nice, clean lines. 

Like the stretchers, glue and screw these two boards in place, pre-drilling to avoid cracks. Install one at the very bottom of the front of the unit, and the other about ⅛-inch above that, leaving a uniform space between.

7. Install a cotter pin into the end of the dowel. If the dowel is left unsecured, it’s likely to slide out of the holes as you turn the paper roll. Drill a ⅛-inch hole through the end of the dowel, perpendicular to the ground, and install a small cotter pin. This will keep it from pulling all the way through the holes. You can also use a lynch pin, but you’ll need to drill a larger hole. Likewise, you can use a small bolt and nut, but that will be a bit more time-consuming to remove.

A man drilling a small hole in the end of a dowel in a wall-mounted paper roll holder, to install a cotter pin so the dowel will stay in place.
Hopefully, you have good aim! Courtesy of Jean Levasseur

8. Hang the paper roll holder. Locate the studs in your wall, using a stud finder if your shop walls are covered, and then pre-drill holes in the rear stretcher that match those stud locations.  Hang the project up with 1 ½-inch or longer screws.  

9. Push the paper through the front boards. Once the paper roll is hung, push the paper through the small ⅛-inch gap you left between the two thin front boards. This will allow you to pull through only the amount you want.  

I tried to make a cutter head with a razor blade that slides over the paper slot, but it only tore the paper. I couldn’t get an orientation or design that gave a clean cut. My recommendation is to keep a pair of scissors handy, or tear the paper along the edge of the wood. 

What you won’t need handy are paper towels to clean up your glue mess when you’re done clamping projects. A clean project, in more ways than one.

The post Clear some space for more projects by building this wall-mounted paper dispenser appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to text Siri instead of talking to it out loud https://www.popsci.com/diy/type-to-siri/ Sat, 04 Nov 2023 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=584860
An open MacBook on a desktop showing the MacOS desktop and the results from a Siri query
Some meetings could be emails and some queries to Siri could be texts. Karolina Grabowska / Pexels

For when you only want to have a private chat with Apple's personal assistant.

The post How to text Siri instead of talking to it out loud appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An open MacBook on a desktop showing the MacOS desktop and the results from a Siri query
Some meetings could be emails and some queries to Siri could be texts. Karolina Grabowska / Pexels

I, like many people, prefer texting to calling. So why does Apple think I want to talk to Siri out loud? 

I understand that in some circumstances talking out loud is easier, but when I’m in a public place I’d rather type notes to my virtual assistant than look like I’m talking to myself. This approach is particularly easy on my Mac, where I have a big keyboard ready to be used. 

If you’d also like to keep your conversations with Siri private, you can dive into the Accessibility settings to enable the Type to Siri feature and stop Apple’s assistant from responding to you out loud. 

How to turn on Type to Siri

Turning on Type to Siri is easy and the same on iPhone, iPad, and Mac devices. Keep in mind that the change only affects the gadget you’re using, so if you’re tweaking the settings on your Apple computer, it won’t affect your iPhone.

Start by opening the settings application for your device. On a Mac, you can find System Settings on the dock or by clicking the Apple logo in the top-left corner of your screen and clicking System Settings. On your iPhone or iPad you can find the Settings app either on your homescreen or in the app drawer. 

[Related: Simplify your life by creating routines for Alexa, Siri, and Google Assistant]

Continue by scrolling down on the left-sidebar, going to Accessibility, and clicking Siri.

Screen showing accessibility settings on MacOS
You’ll easily get to these accessibility settings no matter what Apple device you’re using. Apple

From here, toggle the switch next to the Type to Siri option to activate it. 

From now on, whenever you summon Siri, your system will show you a text box and allow you to type instead of waiting for you to talk. On the Mac, this happens in the top-right corner of the screen. On your iPhone or iPad, your on-screen keyboard will open along with a box prompting you to chat to Siri. Type a question or request and, as always, you’ll get a response. 

Mac screen showing the type to Siri feature with the Myrtle Beach weather forecast as a result.
On MacOS, Siri will display the results right below the text box where you typed your query. Apple

No matter what device you’re using, all Siri functionalities will stay the same, so you’ll still be able to ask follow-up questions like you can when using Siri out loud. 

Note that, on the Mac, you can set a keyboard shortcut for Siri, which is perfect considering you’re using the keyboard for the actual conversation. In Settings, head to Siri & Spotlight and click the dropdown menu next to Keyboard shortcut. You can choose between three default shortcuts or create your own by choosing Customize

MacOS Siri settings menu showing how to disable audio feedback
You can also use your keyboard to summon Siri—just set up a keyboard shortcut. Apple

How to prevent Siri from responding out loud

You’re not talking out loud to Siri but, by default, Siri will still respond by talking back to you out loud. To change this and have her reply with a written response instead, head back to the Settings application and go to the Siri and Spotlight (Mac) or Siri and Search (iPhone and iPad) section. 

[Related: Siri, Alexa, and Google Assistant all have alternate voices. Here’s how to find them.]

Click Siri Responses and toggle off the switch next to Voice feedback

Siri settings menu on MacOS showing how to disable the digital assistant's audio feedback.
Enabling Type to Siri won’t prevent the assistant from talking. For that, you need to disable audio feedback. Apple

Note that on mobile you can’t prevent Siri from talking back at all times, and it’ll keep responding out loud whenever you’re driving. This will also happen when you’re using headphones and your iPhone’s screen is off. But the rest of the time Siri will communicate with you using text. 

The post How to text Siri instead of talking to it out loud appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
You should learn how to take screenshots on a Chromebook (and edit them) https://www.popsci.com/diy/how-to-screenshot-on-chromebook/ Fri, 03 Nov 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=585607
Person sat on a wooden desk working on a open Chromebook laptop
Capture anything that happens on the screen of your Chromebook. Brooke Cagle / Unsplash

ChromeOS users have their own way of taking screenshots.

The post You should learn how to take screenshots on a Chromebook (and edit them) appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Person sat on a wooden desk working on a open Chromebook laptop
Capture anything that happens on the screen of your Chromebook. Brooke Cagle / Unsplash

Whether it’s to save messages for posterity, troubleshoot problems, capture memorable gaming moments, or run tutorials, the ability to take screenshots is so essential that it’s built into Windows, macOS, Android, and iOS.

ChromeOS, Google’s operating system for their Chromebook laptops, is no different and has easy-to-use tools to grab screenshots and screen recordings. The OS also provides some basic integrated editing tools for your captured content if you need them.

Start by launching the screenshot toolbar

Screen showing ChromeOS's Quick Settings Panel, where the screen capture option is visible.
You can find a Screen capture button on the Quick Settings panel. Google

Taking screenshots on a Chromebook will require you to summon the screenshot toolbar. There are several ways to do this, so pick the one that works best for you. 

Newer Chromebooks come with a dedicated screenshot key—it looks like a circle inside a rectangle and you’ll find it up on the top row of the keyboard. As you might have suspected, pressing this button brings up the screenshot toolbar at the bottom of the screen.

[Related: The best cheap Chromebooks in 2023]

If your Chromebook doesn’t offer this option, you can try the overview key: This is also on the top row of the keyboard, and looks like a rectangle with two vertical lines next to it. This key brings up an overview of all your open windows, but if you hold down Ctrl+Shift and then press it, the screenshot toolbar will appear.

Finally, you can get to the screenshot toolbar by bringing up the Quick Settings panel. Click the clock in the lower right corner of the screen and on the emerging menu, click the Screen capture button.

Customize how you take screenshots on ChromeOS

ChromeOS's Screenshot toolbar showing the different options to capture screen grabs and recordings.
Click on the different buttons to choose what kind of screenshot or screen recording you want to take. Google

No matter how you brought up the screenshot toolbar, once it’s open, your options are then the same. On the far left of it you can click either the camera icon or the video camera icon to switch between the ability to take screenshots and screen recordings.

The next three icons to the right let you grab different portions of the screen. Choose the first one to capture the whole screen, the second one to select part of it, or the third one to grab an image of a specific open window. Further to the right is a cog icon that opens the screenshot settings—most of them relate to videos, but you can also choose where in your Chromebook you save your screengrabs.

If you’re making a recording, you’ll be able to include audio from the Chromebook microphone, the feed from your webcam, along with clicks and presses from your mouse and keyboard. These are all useful options if you’re recording a tutorial or a gaming session, for example.

With everything set up the way you want, it’s time to take a screenshot or start a screen recording: For full screen captures, click anywhere on screen; to grab a specific part of the screen, use the crosshair tool to select a portion of it, or if you want to capture a single app window, just click it.  Your Chromebook will snap screenshots instantly, but for videos, you’ll see  a countdown before recording  starts. You can stop them whenever you want by clicking the red button on the shelf at the bottom of the screen.

Editing your screenshots on Chromebook

Screen showing ChromeOS's built-in screenshot image editor tool.
ChromeOS lets you easily annotate your screenshots right after you’ve grabbed them. Google

When you finish capturing a screenshot or screen recording, a small pop up appears in the lower right corner of the screen—click it to see the image or video stored on your Chromebook.

[Related: Revive your old computer by turning it into a Chromebook]

The pop up for screenshots also has an Edit button on it, though you don’t get this with screen recordings. When you click it, the image will open in the basic screenshot editor included with ChromeOS: Hover over the icons at the top to crop and rotate the picture, resize it, add annotations, or change the exposure, contrast, and saturation. 

It’s the annotation tool labeled Draw that’s perhaps most useful for screenshots. A new pane pops out on the right, showing different pen types and colors. Once you’ve made your choices here, you can start scribbling on the image. Click Done when you’re happy with the changes, or Cancel if you don’t want to save them. There’s also a link to launch the image in Google Photos on the web, where you’ll find more editing options.

The post You should learn how to take screenshots on a Chromebook (and edit them) appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
What is a router? It’s like your WiFi’s post office. https://www.popsci.com/technology/what-is-a-router/ Thu, 02 Nov 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=585792
the signal display on a home wifi router
Here's how your home router works. Stephen Phillips / Unsplash

This device distributes internet access to your phones and computers. Here's how it works.

The post What is a router? It’s like your WiFi’s post office. appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
the signal display on a home wifi router
Here's how your home router works. Stephen Phillips / Unsplash

A router is technically a device for directing packets of data between two or more computer networks, but it’s also shorthand for the piece of tech you’re probably thinking about right now: your home WiFi router

A normal WiFi router creates a local area network (LAN) in your home that allows your computers, smartphones, and other devices to connect to your internet service provider’s, or ISP’s, network—enabling access to the open internet. A router is essential if you want multiple devices in your home to access the web.

What does a router do?

A WiFi router works like a post office. It takes packets of data from your devices and directs them to your ISP’s network (where more routers can send them to their final destination). Most importantly, WiFi routers allow a number of devices to share the same internet connection.

For example, let’s assume you are reading this article on your smartphone on your home WiFi network. When you tapped the link to this article, your smartphone sent a series of data packets to your WiFi router requesting the contents of this article, which it then forwarded to your ISP’s network, and on to whatever server PopSci is hosted on. That server then sent the contents of this article back along much the same path to your WiFi router, which neatly handed it back to your smartphone.

Do I need a WiFi router?

If you want to connect more than one device to the internet in your home or place of business, then yes, you need a WiFi router. It’s the best way to create a WiFi network that will allow all your devices to go online at the same time. 

[Related: Device won’t connect to WiFi? Here’s what to do first.]

Most WiFi routers are also wired routers. They normally have multiple Ethernet ports so you can connect devices that don’t have WiFi capabilities, or if you want to directly access the high-speed, reliable connection that an Ethernet cable provides.

While you probably need a WiFi router, you might not need to buy one. When you sign up for an internet plan, most ISPs will send you both a modem, which allows you to connect to the internet, and a router, which creates a LAN for all your devices—though the two devices may be combined into one.

What is the difference between a router and a modem?

Although your ISP may combine both a router and a modem into a single device, the two serve different purposes. 

As we’ve discussed, a router creates a LAN and manages data on it. A modem connects your router to your ISP so you can actually browse the internet. 

If you have a router, but no modem, you will be able to create a LAN and send data between your devices. (This is how people used to play multiplayer games with their friends before online gaming.) You just won’t be able to connect to the open internet.

Now, if you have a modem, but no router, you will be able to connect one device to the internet at a time via an Ethernet cable, but you won’t have a WiFi network for multiple devices to connect to.

Are there advantages to getting your own router?

While the routers provided by ISPs will do the job, if you want the best WiFi router you can get, you will likely have to buy one yourself. There are a number of advantages to upgrading your WiFi router:

Of course, if you just want to connect a smartphone or two to the internet, then any router will do. Just make sure to update your router security settings to keep your browsing safe and secure.

The post What is a router? It’s like your WiFi’s post office. appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best 3D printers for kids in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-3d-printers-for-kids/ Thu, 02 Nov 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=585278
Four of the best 3D printers for kids are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

Modern 3D printers offer much greater accessibility than previous models.

The post The best 3D printers for kids in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Four of the best 3D printers for kids are sliced together against a white background.
Abby Ferguson

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The white Toybox 3D Printer for Kids is placed against a white background with a gray gradient. Toybox 3D Printer for Kids
SEE IT

The Toybox is one of the few 3D printers specifically designed for kids and includes a large catalog of ready-to-print toys.

Best budget The black and red XYZprinting Da Vinci Mini Wireless 3D printer is places against a white background. XYZprinting Da Vinci Mini Wireless
SEE IT

The enclosed printing area and budget-friendly price make this a great kid-friendly 3D printer.

Best for teens The black Monoprice Voxel 3D printer is placed against a white background. Monoprice Voxel
SEE IT

The Voxel offers plenty of bells and whistles for more flexibility as your teen learns to 3D print.

Dedicated 3D printers for kids can be a fantastic and fun way to encourage young minds to create and learn. 3D printers once required huge budgets and hyper-specific skills, but they have become very accessible in recent years. Now, these devices come in small, affordable versions that you can keep in your home. Some are even specifically designed for kids and can encourage problem-solving and creativity. They can also help teach subjects like science, art, and engineering. Whether you are looking at a device for fun, education, or both, the best 3D printers for kids offer an ideal mix of usability, flexibility, and accessibility.

How we chose the best 3D printers for kids

When choosing the best 3D printers for kids, we evaluated more than 15 printer brands and over 40 models of printers. We looked at performance, price, safety features, customer reviews, built-in features, and lifespan. We evaluated warranties and feedback from experts. Best-seller lists and purchaser responses were also taken into account. We included products that are appropriate for a variety of ages and skill levels to offer a well-rounded list for readers and those interested in child-friendly 3D printers.

The best 3D printers for kids: Reviews & Recommendations

While there are some very easy-to-use and kid-focused 3D printers, be aware that depending on the age of the child, a 3D printer will likely require adult supervision and help. The components of 3D printers get hot, and it can take some problem-solving to design items and use some of these devices. Luckily, the devices below are all ideal for beginners, making it easier for you to get started, even if you are new to the world of 3D printing. 

Best overall: Toybox 3D Printer for Kids

Toybox

SEE IT

Specs 

  • Weight: 6.6 pounds
  • Dimensions: 7.4 x 7.4 x 9.05 inches
  • Build volume: 2.7 x 3.1 x 3.5 inches
  • Compatible materials: PLA plastic
  • Print speed: Up to 60 mm/s

Pros

  • Simple, one-touch function
  • Comes with a growing catalog of ready-to-print toys
  • Includes multiple colors of filaments
  • Uses non-toxic PLA

Cons

  • Pricey for what it is
  • Build space is rather small

The Toybox 3D Printer for Kids is an ideal model for kids as young as eight who are interested in 3D printing. It was specifically designed with younger kids in mind, which means ease of use and simplicity at every turn. Printing is a single click away, with buttons and clickable images on the display screen so kids can easily run the show once they get the hang of it. Our reviewer found it to be a “fun factory for kids and beginners.”

With a huge catalog of toys, all you have to do is load and hit “print.” New toy builds are added weekly, creating an endless supply of projects to create. But you aren’t limited to what’s in the catalog; the Toybox app also allows for custom designs. The Toybox comes with eight rolls of filament in different colors, so you can get started right away without pricing out sizes or styles.

The Toybox is also our top 3D printer for kids due to its excellent safety features. It features an enclosed print area to keep curious hands away from hot elements. The easy-peel print bed means kids can take the prints out without needing a knife. And it uses non-toxic PLA (Polylactic Acid) plastic for filament, so you don’t have to worry about any harmful fumes. The small footprint and lightweight design are also a plus. 

Best budget: XYZprinting Da Vinci Mini Wireless

XYZprinting

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 22.1 pounds
  • Dimensions: 14.18 x 13.19 x 15.36 inches
  • Build volume: 5.9 x 5.9 x 5.9 inches
  • Compatible materials: PLA, Tough PLA, PETG, Carbon PLA, Metallic PLA
  • Print speed: Variable

Pros

  • Compatible with laptops, personal computers, or smartphones
  • Can heat to the suggested printing temperature in less than one minute
  • Offers a resolution of up to 200 microns
  • Affordable compared to other 3D printers

Cons

  • Only compatible with size 600G filament
  • No integrated display

The Da Vinci Mini Wireless 3D printer is one of the best budget 3D printers thanks to its absurdly fast heat-up time, which eliminates any downtime before printing. It requires very little setup; simply plug it in, connect your device, and go. This is a great feature for kids (or impatient adults). It’s also a surprisingly rare feature among 3D printers; most require assembly or calibration before they’re functional. Meanwhile, a boxed-in printing area prevents the potential for burns and locks away heated progress from small hands. 

You can use this 3D printer with a variety of filament types, including multiple types of PLA and PETG, though they each must be 600G. Speeds are kept in check with a nozzle and print bed that move simultaneously without sacrificing small details. A 200-micron printing delta will also keep projects accurate and looking great, but printing at that highest resolution will slow down the print time significantly.

At just 22.1 pounds, the Da Vinci Mini can easily be moved or stored away while still offering sizable printing abilities. As a “mini,” it’s extremely versatile and able to tackle a number of projects larger than its size suggests. Keep in mind that there is no integrated display, meaning it requires you to connect a device such as a laptop or phone in order to work. 

Best for speed: AnkerMake M5C 3D Printer

AnkerMake

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 20.94 pounds
  • Dimensions: 21.77 x 20.27 x 12 inches
  • Build volume: 8.66 x 8.66 x 9.8 inches
  • Compatible materials: PLA, PETG, ABS, TPU, and PLA-CF (Carbon Fiber)
  • Print speed: Up to 500 mm/s

Pros

  • Easy assembly with 3-step setup
  • One-click printing with access to free model library
  • Very fast printing
  • Accepts many different materials

Cons

  • Rather noisy
  • No display

Waiting around for a print to finish isn’t fun for anyone, especially impatient kids. But before you even get to printing, you’ll have to build the 3D printer. Luckily, the AnkerMake M5C is quick and easy to set up, with only three steps. You can be up and running in roughly 15 minutes. When it comes time to print, it is one of the fastest 3D printers on the market, with speeds up to 500 mm/s. You’ll still get 0.1mm print precision with those speeds, so you’ll have quality prints as well. 

The MC5 works with a wide range of filament types and can even print multicolor designs. You’ll have access to a free model library, so don’t need to figure out how to design your own if you don’t want to. It features automatic bed leveling and an easy-to-remove printing surface, which are both ideal features for beginners. 

There are some downsides to the M5C, especially as a 3D printer for kids. This isn’t an enclosed printer, so it is best suited for older children or used with supervision. There isn’t a built-in display, so you’ll need access to a computer, tablet, or smartphone in order to print. And the fan is pretty loud, which may be an issue for some. But it offers quality prints at a budget-friendly price, so we think those issues are worth it for those focused on fast printing speeds. 

Best for teens: Monoprice Voxel

Monoprice

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: 28.5 pounds
  • Dimensions: 15.9 x 15.7 x 15 inches
  • Build volume: 5.9 x 5.9 x 5.9 inches
  • Compatible materials: Any
  • Print speed: Up to 60 mm/s

Pros

  • Supports all of the most common types of filament
  • 2.8-inch touchscreen control panel 
  • Built-in camera to monitor print jobs
  • Easy to set up and use

Cons

  • Lengthier heat time
  • Touchscreen is cramped

The Monoprice Voxel is a 3D printer that comes with plenty of upgrades, including assisted leveling and hotspot capabilities. You can connect even without WiFi and then watch the progress from a built-in camera that allows you to check in or adjust when you’re out of filament. These alone are a perk for the price, let alone combined. Plus, they are both extremely rare in the world of electronics; few 3D printers offer their own hot-spotting abilities or remote camera options built directly into the device. 

The Voxel is easy to set up and use, so your teen should have no issues getting the hang of it. You can swap the print nozzle out in seconds with no tools needed. What tools you need come with the device, so you won’t have to hunt them down on the internet. It features a built-in sensor that alerts you to low filament levels and even pauses prints until you reload. 

Meanwhile, it prints at 60mm per second, whipping through any project up to 5.9 by 5.9 by 5.9 inches. The removable and flexible print bed makes it easy to remove your models when printing is done. Should it get damaged, you can swap it out for a new one. The entire printing area is enclosed, providing a level of safety for peace of mind. Offering lots of bang for the buck, this printer has plenty of bells and whistles without complicated knowledge to put it into action. 

Best for learning: FlashForge Finder 3

FlashForge

SEE IT

Specs

  • Weight: ‎36.6 pounds
  • Dimensions: 18.5 x 15.9 inches x 16.4
  • Build volume: 7.7 x 7.9 x 7.5 inches
  • Compatible materials: ABS, HIPS, PETG, PETG PRO, TPU 95A flexible filament, and third-party filaments
  • Print speed: Up to 180 mm/s

Pros

  • No assembly required
  • Operates at just 50 decibels for quiet printing
  • Multiple connectivity options
  • Comes with two interchangeable build plates

Cons

  • Not fully enclosed
  • Requires bed leveling before you can start printing

The FlashForge Finder 3 is designed for beginners wanting to learn the art of 3D printing. It comes fully assembled and comes with any tools you may need for maintenance down the road. You will need to level the bed before you start printing, but the process is quick and easy with the on-screen prompts.

The Finder 3 works with all of the most common filament types, even those from other manufacturers. That includes flexible filaments for when your child gets the hang of the basic materials. There is a low filament sensor and print recovery function so that you can resume printing where you left out should the power go out or you run out of filament mid-print. 

One big plus of the Finder 3 in a home setting is the quiet operation. It runs at 50 decibels, so if your kid is an avid printer (maybe they’re just getting into cosplay and working through some kinks), you won’t have to deal with constant loud noise. You’ll get two different build plates—a glass plate and PEI magnetic steel sheet—allowing you to experiment with printing on different surfaces. It also works with multiple sizes of nozzles, providing even more flexibility as you learn. 

Things to consider before buying a 3D printer for kids

When choosing the best 3D printers for kids, you have some decisions to make. Like any technology, there are products with flashy add-ons (and the flashy price tags to go with them), 3D printers that offer the basics, and everything in between

Learning curve and ease of assembly also play huge factors in whether or not your little one will enjoy the overall process. Kids can have shorter attention spans than adults, while 3D printers that have complicated maintenance issues will go over young users’ heads. 

Safety

When it comes to choosing a 3D printer for kids, safety is one of the first features you’ll want to keep in mind. One of the best ways to ensure a 3D printer is safe for kids is to purchase a version that is fully enclosed. A 3D printer with an open printing area can expose hot elements to curious hands, while a boxed-in version will be closed off while printing. If you opt for an open design and are using the device with young kids, you will want to supervise the printing process closely. If you are buying a printer for an older kid, however, you may be fine with an open 3D printer.

Another important safety consideration is the type of filament you’ll be using. Some filaments, such as ABS, PETG, and nylon, can produce harmful fumes while printing. You’ll need to use these in an area with proper ventilation but may want to avoid them altogether with kids around. PLA is one of the best filament types for kids as it is considered food-safe and non-toxic. Not all 3D printers can use every type of filament, however, so be sure to check compatibility before purchasing.

Printing speed

Kids are typically not the most patient folks. As a result, a 3D printer with relatively fast printing speeds may be a smart move to keep them engaged. Many devices will offer various printing speeds based on print quality (listed as resolution). Faster speeds generally mean lower resolutions. A print speed of at least 60 mm per second will be a good starting point, but you can also opt for a model with faster speeds.

Another aspect to consider is how long it takes to load your next printing color or to replace parts after they’re worn down. This can often take place mid-print, and if you don’t do your research, you could be stuck with a model that needs ample cooling or load time. 

3D printing with kids and sensory disorders

If you have a child who is sensitive to various senses, planning around that factor is at the forefront of your mind at all times. Take note that some senses that may trigger kids include loud noises, strange sounds, smells, and the feel of the plastic at various stages. 

Luckily, you can plan around these changes. Some models offer quiet printing, while the fully enclosed 3D printers for kids may help with fumes and noise as well. Be sure to look carefully at specs and features if you need to be cautious about sensory disorders. 

FAQs

Q: How much do 3D printers cost?

3D printers vary greatly when it comes to price. They typically start around $170 and can go up to nearly $1,000, it’s important to look at the features, size, and abilities that are important to you before purchasing. Not all budget models are low-quality, and not all luxury price tags are worth their weight. Refer to the above features to help find the best 3D printer for kids that will best meet your budget and expectations.

Q: Can a kid use a 3D printer?

Absolutely! Many 3D printer models are great for kids of all ages and skill levels. That said, they will likely involve participation on your part, and some require adult supervision, especially depending on the age of your children. 

Be sure to pay attention to various features to find one that is most appropriate for your kids. Some main features to consider are the size and weight of the 3D printer, if it has a closed-off printing area (which locks away heated elements of the printer), and the sound level. You should also consider your child’s interest level in building and planning, as some models offer far more sophisticated options.

Q: What age is safe for 3D printing?

Every child is different, but thankfully, there are many levels of 3D printers available. So long as you plan to help with the setup and printing process, kids can start as young as five to six years old. (So long as they are mature enough to keep their hands to themselves and follow instructions.) Starting around eight or nine, kids will be able to get more involved in the process, especially with models geared toward little kids.

Q: Are 3D printers hard to use?

Available 3D printers come with all skill sets in mind, from those who have never once even thought about using a 3D printer to those who have years of experience building electronics and attaching relevant software. Before purchasing a model, look at its capabilities and level of difficulty so you can easily find one that meets your expectations, wants, and preferred performance level.

Q: Can I make toys with a 3D printer?

Yes, you can absolutely make toys with a 3D printer. Many kid-focused printers will even come with a library of toys that are ready to print without any design input from you or your kid. They are also great devices for printing miniatures.

Final thoughts on the best 3D printers for kids

While many people still consider 3D printers advanced machines meant for older users, the current generation of devices can be a great way for little ones to flex their engineering and creative muscles. We recommend something that’s easy to set up and use but still offers room to grow for those who really take to it. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best 3D printers for kids in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The science behind mixing honey into cocktails https://www.popsci.com/diy/honey-cocktail-science/ Thu, 02 Nov 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=584784
A honey-infused Bee's Knees cocktail on a white plate on a table next to a jar of honey, some lemons, and a honey dipper.
Honey, alcohol, and citrus work well together. Depositphotos

You don't have to be an experienced bartender to get your guests buzzin'.

The post The science behind mixing honey into cocktails appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A honey-infused Bee's Knees cocktail on a white plate on a table next to a jar of honey, some lemons, and a honey dipper.
Honey, alcohol, and citrus work well together. Depositphotos

In Washington, D.C., a honey bee landed on a restaurant bar, creating quite a stir. But a man a few feet away, who was allergic to the insect’s sting, was not alarmed. This bee’s head and wings were metal, and its abdomen glass.

The bistro, Bresca, which means “honeycomb” in Catalan, likes to serve its riff on a Bee’s Knees cocktail in this bee-like vessel. And, to fit the theme, Bresca’s version swaps out simple syrup made of processed sugar and water for a syrup made entirely of honey and water. Unlike the sucrose-heavy simple syrups that many bartenders use in cocktails, honey is mostly fructose and glucose. Because fructose is sweeter than sucrose, honey goes a long way in a cocktail, and knowing how to use it is key to impressing your guests. 

Use different varieties of honey to your benefit

“Honey comes from thousands and thousands of varietals of plants,” says Juliana Rangel, associate professor of apiculture at Texas A&M’s College of Agriculture and Life Sciences. “Each plant has its own unique [taste] profile that’s not found in [table] sugars.”

[Related: How to build a garden that’ll have pollinators buzzin’]

When you are familiar with the varieties of honey available to you, you can choose the perfect honey to complement the other ingredients in a cocktail. “Horsemint honey,” Rangel notes, which comes from a plant that grows wildly across central Texas and other areas, “would be a great complement to a minty beverage like mojitos because the honey itself has those components.” Rangel also explains that because honey naturally contains acids, it combines well with citrus fruits often used in cocktails. 

Work with honey’s texture, not against it 

Honey, unlike a simple syrup, imparts mouthfeel, texture, and aroma, says Chris Gerling, senior extension associate at Cornell University’s College of Agriculture and Life Sciences.

“Because honey has this viscosity, this texture, and waxiness,” Gerling says, “it helps to soften and round out ethanol, which can be harsh. It can make the more strident parts of bitters… less aggressive.”

But because of honey’s thickness, it needs to be thinned out before it goes into a cocktail. At the urban apiary on the rooftop of the Hilton hotel in McLean, Virginia, the harvest goes to the kitchen and bar, where it’s mixed with equal parts warm water. This keeps it viscous and flavorful, but loose enough to be blended easily into a cocktail of whiskey, Cointreau, and muddled lemon slices so the oils from the skin can help round out the drink.

Actually, mind your beeswax

Bees work busily, visiting flowers and converting pollen and nectar in their stomachs to remove water and produce a simple sugar. A harvesting bee then passes this nectar to another bee that stores this sugar in the honeycomb, drying it out with their wings and capping it with beeswax. As it turns out, beeswax is another useful agricultural product and has its place around alcohol.

Bresca’s bartender works much like a bee. Not only is cocktail construction a busy process, but to infuse the right flavors into the drink, the bartender must move it from vessel to vessel, aging it in beeswax for nine days before it goes into the metal and glass bee.

Storing a cocktail in a jar with a beeswax-coated interior is a lot like putting wine into an oak barrel, Gerling explains. “Alcohol is a solvent. It’s extracting properties from the beeswax.”

Hawksmoor in New York City goes as far as infusing whiskey with melted beeswax harvested from Manhattan rooftops to make their Night Nurse cocktail. After time in the refrigerator, the bartender skims off all that rises to the surface—about a quarter of the initial wax. It’s the same process as fat-washing a cocktail, and the melted beeswax imparts floral flavors and a creamy mouth-feel. Hawksmoor also acid-adjusts their honey with malic acid from apples and citric acid for a cleaner taste.

[Related: 5 ways to keep bees buzzing that don’t require a hive]

While Rangel says beeswax can add an earthy and floral taste to a cocktail, she is less keen on aging alcohol in beeswax. Alcohol will degrade the wax particles, she says, resulting in leaching. And because bees visit agricultural crops and can carry pesticides on their bodies, those chemicals get imparted into the beeswax, giving it a chemical residue.

But it’s no different than eating a salad without the organic label stamped on the bag. And it’s probably no worse than the alcohol itself.

“In urban environments,” Rangel notes, “the pesticides are actually less.”

The post The science behind mixing honey into cocktails appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Stop spam texts with some help from your favorite messaging app https://www.popsci.com/diy/stop-spam-text-messages/ Wed, 01 Nov 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=584799
Person in a red sweater and a black coat holds a mobile phone on their hands and looks at the screen.
You don't have to put up with spam texts. Ruan Richard Rodrigues / Unsplash

Fight back against the deluge of unwanted messages.

The post Stop spam texts with some help from your favorite messaging app appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Person in a red sweater and a black coat holds a mobile phone on their hands and looks at the screen.
You don't have to put up with spam texts. Ruan Richard Rodrigues / Unsplash

Spam’s everywhere: even when you’ve dealt with the junk mail coming through the post and the unsolicited messages clogging up your email inbox, you’ve still got to deal with the spam you get through SMS and other messaging services.

Fortunately, today’s smartphones and messaging apps come with built-in tools for limiting the amount of spam you see. This means that with a little work, you can keep your conversation lists clean and free from junk.

But before technology can do the heavy lifting for you, help it help you by being more careful with your mobile number. To prevent it from ending up in sketchy marketing lists, don’t put it on forms or in any kind of communication if you can help it, and keep it away from your social media profiles on the web.

How to fight spam on iOS’s Messages

iOS menu showing the options to see filtered spam messages.
Messages for iOS filters out communications from unknown senders if you ask it to. Apple

The default Messages app on iOS, covering both basic SMS texts and Apple’s iMessage service, lets you block specific numbers: Tap the name or number at the top of any conversation, choose Info and Block this Caller. Blocked texts won’t show up for you at all, but the sender won’t know they can’t reach you. To manage the numbers you’ve blocked, go to Messages and Blocked Contacts from the iOS Settings screen.

[Related: Why it’s still so tricky to track spam calls and texts]

You can also have Messages filter out spam automatically, though this ability only works on texts you receive through Apple’s own iMessage service. From iOS Settings, go to Messages and enable Filter Unknown Senders. This will create a new Filters link at the top of the conversation list in Messages: Tap it to see messages from known senders, unknown senders, or all messages together. This might include new numbers that are not yet in your contact list, so it’s a good idea to check the unknown senders folder from time to time in case you miss anything.

You can also report junk messages to Apple, which doesn’t stop the sender from texting you, but it gives their information to both Apple and your carrier. The company doesn’t explicitly say what good this does, but we’re assuming repeat scammers end up on some kind of blacklist. To report junk, swipe left on a conversation in Messages, tap the red and white trash button, then pick Delete and Report Junk.

How to fight spam on Android’s Messages

Google's Messages app showing the spam folder filled with unread spam texts
Messages by Google attempts to automatically filter out spam. Google

For Android users, Google’s Messages should be their default platform for both SMS and RCS texts. This app has built-in anti-spam protections that will automatically detect spam and move it out of your way, but it’s not on by default. To turn on this feature, open Messages, tap your profile picture (top right), go to Messages settings and tap Spam protection.

To see messages that have been filtered out in the app, tap your profile picture, then Spam and blocked. From here, you can tap the three dots (top right), then Blocked numbers to see the current blacklist. While Messages often deals with spam automatically, if the platform isn’t sure about a text, you’ll see a “suspected spam” dialog appear at the top of the message when you open it. If this is indeed an unwanted message, tap Report spam on the dialog to get rid of it.

If the Messages app hasn’t picked up on a spam message, press and hold on it in the main conversation list, then tap the block icon at the top (it looks like a crossed-out circle). Finish by choosing OK on the emerging dialog box to block the number and move the message to spam. The emerging box also gives you the option of reporting the sender’s details to Google, which helps it better detect spam messages in the future.

Fighting spam on WhatsApp

WhatsApp pop up window showing the blocking options for users.
With a few taps you can block and report contacts on WhatsApp. WhatsApp

If WhatsApp for Android or iOS is your messaging app of choice, you can deal with spam messages without much fuss. On an iPhone, press and hold on a message in your conversation list to find the Block option. On an Android phone, press and hold on a message on the list, then tap the three dots (top right) and hit  Block.

This will prevent the person behind this number from sending you any more messages. On both Android and iOS, you’ll also see an option to report the sender to WhatsApp as well as blocking them. This means they’ll be known to WhatsApp as a potential spammer, and the platform might ultimately take action against them.

To see the numbers that you’ve blocked, and reinstate them if necessary, tap Settings, Privacy, and Blocked on iOS, or the three dots (top right), Settings, Privacy, and Blocked contacts on Android. WhatsApp won’t identify or filter out spam on your behalf, so it’s up to you to manage this list of contacts.

How to fight spam on Facebook Messenger

Facebook Messenger's Filtered messages inbox filled with unread spam messages
Messages from unknown people are called requests in Facebook Messenger. Facebook

Unlike WhatsApp, Facebook Messenger for Android and iOS does attempt to do some kind of spam filtering. Tap the three horizontal lines in the top right of the interface and choose Message requests—you’ll see the messages from people who you aren’t currently friends with or that Facebook Messenger thinks might be spam. Occasionally, you might find genuine messages in here, so it’s worth checking every now and again.

Messages in your main chats list are from people you’re friends with on Facebook, so in theory there shouldn’t be any spam here. But there are exceptions—maybe a spambot has been impersonating a friend of yours, or a scammer has gained access to their account. In that case, verify their identity through other forms of contact and let them know of the situation.

If you go into a conversation with someone, then tap their name at the top, you’ve got three options for dealing with spam or unwanted messages. The first one is Restrict, which won’t result in you blocking the person, but Facebook will auto-archive their messages and won’t send you notifications about them. The others are Block, where the person will no longer be able to message you, and Report, where you’re reporting the account to Facebook for spam messages or something else.

Fighting spam on other messaging apps

Instagram's message requests folder showing some unread messages.
Instagram filters out messages from people you don’t know. Instagram

We don’t have the space to cover every single messaging app here, but if you dig around you’ll find similar options to these in other platforms. You’ll at least get the ability to block and report spammers, even if your messaging client of choice doesn’t have its own spam filter installed.

[Related: Scammers busted in India for impersonating Amazon and Microsoft tech support]

If you use Instagram for Android or iOS to message people, you’ll see a Requests link at the top of your direct messages inbox—this is where the platform puts messages from people you’re not following. Meanwhile, you can block and report spammers whose messages get through from inside individual conversations: Just tap the sender name at the top of the chat to find the options.

Over on Signal for Android or iOS, messages from senders who are not in your contacts are flagged up as requests, though they still appear in the main chat list. When you open them, you can accept the message or block the sender. To block someone not flagged up in this way, tap the sender name or number at the top of a conversation and choose Block on the next screen.

The post Stop spam texts with some help from your favorite messaging app appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Google Calendar now lets everyone line up their schedules perfectly https://www.popsci.com/diy/google-calendar-appointment-schedule/ Tue, 31 Oct 2023 14:01:17 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=584691
Screen showing an appointment booking confirmation notification on google calendar
Google Calendar just made booking time easier. Google Calendar

It’s like Calendly, but Google.

The post Google Calendar now lets everyone line up their schedules perfectly appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Screen showing an appointment booking confirmation notification on google calendar
Google Calendar just made booking time easier. Google Calendar

There are few things more tedious than the back and forth between you and someone you need to meet. They may say they’re free whenever (me) but when you say a time and date, they wince and say that’s actually the only time they can’t get together (also me). 

To make coordinating meetings easier, Google has launched a new free Calendar feature called Appointment Schedule. The tool has been available to Google Workspace customers since early 2022, but earlier this month The Big G granted all users access to it—albeit with limitations, depending on whether they’re paying or not. 

With Appointment Schedule, you can set up chunks of availability on your calendar so that whoever wants to meet you—be that over a video call or in real life—can pick any time and date within your set parameters. The feature is highly customizable, and setting it up just right is the best way to make it work for you.

How to use Google Calendar’s Appointment Schedule

No matter the type of account you have, you’ll start setting up Appointment Schedule by going to Google Calendar in a web browser and hitting Create in the upper left corner of your screen. On the emerging menu, click Appointment Schedule, and a list of options will appear on the left side of the interface.

Screen showing Appointment schedule option menu
Create your appointment schedule from the same menu you’d create a new event in your calendar.

1. Give your appointment schedule a name. Free-tier users will only be able to create one schedule, whereas paying customers (or those who are part of a Google Workspace organization) can have multiple ones, so naming them will make things easier. Don’t spend too much time on this—you can always change it later. 

[Related: What to know about using Google Calendar’s Time Insights feature]

2. Set up an appointment duration. This will be the standard meeting duration. It can go from 5 minutes up to 23.1 hours. Why the extra 6 minutes? Who knows, but you and whoever you’re meeting will surely agree that an appointment that long is not exactly practical or productive. Don’t stress about cutting your meeting short: people can book more than one slot with you per day as long as the daily cap has not been met—more on that later. 

Screen showing meeting length options for Appointment scheduling on google calendar
Your appointments can be as short as 5 minutes and as long as… a little past 23 hours. Google Calendar

3. Set up your general availability. Under this setting, you’ll establish the big chunks of time you’re available for meetings. If you want this schedule to run forever until you turn it off, leave the Repeat weekly dropdown menu as it is. But if you just want to set up your availability for the next week, click on it and choose Does not repeat

Below this, you’ll see a list of the days of the week, and next to each one, start and end times for big availability windows. These are the chunks of time where people will be able to book an appointment with you, and you can add as many to each day as you want by clicking the plus sign to the right of each day. For example, if you’re available all day at the office, you could put down 9 a.m. to 5 p.m., but if you don’t want anybody to bother you from noon until 1:30 p.m., you can set up two availability windows around that. Once that’s done, you don’t have to repeat the settings for each day of the week—click the copy icon on the right (two rectangles on top of each other) and it’ll automatically replicate your general availability Monday through Friday.  

Screen showing appointment schedule settings
Prevent anyone from interrupting your midday walk by building your availability around it. Google Calendar

Note that by default, Saturday and Sunday will be set as unavailable for meetings, but clicking the plus sign will change that. 

4. Adjust scheduling. The next menus will let you fine-tune details of how you want Appointment Schedule to work. For example, you’ll be able to set when it kicks in (select Available Now under Scheduling window, or Start and end dates) and how far in advance people can book time with you (up to a year). 

You can also tweak Adjusted availability for specific dates where you’d normally be able to meet. This works exactly like the general availability option, but instead of days of the week, you’ll choose specific dates. So, if your teeth cleaning falls during a time you’ve marked yourself as generally available, you can add that date here and adjust your schedule as needed. 

If you need time to prepare for each meeting or just want to prevent your day from becoming an endless parade of people asking you questions, you can limit your availability time by setting up a Buffer time and Maximum bookings per day. The latter will set a cap of daily meetings, and you’ll appear as unavailable when that cap is met.

Google Calendar menu showing appointment schedule settings
Give yourself a 5-minute break in between meetings. You deserve it. Google Calendar

5. Choose how Google Calendar determines if you’re busy. Your appointment schedule will always check your Google Calendar to see if you’re busy so that there’s no overlap with any other meetings you might’ve accepted. 

But here’s the catch: If you’re not a paying Google user and have more than one calendar (a personal and a work one, for example), you will only be able to pick one of them to define availability. Paying Google account holders and members of Workspace organizations don’t have to choose, so they can continue to compartmentalize their lives in a more practical way. 

When you’re done with these settings, click Next to continue.

6. Edit your Appointment schedule details. On the following menu, you’ll find more settings you can mess around with:

Google Calendar menu showing meeting options for appointment scheduling
The last option might also be called “Nah, we’ll figure it out”. Google Calendar
  • Booking page photo and name: Your booking page is what people will see when they want to book time with you. The name and photo you use for your Google account will appear there, so if you want something that looks professional, make sure you change these settings in the My Account page.
  • Location and conferencing: Tweak this to establish where you’d prefer to meet the person booking your time. You can choose to have the platform automatically generate a Google Meet link upon booking, specify a physical place (your office, for example), or transform all of your meetings into phone calls. You can also choose None / to be specified later so you and your guests can decide how you’ll meet. 
  • Description: Here you can say anything you want about your meeting. Maybe you want to make it clear to your students that you won’t be responding to questions about their latest exam, or you want to let people know about the price of your services. Yes—if you’re a Google Workspace subscriber you can also set up a Stripe account to receive payment for your time. 

7. Set up a booking form. Under Booking form, you’ll be able to specify all the fields guests have to fill before booking time with you. By default, Google Calendar requires their first and last name, as well as their email address, but you can add more if you want. Click Add item—you’ll be able to ask people to provide their phone numbers or fill out a custom field, like their preference of coffee shop. Check the box next to Required to make something mandatory and finish by clicking Add item

On this menu, paying Google users will also see the option to require email verification. Click the box beside it to have people verify their emails when booking time with you using a non-Google email account. This extra step might be annoying for some, but it’s also extremely useful to prevent malicious bookings, especially if your booking page lives in a public place, like a social media bio. 

8. Make sure your guests know about your meeting. Now, choose whether you want to remind the people booking time with you about their appointment. Free-tier users will only be able to send guests a confirmation upon scheduling, whereas paying Google customers will be able to blast out as many email reminders as they want. 

Google Calendar menu showing options to send reminders to people booking appointments with you.
If you’re a paying Google customer you can send your guests multiple reminders about your appointment. Google Calendar

By default, the box next to Email reminder will be selected and set to send a message a day before the scheduled appointment. Click on the dropdown menu to choose another time frame or create a custom one. If you want to send more than one note, hit Add reminder

Finally, hit Save to finish setting up your appointment schedule. 

How to edit Appointment Schedule on Google Calendar

With all of those settings, you might expect there to be an easy-to-access page where you can go back to the Appointment Schedule creation menu—there is not. To tweak any details of your appointment schedule on Google Calendar, you’ll need to find its name on the calendar (think of it as a single event that repeats itself), open it, and click the pencil icon

Note that you might find multiple entries of your appointment schedule on a single day. This happens because the name of your appointment schedule will always appear on days when there are time slots to be booked, but there will also be specific appointments that were already scheduled. You’ll know the difference because the former will have a four-square icon next to it, while the latter will have the name of the person who booked the slot inside parentheses to the right of it. 

Google Calendar menu showing options to delete appointment schedule.
You can delete your appointment schedule partially or completely. Just make sure you select the right option. Google Calendar

When you open Appointment Schedule from the Calendar view, you’ll also see a trash can icon—click it to get rid of your bookable schedule partially or entirely. On the next menu, you’ll be able to delete that day specifically (This week only), that day in all upcoming weeks (All weeks), or erase the schedule entirely (All availability). Check the bubble next to the option you want and hit Save

How to invite people to schedule an appointment with you on Google Calendar

Google Calendar appointment scheduling booking page
This is what your booking page will look like to people wanting to meet with you. Google Calendar

To let people book time with you on Google Calendar, you’ll need to direct them to your booking page. This is a simple website where they’ll be able to navigate your availability and choose the time that works best for them. Note that they’ll only be able to see when you’re free to meet, but won’t see any details of your calendar. 

[Related: Syncing Google and Apple calendars is less annoying now]

To share this link, open your appointment schedule from Google Calendar and click Open booking page. From there, hit the Share button in the top right corner of your screen—click Copy link to copy the URL to your clipboard and share it with whoever you want on a platform of your choosing, such as email, text message, or social media. You can also go to the Website embed tab to get an embed code that will allow you to add a widget to your webpage that people can click to book time with you.  

The post Google Calendar now lets everyone line up their schedules perfectly appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to save videos from Facebook https://www.popsci.com/diy/how-to-save-videos-from-facebook/ Tue, 31 Oct 2023 09:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582654
A person typing on a laptop that is opened to Facebook.
You don't have to lose your video memories if you decide to delete your account. Depositphotos

If you've soured on the social media platform or just want to back up your files, you should know how to save videos from Facebook.

The post How to save videos from Facebook appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A person typing on a laptop that is opened to Facebook.
You don't have to lose your video memories if you decide to delete your account. Depositphotos

Facebook probably has a lot of your favorite videos—from lovely, mischievous puppies and memes, to all the memories from that wonderful trip to Europe last summer. They don’t have to stay there, though: You can easily save videos from Facebook, if you want to.

However, there are limitations. The platform doesn’t have a direct way to download videos, but there is an easy workaround to save footage that’s labeled as public or has been posted by your friends. This method doesn’t require downloaders or third-party software, and works on computers running Windows or macOS.

How to download your own Facebook videos

Downloading videos from your own Facebook page, whether they’re public, private, or only visible to your friends, is a pretty simple process.

1. Log into your Facebook account and go to your profile page.

2. Click Video in the Facebook navigation bar located just below your name and profile picture. On the next screen, you’ll see all the video content you’ve ever uploaded to the platform—find the video you want to download and click on it. 

3. Open the three-dot menu in the top right corner of your screen.

4. Click Download Video. An emerging window will appear allowing you to rename the video and save it wherever you like on your computer’s hard drive.

How to save public videos from Facebook

You can’t save Facebook videos that have been posted to a group or someone else’s channel if they’re labeled as private—you can only download them if they’re listed as public. That’s important if you’re trying to save a video for personal, historic, or accountability reasons. But there is one major caveat—this method involves snagging a mobile version of the video, which means the resolution will only be good enough to watch on a smaller screen. You can try watching a video you downloaded using this method in full-screen mode on a laptop, but you’ll notice a significant loss of quality. 

Another important note: Just because you can download a video doesn’t mean you can do whatever you want with it. If the video isn’t yours, it might be protected by copyright and you might need explicit permission from the owner before you share it on other platforms. Fail to do so and you could face legal repercussions. Keep all that in mind as you proceed.

1. Log into Facebook and find the video you want to download. Once you’ve located the video, click on the three dots in the upper right hand corner of the video.

The section of Facebook featuring a video of baseball player Kirk Gibson hitting his famous walk-off home run for the Los Angeles Dodgers in Game 1 of the 1988 World Series.
It’s easy to save your favorite videos from years ago. Screenshot: Facebook

2. Notice that the emerging menu doesn’t give you the option to download the video as it does with those uploaded to your profile or channels, so you’ll need to go a different route. Select Copy Link.

The menu on Facebook that allows you to save videos by selecting "Copy Link."
Facebook doesn’t let you download your videos directly. Screenshot: Facebook

3. Open a new window in your browser, paste the link into the address bar, and press Return or Enter—this will display the full URL instead of the shortened one. Once you see the complete address, replace the “www” with “mbasic“, making sure to keep the rest of the URL intact. MBASIC is a pared-down version of Facebook designed to make the service easier to use on older smartphones. After making the change, press Enter.

A browser window open to Facebook, showing where you can paste a Facebook link to save a video from Facebook.
You’ll need to save videos from Facebook one by one. Screenshot: Facebook

4. On this page, you’ll see a stripped-down mobile version of the video grouped with other public Facebook posts. Click the play button located in the middle of your video to open it in another tab.

A public Facebook page with a video of a baseball player with a play icon to start the video and open it in a new tab.
Just a few more steps before you can save your Facebook video. Screenshot: Facebook

5. While the video is playing, right-click on the screen and select Save Video As.

[Related: How to keep your Facebook account secure]

Los Angeles Dodgers player Kirk Gibson walking to bat in Game 1 of the 1988 World Series, with a menu over the video player showing where to click to save the video from Facebook.
Make sure you have space for the video on your hard drive. Screenshot: Facebook

6. A file explorer or finder window will open, allowing you to rename the video. By default, the video will save to the downloads folder on your hard drive, but you can choose another location within your system. Once you’ve renamed the file (if you want) and selected a download location, click Save.

Saving a Facebook video as an MP4 file on a computer.
Now you can save the file to the cloud or another storage location. Screenshot: Apple

7. Your system will save the video as an MP4 file, so you’ll need a media player that supports this file format to view it on your computer.

The post How to save videos from Facebook appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
This DeWalt jump starter belongs in your car’s emergency kit, and it’s 20% off pre-Black Friday at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/dewalt-jump-starter-deal-amazon-early-black-friday-2023/ Mon, 30 Oct 2023 14:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=584290
DeWalt power bank jump starters arranged in a pattern on a white background
Stan Horaczek

Winter is brutal on car batteries, so a jump starter is an emergency kit essential to prevent you getting stuck in the cold.

The post This DeWalt jump starter belongs in your car’s emergency kit, and it’s 20% off pre-Black Friday at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
DeWalt power bank jump starters arranged in a pattern on a white background
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Cold weather is coming, and your car isn’t excited about it. Low temperatures are brutal on batteries, so you may get stuck with a vehicle that won’t start. Right now, this DeWalt power bank jump starter is $127, which is 30 percent off of its regular $182 sale price. It’s not every day you can save money on a device that may someday save you back.

DEWALT DXAEJ14 Digital Portable Power Station Jump Starter – 1400 Peak Amps with 120 PSI Compressor $149 (was $181)

DeWalt

SEE IT

This battery pack has enough peak power output to jump-start vehicles with up to V8 engines. Plus, it works in the cold, which is when batteries tend to act up the most. A built-in USB port allows it to double as a portable charger to keep your devices powered if they die. Plus, it has an integrated compressor, so it can fill a leaking or under-inflated tire without finding a gas station. This is an essential piece of emergency gear for any car, especially if you’re going to be driving in cold weather.

More deals on car starters and trickle chargers

As the cold weather approaches, your car’s battery needs more and more love. Here are some devices Amazon has on sale to keep your car starting and running like it should:

The post This DeWalt jump starter belongs in your car’s emergency kit, and it’s 20% off pre-Black Friday at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to stop spam emails from destroying your inbox https://www.popsci.com/stop-spam-emails/ Tue, 02 Feb 2021 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/stop-spam-emails/
An old metal mailbox mounted on a wall and overflowing with junk mail.
Don't let your inbox be the digital equivalent of this. Thanhy Nguyen / Unsplash

Thine commercial emails shall not pass!

The post How to stop spam emails from destroying your inbox appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An old metal mailbox mounted on a wall and overflowing with junk mail.
Don't let your inbox be the digital equivalent of this. Thanhy Nguyen / Unsplash

Everything that makes email so convenient—free messages, quick delivery—also makes it susceptible to spam. With only a list of addresses (widely available online), professional spammers can merrily bombard their victims with as many messages as they like, and they have a host of automated tools to help them expand their volume and slip past filters.

It’s time to fight back against the deluge. Here are five strategies for banishing junk email and learning how to stop spam emails for good.

1. Train your spam filter

Three old mailboxes inset into a brown wall. The left-most and middle ones both have mail overflowing out of them.
So what you want your inbox to look like? Hint: you want the one on the far right. Andi Munich / Pixabay

These days, most email clients include some form of spam detection. Your provider will automatically red-flag messages that seem worthless or fraudulent and move them to a special folder where you can review them later. However, these filters will work a lot better if you tell them when they chose well or made a mistake. In other words, the spam filter isn’t an end-all solution for getting rid of spam emails—you can configure its settings and actions to improve its performance. If you’re trying to figure out why you’re getting junk mail in your inbox despite having a spam filter enabled, you probably need to train it a little more.

For instance, every time you open an email in the Gmail web app, you’ll see a Report Spam button (it looks like a stop sign with an exclamation mark inside it) at the top of the page. Click this when you encounter any message that managed to sneak past Google’s spam filters. On the other hand, if you check your Spam folder and find a genuinely useful email, open it and click the Not spam button at the top of the page or the Report not spam banner in the email itself.

[Related: Why you should use whitelists to manage your email]

In Outlook, you mark a message as spam by selecting it in your inbox, selecting Report from the toolbar at the top, and clicking on Report Junk. When you’re browsing the Junk Email folder, restore a flagged message to your inbox by selecting it, clicking Report, and choosing Not Junk.

Just about every email client will include options like these. Simply dig into the settings or review the buttons that appear on the page.

2. Unsubscribe from unwanted messages

A redheaded woman in a coffee shop smiling while she uses a laptop.
Emptying your inbox of those annoying emails will sure make you smile too. Brooke Cagle / Unsplash

Many items that we think of as spam—such as newsletters and emails about deals—do aim to make your life better. However, these well-intentioned messages add up, cluttering up your inbox until they become stressful. Rather than deleting them en masse, look for unsubscribe links to stop receiving emails from that source.

These links usually appear at the bottom of an email—because most of the time, the sender doesn’t really want you to unsubscribe. If you do take time to hunt down these links, they often direct you to a page that asks you to confirm your decision. Once you do so, most sources will respect your wishes and remove you from their mailing lists. For Gmail users, this process is even easier, because if Gmail detects an unsubscribe link in the body text, it displays that link prominently at the top of the email. You can enjoy the same automated action in the Mail app on iOS—it will copy any unsubscribe link in the body text and display it at the top of the email, near the toolbar.

Another option is Unroll.me, a third-party service that scours your inbox for messages from mailing lists and gives you the option to unsubscribe in one click. If you’d like to keep receiving updates, but would prefer to see fewer of them, Unroll.me can condense all of those emails into a single daily message that’s easier to digest. The extension works with Gmail, Outlook, Yahoo Mail, AOL mail, iCloud, Hotmail, MSN, and Live Mail. Although it’s free and it will help you stop unwanted emails, it makes money by collecting anonymized email data on shopping trends, so be aware of that if you plan to sign up.

3. Use an alternative email address

A lot of unwanted messages make their way into your inbox when you order a product or subscribe to a mailing list—and then the company automatically signs you up to receive unwanted marketing updates or shares your contact information with an advertiser. One workaround for this problem is to create an email alias or a secondary address that you can use for some of these web activities, such as online shopping or hotel booking.

While another email address won’t stop spam from arriving, those unwanted messages will appear in a secondary email account rather than your primary one, keeping your main inbox free from clutter. If you already use Gmail, Yahoo Mail, Outlook, or Mail.com, you can set up a decoy account for free, following the same process you used to establish your original account.

[Related: 4 tips to help you achieve “Inbox Zero” in Gmail]

Depending on your email client, you may not need an entirely new account. Many clients will accept variations of your existing email address. For example, Gmail addresses ignore dots, so emails sent to “johnsmith@gmail.com” and “j.ohnsm.ith@gmail.com” will both arrive at the same inbox. Your emails will also come through if someone sends a message to your email address followed by a plus sign and extra words—so messages addressed to “johnsmith@gmail.com” and “johnsmith+extra@gmail.com” will both land in your inbox.

Why is this helpful? It means you can enter a variation on your current email address whenever you sign up for or buy something, and then create a filter to corral anything sent to that address in its own folder. To create a filter in Gmail, click the settings button (cog icon) on the top right, followed by See all settings and then Filters and Blocked Addresses. Click Create a new filter, enter your tweaked address in the To field, and then decide what you want to do with these types of emails. You could mark them as read immediately, archive them, slap a shared label on them, or some combination of these actions.

4. Download third-party extensions to stop spam emails

The MailWasher app interface.
Want a little help? The MailWasher app can be a great sidekick when you’re fighting spam emails. MailWasher

If a lot of junk mail slips through your email client’s spam filter, try adding a third-party app to supplement it. This type of service nabs messages as they travel between an email server (the cloud where messages are stored) and an email client (the display where you actually see your messages).

For a free option, we like the effective, easy-to-use Mailwasher. You just plug in your email login details, and this service applies a series of intelligent filters to identify unwanted messages. You can review the captured emails online before they show up in your inbox. For more features, including access to the app version of Mailwasher and support for more than one email address, you’ll need a Pro account, which costs $50 per year.

On macOS, users recommend SpamSieve ($40 with a free trial available). Like Mailwasher, it relies on an intelligent filtering system that gets smarter over time by recognizing the messages you agree are spam or mark as safe. As it adjusts to your preferences, it will only let genuine messages through.

The free SpamCop service works slightly differently. It allows you to report bad actors to internet service providers (ISPs) so they can block these messages at the source. While it requires more effort—you’ll need to report the unsolicited mass emails you receive—you can find help on the SpamCop website. You also get the pleasure of knowing that your efforts are helping others.

5. Protect your email address

We’ve already spoken about setting up a second email address to take the brunt of the spam you receive. In addition, you should aim to keep your primary address as secret as you can. That means hiding it from public pages, such as your personal website or your Twitter profile, where bots and scammers can collect it.

If your job requires that you make your contact information available, try writing out your email address longhand—something like “John Smith at Google’s email service”—whenever you need to display it on the web. This format makes sense to a human, but an automated bot won’t recognize it as an email address it can collect. You’ll often see this tactic on online contact forms.

In addition to collecting email addresses with bots, some email marketers will use what’s called a tracking pixel, or related technology, to figure out which email addresses are valid. This means they’ll send messages to a variety of addresses, and as soon as a real person opens one of these pieces of bait, the sender will receive a confirmation that the address is in use. To keep your contact information private, avoid opening messages you know are spam—just trash them directly.

Another way to fight tracking pixels is to turn off images—if images won’t load, neither will tracking pixels. Gmail users can also lean on the Ugly Email extension, which highlights emails that contain trackers.

Because marketing methods evolve constantly, neither of these options are 100 percent foolproof, but they can still reduce the number of bad actors who get their hands on your email address.

The post How to stop spam emails from destroying your inbox appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
4 science tricks to scare up a better Halloween costume https://www.popsci.com/halloween-costume-science-tricks/ Mon, 15 Oct 2018 21:30:11 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/halloween-costume-science-tricks/
A woman wearing ultraviolet makeup or body paint on half her face, standing under a blacklight.
This was the least-creepy image we could use at the top of this story. Oni Banerjee / Unsplash

Lights, tricky knots, and just a bit of body horror can really set you apart at the costume party.

The post 4 science tricks to scare up a better Halloween costume appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A woman wearing ultraviolet makeup or body paint on half her face, standing under a blacklight.
This was the least-creepy image we could use at the top of this story. Oni Banerjee / Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Halloween is coming, which means the race for the most awesome costume is on. Fortunately, a little science can add some serious fright to your get-up. These tricks only require a little advance preparation, but your friends will remember the result for years to come.

Apply makeup that only appears under ultraviolet LEDs

Want to play Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde? You can paint your skin with glowing scars, creepy eye makeup, and veiny hands… that only appear under ultraviolet light. Add some UV LEDs to your costume, and you’ll be able to turn this makeup on and off with a switch. Alternatively, amp up your vampire look with similar UV-reactive makeup that’s visible under normal light but produces fluorescence in the presence of a blacklight.

To put this look together, you’ll need specially-formulated face paint that reacts to ultraviolet light. Brands like Moon Glow and Midnight Glo specialize in this type of UV-reactive makeup. For hair products that glow, look for gel or dye from Manic Panic.

Once you have your face paint, you’ll need some wearable LEDs. Look for UV-emitting strip lights, sometimes called “blacklight” strips, which are widely available at hardware stores and online. Choose lights that you can cut and that come wired to a connector, preferably a DC receptacle. If you can’t find a strip with a DC power source, get one with a solderless connector, buy a separate DC receptacle at an electric supply store, and connect the two in seconds—no tools required. In the long haul, this setup is not the sturdiest, but you only need it for a night.

For power, you have a couple options. A battery holder with a DC plug can attach directly to your light strip. Or grab a power bank like the one you use to charge your phone, attach it to a USB-to-DC converter, and connect that to your LEDs. However, before you plug in the power bank, check its maximum instantaneous amperage limit, usually found in the user’s manual. Compare that to the overall amperage the LED strip will pull, which you’ll find in the specifications sheet. If the light strip draws more amps than the battery can provide, the power will drain too quickly, potentially destroying the power bank.

Now that you have your materials in hand, use fabric glue or pins to attach the light strip to your clothing. Put on your UV-enabled costume, apply your UV-reactive makeup, and test the range of the lights in total darkness. This should show you how the effect is working and whether you need to tweak the setup.

Use makeup glue to mimic puncture effects

If you’re planning to dress as a zombie, a heavily memed Skyrim guard, or pretty much anything with punctured skin, add a little interactive element to your costume by inserting a few blood-spattered rods, sticks, or arrow shafts into your body, then letting people pull on them. Of course, you’re not really going to stab yourself with pointy objects—but some stage blood and makeup glue will give people the illusion that you did.

A quick warning: If you’re allergic to latex, check the makeup glue ingredients carefully. Many of them use latex, and anaphylactic shock is not a fun costume trick!

First, find a spot on your body where your skin is relatively loose. To test it, lay the stick or rod flat on the surface and pinch two ridges of flesh together around the object.

[Related: A stork impaled by a 30-inch spear flew thousands of miles to make it home]

Once you’ve picked a good spot, apply the makeup glue to that area, put your prop in the middle, and pinch your skin together lightly, just enough to cover the middle of the pin and keep it in place. To ensure that nobody notices you’ve glued your skin together, you might want to fill in the pinched area with a little foundation. Complete the effect with a bit of fake gore.

At your soiree, just ask somebody to grab and pull. Make sure to yell in pain, or perhaps issue a ghoulish chuckle, as the object slides right out.

Pretend to pull a scarf through your neck

Want to really sell your ghost costume? Have somebody grab your tie or scarf, give it a tug, and watch them gape in shock as it seems to slide through your incorporeal neck. What you’re really doing is creating a loose knot that easily pops off (and isn’t visible from the front). For this trick, you’ll need a scarf or tie about 4 or 5 feet long, and some time to practice and really get the hang of the knot.

Here’s how it works: Put the scarf around your neck, take the ends in your hands, and pull gently until the left-hand side hangs longer than the right. Cross your arms, right over left, with your right hand holding the scarf a little higher than your left. Pull your right hand across, forming a u-bend. Wrap the part of your scarf held by your left hand around your neck, over the bend, and follow with your right, gently resting the loop on the back of your neck. This is a little tough to visualize, so check out the video below for more details.

Knot enthusiasts might find these steps familiar. That’s because the method mimics the first two steps in a basic quick-release hitch. For novice tie-ers, this trick may take a little practice.

Finally, ask someone to tug on the left-hand end, and the scarf will seem to fall “through” your body. Once you’ve got the knot down, you can re-tie your neck gear and endlessly repeat the performance.

Play undead with no pulse and endless guts

If you’re going to be one of the legion of Halloween zombies, you should give your costume a couple touches that make it stand out.

The first trick just requires a rubber ball. Hide it in your armpit, ask someone to take your pulse from your wrist, and then squeeze the ball. This will temporarily block your radial artery, which delivers pulsing blood to your wrist. Search as they might, your friend won’t detect the tell-tale sign of life.

[Related: How William Harvey discovered blood circulation]

If that’s too subtle, try a new take on the old endless hanky gag. Get some red “silks,” available at magic shops (you can also make your own with bolts of fabric), and knot them together end to end with a simple square knot. Then fold your ties to form a stack and twist them until they fit in something small and portable, like a cardboard tube.

Stick the tube in your shirt, leaving the end sticking out, and ask somebody to play pull-the-intestine. For bonus points, tie something gross, like a rubber heart, to the last tie. This is particularly great if you really ham it up; shriek, make gagging sounds, or hide a handy fake blood capsule so it creates a grotesque mess.

This story has been updated. It was originally published in 2018.

The post 4 science tricks to scare up a better Halloween costume appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How does 3D printing work? https://www.popsci.com/technology/how-does-a-3d-printer-work/ Sat, 28 Oct 2023 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=584066
A 3D printer printing a green plastic shoe.
Print any oddly shaped object with a 3D printer. Depositphotos.

Rapid prototyping is a relatively simple process that can be scaled up or down.

The post How does 3D printing work? appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A 3D printer printing a green plastic shoe.
Print any oddly shaped object with a 3D printer. Depositphotos.

Since 3D printers debuted in the 1980s, the devices have been used to build meat, chocolate, human organs, clothing, cars, and houses. It’s more mainstream than ever, and you can buy a machine for less than $200.

Also called additive manufacturing or rapid prototyping, 3D printing has many advantages over the more traditional subtractive manufacturing methods, where you start with a hunk of metal or wood and remove material using mills, drills, and other tools. The two main benefits are that 3D printers produce a lot less waste and can do a better job creating objects with complex shapes. Instead of an involved assembly process, everything can be made in one place.

“Mass manufacturing methods, almost all of them are quite fixed,” says Diana Haidar, associate professor of mechanical engineering at Carnegie Mellon University. “You can only remake the exact same parts over and over again. But people also want custom parts. That’s where 3D printing has a niche.”

So how, exactly, does a 3D printer work?

What is 3D printing?

Consider the type of printing most people are very familiar with: Printing with ink on paper. This is 2D printing, because there’s an area with an x-axis and a y-axis, so there are two degrees of freedom. With 3D printing, there’s a third dimension: height. The files you feed into 3D printers are 3D images that a software program then slices into horizontal layers.

“The idea is that I have a 3D object, and I’m going to slice it into many individual layers. We use slicer software for that,” Haidar explains. “Then there’s usually a two-axis head that will move around and build a singular layer. Then either the head goes up or the bed [that the object is being built on] will drop. But there is a z-axis change so we can build up one layer at a time.”

One of the most common types of 3D printing is fused deposition modeling, or FDM. “It’s the cleanest with regards to space,” says Haidar.

With this method, there’s a spool of winding filament (usually plastic or polymer) that is fed into the machine’s head. Inside the head, there’s a heating unit that melts the polymer. Polylactic acid (a type of plastic) is one of the most commonly printed 3D materials, because it’s cheap and has a fairly low melting point of around 180 degrees Celsius (350 degrees Fahrenheit). When it’s used as a feeding material, engineers usually set the 3D printer to around 200 Celsius (390 Fahrenheit) to make sure the material is going to be melted as it’s extruded from a little nozzle, but can then harden back into form. The smaller the nozzle, the more resolution there is in the printed object. 

The second most popular method for 3D printing is an older technique called stereolithography, or SLA. In this case, photo-curable resin is the print material instead of a solid spool. This technique involves a bath of sticky, goopy resin sitting in a glass tank that’s uncured; a UV laser beam and multiple mirrors cure one layer at a time. Every time a layer is cured, it becomes solid, gets sheared from the bottom glass in the tank, and then gets lifted from the bath—eventually a solid, cohesive structure emerges.

The third most popular 3D printing method is called laser powder bed fusion. This technique works well for printing or compressing together metals. To start, there is a big, flat bed of metal powder, and a laser carves out a shape, melting together the desired forms. Once a layer is complete, the bed drops, and a roller distributes a new fine layer of powder across the surface. 

Another common 3D printing method is polyjet printing, which allows engineers to work with a wide array of nozzles and materials (from hard to soft) in one print.

What kinds of materials can be 3D printed?

Although 3D printers most commonly print with plastics, they can also be tweaked to print metal-embedded materials, ceramic-embedded materials, and wood-embedded materials. Different types of fibers or particles can be mixed in with polymer binders to give objects varied properties.

When specialized machines print organs (such as a heart), multiple nozzles can be prefilled with syringes to inject different types of cells. Instead of a spool, the machine injects into a hydrogel. 

How much are 3D printers?

The cheapest 3D printer on the market is around $200, and those machines are the ones used by engineering students to make quick mockups. But spending less money on a machine like this comes with trade-offs. The cheap ones tend to be more finicky and break down more often. They’re also not as consistent at producing the same object over and over again. For example, the polymer, or plastic building material, can warp if there’s too drastic a change in temperature from the inside of the nozzle to the external environment. “You don’t see that as much in the big machines because they have clearly enclosed environments that are temperature-controlled, and they might even have a cooling cycle,” Haidar explains.

A midrange desktop machine for FDM printing will usually go for $3,000, and this price includes software packages. A more high-end machine that can manufacture bigger objects with a more durable starting material can cost $200,000. Spending all that money comes with big benefits down the line. “Your maintenance cost is quite a lot lower. It’s easier to print materials that the little machines would struggle with,” says Haidar. “Those machines give you the closest thing to a professionally manufactured part.” 

The fanciest machines print using metal, like aluminum. The metal 3D printers can cost up to $1 million, since they have to be operated in a room that’s very well-controlled, ventilated, and has the ability to suppress explosions (if they happen).

The post How does 3D printing work? appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
A woodworker’s guide to choosing the right saw for each cut https://www.popsci.com/diy/types-of-saws/ Fri, 27 Oct 2023 17:03:29 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=583968
Two older men working in a well-lit white room, using two different types of saws to cut wood: a jigsaw and a miter saw.
There are plenty of different types of saws in the world, but they're each good at specific things. Annie Gray / Unsplash

How to know when to use the table saw, pull out a hand saw, or grab something else.

The post A woodworker’s guide to choosing the right saw for each cut appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Two older men working in a well-lit white room, using two different types of saws to cut wood: a jigsaw and a miter saw.
There are plenty of different types of saws in the world, but they're each good at specific things. Annie Gray / Unsplash

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

There are a few variables to think about when deciding which tool to use when you need to cut a piece of wood. First, figure out what you own that’s capable of making the cut. Sometimes that limits the options to one tool, and that’s what you should go with. But when multiple tools will do the job, you’ll have to do a little more calculus. 

Don’t worry, I’m not talking about actual calculus. You will, however, have to run some mental calculations that weigh your comfort using the qualified tools against the difficulty of what you’re doing. For complex or new cuts, I like to use the tool I’m most comfortable with. Simpler cuts, meanwhile, might give me an opportunity to practice with a tool I don’t use often. Finally, because I work in a small shop, I always consider a tool’s accessibility. A saw that’s already out and plugged in is far more attractive than a tool I have to dig out from the back of a cabinet.

If you’re new to woodworking, or just looking for more insight on the choices you have to make in the shop, here’s a primer on the types of saws you’re likely to have access to, and the cuts they’re best at. 

Table saw: good for long cuts

A person using a crosscut sled on a table saw.
You can use a table saw for multiple types of cuts if you have the right jigs. Anna Shvets / Pexels

Table saws are built to make rip cuts, which means slicing long boards in the same direction as the grain. If you’re trying to trim a 2-by-6 down to 4 inches wide, a table saw is the best tool you can use, hands down.

Most table saws are built with slots on either side of the blade, called miter slots. These allow jigs to slide over the tabletop to help you make different types of cuts. One example is a miter gauge, which probably came with your saw. This jig can hold boards at different orientations to the blade, allowing you to cut a wide range of angles. You can also make larger sleds, called miter or crosscut sleds to cut a variety of non-rip cuts.

[Related: How to tune up a table saw]

Another jig category rides along the table saw’s fence instead of in a miter slot. A jointer sled or tapering jig, for instance, uses the fence as a reference point to make perfectly straight or tapered cuts, depending on how it’s set up. Other fence-referencing jigs can stand boards on end. A tenoning jig, for example, allows you to clamp a board vertically to cut tenons into the ends of the board, a job that would be quite dangerous without the stability the jig provides. 

Where a table saw falls short

There are a few limitations to table saws. The first is that they aren’t versatile unless you build (or buy) the right jig, which can take hours and shrink your bank account. Not to mention the storage space those jigs take up—it might not be worth spending time or money on one if you’re only going to use it one or two times. Of course, if you can’t figure out a safe or effective way to make a cut without a jig, go ahead and add one to your collection. Table saws can also only cut straight, so they’re useless if you need a nice curve. 

Finally, most table saws that a homeowner or hobbyist would own can only cut boards as large as the user can lift and maneuver. Cutting full sheets of plywood on my table, for example, is almost impossible, especially by myself. Likewise, the blade on my saw can only be raised to about 3.5 inches. Even if I flip the board over and cut twice, I can’t cut anything thicker than 7 inches on the table saw alone. So, versatile as it is, this can’t be the only saw in your shop. 

Miter saw: good for angled cuts

A gray-haired man cutting a piece of wood on an angle while using a miter saw outside.
Miter saws are great for cutting wood on an angle. forestpath / Depositphotos.

If you’re only looking to cut boards to length, or add angles to the ends, a good miter saw might be your best bet. All you’ll need to do is place the board on the flat surface beneath the blade, pull the trigger, and lower the saw to make the cut. If you pair a miter saw with a good stop block system, it’s easy to make repeated cuts of uniform length.  

The entire blade assembly can turn to make angled cuts on the face of the board, tilt to angle the end of the board, or tilt and turn to angle both the face and the end. This dual angling capacity makes these great saws for the complex cuts needed for crown molding. However, achieving the precision required for that kind of finish work requires you to really set up and fine-tune your machine.

A miter saw’s limitations

Like a table saw, a miter saw has de facto size limits. For one, miter saws have a maximum board width they can cut through, though you can flip the board over to extend that. Perhaps more importantly, miter saws are limited by how large a board you can lift, because this is another type of saw you have to bring the wood to.

Track saw: good for boards you can’t move around

If you’ve got a board too big to realistically or safely cut on a table saw or miter saw, a track saw should be your next choice. These are basically circular saws that lock into and follow a straight edge that you clamp to your board. A track saw is the perfect tool to break down large sheets of plywood into usable sizes, or to trim up the edges of a table or countertop that’s simply too long to feed into a table saw. They can also tilt to cut at an angle, so they’re perfect for chamfering the underside of a table without the risk of tearout that you might get from a large router bit.

Unlike table saws, track saws don’t require a reference edge to cut. So if you want to cut a straight edge on a live-edge slab, for example, you can align the track where you need it, and make the cut.

When not to use a track saw

While they’re one of the best homeowner-accessible tools for cutting large sheet goods or live-edge slabs, track saws are quite a bit slower than table saws because of the increased measuring and setup time. They also don’t have the same ability to accept jigs, so they lack some of the versatility of a table saw. 

Band saw: good for weird, curved cuts

A person wearing a black t-shirt using a band saw to cut a piece of wood in a woodshop.
Band saws can take up a lot of space in a workshop, but they’re good for certain cuts. Ono Kosuki / Pexels

Band saws can make most of the same cuts miter and table saws can, but I’ve found they don’t do them quite as well. There are, however, two types of cuts where a good band saw stands alone.

First is strangely shaped cuts. Band saws are great for cutting curved pieces or somewhat intricate shapes out of a board. The band saw is limited to staying on the outside of the shapes—you can’t cut a circle in the center of another board, for instance, but you can cut a board into a circle. 

[Related: The best safety advice for any beginner woodworker]

The second area is resawing, or sawing a thick board in half. Technically, a table saw can do this too, but a band saw can do it without you having to flip the board over and make two passes. Larger band saws, like a 14-inch one, can cut much taller pieces than a table saw can even with flipping.

Where band saws fall short

Band saws do require a bit more practice and experience to both maintain and use well than either a table saw or miter saw do. The blade has to be properly tensioned, the fence and guide bearings have to be set up properly, and you need to have the right blade for your job. It’s also easy for a band saw blade to get stuck in the project, and potentially snap, which can ruin your workpiece, or worse, injure you.

Jigsaw: good for curved cuts on larger pieces of wood

A person wearing a green baseball cap using a jigsaw to cut the edge of a skateboard deck out of a piece of wood.
If you’re making skateboards, like this guy, a jigsaw might be right for you. Yaroslav Shuraev / Pexels

If you need to make a weird-shaped cut and your workpiece is too large and awkward for a band saw, consider a jigsaw. This tool is a handheld saw with a thin, vertical blade sticking out of the bottom that moves up and down to make cuts. Jigsaws can cut curves and corners alike, and have a tight turning radius to make detailed work easier. There are also numerous available blades for different kinds of cuts. Some are best for rough, fast cuts, some are thin for getting into tight spaces, and others have lots of teeth for finer finish work. Jigsaws can also cut shapes on interior sections of a board, provided that you can drill a hole large enough to fit the blade.

A jigsaw’s limitations

Unless you have a lot of practice and a high-end machine, a jigsaw will serve you best as a rough cutting option. You’ll want to cut your shape a bit oversized and then sand it down to finished dimensions. Jigsaws are also a bit harder to control than a band saw, so it’s easy for the blade to wander. And blades might bend and flex inside the wood, so the cut on the bottom of the board might not be perfectly in line with the cut on the top. Finally, jigsaws require you to figure out how to clamp your workpiece into place with open air below it, because the blade penetrates all the way through the wood.

Scroll saw: good for finish work

A person cutting a reindeer figurine out of wood on a scroll saw.
Few saws can make these cuts, but a scroll saw can. Beauty of Nature / Pixabay

If you’re looking for intricate detail and artistic through-cuts in your boards, a scroll saw—sort of a combination between a band saw and a jigsaw— is the tool for you. The saw’s short blade vibrates up and down like a jigsaw, but is secured to the machine at the top and bottom so you can move the board over a table like a band saw. This setup offers incredible precision, as well as the ability to disconnect the blade, slide it through a hole in the board, and reattach it. The detachable blade means you can start cuts in the middle of the board like a jigsaw, too.  

When not to use a scroll saw

It’s worth noting that scroll saws cut fairly slowly. Because they’re designed for precision rather than power, you won’t be able to move through a lot of material at once. That means they’re not a feasible option for processing wood—you shouldn’t use one to rip boards or crosscut anything to length. There’s also a bit of a learning curve, as it can take hours of practice to get the most out of a scroll saw. I’m still terrible with them, though I’ve only used one a handful of times.

That said, there are few better ways to cut beautiful scenes into your wood.  

Hand saws: a dimension of their own

While power tools tend to be faster, and, frankly, more accurate in beginner hands, not every situation needs electricity. Sometimes the gentle rasp of a saw moving back and forth through the board is exactly what your project requires. And I truly find an accurate hand-sawn cut quite a bit more satisfying than one I just pushed through the table saw. Though of course, the odds that I mess up that hand-cut are quite a bit higher.

There are too many types of hand saws to cover in this article, but I’d like to talk about the two I use most often. 

Pull saw: good for low-effort cuts

A man kneeling on the floor of a woodshop, using a pull saw to cut through a small piece of wood.
A pull saw could change your opinion of hand sawing. Ono Kosuki / Pexels

If you’ve never used a pull saw, I recommend trying one, because it’ll change your outlook on hand sawing. The saws many of us grew up using to slice branches off of trees are saws that cut on the push stroke. Pull saws, as their name implies, cut on the pull stroke. Conveniently, this is the direction where we are both strongest and the most stable. When you push a saw through wood, the tip becomes more and more unstable as there’s nothing locking it in place and preventing it from vibrating back and forth. When you pull it toward you, however, the force of the board and your hand on the handle keep the blade steady and smooth through the entire cut.  

The easiest cut to make with a pull saw is a rip cut, which is following the grain. However, they’re perfectly capable of cross cutting as well. And with practice, they can be a precision instrument. Many people use pull saws to cut intricate joinery, for instance, though they do still typically need to clean up the edges with chisels.  

Coping saw: good for intricate manual cuts

A person using a coping saw to cut a semicircle out of a small piece of wood.
You may find you prefer a coping saw for a small cut like this. Depositphotos.

Coping saws have a U-shaped handle and—like a scroll saw—a thin blade attached at the front and back. The blade is similarly detachable, so you can slip it through a hole in a board and make cuts on the inside of the face. And because the blade is so thin, it can easily turn and curve inside the wood. This allows you to cut all kinds of fancy shapes. They’re excellent for removing material in joinery, like hogging out the bases of dovetails or trimming a back cut on molding.  

The cuts can get a bit wobbly, though, and there’s no built-in way to keep them square to your board, so the top and bottom of the cut likely won’t line up exactly. As such, it’s usually best to use these saws to get close to the cut line, and then finish everything with chisels, files, or other more precise tools.

The post A woodworker’s guide to choosing the right saw for each cut appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best free language learning apps for building your vocabulary and conversational skills https://www.popsci.com/diy/best-free-language-learning-apps/ Fri, 27 Oct 2023 01:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=583480
A person holding a smartphone featuring Duolingo, one of the best free language learning apps.
Learning a new language can help you connect with so many more people. Depositphotos

Free language learning apps can help you join the global conversation in as little as five minutes a day.

The post The best free language learning apps for building your vocabulary and conversational skills appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A person holding a smartphone featuring Duolingo, one of the best free language learning apps.
Learning a new language can help you connect with so many more people. Depositphotos

Learning a second or third language can help you better navigate the world and thrive personally and professionally. But not everyone has the money for private tutoring or language lessons. Free language learning apps can fill the gap between your budget and your desire to learn teach you the linguistic skills to communicate in as many languages as you’d like.

These apps vary in their focus, technique, strengths, and weaknesses. Some offer comprehensive, easy-to-use lessons, while others provide practical experience conversing with foreign language speakers. We’ve put together a list of the best free language learning apps with options that span different fluency levels, time constraints, and ages.

1. Best Overall: Duolingo

The homepage of the Duolingo language app, which features their green logo owl in the center and the languages you can learn with flags along the bottom of the screen.
Duolingo has become a big name in the language-learning space for a reason. And not only thanks to owl memes. Screenshot: Duolingo

Duolingo, while free, is one of the best language learning programs you can get, thanks to the number of languages you can pick up, and the app’s well-designed, bite-sized lessons. Duolingo aims to entertain while teaching, using challenges and game-like features to motivate learners. For example, you can earn gems by completing lessons—but you lose a heart every time you make a mistake. 

The app currently offers almost 40 languages, including a beta version that teaches Klingon—for you Trekkies out there. The short lessons typically last about five minutes and are designed for one lesson per day, though there’s no limit to how many you can do each day. However, the free version only lets you make five mistakes before the lesson pauses, and you’ll have to come back later. You can get around that by upgrading to the Super Duolingo subscription, which costs $7.99 a month (charged yearly). 

Duolingo lets you learn as many languages at once as you like, whereas some other apps, like Busuu, limit you to one language at a time. The option to learn two languages at once lets you explore a variety of linguistic possibilities, too. To get started, you’ll need to set up an account with a password, but once you’ve done that, there are few restrictions if you don’t mind a 30-second ad every now and then. 

The app’s organization and ease of use stand out among language learning apps. There’s a clear structure and order to the lessons. To keep you on track, you can’t move on to a new module until you’ve completed a certain number of lessons in the previous module. You’ll also have the option to review previous lessons, mistakes, and vocabulary as needed to refresh your memory and practice. Plus, you can listen to podcasts in your language of choice. 

On the downside, the amount of content isn’t the same for every language. Some, like Spanish and French, have content galore, while others, like Esperanto and Navajo, aren’t quite as fully developed. 

If you want more training, the Super subscription lets you use the app without restrictions and offers a few other perks like unlimited mastery quizzes and Test Outs, whereas free members only get so many. (Test Outs let you skip lessons if you’ve already mastered the skills.) You can also access extra speaking and listening practice with the Super membership, though repeating previous lessons can offer extra practice without the extra cost. 

Duolingo is available on iOS, iPadOS, iMessage, and Android.

2. Best for multiple languages: Memrise

The black and yellow homepage for the Memrise free language learning app.
Learn how to speak like a local from native speakers. Screenshot: Memrise

Memrise’s free tier might be all you need if you’re brushing up on your language skills or want to learn the basics of several languages at once. This app is more of a study aid than it is a comprehensive language learning app. But it tops other apps for multiple languages because it customizes suggested lessons based on your past performance and features an AI chatbot that can help you learn.

This app relies on a number of memory techniques, but it heavily uses videos in its courses. For example, when learning vocabulary, you’ll see short videos of native speakers saying a single word. Learners follow a “watch, learn, speak” method to learn vocabulary and pronunciation. Memrise offers 23 languages, and you can work on as many of those at a time as you want. Plus, your account syncs across devices, so you can access lessons from multiple places, including a desktop computer.

[Related: How to get your computer and phone to work together]

Memrise lets you customize your learning settings so you can adjust the number of words you work on in each learning or reviewing session. However, if you make these changes in the app and later use the desktop version, you’ll have to adjust the learning settings again, as that is the only part of the app that doesn’t sync. 

Memrise offers a free and paid subscription, with the latter coming in at $14.99 per month, $89.99 a year, or $199.99 for a lifetime membership. The paid tier is ad-free and includes access to all lessons in every language, which you won’t get with the free tier. 

Memrise is available on iOS, iPadOS, and Android.

3. Best for general vocabulary: Busuu

The purple and blue homepage for Busuu, which features a map and images of people saying hello in different languages.
Native speakers on Busuu can provide feedback on your new conversational skills. Screenshot: Busuu

Busuu may not have the wide language selection of apps like Duolingo and Memrise, but the app makes up for it in the quality of its vocabulary content and course structure. At the start of each lesson, you can clearly see what your goals are and what you’ll do next. They’re also broken down into manageable, logical chunks.

The free version of Busuu only allows you to work on one language at a time, and depending on the language you’re learning, certain features may not be available. If you want more and are serious about learning languages, we recommend the Premium Busuu plan ($6.95 to $13.95 per month). The fact that you can learn vocabulary in multiple languages alone makes the price worth it. However, if you’re looking to brush up or are happy learning a single language, the free version will work well.

A fun and unique feature that Busuu offers is the option to submit audio or written answers to the Busuu community for feedback and/or correction on your language skills. Community members who speak the language you’re learning will be able to offer suggestions or provide cultural context. This app’s instruction is excellent whether you opt for the free or paid version. Just know that if you’re looking to learn one of the less popular languages, Busuu may not have it because it focuses on 14 languages, including Spanish, Japanese, and Arabic.

Busuu is available on iOS, iPadOS, and Android.

4. Best for kids: StudyCat

A photo of a woman and a little girl on the the homepage of StudyCat, a free language learning app geared toward children.
Little kids are some of the best language learners. Screenshot: StudyCat

StudyCat offers free language learning for kids ages 3 to 8 years old. While kids won’t learn everything they need to know from this app (like grammar), it’s a fun way to support their language development. Harvard and MIT researchers have found that learning a new language before the age of 10 provides the greatest opportunity for proficiency.

The app uses fun characters and games that appeal to young kids. Many of the games are similar to matching or quest games they may have already played on a phone or tablet. More than games, the app encourages a critical thinking approach to language learning. Each activity builds on the previous one to increase vocabulary while encouraging curiosity. Learning comes through categories, such as numbers, actions, food, and body. Through these categories, kids are exposed to speaking comprehension drills and reading skills. You can jump to different categories, but you have to start at the first lesson before advancing to the next, which allows your child to gradually build upon each lesson. 

[Related: How to set parental controls on any phone or tablet]

StudyCat comes in five languages, and each language has its own app. That’s a little limited if you want to expose your kids to languages other than Spanish, French, English, Chinese, and German. However, it also keeps the app simple, which works well for young learners. 

On the downside, the free version of the app doesn’t offer full access to all categories, words, and phrases. You’ll get access to two categories, and some won’t have all of the games. For that, you’ll have to pay for a monthly $14.99 subscription. I had to dig past the signup screen to get to the free version, but it’s there. The app is simple and fun for young kids, providing plenty of good practice without feeling like a drill.

StudyCat is available on iOS, iPadOS, and Android.

5. Best for conversation: HelloTalk

The blue homepage of HelloTalk, which displays a chat conversation on two smartphones.
HelloTalk provides translations for users in real time. Screenshot: HelloTalk

If you’re ready to practice your language skills with a native speaker, HelloTalk is the app for you. It’s a language app with translation tools, so you can learn while you converse. You might think you need to be an intermediate or even an advanced speaker to carry on conversations, but that’s not true with HelloTalk. 

To get started, you fill out a survey with the language you’d like to converse in and your fluency level. Then, the app creates a list of fluent speakers with whom you can chat. You can type what you’d like to say in English, and the app will translate it into the language you’re learning. There’s also a quick tap option to translate specific words. Plus, you can hear the answers read aloud or see a transliteration. HelloTalk also offers a grammar correction option to help you communicate more proficiently. 

Group chat features let you talk with several people all over the world, and you can save conversations to go back and review words or phrases. You can chat in 18 languages, practicing your conversation and writing skills at the same time. This is a great app if you’re feeling more confident in your vocabulary and sentence structure. Language development increases when you use it in practical ways with native speakers. 

The best part is the free version offers access to the same features as the paid version, but it includes ads. You can invest in the ad-free version for $6.99 per month or $45.99 per year. If you really love conversation as a learning tool, you can purchase a lifetime membership for $175. 

HelloTalk is available on iOS, iPadOS, and Android.

The post The best free language learning apps for building your vocabulary and conversational skills appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best circular saws in 2023, according to experts https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-circular-saws/ Thu, 26 Oct 2023 17:05:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=583375
Home photo

A solid circular saw will provide years of quick, safe, and straight cuts no matter what project or material you're working on.

The post The best circular saws in 2023, according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Home photo

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall DeWalt DCS573B Flexvolt Advantage 20V Circular Saw on a plain background DeWalt DCS573B Flexvolt Advantage 20V Circular Saw
SEE IT

This fantastic all-around option provides powerful cutting and reliable performance.

Best budget Skil 5280-01 15 Amp 7-1/4 Inch Circular Saw on a plain background with its laser level active Skil 5280-01 15 Amp 7-1/4 Inch Circular Saw
SEE IT

This affordable model offers features you’d expect to find in much more expensive saws.

Best premium Makita XSH06PT 18V X2 LXT Circular Saw Kit on a plain background Makita XSH06PT 18V X2 LXT Circular Saw Kit
SEE IT

If you’re cutting every day, then this robust saw is absolutely worth the extra investment.

Circular saws are powerful, versatile, and can be very affordable. As a result, they are extremely popular. They are often the first saw owned by DIY enthusiasts and are found on jobsites around the world. Although the basic design is simple, you’ll find dozens of models on the market with various features. This can be very confusing for first-time buyers. Luckily, we’re here to outline the key features and functions to consider when finding the right tool for your specific needs. Here are the best circular saws on the market right now.

How we chose the best circular saws

I am a keen DIYer and have remodeled two of our homes from the ground up. I have owned multiple circular saws and occasionally pushed them to their limits. To add to my experience and ensure we had up-to-date technical information, we researched the current offerings from all the leading manufacturers.

When putting together our collated selection of the best circular saws, we aimed to find tools for all needs and budgets. Some of our picks offer impressive performance but would be overkill for many, so we have also included models that would suit beginners or occasional users. In addition to performance and budget, we looked at construction materials to ensure durability, power source, any features that made them more user-friendly, and weight—which can have a considerable impact if the tool is used for long periods.

The best circular saws: Reviews & Recommendations

Our favorite circular saws offer something for everyone, from the DIY user on a budget to the demanding professional. We assigned each category so that new circular saw buyers could quickly identify the tools most likely to meet their needs, but all of our picks are tools we’d be proud to keep in our storage shed.

Best overall: DeWalt DCS573B Flexvolt Advantage 20V Circular Saw

DeWalt

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A feature-packed circular saw from a brand renowned for durable construction and reliable performance.

Specs

  • Blade Diameter: 7-1/4 inches
  • Power: 20V cordless
  • Maximum Depth of cut: 2-9/16 inches
  • Weight: 8.2 pounds (excluding battery)

Pros

  • Runs at 5,500 rpm for faster cutting
  • Flexvolt Advantage accepts 20V or 60V batteries
  • Brushless motor maximizes battery performance

Cons

  • Premium price tag and there’s no bag
  • As is common, battery and charger are extra

With so many good tools available, picking a single best circular saw is never easy, but the DeWalt is arguably the best all-rounder on the market. It has renowned durability and reliability on top of its impressive performance. It also offers numerous user-friendly features that suit both professionals and amateurs who are prepared to invest in quality.

The DeWalt circular saw is a powerful 20V cordless model that runs at 5,500 rpm, providing faster cutting than many rivals. The brushless motor maximizes battery life. Thanks to the Flexvolt Advantage system, this saw can also use DeWalt’s high-capacity 60V batteries, which the manufacturer claims can result in a 77-percent power increase. In real terms, the larger batteries are more expensive, but those who use a circular saw every day should improve productivity considerably.

The saw cuts to a maximum depth of 2-9/16 inches, with the blade at 90 degrees and 2 inches at 45 degrees. An LED light makes it easier to see cut lines and improves accuracy in low-light conditions. An electric brake stops the blade quickly, so it’s safe to put the saw down after a cut. A rafter hook, favored by framers and other carpentry trades, is also included. The aluminum sole helps keep weight down, but once a battery is added, the all-up weight will be around 9 pounds.

Best budget: Skil 5280-01 15 Amp 7-1/4 Inch Circular Saw

Skil

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Skil is one of the best-known circular saw brands, and this model offers good capacities at a budget-friendly price.

Specs

  • Blade Diameter: 7-1/4 inches
  • Power: 15 amp corded
  • Maximum Depth of cut: 2-7/16 inches
  • Weight: 8.7 pounds

Pros

  • Packed with useful features at a competitive price
  • Laser makes accurate cutting easier
  • Dust blower clears the cut line

Cons

  • Complaints are rare, but there have been motor faults

Skil was the first manufacturer to offer a hand-held circular saw way back in the 1920s, so they have unrivaled experience with this kind of tool. The Skil 5280-01 is their latest corded model and is a feature-packed circular saw at a very competitive price.

The 15 amp motor delivers 5,300 rpm for rapid cutting. Maximum depth is 2-7/16 inches at 90 degrees and 1-15/16 inches at 45 degrees. A single-sided laser is provided, which many beginners find invaluable for accurate working. In addition, a front-facing dust blower clears the cut line to maintain visibility.

An indicator light on the top of the handle lets you know power is on, and a trigger guard with a safety lock helps prevent accidental starts. Conveniently, the wrench for blade changing is kept on the saw. The sole is steel rather than aluminum, which helps keep costs down but adds a little weight, though it’s no heavier than many cordless competitors. The Skil circular saw would make a great value-for-money addition to the homeowner’s DIY tool kit, and the low price even includes a carry bag.

Best splurge: Makita XSH06PT 18V X2 LXT Circular Saw Kit

Makita

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is a complete, high-quality, high-performance kit designed to satisfy the most demanding professional.

Specs

  • Blade Diameter: 7-1/4 inches
  • Power: 36V cordless
  • Maximum Depth of cut: 2-5/8 inches
  • Weight: 10.5 pounds (including batteries)

Pros

  • Powerful pro-grade tool with batteries and charger
  • 3-stage battery charge indicator
  • Dual LEDs brighten the darkest workplace

Cons

  • It’s a considerable investment
  • Heavier than many

Those needing a high-performance circular saw will want to look closely at the impressive Makita SH06PT kit. Where most rivals offer 18V power, the Makita uses two batteries in tandem to provide 36V. What’s more, these are high-capacity 5Ah (Amp hour) versions that will deliver consistent performance for longer than the standard 2Ah models. The kit includes a dual-port rapid charger and a durable carry bag.

With a speed of 6,000 rpm, the Makita is one of the fastest-cutting circular saws on the market. The electronically-controlled brushless motor also features Automatic Speed Change that matches torque output to the demands of the material being cut so the blade won’t slow or bind. Maximum depth of cut is 2-5/8 inches at 90 degrees and 1-13/16 at 45 degrees. There are two cut-line LEDs fitted for clarity in even the darkest workplaces, and 3-stage LEDs are also used to indicate charge level.

The sole is made of magnesium, which is both lighter than aluminum and stronger. However, the Makita still weighs 10.5 pounds with both batteries installed, making it heavier than most. Given the investment required, the Makita SH06PT circular saw kit will most likely appeal to professionals, though it could also benefit keen DIYers undertaking large remodeling jobs.

Best corded: DeWalt DWE575SB 15 Amp Circular Saw

DeWalt

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This tool meets the high standards expected of the brand and is one of the best general-purpose circular saws available.

Specs

  • Blade Diameter: 7-1/4 inches
  • Power: 15 amp corded
  • Maximum Depth of cut: 2-9/16 inches
  • Weight: 8.8 pounds

Pros

  • Durable, reliable, and versatile all-rounder
  • Integral blower for line-of-sight visibility
  • Ball bearing lower guard for durability

Cons

  • Expensive for a corded saw
  • No LED or laser guide

Before the introduction of cordless tools, the DeWalt DWE575SB circular saw might easily have been our best overall pick. It has the brand’s renowned durability and reliability, and its 15 amp motor means it can deliver consistent cutting performance while battery-powered competitors are taking a break for recharging.

Blade speed is 5,200 rpm with a maximum depth of cut of 2-9/16 inches at 90 degrees and 1-9/10 inches at 45 degrees. It will cut bevels at up to 57 degrees, which gives it greater versatility than many rivals.

The DeWalt corded circular saw does not have LEDs or a laser for guidance, but it does have a blower to keep the cut-line free from dust. There’s also an electric brake to stop the blade quickly. The lower blade guard runs on ball bearings, which might not seem much, but they should ensure smooth, snag-free operation for the life of the saw. With its aluminum sole, the DeWalt DWE575SB is also relatively light and easy to handle.

Best heavy-duty: Skilsaw SPT77WML-01 15 Amp Worm Drive Circular Saw

Skilsaw

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: While most rivals have similar cutting depths, none can match this circular saw for consistent power delivery.

Specs

  • Blade Diameter: 7-1/4 inches
  • Power: 15 amp corded
  • Maximum Depth of cut: 2-3/8 inches
  • Weight: 11.5 pounds

Pros

  • The unrivaled power delivery of worm drive
  • Cut-Ready system for rapid adjustment
  • Ergonomic handles reduce effort

Cons

  • Bigger and heavier than most
  • Not recommended for inexperienced users

Skil produces two ranges of power tools. Those under the Skil brand are largely intended for DIY use. The Skilsaw brand is for professional tools, and the SPT77WML-01 worm drive circular saw falls under that category.

In the hands of experienced users, this tool has one main advantage: the worm drive. In a nutshell, this is direct gearing between motor and blade arbor (the shaft that holds the blade), which effectively transmits almost all of the power available. So, while actual cutting capacities are little different from many competitors, the Skilsaw delivers consistent performance even when sawing through the toughest materials.

The Skilsaw worm drive circular saw uses the brand’s own ‘Dual-Field’ motor specifically designed for circular saws. It drives the blade at 5,300 rpm. Maximum depth of cut at 90 degrees is 2-3/8 inches, and at 45 degrees is 1-15/16 inches. The Cut-Ready system has pre-set markings allowing for rapid depth adjustment to suit commonly used materials like 2×4 or 1/2-inch plywood. Handles are ergonomically positioned to put the operator’s force at the optimum position behind the saw to minimize effort. Nevertheless, even with the magnesium she and frame, the Skilsaw SPT77WML-01 does weigh 11.5 pounds. This bulky and comparatively heavy circular saw is not recommended for beginners.

Best compact: Milwaukee 2530-20 M12 Fuel Circular Saw

Milwaukee

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This tool is light and easy to handle and can still cut many DIY and trade materials.

Specs

  • Blade Diameter: 5-3/8 inches
  • Power: 12V cordless
  • Maximum Depth of cut: 1-5/8 inches
  • Weight: 5.25 pounds (excluding battery)

Pros

  • Compact and very lightweight
  • Maintenance-free brushless motor
  • Overload, overheating, and over-discharge protection

Cons

  • Some full-size corded tools are cheaper
  • Blade is HSS not TCT

Those who mostly cut 2x lumber and sheet material could find the Milwaukee 2530-20 an attractive alternative to full-size circular saws. It is not only more compact but at under 6 pounds with a battery fitted, it is also remarkably light.

The maintenance-free brushless motor runs at 3,600 rpm. With a blade that’s only 5-3/8 inches in diameter it obviously has lower cutting capacities than a 7-1/4 inch circular saw, but it still offers a maximum depth of 1-5/8 inches at 90 degrees, and 1-1/8 inches at 45 degrees. It makes a good choice for DIYers and professionals who don’t need a heavy-duty circular saw. The Redlink Plus electronic control system optimizes battery performance and also protects the saw from overheating, overloading, and over-discharge, so the Milwaukee 2530-20 should maintain the same level of performance throughout its life.

The tool comes with a useful built-in LED work light, but somewhat surprisingly, the blade is only HSS (high-speed steel) rather than the TCT (tungsten carbide tipped) type usually found on a circular saw of this quality. Frequent users will probably want to upgrade it.

What to consider before buying a circular saw

At first glance, most circular saws look very similar, and the key differences may not be obvious. The following section explains these in detail so potential buyers are fully informed when making their choice:

Power and drive

Corded tools are almost always 15-amp because it’s the maximum power delivery available from a standard electrical outlet. Cordless tools vary considerably. 18- and 20-volt are common (they are effectively the same thing), but compact circular saws may be 12-volt, and heavy-duty models can be 36-volt or even 60-volt. With cordless tools, it’s also worth checking the Ah (amp hour) battery rating. The higher the figure, the longer the battery will maintain performance. So, for example, a 4Ah battery will run twice as long as a 2Ah battery.

The motor’s revolutions per minute (rpm) are another performance indicator because higher speed usually means faster cutting. However, it’s important to combine this with adequate power; otherwise, the blade might stall when taking bigger cuts or in tough material.

Most circular saws have sidewinder drive where the motor is fixed in line with the arbor (the shaft that holds the blade). The alternative is worm drive, where the motor sits behind the blade and is connected via worm gears. The latter typically transmits more power but increases the size and weight of the saw.

Blade size and capacities

A blade of 7-1/4 inches is the most popular size, but depending on configuration, the maximum cutting depth can vary. It may not be enough to make a difference for most users, but it’s worth checking.

There are also mini circular saws popular with hobbyists, which usually have a 4-1/2 inch blade, though even smaller versions are available. At the other end of the scale, there are a number of 10- and 12-inch circular saws. The largest we have seen has a 16-5/16 inch diameter blade and is capable of slicing through 6-inch beams. So, whatever size the material needs to be cut, there’s a circular saw capable of doing the job.

All circular saw blades are made of high-speed steel (HSS). Many have teeth that are tungsten carbide tipped (TCT). Tungsten carbide is harder and stays sharper for longer. These blades are a little more expensive, but most users find them worth the extra expense.

Weight and materials

A half-pound difference in the weight of a circular saw might not seem much, but it has an impact if you’re using it all day. The material used for the shoe (the bottom plate) can make a considerable difference.

Steel is often used on low-cost circular saws. It is strong and inexpensive, but there is a weight penalty. Aluminum is lighter and often the choice of good quality saws. The best material is magnesium (actually magnesium alloy), which is both strong and light but also expensive. As a result, it is usually only found on circular saws aimed at professional users.

Other features

  • LED work lights ensure the cut line can be seen clearly. LEDs might also be used as charge indicators on cordless circular saws.
  • Lasers can help improve accuracy. They track the path of the blade, so alignment is easier.
  • An electric brake is a nice feature. It brings the blade to a stop almost immediately. This can prevent motor damage if the blade jams in the workpiece and means users don’t need to wait to put the saw down once the cut is finished.
  • Some circular saws have a dust port, so a shop vac or other extraction can be attached.

FAQs

Q: What’s the difference between a circular saw and a miter saw?

A circular saw is a hand-held tool that’s taken to the workpiece, whereas a miter saw usually sits on a bench or stand, and the work is taken to it. Miter saws can cut thicker material than circular saws, and can create compound angles, but they cannot cut sheet material like plywood or OSB. Professionals and keen DIYers will often have both.

Q: What safety gear do I need with a circular saw?

As with all powered saws, some protective eyewear should be worn, and a dust mask is also a good idea. The blade guard will prevent most accidents, so it should never be removed or jammed open.

Q: What is kickback and how do I avoid it?

Kickback happens when the blade binds in the material, and either the workpiece or the saw gets thrown up by the rotating blade. It can cause serious injury. With a circular saw, it often happens when the saw strays off the cut line, and the user tries to twist the tool slightly to correct the problem. Rather than trying to continue with the existing cut and risk injury, it is better to start again from the other side of the material.

Final thoughts on the best circular saws

All of the circular saws described are very good tools and are unlikely to disappoint their owners. However, with its combination of performance, durability, and reliability, the DeWalt DCS573B is the standout choice. That said, it’s not the cheapest circular saw on the market. For those with a more limited budget, the Skil 5280-01 is a perfectly competent alternative.

If you’re looking for other cutting tools, check out our lists of the best miter saws and the best table saws. The right tool makes the job much simpler.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best circular saws in 2023, according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best miter saws for 2023, according to experts https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-miter-saws/ Thu, 26 Oct 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=583404
The best miter saws composited together in four columns with close-up views of each
Stan Horaczek

Few tools offer the same power and flexibility as a miter saw, whether you're a DIY enthusiast or a pro contractor.

The post The best miter saws for 2023, according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best miter saws composited together in four columns with close-up views of each
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Bosch GCM12SD 12-Inch Dual Bevel Sliding Miter Saw on a plain background not running Bosch GCM12SD 12-Inch Dual Bevel Sliding Miter Saw
SEE IT

With lots of cutting power and tons of angle options, this saw is ready for any job.

Best budget Metabo HPT C10FCGS 10-Inch Compound Miter Saw not running on a plain background Metabo HPT C10FCGS 10-Inch Compound Miter Saw
SEE IT

This is a great option for those making relatively simple cuts at a high volume.

Best 10-inch Skil MS6305-00 10-Inch Dual Bevel Sliding Miter Saw on a plain background Skil MS6305-00 10-Inch Dual Bevel Sliding Miter Saw
SEE IT

This compact saw is roughly 30 percent smaller than a 12-inch bladed model.

Miter saws are perhaps the best all-rounder for both DIY and professional users. They can be found everywhere, from home workshops to construction sites. A basic miter saw can quickly cut 2×4 for framing and garden projects. More advanced models can cut wide boards for flooring or decking and create compound angles for crown moldings or furniture making. In this miter saw roundup, we look at both cutting performance and the extra features that make it quicker and easier to produce accurate work. Whatever you are building, this selection of the best miter saws currently available provides a high-quality solution.

How we chose the best miter saws

I ran my own woodshop for a decade and also remodeled two houses from the ground up, so my experience with various types of saws is extensive. I still use a miter saw regularly for projects around the home and yard.

We conducted extensive market research to supplement my knowledge and make sure we were aware of the most recent developments in tool technology. We compared all the latest models and analyzed the feedback of real-world buyers.

We aimed to put together a collection of miter saws that would suit as many different individuals as possible. Professional users demand optimum performance and reliability, so we looked at maximum cutting capacities and motor power. Occasional DIY users are perhaps more interested in affordability, so we also looked at low-cost models. That said, we wanted to ensure reliability and durability even when prices were comparatively low, so we avoided cheap miter saws with unproven reputations.

The best miter saws: Reviews & Recommendations

Although prices vary considerably, the following picks all come from leading manufacturers recognized for producing high-quality tools. Each of them is a fine example of what’s currently available. We have assigned categories to make it easier to find what we believe is the best miter saw for a particular task, but all of our picks are tools we’d be proud to keep in our storage shed.

Best overall: Bosch GCM12SD 12-Inch Dual Bevel Sliding Miter Saw

Bosch

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Given its capacities, build quality, and user-friendly features, there is no better miter saw for precision and productivity.

Specs

  • Blade Diameter: 12 inches
  • Maximum Cutting Thickness: 6 inches
  • Maximum Cutting Width: 13-1/2 inches
  • Weight: 65 pounds

Pros

  •     Super-smooth Axial Glide system
  •     Range of bevel and miter detents for rapid setup
  •     Base extensions for workpiece support

Cons

  •     Price will put it beyond many
  •     Laser guide not included

This saw does everything a demanding professional could need. The Bosch is a dual-bevel sliding compound miter saw, so it has the maximum range of movement in both saw head and table. The former can be angled up to 47 degrees in both directions, and the latter will rotate from 52 degrees left to 60 degrees right. Detents (pre-set stops) make it quick and easy to set commonly used angles. Scales are etched into stainless steel so they won’t peel off or wear out: something that’s not uncommon on cheap miter saws.

The fence allows for cuts as deep as 6-1/2 inches. Its maximum width for boards is 13-1/2 inches. Thanks to the super-smooth Axial Glide system, cutting large stock is almost effortless. Quick-release SquareLock fences help maintain accuracy and provide good workpiece support, as do the integrated side supports that will extend to 40 inches. A high-quality 60-tooth TCT (tungsten carbide tipped) blade comes in the box.

In our opinion, the Bosch GCM12SD is the best miter saw on the market at the moment, but it does come with a price tag that puts it firmly in the contractor or tradesperson category. Some reviewers have expressed surprise that it doesn’t include a laser guide at this price point. However, those devices are not always as accurate as they could be, and many professionals tend to prefer sight alignment.

Best budget: Metabo HPT C10FCGS 10-Inch Compound Miter Saw

Metabo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This pro-grade tool comes with an attractive price tag and makes a great everyday saw for framers and DIYers.

Specs

  • Blade Diameter: 10 inches
  • Maximum Cutting Thickness: 3-1/2 inches
  • Maximum Cutting Width: 5-21/32 inches
  • Weight: 24.5 pounds

Pros

  •     Tackles dimensioned lumber for framing and DIY
  •     Excellent value for money
  •     Powerful 15 amp motor

Cons

  •     No slide so capacities are limited
  •     24-tooth blade leaves fairly coarse finish

You don’t want to pay for features and power you don’t need and won’t use. The Metabo HPT C10FCGS is considerably more basic than our top pick, but it’s not just its competitive price that makes it an attractive proposition.

Metabo HPT has built a reputation for reliable, high-quality tools without the high sticker price. Sometimes, that means a reduced feature set, and in the case of this miter saw, that means no slide for cross-cutting. This restricts maximum depth and width to 3-1/2 inches and 5-21/32 inches respectively. That’s still plenty to cut 2×4, 3×3, and 2×6 dimensioned lumber (2 x 6 is actually 1-1/2 inches by 5-1/2 inches). That’s all that many framers and DIY users need, making it excellent value for money.

The Metabo HPT miter saw bevels up to 45 degrees (to the left only) and miters up to 52 degrees right and left, so it’s perfectly capable of compound angles. Common detents are provided. The 15 amp motor is as powerful as anything on the market, and the miter saw weighs just 24.5 pounds, so it’s easy to carry around. A 24-tooth TCT blade is included. It’s serviceable but does leave a fairly coarse finish.

Best for DIY: DeWalt DWS780 12-Inch Double Bevel Sliding Miter Saw

DeWalt

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Keen DIY enthusiasts will appreciate the excellent build quality and features that help improve accuracy while remaining easy to use.

Specs

  • Blade Diameter: 12 inches
  • Maximum Cutting Thickness: 6-3/4 inches
  • Maximum Cutting Width: 13-1/4 inches
  • Weight: 58 pounds

Pros

  •     Precise Cutline blade positioning
  •     Class-leading vertical capacity
  •     Linear ball bearings for smooth cross-cutting

Cons

  •     Hard to fault, but quite expensive

The DeWalt DWS780 isn’t a cheap miter saw, but for home users who are taking on their own remodeling jobs, building decks and pergolas, or making furniture regularly, it should soon repay the investment (and you may want to look at our guides to orbital sanders and laser levels, as well). With a maximum cutting height of 6-3/4 inches and a width of up to 13-1/4 inches, it will handle all common lumber sizes. It will bevel at 45 degrees both sides and miter from 50 degrees left to 60 degrees right. There are 10 detents for fast setting of common angles.

One of the key features of the DeWalt miter saw is the XPS Cutline system. Unlike single-sided lasers, it shines an LED light down either side of the blade. This creates a shadow on the workpiece that sharpens as it gets closer, showing not only the position but the thickness of the cut, too. It works whether the blade is rotating or not, so it’s perfect for setting up, and it runs off the same power as the saw, so there’s no need for batteries.

Best 10-Inch: Skil MS6305-00 10-Inch Dual Bevel Sliding Miter Saw

Skil

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Delivers all the features of the best 12-inch miter saws in a more compact and affordable package.

Specs

  • Blade Diameter: 10 inches
  • Maximum Cutting Thickness: 4-1/2 inches
  • Maximum Cutting Width: 11-1/4 inches
  • Weight: 39.4 pounds

Pros

  •     Full dual bevel sliding compound action
  •     Great value for money
  •     Accurate LED blade positioning system

Cons

  •     Blade is only high-speed steel
  •     Quality control may be inconsistent

Yes, 12-inch miter saws can offer outstanding performance, but they’re large, heavy, and generally require significant investment. A 10-inch miter saw like the Skil MS6305-00 is more compact, lighter, and more affordable. What’s more, the sacrifices are relatively minor, making it a serious alternative for many.

On the plus side, the Skil is a dual-bevel compound sliding miter saw, so it provides all the versatility of its larger rivals. It will bevel to 48 degrees left and 45 degrees right and cut angles 50 degrees left and right. There is a full range of detents, and the Skil MS6305-00 uses a similar LED blade positioning system to the DeWalt, so it’s easy to maintain accuracy. At a fraction over 39 pounds, it’s around 30 percent lighter than its bigger rivals.

On the minus side, the smaller blade does mean reduced cutting capacities. Nevertheless, it can still manage 4-1/2 inches vertically and 11-1/4 inches vertically, thus accommodating all the dimensioned lumber most people will ever use. We were a little disappointed that the blade is only high-speed steel (HSS) rather than TCT, and we have seen occasional reports of manufacturing defects that suggest quality control could be improved. In general, though, owners appear very satisfied with their purchase.

Best cordless: Craftsman CMCS714M1 V20 7-1/4-Inch Miter Saw Kit

Craftsman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Comes from a trusted brand and offers both the freedom of cordless power and a lightweight build for easy portability.

Specs

  • Blade Diameter: 7-1/4 inches
  • Maximum Cutting Thickness: 3-1/2 inches
  • Maximum Cutting Width: 8 inches
  • Weight: 21.8 pounds

Pros

  •     The go-anywhere freedom of cordless power
  •     Competitive price includes battery and charger
  •     Good cutting capacities for its size

Cons

  •     Spare batteries can be expensive
  •     Single bevel only

Cordless tools have obvious benefits. They generally provide greater freedom of movement and work when a normal electricity supply isn’t unavailable. The challenge with miter saws is that driving a 10- or 12-inch blade takes a lot of energy, resulting in very high prices. With its 7-1/2-inch blade, the Craftsman CMCS714M1 is a much more affordable alternative, but how does it stack up in performance terms?

Pretty well, actually. With a maximum thickness of 3-1/2 inches and a maximum width of 8 inches, it has no trouble handling many of the common dimensioned lumbers used for framing, decking, and other construction projects. It bevels to the left, at up to 47 degrees, and miters up to 45 degrees on both sides. The Craftsman is another miter saw that uses the increasingly popular LED blade alignment system for accuracy.

The battery supplied is 20V and 4Ah, which should offer decent run time. Craftsman says it will make up to 585 cuts in 3-1/4-inch MDF baseboard, but frankly, that means little. Frequent users will want a spare battery, which is quite expensive. Carry handles are incorporated into the base, but there are no table extensions for workpiece support.

Most versatile: Evolution Power Tools R255SMS+ 10-Inch Miter Saw Plus

Evolution Power Tools

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Features multi-material cutting technology for sawing wood, plastic, laminates, composites, ferrous and non-ferrous metals.

Specs

  • Blade Diameter: 10 inches
  • Maximum Cutting Thickness: 3-9/16 inches
  • Maximum Cutting Width: 11-3/16 inches
  • Weight: 33.7 pounds

Pros

  •     Unrivaled material-cutting versatility
  •     Lightweight with built-in carry handle
  •     Ergonomic trigger for right or left handers

Cons

  •     Supplied blade wears quickly on metal
  •     Laser quality could be improved

Most miter saws would be capable of cutting metal if an appropriate blade were fitted, but it’s not usually recommended because swarf (metal shavings) can wreak havoc with bearings and the motor. The Evolution Power Tools R255SMS+ is one of few exceptions and offers the versatility to cut anything from wood and laminates to plastics and metals. Most people would shy away from cutting up scrap wood with their miter saw for fear of hitting nails or screws, which could wreck the blade. With this miter saw, that’s not a problem.

It looks much like any other 10-inch compound sliding miter saw, and its capacities are competitive. Maximum thickness is 3-9/16 inches, and maximum width is 11-3/16 inches. It offers the unusual ability to adjust cut depth. At under 34 pounds, it’s reasonably portable, and a molded carry handle is provided.

A laser blade guide is included and can be valuable if set properly. Alignment should be checked regularly. However, there have been some reports of failures, and a good old pencil mark is a perfectly serviceable alternative. Unlike many rivals who only offer 6 feet of cable, the Evolution Power Tools miter saw has 13 feet and a useful cable tidy.

There are a couple of things to note when cutting steel. The maximum thickness recommended is 1/4 inch, and the supplied blade will wear out very quickly. A dedicated metal-cutting blade should be used instead. Also, Evolution Power Tools does not recommend attempting to cut hardened or stainless steel.

What to consider before buying a miter saw

While all these tools use a similar design, the differences in motion and capacity are key elements. The following information will help focus on the best miter saw for your needs:

Types of miter saws

The earliest miter saws were basic, with just a rotating table that allowed miters to be cut, hence the name. Next, a tilting head was added to cut bevels. Combining a miter and a bevel gives a compound angle; thus, these tools are sometimes called compound miter saws. Low-cost models only bevel to one side (single bevel). Those that can bevel to both sides are known as dual- or double-bevel miter saws.

At this stage, the blade followed a rise-and-fall motion. The next development was to add one or two tubular slides for horizontal motion that dramatically increased the width capabilities. A combination of all these elements gives us the dual-bevel sliding miter saw, also sometimes called a compound sliding miter saw. The names can sometimes seem slightly confusing at first glance, but by separating the elements, you can picture the saw’s capabilities.

Capacities

Most miter saw blade diameters are usually either 12 inches or 10 inches. However, 8-1/4 and 7-1/4 inch models also exist. This size will, of course, have a major bearing on cutting capacities, but it’s more complicated than that. The bevel and slide mechanisms used will also have an impact. Two miter saws with identical 12-inch blades will often have different cutting specifications, so it’s important to check.

There can also be some confusion with how these capacities are described. For example, a mitre saw might be described as cutting crown moldings up to 7-1/2 inches when nested. It sounds like that saw has a maximum depth of cut of up to 7-1/2 inches, but in fact, the term ‘nested’ means the molding is being cut at an angle. The true maximum height is usually described as ‘vertical’: how deep the material can be when held upright against the fence.

It can also seem misleading when you see a maximum depth of 6 inches and width of 12 inches (for example). This does not mean the miter saw can cut a board that is 6 inches by 12 inches. When cutting maximum depth, the saw uses an area of blade in front of its center boss, but if that blade were to slide forward, the boss would foul the board. Therefore, maximum board thickness is going to be less. Manufacturers aren’t being deceptive, as most provide a variety of dimensions showing true maximums. It might just take a minute or two to work them out.

Power

Most corded miter saws have 15 amp motors because that’s the maximum provided by a standard household power outlet. It’s not a particularly accurate way to measure power anyway, as amps measure current, not power, but it’s what almost all manufacturers use. Watts is a true reflection, though the figure is not always easy to find. In truth, almost all 15 amp motors are perfectly adequate.

Cordless miter saws are rated in volts. 18/20 volt models are the most common, though up to 60-volt miter saws are available. Unfortunately, the latter currently come with very high price tags.

The other thing to check is the Amp hours (Ah) of the battery. The higher the Ah, the longer the battery will maintain power. So, for example, a 4Ah battery will run for roughly twice as long as a 2Ah model. This is something worth bearing in mind when buying a spare, though the larger capacity model will be more expensive and takes longer to recharge.

Other Features

  • Saw safety is always a big deal, and all miter saws have a guard that automatically slides out of the way as the cut is made. Even basic guards should be effective if the operator uses them correctly.
  • A blade lock is another common safety feature, so the saw can’t be operated accidentally.
  • We’ve mentioned detents, which help make setting common angles quicker and easier. The number and position of these vary, so it’s another area worth checking.
  • Laser blade guides were once very popular and are not without their merits, but LED versions are now largely seen as superior.
  • Automatic blade brakes are another nice feature, rapidly slowing the blade so you don’t have to wait to change workpiece or make adjustments.
  • Regular users will often have one blade for rough cutting and another for finer work. How quickly these can be changed will have an impact on user convenience.

FAQs

Q: What is a miter saw used for?

A miter saw is a versatile tool that is generally used for cutting the store-bought dimensioned lumber used in stud walls, framing, and other construction projects. Sliding miter saws are also capable of cutting boards used for flooring and decking.

Q: Are miter saws safe?

Generally speaking, miter saws are very safe when used correctly. A guard shields the blade, and dust ports allow for extraction. For added protection, you should always wear goggles or safety glasses and a dust mask. Work should be properly supported and held in place with clamps so your hands never get near the cut line.

Q: What is the difference between a miter saw and a circular saw?

A miter saw can sit on a benchtop, a stand, or on the floor, and you bring the material to it. A circular saw is a hand-held device that you take to the workpiece. While there is some overlap in terms of what they can cut, a miter saw can usually tackle greater thickness. A circular saw is great for plywood and other sheet material that is much too large to go under a miter saw. Most professionals and keen DIYers will have one of each.

Q: Can a miter saw cut metal?

Technically, most are capable with an appropriate blade, but it’s not usually recommended because of the damage swarf can do. The Evolution Power Tools model we reviewed above is one solution, though those with frequent need should probably buy a dedicated metal-cutting chop saw.

Final thoughts on the best miter saws

Our research uncovered a tremendous variety of high-quality miter saws, and we really are spoiled for choice. The Bosch that took our top award is a feature-rich tool with excellent capacities. For those who use one every day, it’s probably worth the investment. At the other end of the price scale, the Metabo HPT will prove perfectly adequate for many people’s needs and should provide years of trouble-free service.

If you’re looking for other cutting tools, check out our lists of the best circular saws and the best table saws. The right tool makes the job much simpler.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best miter saws for 2023, according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
7 hands-on (and off) tips for the new Meta Quest 3 mixed reality VR headset https://www.popsci.com/diy/meta-quest-3-tips/ Thu, 26 Oct 2023 12:17:49 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=583448
A person wearing a Meta Quest 3 headset, standing in a well-lit room with their hands behind their head.
There's a lot to experience on Meta's latest headset. Meta

Meta's latest MR/VR headset might be one of the best, and we can help you find your way around.

The post 7 hands-on (and off) tips for the new Meta Quest 3 mixed reality VR headset appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A person wearing a Meta Quest 3 headset, standing in a well-lit room with their hands behind their head.
There's a lot to experience on Meta's latest headset. Meta

The Meta Quest 3 could lay claim to being the best VR headset around right now, but it actually combines both virtual reality (completely enclosed digital worlds) with mixed reality (where digital elements are mixed with the real world).

With so many types of experiences available on the latest headset from Meta, there are a lot of features and settings to dig into if you want to make sure you’re getting the most out of your wearable gadget. Let’s get you started.

1. Cast to another screen

While you’re busy immersed in VR or MR, the people around you—outside the headset—might feel a little left out. If you’d like, you can cast the action happening inside the Meta Quest 3 to another screen, so anyone in the room can see what you’re doing.

You can cast to a phone or a computer, as long as all the devices are on the same WiFi network. On a phone, you’ll need to be logged into the Meta Quest app for Android or iOS: Tap Menu, then Casting to start the show. On a computer, head to oculus.com/casting in a web browser, log into your Meta account, and follow the instructions.

Casts can be initiated from inside the headset as well. Press the Meta button (the Meta logo, a warped infinity symbol) on the Touch Plus controller, then choose Camera and Cast. You can then pick from Computer or Meta Quest mobile phone app.

2. Enter passthrough mode

Beyond the apps and games that make use of the Meta Quest 3’s mixed reality capabilities, you can also let the real world in when you’re browsing through menus and apps in the Horizon Home environment.

Tap the Meta button on the Touch Plus controller, then select the button to the right of the notification bell icon to switch between immersive (VR) mode and passthrough (MR) mode—the button you want looks like a pair of goggles and will be outlined or filled in depending on which view you’re using.

3. Customize your avatar

Your avatar represents you in a variety of places on the Meta Quest 3, so make sure it looks like you and not some generic gray blob of a person (the default). When you’re in your Horizon Home environment, select the mirror to get started.

[Related: Make a Memoji that actually looks like you]

You’ll need to choose an avatar template to get started, but don’t worry if it doesn’t look too much like you—you can customize your facial hair, your outfit, your body shape, and a number of other attributes to get the right VR representation of yourself.

4. Record photos and videos

Capturing screenshots and videos on the Meta Quest 3 is a good way to share what you’re up to. If you press the Meta button on the Touch Plus controller, then choose Camera, you can find Take photo and Record video options, but they’re really just for the Horizon Home environment.

When you’re inside games and apps, you can take a screenshot by holding down the Meta button, tapping the right trigger button, and then releasing both buttons. To take a video, hold down the Meta button, hold down the right trigger button until you see the video recording message, then release both buttons—repeat the action to stop the video.

5. Boost the refresh rate

A person wearing an orange sweater and gray pants striking an active pose in a room while wearing and using a Meta Quest 3 headset.
Some games can be played at a higher refresh rate. Meta

The Meta Quest 3 comes with a significant boost in graphical capabilities over the Oculus Quest 2, including the ability to hit a 120Hz refresh rate if games and apps demand it. This means motion will look smoother and more fluid, though it also means the headset might get warmer, and the mode is more of a drain on battery life.

If you want to make sure games and apps are looking as good as they can be, tap the Meta button on the Touch Plus controller, then choose Settings, System, Display, and enable the 120Hz refresh rate option. If you’d rather have the extra battery life, turn it off.

6. Reset the view

You might sometimes find yourself a little lost in the VR (or MR) world, with the menu or dialog box you want to look at above or below or behind you. To reset the view so everything is in front of you again, press and hold the Meta button on the Touch Plus controller.

After a few moments, you’ll see a circle on screen—keep holding to complete the circle and reset the view. This works in games and apps as well as the Horizon Home environment, so you can use it whenever you’re disoriented.

7. Use hand tracking

The cameras on the front of the Meta Quest 3 can track the actions of your hands and fingers, so you can ditch the Touch Plus Controllers if you want to. The tracking isn’t perfect, but it’s a more natural way of getting around in VR or MR.

Press the Meta button on the Touch Plus controller, then select Settings, Movement tracking, and Hand tracking. Here you can enable the feature (via the top toggle switch) and customize how it works.

Use the options on this screen to choose how you want to switch between using controllers and using hand tracking: You can simply just put the controllers down, for example, or double-tap the controllers together to switch.

The post 7 hands-on (and off) tips for the new Meta Quest 3 mixed reality VR headset appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best table saws for 2023, according to experts https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-table-saws/ Wed, 25 Oct 2023 20:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=583133
The best table saws composited together on a white background
Stan Horaczek

A solid table saw is an essential part of any power tool kit, whether you're a pro contractor or a DIY warrior.

The post The best table saws for 2023, according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best table saws composited together on a white background
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The DeWalt DWE7491RS 10-Inch Table Saw with its legs extended on a plain background DeWalt DWE7491RS 10-Inch Table Saw
SEE IT

This all-rounder offers renowned build-quality, excellent capacities, and user-friendly features.

Best budget The GoPlus Ironmax 10-Inch Table Saw standing on a plain background GoPlus Ironmax 10-Inch Table Saw
SEE IT

Get all the features and performance you need with money left over in the budget for materials.

Best folding The Skil TS6307-00 10-Inch Portable Table Saw sitting on a plain white background Skil TS6307-00 10-Inch Portable Table Saw
SEE IT

This compact saw collapses down to a fraction of its normal size for easy storage and portability.

Table saws come in a variety of sizes, from bench-top models popular with DIYers through jobsite saws to cabinet saws used in furniture making. While they are perhaps most used for making long, accurate ripping cuts through boards and sheet material, they can also crosscut at various angles and, with specialist blades, create rabbets (steps) and dadoes (grooves) for joints, door panels, or drawer bottoms. They range in price from a couple hundred dollars to several thousand, depending on the specs. In this article, we’re checking out the key features of these versatile tools and looking at the best table saws for both trade users, and DIY enthusiasts.

How we chose the best table saws

I owned my own woodshop for 10 years and used table saws daily. I am also a qualified engineer, so I know what makes a good saw tick. To supplement my own hands-on experience, we researched a host of current models from both leading and less well-known manufacturers. This ensured we understood what was available and were up-to-date on technological advances.

The variety of table saws available is extensive, so we wanted to represent as many different types as possible in our collated selection. Our picks range from portable benchtop table saws to models called contractor saws designed for pro woodshops.

Cutting capacities are, of course, a key issue, but so is accuracy and stability. Table saw buyers will also be keen to know that their tool will be reliable and durable, so we factored this into our thoughts. Finally, there’s value for money, which doesn’t necessarily mean finding the cheapest table saw but rather those that meet performance expectations while keeping prices at an affordable level.

The best table saws: Reviews & Recommendations

The following models all meet the performance and cost criteria we set, but each of them has different capabilities and their own pros and cons. We have assigned categories to make finding the best table saw for a particular range of tasks easier, but all of our picks are tools we’d be proud to keep in our storage shed.

Best overall: DeWalt DWE7491RS 10-Inch Table Saw

DeWalt

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This high-quality tool offers performance that makes it suitable for busy professionals, enthusiastic DIYers, or home furniture makers.

Specs

  • Blade Size: 10 inches
  • Maximum Depth of Cut: 3-1/8 inches
  • Maximum Rip: 32-1/2 inches
  • Table Size: 21-7/8 x 26-3/8 inches

Pros

  •     Pro-grade build quality and reliability
  •     Good cutting capacities and precise fence
  •     Stand offers stability and improves mobility

Cons

  •     Supplied blade could be better
  •     Premium price tag

Given the variety available, it’s almost impossible to pick a single best table saw that will meet everyone’s needs. The DeWalt DWE7491RS is the one that, in our opinion, comes closest. It has the performance and durability demanded by tradespeople, and capacities that could make it the only table saw most keen DIYers ever need.

Maximum depth of cut is 3-1/8 inches, meaning it will easily handle 2x dimensioned lumber used for framing and construction. A ripping capacity (maximum width of cut) of 32-1/2 inches makes it great for plywood and other sheet materials. The table offers good support, and the extending fence has a rack and pinion drive that makes it easy to use, and delivers repeatable accuracy. There’s a nice chunky wheel for blade angle adjustment and a big stop button front and center where it’s easy to reach in an emergency. There’s a 2-1/2” dust port that can be hooked up to a shop vac or other extraction. The included blade is 24-tooth TCT (tungsten carbide tipped). It’s OK, but those looking for a better finish to their cuts will want to upgrade.

The DeWalt table saw comes with a rolling stand that offers good stability and folds down quickly for transportation. It is held in place with four bolts, so it is easy to remove for bench-top use if preferred.

Best budget: GoPlus Ironmax 10-Inch Table Saw

GoPlus

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For those on a restricted budget, this table saw offers similar features and capacities to those from leading brands.

Specs

  • Blade Size: 10 inches
  • Maximum Depth of Cut: 3 inches
  • Maximum Rip: 26 inches
  • Table Size: 19 x 26 inches

Pros

  •     Offers good value for money
  •     Competitive cutting capacities and feature set
  •     Includes 36-tooth TCT blade

Cons

  •     Quality control is inconsistent
  •     May arrive requiring considerable adjustment

We generally avoid power tools from lesser-known brands for fear of poor build quality or reliability. The GoPlus table saw is an exception. It might not be the tool for precision woodworking, but it has similar features and capacities to many better-known rivals at a fraction of the price.

With a maximum depth of cut of 3 inches and ripping of up to 26 inches, it will handle most common store-bought construction and DIY materials. The aluminum table has been coated to provide an easier sliding surface. The fence runs on plain rails rather than rack and pinion, but it has an easy adjustment system and a magnifier lens over the scale to improve readability. The included stand raises the saw to a comfortable working height. Assembly involves 24 bolts, so it takes a few minutes to put together, but it provides good support once assembled. A surprisingly good 36-tooth TCT blade is included.

So far, so good. However, while most buyers we surveyed appear happy, inconsistent quality control means some saws arrive needing a lot of adjustment before they can be used. Whether the GoPlus is the right table saw for you will depend on what is expected of it. It is suitable for many construction and DIY jobs around the home and yard, but we wouldn’t recommend it for those expecting high accuracy.

Best folding: Skil TS6307-00 10-Inch Portable Table Saw

Skil

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Skil is one of the world’s leading saw brands, and this model’s integrated folding stand combines sturdy support with easy portability.

Specs

  • Blade Size: 10 inches
  • Maximum Depth of Cut: 3-1/2 inches
  • Maximum Rip: 25-1/2 inches
  • Table Size: 24 x 25 inches

Pros

  •     Stand folds easily for portability
  •     Tool-free blade alignment
  •     Accurate rack and pinion fence

Cons

  •     Some plastic components are fragile
  •     Customer support has been criticized

Several of the top table saws we looked at offer good stands, but none match the simple efficiency and affordability of the folding stand on this Skil model. In fact, this table saw is an attractive proposition all around. While it costs more than some of the budget table saws available, it is well below the price of premium models and, in many ways, offers comparable performance.

When deployed, the Skil table saw stand provides the stability necessary for working with large sheet materials. To use the saw as a benchtop model, there’s no need to undo lots of nuts and bolts; the legs tuck under with a simple button push.

A 3-1/2 inch maximum depth of cut is very competitive, though the 25-1/2 inch rip is less than some. The fence has the rack and pinion adjustment we prefer for accuracy, and the tool-free micro adjustment for blade alignment is a nice feature. However, the supplied blade is only 24-tooth TCT. It’s not bad, but those working with hardwoods will probably want to buy something more robust.

Best for jobsites: Bosch 4100XC-10 10-Inch Worksite Table Saw

Bosch

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A high-performance jobsite saw with a wheeled gravity lift stand that rises and falls in seconds.

Specs

  • Blade Size: 10 inches
  • Maximum Depth of Cut: 3-1/8 inches
  • Maximum Rip: 30 inches inches
  • Table Size: 22-1/2 x 30 inches

Pros

  •     Powerful 4HP motor for effortless cutting
  •     Constant response circuitry maintains performance
  •     Excellent rolling stand for jobsite mobility

Cons

  •     Expensive, and heavy with stand attached
  •     Poor assembly instructions

Jobsite table saws need to be reliable and durable in working environments that are often harsh. The Bosch 4100XC-10 is a proven solution that is powerful, accurate, and comes with a gravity rise stand that provides virtually effortless single-handed operation.

Cutting capacities are among the best on the market with 3-18 inch maximum depth and 30-inch ripping. The table surface is the largest we looked at on a portable saw, offering a stable platform for large-scale cutting. The motor is an impressive 4-horsepower unit, and the Bosch worksite saw features constant load circuitry that measures blade feedback and matches power output to the demands of the material being cut so the blade won’t stall. The SquareLock fence isn’t rack and pinion, but it is very sturdy. It fits neatly into a slot on the side for transportation.

While the stand is excellent in operation, there are a couple of negatives. It doesn’t come pre-assembled, and the instructions for putting it together are poor. Once finished mounting, the sawing is best done by two people. The other consideration is the all-up weight, which is 94 pounds, so while it’s easy to roll to the truck at the end of the day, lifting it requires a little more effort.

Best for shops: SawStop CNS175-TGP236 10-Inch Contractor Saw

SawStop

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A high-performance, high-capacity, and high-precision  contractor-grade saw for discerning professionals or enthusiastic home furniture makers

Specs

  • Blade Size: 10 inches
  • Maximum Depth of Cut: 3-1/8 inches
  • Maximum Rip: 36 inches
  • Table Size: 27 x 44 inches

Pros

  •     Patented SawStop safety system
  •     T-Glide fence does no deflect
  •     Includes excellent 40-tooth TCT blade

Cons

  •     A considerable investment
  •     Replacement brake cartridges are expensive

The SawStop contractor saw is a superbly engineered tool built for high-precision woodworking. The table is cast iron rather than aluminum for added strength and rigidity and has a flatness within ten-thousandths of an inch (measured diagonally). Extension tables are steel.

Given the 10-inch blade, the maximum depth of cut is a fairly standard 3-1/8 inches. However, ripping is 36 inches, and extensions can be added to take it out to 52 inches. The T-Glide fence is heavy-gauge steel to prevent deflection under load. Versatility is such that a router table can also be added, saving valuable workshop space. A sliding crosscut table, popular with professionals, is also available.

The headline feature is the patented SawStop safety system that can detect human skin and will stop the blade and drop it under the saw table in under five milliseconds. This remarkable device means that instead of losing fingers, all the woodworker will have is a scratch. The only downside is that the special sensor cartridge has to be replaced after an event, and they’re not cheap.

The SawStop contractor saw is a considerable investment, but compared with rivals of a similar standard, it’s very competitive.

Best cordless: DeWalt DCS7485B Flexvolt 8-1/4-Inch Table Saw

DeWalt

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Has the excellent build quality and reliability associated with the brand and delivers 60V power where rivals only offer 18V.

Specs

  • Blade Size: 8-1/4 inches
  • Maximum Depth of Cut: 2-1/2 inches
  • Maximum Rip: 24 inches
  • Table Size: 14-1/5 x 26-3/4 inches

Pros

  •     Go-anywhere cordless cutting
  •     Class-leading 60V power
  •     Protective metal roll cage

Cons

  •     Modest capacities
  •     Battery and charger not included

The ability to take a table saw anywhere, regardless of whether there’s electricity available, has obvious benefits whether you’re a contractor or just want to work beyond the range of extension cords (which, for safety reasons, should never be more than 100 feet). The DeWalt DCS7485B Flexvolt gives that ability, and where most rivals offer 18V batteries, this model uses DeWalt’s high-performance 60V unit, meaning more power for longer.

Cordless does come with a compromise. Table saws are quite power-hungry tools, so in order to provide decent cutting performance, the blade is reduced to 8-1/4 inches. This, of course, means lower capacities. However, with a maximum depth of 2-1/2 inches and a maximum rip of 24 inches, this is still a very useful saw for DIY and light-duty trade use.

Portability is another major benefit of cordless table saws. The DeWalt weighs 45 pounds and has carry handles that double as feet, plus a steel roll cage to protect internal components from knocks. There’s often a premium to pay for cordless tools, and that’s true here. By the time battery and charger are added, this saw is a similar price to high-quality 10-inch corded table saws.

What to consider before buying a table saw

All table saws function in basically the same way, but size and configuration can vary dramatically. In this section, we look at what impact those aspects have on finding the best table saw for particular needs.

Types of table saw

Table saws can be divided into five main types:

  • Benchtop table saws are self-explanatory. These are the smallest and lightest table saws and are usually the choice for DIY users who have limited space or might only use a table saw occasionally.
  • Jobsite table saws are probably the most popular type. They are usually supplied with a stand that gives the stability required for working with large sheet materials. Wheels help with mobility. They are also a good choice for more enthusiastic DIY users.
  • Contractor table saws are the smallest of what might be described as ‘fixed’ saws. They are designed for permanent shop use and have a larger ripping capacity than benchtop or jobsite models.
  • Hybrid & cabinet table saws are larger versions of the contractor saw and are normally only found in professional woodworking shops. Where contractor table saws sit on sturdy legs, hybrid and cabinet saws usually have fully enclosed cabinets that provide even greater stability.

Blade size and capacities

High-end table saws for commercial use can have 12-inch diameter blades, but 10-inch is by far the most common. This means maximum depth of cut is broadly similar, though still varies between 3 and 3-1/2 inches. Cordless models are usually 8-1/4-inch with a depth of cut of around 2-1/2 inches.

The big difference is ripping capacity or maximum width. On benchtop table saws, this can be as little as 24 inches, whereas cabinet table saws can offer 60 inches or more. Greater ripping capacity and the larger table surface that goes with it are particularly important for those who frequently work with sheet material. Not only does it offer wider cuts, but also a more stable platform, so it’s easier to maintain accuracy.

Fence and miter gauge

The ripping fence (usually just called the fence) is another element that has a major impact on accuracy. It keeps the material in place as you perform long cuts. If it deflects when material is pushed against it, the cut won’t remain true. As a result, these devices are usually a substantial construction with secure clamping.

The rails are also important. Often, the fence just slides along these and then clamps in position. Some benchtop and jobsite saws offer rack and pinion rails, which make it easier to make fine adjustments.

A miter gauge is usually included for making angled crosscuts. On cheap table saws, these are often criticized, though better alternatives are widely available.

Other features

  • A blade guard and riving knife (which prevents the material from pinching the blade and causing kickback) are important safety features. These should never be removed while the saw is in use.
  • Weight may be a factor if the table saw is going to be moved around the workshop or transported regularly. Some are fitted with wheeled stands, but larger models can be awkward to lift in and out of a vehicle.
  • Dust ports are usually fitted, but it’s worth checking size if a shop vac or other extraction will be used. Low-cost adaptors are available if existing equipment doesn’t match.
  • Convenient onboard storage for blade wrenches, miter gauges, a push stick, and other accessories is often provided.

FAQs

Q: Is a table saw better than a miter saw?

Their main functions are different, so it’s not really a case of one being better than the other. A table saw can crosscut framing lumber, etc., but doesn’t have the depth of cut or versatility that a miter saw has for compound angles. On the other hand, a miter saw can’t cut sheet material like plywood or OSB. It’s important to understand how each saw works before making that decision.

Q: Is a table saw safe for beginners?

When operated according to the manufacturer’s instructions with guards and riving knife in place, a table saw is as safe as any other type of saw. Use protective eyewear or a face shield, and a dust mask are always recommended.

Q: How long will a table saw last?

It will depend on how much it is used, the working environment, and how well it is maintained, but 10 years is usually given as the expected life of a table saw.

Final thoughts on the best table saws

As we’ve seen from the selection above, there are high-quality table saws that will suit everyone from beginners on a budget to full-time tradespeople. The DeWalt DWE7491RS is a terrific all-rounder. It has the performance and capacities that professionals demand and, with proper care, might also be the only table saw many home woodworkers ever need. At the other end of the price scale, the GoPlus table saw is an ideal solution for those who want the benefits a table saw offers but might never go beyond occasional DIY or small furniture projects (and who might want to read our guides to orbital sanders and laser levels next).

If you’re looking for other cutting tools, check out our lists of the best miter saws and the best circular saws. The right tool makes the job much simpler.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best table saws for 2023, according to experts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
What is WiFi calling, and when should you use it? https://www.popsci.com/technology/what-is-wifi-calling/ Wed, 25 Oct 2023 19:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=583269
Various icons on an iPhone screen, including the one for WiFi calling.
Everything to know about WiFi calling. Brett Jordan / Unsplash

All your WiFi calling questions answered in one place.

The post What is WiFi calling, and when should you use it? appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Various icons on an iPhone screen, including the one for WiFi calling.
Everything to know about WiFi calling. Brett Jordan / Unsplash

With WiFi calling, you can make or receive calls with your smartphone over a WiFi connection in areas where you have poor cellular signal. It’s supported by most modern smartphones and most carriers, including Verizon, AT&T, and T-Mobile. Of course, you won’t be able to do any of this unless you know how to turn on WiFi calling in the first place.

Once you understand the basics and have enabled WiFi calling on your iPhone or Android phone, you can dig deeper into other important questions like how this technology actually works and if it’s free for international calls.

How does WiFi calling work?

WiFi calling is like a cross between regular cell phone calls and VOIP services like Skype that allow you to make phone calls from your computer. Instead of using a third-party service, your phone call is routed through the internet to your cell provider and then connected over the cellular network to the person you’re calling (or is calling you). This means that it still uses your phone number and your cell provider’s network, rather than a username, email address, or anything else. 

The big difference between WiFi calling and regular calling is that it uses your WiFi network, not your mobile data. This means it works well in areas where you have bad cell signal but good WiFi signal, like if you have a satellite internet connection at your rural cabin or just live in a building with an unreliable cell service. WiFi calling won’t help you if you’re out on a hike or otherwise totally off-the-grid, though. And if you have a good mobile data connection at home, you won’t notice much difference.

How to turn on WiFi calling on an iPhone

To enable WiFi calling on an iPhone, go to Settings > Phone > WiFi Calling. If you don’t see the option, it is most likely because your carrier doesn’t support WiFi calling. You may be prompted to enter or confirm your address so your phone can pass your location on to emergency services if you call them.

All modern iPhones support WiFi calling, although some networks only support the iPhone 6 (released in 2014) and newer. Basically, unless you are using a 10-year-old iPhone that you’ve somehow kept running, your iPhone supports WiFi calling. 

How to turn on WiFi calling on an Android phone

To enable WiFi calling on an Android, go to the Phone App > More > Settings > Calls, and enable WiFi Calling. If you don’t see it, your carrier likely doesn’t support WiFi Calling.

All modern Android smartphones support WiFi calling as long as they are running Android 6.0 Marshmallow (released in 2015) or newer. While the Android update situation isn’t as clear-cut as it is with iPhones, as long you bought your phone in the last five years or so, it almost certainly supports WiFi calling. If you’re unsure, check what version of Android your phone is running.

Does WiFi calling cost money?

WiFi calling isn’t free, even if you’re connected to a free public network. At the very least, you are paying for it as part of your regular cell plan—and in some situations, like if you make an international call or phone a premium number, you will be charged extra. Think of it more like dialing a phone number on Skype rather than using FaceTime. 

[Related: The best WiFi boosters you can buy]

Check your cell plan to see if WiFi calling is included and how much you will be charged for different kinds of calls. 

Does WiFi calling work on an iPad or Apple Watch?

Yes, if your carrier supports “WiFi calling on supported iCloud-connected devices” (check Apple’s official carrier support list to be sure), you can make and receive WiFi phone calls on your iPad and Apple Watch.

To enable WiFi calling on your iPad or Apple Watch, open your iPhone’s Settings app, then go to Phone, WiFi Calling, and turn on Add WiFi Calling For Other Devices. Calls that come through your iPad will be routed through your iPhone. When you’re using an Apple Watch, though, you’ll be able to receive calls even if your phone isn’t turned on or nearby, as long as your iPhone has previously connected to the WiFi network you’re using.

The post What is WiFi calling, and when should you use it? appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save up to half-off Ryobi power tools and batteries during Amazon’s early Black Friday sale https://www.popsci.com/gear/ryobi-tool-deals-fall-amazon-early-black-friday-2023/ Wed, 25 Oct 2023 13:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=583172
Ryobi circular saws and tool batteries arranged in a repeating pattern on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

Whether you need extra batteries or a whole new kit of power tools, this pre-Black Friday Amazon Ryobi sale will save you some cash.

The post Save up to half-off Ryobi power tools and batteries during Amazon’s early Black Friday sale appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Ryobi circular saws and tool batteries arranged in a repeating pattern on a plain background
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

It’s perfect DIY weather outside right now. The fall is an awesome time to check things off of that stagnant to-do list, and these Ryobi tools seeing deep discounts at Amazon can help. Whether you need a couple extra batteries or a full new kit of power tools, you can save more than 30 percent on some of these early Black Friday Ryobi deals. Here are some handy deals worth your time:

The post Save up to half-off Ryobi power tools and batteries during Amazon’s early Black Friday sale appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to make hit Spotify playlists, alone or with your friends https://www.popsci.com/diy/how-to-make-a-playlist-on-spotify/ Wed, 25 Oct 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582919
An iPhone connected to white, wired earbuds showing a Spotify playlist on the screen.
Get your tracks in the order you want. Imtiyaz Ali / Unsplash

Put together a specific list of tunes to share with the world or keep to yourself.

The post How to make hit Spotify playlists, alone or with your friends appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An iPhone connected to white, wired earbuds showing a Spotify playlist on the screen.
Get your tracks in the order you want. Imtiyaz Ali / Unsplash

Spotify has a wealth of options for music lovers: Mixes, new releases, genre picks, recommended tracks, albums you’re already obsessed with, and plenty more.

However, you can also take more control over your listening by making your own Spotify playlists. You can keep these compilations to yourself or share them with others—and you can even work on collaborative playlists with other people.

Putting together a curated list of songs takes longer than just diving into whatever Spotify’s algorithm offers you, but it means you’ll only listen to exactly what you want. It’s a more personalized and deliberate way of enjoying your tunes.

There are several ways to make a playlist on Spotify, and we’ll go over a couple of them plus other features to improve your listening experience.  We’ve focused on instructions for the Android and iOS mobile apps, but the process is similar if you’re using the desktop or web apps.

How to make a playlist on Spotify

You can create a playlist in the Spotify mobile app by tapping on Your Library, in the bottom right corner of your screen, followed by the + (plus) button in the top right, and then Playlist. Give your compilation a name and tap Create—the app will take you straight to your new, empty playlist.

In-app menus showing the steps to create a playlist on Spotify.
You can make as many playlists as you want, but only Premium subscribers will be able to listen to them in order. Spotify

New playlists are public by default, which means everybody will be able to find them, play them, and even access them with a shared link. But even though they’re public, your playlists don’t appear on your profile by default. To change this, open the playlist and tap the three dots: on the emerging menu, tap Add to profile to flaunt your compilation skills or Make private to hide your collection of tunes, remove it from search results, and disable its public link.

[Related: How to listen to Spotify’s huge library of audiobooks]

Spotify menu showing the privacy settings for playlists.
You can keep a playlist public while preventing it from appearing on your profile. Or, if you want to brag, you can change that on the playlist settings. Spotify

Straight away on your empty playlist page, you’ll find recommended songs based on your listening history. You can add any of these tunes to the playlist by tapping the musical note icon on the right. You can also tap Add to this playlist to start searching for specific tracks on Spotify.

Spotify menu showing how to add songs to a playlist
You can add songs to your playlist by accepting Spotify’s recommendations or by browsing the service’s catalog. Spotify

You can add more tracks by browsing the Spotify catalog. Tap the three dots next to any song, album, or playlist to find the Add to playlist option. From there, you can pick a playlist you’ve previously created or start a brand new one for the songs that you’ve just selected.

Spotify menu showing all the options you have with specific songs, including adding it to a playlist.
Whenever you find a song you list, you can add it to any of your playlists by tapping or clicking its three-dot menu. Spotify

You can make, edit, and share playlists whether you pay for Spotify or not, but only Premium subscribers can listen to them in the specific order given by the playlist creator—free users are stuck with shuffle play. To change the order of a compilation’s tracks, as well as its name, tap the three dots on the playlist page and Edit playlist.

Finally, there’s another playlist option worth mentioning. Spotify uses your listening history and machine learning to figure out your music taste and recommend artists, albums and playlists that you’ll like. But the service also acknowledges that there are a lot of reasons to make a playlist, and maybe you don’t want a particular compilation to affect your Spotify suggestions—maybe you created a playlist of kiddy songs to keep your nephews entertained when you babysit them, or a collection of epic tunes for your Dungeons & Dragons games that you don’t want to inform your daily mixes. If this is the case, create your playlist and before you add any songs, open the three-dot menu and choose Exclude from my taste profile.

How to share a Spotify playlist

A Spotify menu showing all the app  options to share the link to a playlist.
Your sharing options will vary depending on the apps you’ve got installed on your phone. Spotify

You can share any public Spotify playlist via a link—just tap the three dots on the playlist page and go to Share and Copy link. You’ll get a unique URL you can paste anywhere you want,  like an email or chat conversation. Instead of choosing Copy link, you can share the link directly  through one of the suggested apps on your phone. To do that, just pick the app you want and follow the steps.

You could even paste this link on your website or in your social media bio to give visitors an idea of your taste in music. The playlist will open on the web, in the desktop app, or the mobile app, depending on the device the person is using when opening the link, and how it’s configured.

[Related: Spotify wants to understand your body on music]

You’ll find the same options for private playlists, but the generated link has a limited lifespan of seven days—if the person you shared your playlist with opens the link within that time frame, they’ll be able to access the compilation indefinitely. But that doesn’t mean they can share it with more people—only you, as the creator of a private playlist, have the power to share it.

On mobile, shared private playlists differ from shared public playlists in that you can see who has access to the compilation. Just below the playlist name, you’ll see the little profile pictures of the people you’ve invited and you can click or tap it to get a full and detailed list. If you want to revoke access from someone there, do it by tapping the three dots next to their name and choosing Remove from playlist.

Another option for sharing playlists is to use a Spotify code, which works a bit like a QR code. Tap the three dots on the playlist, then Show Spotify Code. You’ll see a series of lines that you can share by posting anywhere online or even printing it. People can then scan it using the Spotify app by tapping Search and then the camera icon in the top right corner.

Spotify code showing a compilation of album covers by British band New Order
You can screenshot your playlist’s Spotify code and post it as an image wherever you want. Spotify

How to make a collaborative playlist on Spotify

Creating collaborative playlists on Spotify can be extremely useful for everything from weddings to road trips. This feature allows you to invite your friends to the creation process and give them permission to add and remove songs on the playlist, as well as changing the order of the tunes.

On each public and private playlist page there’s an invite button—a portrait silhouette with a plus symbol. Tap it to generate a link to pass on to the people you want to give editorial access to your playlist. Just like the sharing link on private playlists, collaborators have to click or tap the URL within seven days. After that, there are no time restrictions on how long they can stick around for.

Screen showing a collaborative playlist on Spotify, including the option to add collaborators.
Playlists are always better with friends. Spotify

Pictures of collaborators will show up in small bubbles at the top of the playlist, the same way that people who’ve been invited to shared private playlists do. Tap these bubbles for more details and select the three dots next to any name to choose whether people can collaborate on the playlist or are simply allowed to look at it. From the same menu, you can also remove access completely, if you want.

Screen showing the collaborator settings on a Spotify playlist, including how to remove collaborators.
Is someone abusing their power as a playlist curator? Kick them to the curb with a single tap. Spotify

And if at some point you’re done with your compilation, know that it’s easy to delete your Spotify playlist. Open the collection you want to get rid of, click or tap on the three-dot menu and select Delete. It’s that simple.

Two Spotify features to make your playlists even better 

If you thought those were the only ways to customize and create playlists on Spotify, think again. The streaming service has two more options you can play around with to create the perfect musical compilation. 

Blend

If you tap Your Library, then the + (plus) icon, you’ll see a Blend option next to Playlist. Blend lets you invite up to 10 people to a shared playlist, and then Spotify will automatically build a compilation that mixes the musical tastes and listening history of all the users you’ve invited. It also refreshes with a new mix every day.

Jam 

This feature facilitates collaborations at parties. It lets you invite friends to add tracks to a playlist in real time while still keeping veto power and control over the track order. Spotify will also help by offering up recommendations based on who’s accepted your invitation.

To start a jam you’ll need to be a Premium subscriber, but free users can help out as collaborators. On your phone, tap the devices icon on the Now Playing bar (it looks like a small speaker), then Start a Jam. You can find the same option by tapping on the three dots on a public playlist page. From there, you can invite people to the jam by sharing a link, or by opening the Spotify app and either tapping your phones together or scanning a QR code. 

The post How to make hit Spotify playlists, alone or with your friends appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
This Windows feature lets you pin important apps to your screen https://www.popsci.com/diy/always-on-top-windows/ Tue, 24 Oct 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582703
Windows desktop showing the Always on Top feature activated and showing a video on top of a browser window.
You don't have to arrange and rearrange windows when switching apps. Screenshot: Windows

Boost your productivity by keeping your most important apps handy.

The post This Windows feature lets you pin important apps to your screen appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Windows desktop showing the Always on Top feature activated and showing a video on top of a browser window.
You don't have to arrange and rearrange windows when switching apps. Screenshot: Windows

When you’re working on your PC, sometimes it’s handy to pin a window so that it’s always on top of the programs you’re using. Maybe you want to keep the calculator app or a text document visible at all times, or maybe your favorite team is playing and you want to make sure you don’t miss out on all the action.

Windows doesn’t offer this ability by default but you can add it through the Powertoys app. This tool brings with it a bunch of great features to Microsoft’s OS, including Always On Top, which can pin any window so that it stays right in front of everything else in your workspace. Here’s how to set it up.

How to set up Always On Top

1. Download the Powertoys app from the Microsoft Store. Once the program is installed, it should open automatically.

Windows App Store showing the Windows Powertoys app.
Once you download Powertoys it should open automatically, but you can find it using the search bar in the Start bar. Screenshot: Windows

2. On the left sidebar, click Always on Top to configure it.  By default, you’ll be able to trigger the feature by using the keyboard shortcut Windows + Ctrl + T, but you can change it to something else—more on that later. 

[Related: 7 hidden Windows features you should be using]

3. That’s it—Always on top is ready to use. Now, open whatever app or window you want to keep in front and hit the keyboard shortcut to pin it in place. Use the same shortcut unpin it.  

How to customize Always On Top

By default, there will be a thick blue border around the window you pin, but you can change or remove it. 

1. Open Powertoys and head to the Always On Top section in the sidebar. 

  • Pro tip: If you can’t find the app, click the Windows logo on the Start bar and use the search field at the top of the emerging window. 

2. Click Open Settings. Scroll down and under Appearance & Behavior, you’ll be able to remove the border entirely, if you like—just toggle the switch next to Show border around the pinned window

If you don’t want to get rid of the border, you can change its color. By default, the feature will use the current system color (Windows default), which is defined by your wallpaper, but you can switch it to any hue you want. Just open the drop down menu next to Color mode, and click Custom color. A new entry named Color will appear on the menu, and you can play around with the color picker on the right to choose whatever tone you like. 

Always on Top settings on the Powertoys app showing the color settings and the color picker.
You can choose whatever color you like for the line framing your pinned window. Screenshot: Windows

You can also make the border transparent by dragging the slider next to Opacity to the left or right. Unfortunately, there’s no preview to guide you on how the different opacity levels will look, but you’ll see the changes in real time if you’ve got a window pinned to the top of your workspace already. Drag the slider all the way to the left, and the pinned window frame will become totally see-through. 

[Related: 10 new features to get you started with Windows 11]

Another element you can customize is the border thickness. Just play around with the slider next to Thickness. Again, you’ll need to have a window already pinned in place to see how the changes look in real time. 

Always on top setting showing thickness and opacity sliders.
You can customize how Always on Top looks in your PC. Screenshot: Windows

Finally, by default there is a sound every time you pin and unpin a window—you can turn this on and off in the Sound section of the settings. 

Other options include the ability to exclude certain apps from being pinned and changing the keyboard shortcut to activate Always on Top. Click the pencil icon under Activation and type whatever shortcut you like. Just make sure the key combo you use is not taken by another action, or things can get pretty confusing and annoying pretty fast. 

The post This Windows feature lets you pin important apps to your screen appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to see which websites are sharing your data with Instagram https://www.popsci.com/diy/third-party-data-instagram/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 16:23:01 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=582387
Instagram menu showing the Activity off-Meta technologies settings
Now you can know who's sharing data with Instagram about you. Screenshot: Instagram

Privacy setting allow users to manage what other websites share with Meta about you.

The post How to see which websites are sharing your data with Instagram appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Instagram menu showing the Activity off-Meta technologies settings
Now you can know who's sharing data with Instagram about you. Screenshot: Instagram

Meta, possibly in an effort to convince people it’s a transparent company, just equipped Instagram with a new feature that lets users know what it learns about them through other websites. Unfortunately, getting that information is not as easy as Meta wants you to believe.

Other than what you post and how you interact with the platform, Instagram’s parent company also gathers data about you through other sites and organizations that use the company’s products and services. That means that if you buy something from a vendor that uses Meta Pixel on their website, for example, Instagram will know about it. 

With this new feature, you can see who’s sharing your information, delete the data already in Instagram’s hands, and prevent any future sharing. That may sound like a lot of work, but we tried it and made mistakes so you don’t have to. 

How to find out what other sites share with Instagram about you

You can learn all the hot gossip other sites tell Meta about you on the Activity off-Meta technologies menu. This option was once only available to Facebook users, but it’s now an integral part of the company’s Account Center, which includes Instagram. 

[Related: How to make your social media posts truly private]

1. On the Instagram app, open your profile by tapping the silhouette of a person in the bottom right corner of your screen. Go to the hamburger menu (three lines) in the top right corner, choose Settings and privacy, and then Accounts Center

On the web, log into Instagram, click More in the bottom left corner of your screen, and go to Settings. There, click Accounts Center

Instragram menu showing how to get to Meta's account center
On the Accounts Center menu you can tweak details about all your Meta accounts. Screenshot: Instagram

2. From here on out, the options are the same no matter if you are on your phone or your computer. Go to Your information and permissions and then to Your activity off Meta technologies

Meta's Account Center menu on Instagram
Facebook users already had the option to see which third parties were sharing information with the platform. Screenshot: Instagram

On the next screen, you’ll be able to learn a bit more about the type of data Instagram receives from third parties when you interact with them. This data can be a number of things, such as when you opened an app, logged into it using Facebook or Instagram, added an item to your cart, bought something, or even made a donation. Meta says this information doesn’t include health or financial data, or other sensitive details like date of birth or passwords.  

3. Under the What you can do heading, go to Recent activity to see all the sites sharing your information with Instagram. You may need to enter your Instagram password to continue. You’ll see a list of companies, and you can click each one to learn more details. 

Instagram menu showing the Activity off-Meta technologies settings
Now you can know who’s sharing your data with Instagram. Screenshot: Instagram

Here’s the tricky part, though: when you click the number of interactions the company has shared with Meta, you won’t see a detailed account of the interactions the site shared with Instagram. Instead, you’ll see more information and a button you can hit to Download activity details.

The notification showed when you open the Activity Off-Meta technologies menu
Meta does a good job at explaining what third party data might be, but remember that this list is not exhaustive—it only includes examples. Screenshot: Instagram

You’d think that by that they mean downloading only the details of your interactions with other apps and websites, but you’d be wrong. You’ll actually need to request to download a file that contains your entire Instagram account information, and you still won’t find what exactly other sites shared about you. 

4. This leaves you with nothing to do except cut the data flow off at the source. Back in the Recent activity menu, you can click or tap Clear previous activity or Disconnect specific activity. The first one will remove everything Instagram has on you from third parties, but it won’t prevent the same sites from continuing to share information in the future.

To do a thorough job, start by choosing Disconnect specific activity and picking a site you want to cut off. It’s counterintuitive to start here, as it’s the second option, but clearing the activity will prevent you from disconnecting third parties, as their names and the option to disconnect will disappear. That means you’ll need to wait until they appear on the menu again to block them once and for all. 

Activity off-Meta technologies menu showing dark pattern
This is a dark pattern: you’re most likely to click the button at the top, but doing so will prevent you from blocking the data sharing between external sites and Instagram. Screenshot: Instagram

5. The next screen will show you a list of the websites sharing data with Instagram. Select the ones you want to sever ties with by checking the circle next to their name, then hit Continue

The Disconnect Specific Activity menu on Instagram showing an entry from Sephora.
You can disconnect sites one by one, but it’s easier (and faster) to cut sites off from the Disconnect specific activity menu. Screenshot: Instagram

6. The next screen will show you more information about severing ties between that third party activity and your account, including the fact that doing so might log you out of that external website if you used your Instagram account to log in. It also clarifies that you’ll still see ads from the site, albeit less personalized, and Meta will continue to receive information, but it just won’t be associated with you. Hit Confirm when you’re done and repeat the process with all the sites you don’t want sharing your data. 

[Related: How to go incognito on these 6 popular apps]

Back on the Recent activity menu, you can also tap on the name of a company and select Disconnect. This, of course, requires you to disconnect sites one by one, which is not as efficient as doing it by hitting the Disconnect specific activity button.   

Keep in mind that disconnecting these sites doesn’t mean they won’t keep sharing information with Instagram—it just means the data will be anonymized, so not tied to you specifically. This is something a lot of companies do to protect users’ privacy, but it’s also worth knowing there are studies claiming data can never be truly anonymized, especially when certain data points, like location, are involved

7. Now it’s time to delete what Instagram already has on you by clicking or tapping Clear previous activity. Continue by choosing your account and hitting Clear. Confirm your choice again by selecting Clear previous activity

The Clear third party activity menu on Instagram
Finish by making sure the data Instagram already has on you from third parties is wiped out. Screenshot: Instagram

As you can see, Instagram’s new way of managing third-party activity is, well, disappointing. Navigating the new menu is incredibly frustrating, as it’s mined with dark patterns, and even after doing a deep dive, we still don’t know what third-party websites shared about us, and we couldn’t prevent them from sharing more information in the future. Certainly not the best experience.

The post How to see which websites are sharing your data with Instagram appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best leaf blowers of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/story/reviews/best-leaf-blower/ Tue, 20 Jul 2021 11:00:00 +0000 https://stg.popsci.com/story/uncategorized/best-leaf-blower/
The best leaf blowers
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Rid your lawn, sidewalk, or back porch of pesky foliage.

The post The best leaf blowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best leaf blowers
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Dewalt Cordless Leaf Blower XR DeWalt Corded Electric Handheld Leaf Blower
SEE IT

No need to fuel this pick up with gas—it runs on electricity alone and can clear out up to 450 cubic feet per minute.

Best cordless Worx Nitro 40V Pro Leafjet sitting on a pile of leaves Worx Nitro 40V PRO LEAFJET Cordless Leaf Blower
SEE IT

Clear away debris and leaves without the hassle of a tangled cord or short battery life.

Best budget BLACK+DECKER Leaf Blower & Leaf Vacuum BLACK+DECKER Leaf Blower & Leaf Vacuum
SEE IT

Get both a blower and a mulcher for the price of one (or less) without sacrificing power. This pick blows at up to 250 miles per hour for no-fuss cleaning.

A great leaf blower makes you want to wake up on a fall day and get to work. It makes you wish your yard was a few acres bigger so you can use your favorite power tool more. But who wants to bother with a leaf blower rental? And trying to borrow a neighbor’s noisy, old leaf blower can feel like pulling teeth. The wrong leaf blower can make you want to pick up a rake to move the few leaves that fell on your front lawn. Purchasing your own leaf blower can have higher upfront costs than renting, but it will save you plenty of headaches—there’s no need to pick up and drop it off, and you don’t have to worry about handling a leaf blower you hate. Effectiveness isn’t the only measure of a blower. If you want to be a good neighbor, you’ll also want to consider just how loud your lawn equipment is, as some communities ban the use of certain kinds of leaf blowers to reduce noise pollution. Here’s how to find the best leaf blower for you.

How we chose the best leaf blowers

We looked to product reviews, consumer impressions, and warranted advice from our landscape-loving dads, who are very proud of their yard tools. You deserved to be just as jazzed about a storage shed packed with your own collection of backyard tools as they are.

The best leaf blowers: Reviews & Recommendations

Looking for a tool to move leaves can be stressful, but don’t worry, we’ve got you covered—you don’t have to go back to raking leaves. This guide will take you through the main points to consider while buying a leaf blower while offering up our leaf blower reviews. You can save that stress for when it’s time to choose a snowblower.

Best overall: DeWALT Cordless XR Leaf Blower

Dewalt

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This professional-grade leaf blower brings crisp landscaping to your backyard.

Specs

  • Weight: 5.43 lbs.
  • Power source: Battery
  • Electric or gas: Electric
  • Air speed: 125 MPH

Pros

  • Part of DeWalt’s tool ecosystem
  • Brushless motor
  • Lightweight

Cons

  • Doesn’t come with a battery

DeWALT’s cordless leaf blower offers an excellent combination of both power—courtesy of its 20V motor—and cost. This battery-powered model can push out air at up to 125 miles per hour, covering an area of 450 cubic feet per minute. A flat concentrator nozzle helps blow away heavier debris. This leaf blower runs on a battery, but DeWALT doesn’t include one with the box; you’ll have to pick one up separately. If you have another DeWALT power tool, there’s a good chance its battery is compatible with this leaf blower, which is one reason to stay within the company’s ecosystem. The company does offer a bundle with a battery and charger for an additional $50 in case you’re totally new to DeWALT power tools, or want a spare.

Best cordless: Worx Nitro 40V PRO LEAFJET Cordless Leaf Blower

Billy Cadden

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This lightweight cordless leafblower is designed with an efficient brushless motor, yet provides plenty of power, courtesy of two 20-volt batteries.  

Specs

  • Weight: 6.6 lbs.
  • Power source: Battery
  • Electric or gas: Electric
  • Air speed: 165 MPH

Pros

  • Designed with two powerful batteries
  • Features 620 CFM blower and has high capacity
  • Comes with charger

Cons

  • Somer users had issues with battery performance

The WORX Nitro Leaf Blower provides plenty of performance for a lightweight, cordless tool. It’s designed with a brushless motor that allows it to run longer and provides quite a bit of power. The two included lithium-ion batteries provide 40 volts of power and 165 MPH of blowing speed. The controls allow you to toggle between four speed settings and the blower also features dual air intakes. The batteries charge to full capacity in two hours, and this blower is compatible with other WORX tools. I also found it useful for blowing away spiderwebs.

Best rechargeable: RYOBI Brushless Cordless Jet Fan Leaf Blower

Ryobi

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This lightweight, quiet leaf blower packs a powerful punch.

Specs

  • Weight: 8.08 lbs.
  • Power source: Battery
  • Electric or gas: Electric
  • Air speed: 125 MPH

Pros

  • Quiet
  • Light
  • Brushless motor

Cons

  • Battery and charger sold separately

This Ryobi leaf blower buzzes along at 125 MPH and is fairly quiet at only 59 decibels. The cordless blower has a battery life approaching half an hour without using turbo mode. It weighs less than 10 pounds, meaning you can teach Junior how to help out in the yard without risking a hospital trip. Don’t let its weight and quietness fool you—this leaf blower runs at 550 CFM, or cubic feet per minute, and rivals the power of many gas-powered leaf blowers. This means you can clean the yard and driveway faster than Junior tries to bail out of their yard duties. Not today, Junior!

Best handheld: CRAFTSMAN Cordless Leaf Blower

CRAFTSMAN

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A large, translucent fuel tank takes the guesswork out of filling up this leaf blower.

Specs

  • Weight: 8 lbs.
  • Power source: Battery
  • Electric or gas: Electric
  • Air speed: 100 MPH

Pros

  • Completely wireless
  • Powerful
  • Includes multiple batteries and charger

Cons

  • Not for heavy use

This CRAFTSMAN leaf blower is relatively lightweight, runs on a battery, and includes all of the necessary charging accessories. With a maximum speed of 100 MPH, this leaf blower will offer respectable performance given its size. You’ll only be able to get through roughly a quarter of an acre of land per cleaning session off a single fully charged battery, but the bundle we’re recommending comes with two. If you have a larger backyard, it would be wise to invest in a more heavy-duty leaf blower.

Best backpack: ECHO Gas Backpack Blower

Echo

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This powerful leaf blower takes the strain off your hands to make yard work a breeze.

Specs

  • Weight: 29 lbs.
  • Power source: Engine
  • Electric or gas: Gas
  • Air speed: 234 MPH

Pros

  • Powerful
  • Covers lots of ground
  • No tingly hands from vibrations

Cons

  • Heavy
  • Expensive

This ECHO leaf blower blows 234 MPH and has an airflow capacity of 765 CFM, which makes it perfect for those with plenty of acres to cover or who landscape on the side. Keep in mind that it weighs 29 pounds, though, so it might be cumbersome to wear for long periods of time. However, the comfortable straps help ease the burden on your shoulders. Although this leaf blower packs a hefty price tag, reviewers note its longevity and power, meaning this investment purchase pays for itself.

Best budget: BLACK+DECKER Leaf Blower & Leaf Vacuum

Black+Decker

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This versatile piece of equipment vacuum leaves not the cash in your wallet.

Specs

  • Weight: 8.1 lbs.
  • Power source: Corded
  • Electric or gas: Electric
  • Air speed: 250 MPH

Pros

  • Three tools in one
  • Easy leaf disposal

Cons

  • Needs practice to handle

This Black+Decker leaf blower provides leaf blowing and vacuuming and a bag for mulching. Twelve amps of power deliver up to 250 MPH of blowing speed. You can conveniently grind down up to 16 bags of mulch into one with this leaf blower vacuum. Reviewers note that it works on small debris, but be aware that it takes a bit of practice to handle—vacuuming too fast will clog the tube. It’s quiet despite its power, meaning you won’t alert the entire neighborhood that you’re doing yard work. Two disposable bags are included for fast clean-up.

What to consider when buying the best leaf blowers

Walking into a home and garden store can be overwhelming, between the high ceilings and bounty of charcoal grills. How can you focus on picking out the best leaf blower when there are at least 20 varieties of riding lawn mower five feet away? We’ve done all the work for you, so leave the choice paralysis for the chip aisle at the grocery store.

Power source

When considering the best leaf blower, you’ll first need to decide between gas, electric, and battery-powered models. Gas models are generally more powerful than electric models and freedom from a cord means they can go just about anywhere. However, they are considerably noisier, heavier than electric models, and put out pollution tied to fossil fuels. Electric models are lighter than gas and can provide the kind of power that will cover a large swath of jobs—however, their mobility is limited to about 100 feet of an outlet (give or take one of the best extension cords). Battery-powered models spare users from the maintenance required of gas blowers but have less power. The biggest mark against battery-powered leaf blowers is that batteries generally only last up to an hour. That means big jobs will take much longer, as you’ll need to recharge. (Of course, you can also check out the best solar generators so you can take a portable power station around with you to keep a steady rotation of charging battery packs.)

Power

To gauge the power of a blower, you’ll want to look at the cubic feet per minute (CFM) rating and promised miles per hour (MPH). The higher CFM, the more leaves you’ll be able to blow away at one time. The higher the MPH, the easier it will be to move heavier debris or wet leaves.

Once you get through that basic consideration, you might want to consider other features like vacuuming and mulching features, which store and shred yard waste. For professional-grade yard maintenance across multiple acres, you’ll want to consider backpack models that pack extra power, or even wheeled models. Keep in mind though, that wheeled models come with their own drawbacks, like a lack of features and considerably high noise levels.

Cordless vs. corded

When it comes to convenience, cordless leaf blowers are at the top of the pack. They dispense with the need for gas and maintenance required by gas-powered blowers as well as their noisiness. A cordless blower also tends to be fairly light and allows you to go wherever you need without worrying if you’re close to an outlet. However, even the best cordless blower doesn’t tend to have the same power as its gas-powered brethren and with a battery life of around one hour, you may have to charge once or twice before finishing your chores or consider investing in a second battery.

Corded leaf blowers are ideal for backyards that provide access to outlets at 100 feet of your work zone. They provide power nearly as strong as gas-powered motors and are generally much lighter.

Electric vs. gas

Gas leaf blowers feature high power and the convenience of not having a cord. However, they require regular maintenance, and two-stroke engines featured in the majority of gas blowers require mixing gas and oil. Try to look for four-stroke engines instead to do away with the need for mixing gas and oil and to reduce emissions. Another drawback to gas leaf blowers is their sound level—it’s often recommended to wear hearing protection when operating them. Most models also weigh about 10 pounds, which might be disqualifying for some users. Electric leaf blowers offer the convenience of a button-press start and do away with the noise and environmental pollution of gas blowers.

Backpack vs. handheld

Backpack leaf blowers arm users with power twice that of their handheld competitors. The tradeoff is the drawbacks associated with gas engines—maintenance, fuel mixing, noise pollution, and air pollution. They offer way more power than folks with a small front yard or even a sizable backyard need. But if you’re dealing with major acreage that has to be maintained meticulously and quickly, you may want to consider a backpack blower. Handheld leaf blowers are good for cleaning up your driveway, but the vibrations might make your hands hurt if used for an extended period of time.

Price range

A budget leaf blower will give you what you need to deal with your sidewalk and moderately sized yard. You’ll be able to find decent corded models for around $100. In some cases, you’ll find deals that get you models with useful features like mulching and vacuuming. Just expect lower CFM rates, which means you might have to spend longer blowing.

FAQs

Q: What cities have banned leaf blowers?

Over 20 cities in California have banned leaf blowers due to the noise they create, although enforcement of the ban is spotty. Some cities, including Greenwich, Connecticut, and Palm Beach, Florida, regulate the decibel volume and times of use of leaf blowers. To find your city’s rules on leaf blowers, you can check here. Your local government website may have more up-to-date information.

Q: What is the best kind of blower for gutter cleaning?

Cordless leaf blowers offer the kind of maneuverability to safely work on your roof. They are generally lighter than gas-powered models and won’t force you to deal with the noise of a gas-powered model as it ricochets off your roof and across the neighborhood. Yes, you might have to recharge your blower—but odds are your gutters aren’t going to need hours of power to get things clean.

Q: What is the best way to use a blower?

Before using your blower, make sure you’ve taken your safety into account. Put on a pair of safety goggles to protect your eyes from debris, and don a pair of earmuffs or earplugs to protect your hearing. Check that the leaves you are blowing are mostly dry, and that wind is low. Plan to blow your leaves in one direction using air pulses while pointing the nozzle at a shallow angle toward the ground. Sweep the blower from side to side while blowing leaves into a pile.

Q: Can you use a leaf blower on wet leaves?

If using a leaf blower to vacuum leaves, no. They can clog the fan, prevent other debris from being sucked up, weigh down the tool, and cause bag attachments to break. However, if you’re blowing away wet leaves, by all means, yes. It might take more work, but it can be done.

Q: Which is more important for a leaf blower, CFM or MPH?

It depends. A higher CFM pushes leaves further and helps you clear a larger area faster. This is important if you’re working with light materials. However, a higher MPH will help move heavier objects, like wet leaves and larger rocks. Take both into consideration when purchasing a leaf blower.

Q: How much does a leaf blower cost?

Our leaf blower recommendations cost between $92 and $529.

Finals thoughts on the best leaf blowers

When buying a leaf blower, your first major consideration should be the demands of the property you are tending. Do you have access to power outlets? Do you have acres or a small backyard? This will tell you whether it’s worth buying a larger gas-powered model, or if you can stick with a corded or wireless model. From there, you’ll want to consider what kind of power tool owner you are. Are you someone who likes maintaining your landscaping tools, checking the engine, and mixing gas? Or do you simply want to plug something in or charge a battery?

Your environment also comes into play when considering how much power you’ll need. Are you dealing with debris other than leaves? Do you have close neighbors who will object to loud engine noise? Once you’ve reached this conclusion, you’ll want to set a price range. Remember that CFM rating will tell you how many leaves your tool can move at once, and MPH will tell you how it can handle heavier debris. Now you’re well on your way to finding the best blower for your home.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best leaf blowers of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
This giant bumper car is street-legal and enormously delightful https://www.popsci.com/technology/dan-hryhorcoff-bumper-car/ Mon, 23 Oct 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581743
a giant bumper car
Dan Hryhorcoff, who has a deep mechanical background, built the vehicle as a pandemic project. Kathy Hryhorcoff

Dan Hryhorcoff built the 13-foot-long bumper car as a pandemic project. Here's how he made it.

The post This giant bumper car is street-legal and enormously delightful appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
a giant bumper car
Dan Hryhorcoff, who has a deep mechanical background, built the vehicle as a pandemic project. Kathy Hryhorcoff

“I always build things,” says Dan Hryhorcoff. 

Case in point: Hryhorcoff has constructed an absolutely delightful giant bumper car, a project that he says began during the pandemic. The rest of us may have baked bread as COVID came down the pike, but Hryhorcoff, who lives in northeastern Pennsylvania and has also built a submarine, constructed an enormous blue bumper car. It gets its propulsion from a repurposed Chevrolet engine and is street-legal. 

Before he constructed the big bumper car, Hryhorcoff had made a different vehicle, starting on it around 2013 or so. “When I retired, I decided I kind of wanted to build a car,” he recalls. For that project, he chose to focus on a 1950s pedal car for children called a Murray “sad face.” “I decided to copy that and make a large one.” (Those Murray models have a front that does indeed look like a sad face, but anyone who sees Hryhorcoff’s work will probably smile.) 

Creating that big red vehicle provided him with further experience working with fiberglass, a material he had also worked with when building the submarine. “I had a lot of fun with that [Murray car] at car shows and things, and it got a lot of attention from a broad audience,” he says.

“Then COVID hit,” he adds. He wanted a new project. His thinking? “Another car project would be good.” 

Building the big bumper car

He settled on a bumper car. To get the source material he needed for the project, he turned to an amusement park in Elysburg, Pennsylvania called Knoebels, and the bumper cars they have there. Specifically, he focused on the 1953-model bumper car that was made by a company called Lusse. He liked that it had a “Chevrolet pickup truck sorta look” from the 1950s. 

“I decided to copy one of those,” he says. Spending some eight hours at Knoebels gave him the chance to get the information he needed. “I measured, and took photos, and made templates, and whatever I needed to, to copy the car as well as I can.” He chose to make his version of the car double the size of the base model. As the Scranton Times-Tribune noted in a story about Hryhorcoff in July, the bumper car ride at Knoebels dates back to the immediate post-World-War-II era.

[Related: This Florida teen is making a business out of rebuilding old-school auto tech]

Inside, the big bumper car’s power plant comes from a Chevrolet Aveo. “I took the front of the Aveo, and chopped it off, and put that in the back of the bumper car,” he explains. “And the front of the bumper car is a motorcycle wheel.” That single wheel up front means it can turn very sharply. The exterior is made out of fiberglass. All told, it measures 13 feet long, 7 feet wide, and 5.5 feet tall, making it twice the size of a regular bumper car. A pole in the back mimics the way actual bumper cars get their electricity, except this one connects to nothing. 

A project like this would likely be a bumpy ride for anyone without the experience that Hryhorcoff, 72, brings to the table. “I learned to run a lathe when I was 13 years old, with my dad, and he was kind of a jack-of-all-trades,” he recalls. (A lathe is a tool for forming metal into a round shape, and a wood lathe is the kind of equipment you could use to make a baseball bat.) He built a go-cart, tinkered with lawn mowers, and learned about auto repair in a garage. His interest, as he describes it, was “all around mechanical.” 

He spent four years after high school in the Navy in the early 1970s, where he worked stateside and repaired radios for F-4 jets, and then studied mechanical engineering at Penn State. After working for a drilling company, he started his own machine shop called Justus Machine. 

a giant bumper car on the road
The bumper car measures 5.5 feet high. Kathy Hryhorcoff

Always diving into something new

The submarine he built came from plans for a K350 model purchased from George Kittredge, and is called Persistence. “I knew I was building something that wasn’t gonna kill me, if I build it correctly,” he says. (Watch a video of the sub in action here.) That sub has gone as deep as 540 feet with no one on board, Hryhorcoff says, and he’s taken it down himself to about 150 feet deep. 

[Related: How does a jet engine work? By running hot enough to melt its own innards.]

Hryhorcoff describes himself as an engineer, not an artist, and prefers to follow plans and undertake projects in which he knows any challenges he might face are surmountable. “Any project I’ve ever chose was a project that I knew I can get through it, but I had something new to learn in the process,” he says. “There were always some unknowns.” But those unknowns, he adds, were within the realm of doable for him and his equipment, even if he had to learn new stuff along the way.

“I’d rather big projects, rather than a dozen little ones,” he adds. 

Watch a short video about Hryhorcoff and this project, below:

The post This giant bumper car is street-legal and enormously delightful appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to watch TV on a computer, even if it’s live https://www.popsci.com/watch-live-tv-on-computer/ Fri, 30 Apr 2021 21:26:55 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/watch-live-tv-on-computer/
A young woman reclining on a gray couch, smiling as she watches TV on a silver laptop on the table in front of her.
Forget a separate device—you can stream live TV on your laptop. Depositphotos

Turn your laptop into a mobile television set.

The post How to watch TV on a computer, even if it’s live appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A young woman reclining on a gray couch, smiling as she watches TV on a silver laptop on the table in front of her.
Forget a separate device—you can stream live TV on your laptop. Depositphotos

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

As television shows become available online, there’s less of a need to watch your favorites on a set schedule. But if you choose to cut the cord entirely, you’ll miss out on live channels, such as news and sports. Luckily, you can still watch live TV on your computer. You have two options: Plug a TV tuner device—which catches broadcasts like an antenna does—into a USB port, or stream shows through your web browser.

Plug in a TV tuner

Network channels, including NBC, CBS, ABC, Fox, PBS, and local stations, air for free. All you need to watch them is an antenna to snag the broadcasts and a device to share them with your computer. The latter, called a TV tuner, can come in the form of a dongle or a larger box that plugs into any spare USB port.

Tuners come with bundled software that helps you navigate. When you’re getting started, these built-in applications will install the necessary drivers, scan for available channels, and display them on your computer screen. Then you can click through your options.

Once you’ve finished installation, the bundled software will help you receive channels, browse program guides, and make recordings. However, you can also download alternative applications, such as Kodi and Plex, to do the same tasks. Kodi is free but has a slightly more complicated setup, while Plex has a simpler process but requires a Plex Pass subscription that costs $5 per month, $40 a year, or $120 for lifetime access. Plex also has a handy “discover” feature that lets you track down anything you want to watch.

Buying a tuner

When you go shopping for tuner hardware, first look for compatibility with your computer’s operating system. Also consider whether the device includes extras like a bundled remote control. If you choose a model that comes with two or more integrated tuners, you’ll be able to record one channel while watching another, record two shows at once, or create a picture-in-picture effect with two channels.

We’d recommend the Hauppauge WinTV-DualHD ($80 on Amazon), though it only works with Windows machines. It includes two tuners, which lets you view or record two shows at once. Once you plug it into a spare USB port, the supplied software will take over, which makes the setup process extremely easy.

Buying an antenna

If you’ve already wired your home with a TV antenna, you can connect it to your new tuner and be good to go. If not, you’ll need to purchase an antenna to catch the TV signals flying through the air. Unfortunately there’s no easy way to figure out how many channels an antenna will catch—many factors make a difference, including the presence of surrounding buildings and nearby hills, and the distance between your home and the closest tower. You’ll just have to buy the hardware and try it out, so make sure the seller has a good returns policy, in case the reception is poor. If you live in a place where structures are few and far between, you may also want to check out our review team’s roundup of the best TV antennas for rural areas.

One of our favorite options is the Mohu Leaf Supreme Pro ($70 on Amazon), which boasts a sleek-looking design and a 65-mile range. Because it’s multi-directional, you don’t need to point it in a specific direction, so you can lay it flat or mount it to a wall. It’s meant to be used indoors, but it works great wherever you put it.

[Related: The best TV antennas]

Another choice we’d recommend is the 1byone Digital Amplified Indoor HDTV Antenna ($18 on Amazon), which is cheaper than the Mohu but has a smaller range—it only connects to transmission towers within 50 miles.

Once you’ve purchased your new gear, connect the antenna to the tuner, then the tuner to your laptop. Finally, download the free installer software (if necessary) and launch the application. It will walk you through the process of bringing up live TV channels on your laptop.

Stream channels online

Don’t want to buy new hardware? You can still watch live TV through your web browser. While services like Netflix focus on on-demand programs, other services include a live component so you can watch broadcasts—such as sports—as they happen.

If you’re only interested in watching a few channels in particular, head to the websites for those companies. Many of them—including ABC, Fox, and NBC—let you stream directly from their sites. However, there’s a catch: Different channels have different rules, and some require that you already have a TV provider or similar subscription (you have to sign in to confirm those credentials before watching). For example, you can watch CBS shows live only if you have a Paramount Plus subscription, which costs $6 per month and still includes ads.

Monthly online TV services

To get more than one channel at once, including premium options, you’ll need to subscribe to a monthly service like Hulu Live TV, YouTube TV, or Sling TV. All of these options provide a strong connection and easy setup, but they differ in the channels they offer. For example, YouTube TV doesn’t have a great spread of sports channels, while Sling TV has two plans that contain different stations but doesn’t focus on local ones. Before you invest in any subscription, test out that service’s free trial (they all offer one) to get a feel for the experience and make sure it includes the TV channels you want to watch. Here’s some more information that should help you choose.

Hulu offers four plans that include live TV, and the cheapest is $75.99 a month, but it does not allow you to access Hulu’s regular on-demand library—it’s live stuff only. You can spend $1 more ($76.99 per month) to add access to Hulu’s streaming library, Disney Plus, and ESPN Plus, all with ads. You can also pay more for additional features, such as premium channels like Showtime and Max (formerly HBO).

[Related: Watch anything you want without signing up for every streaming service]

With a slightly lower price of of $72.99 a month, YouTube TV offers access to more than 100 live channels, but you will need to enter your ZIP code to see what’s available in your area. For an additional $2 to $30 a month, you can bolt on extra ones, including NFL RedZone and Showtime. It also gives you an unlimited amount of free cloud DVR storage, so you can record as much content as you want and store it on YouTube’s servers.

Sling TV focuses on premium cable channels rather than local networks like ABC, CBS, and Fox, although you may be able to get some local channels, depending on your area. Prices start at $40 a month for a pack of 32 channels, and you can increase your subscription fee to add more. You can watch on a variety of devices besides your computer, including a smartphone or an Apple TV. Sling also offers a cloud DVR service, but you’ll have to pay an additional $5 a month to save recordings in the cloud.

Cable subscriptions

If you already pay for a cable subscription, this may be the easiest way to tune into live television on your computer. All you need are your username and password.

Take Comcast’s Xfinity Stream service. It gives subscribers access to more than 250 channels. Just navigate to the Xfinity Stream site, log in with your credentials, and start watching. DirecTV offers similar services, and you can access it through a web browser.

This story has been updated. It was originally published in 2019.

The post How to watch TV on a computer, even if it’s live appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best iPad apps for making the most of your device https://www.popsci.com/diy/best-ipad-apps/ Sun, 22 Oct 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581678
A person's hand selecting options of iPad apps in Apple's App store.
Select from the estimated 1.8 million apps available for the iPad. Depositphotos

Maximize your iPad’s potential (and your productivity) with the top apps for from drawing, planning, photo editing, and more.

The post The best iPad apps for making the most of your device appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A person's hand selecting options of iPad apps in Apple's App store.
Select from the estimated 1.8 million apps available for the iPad. Depositphotos

The latest iPads, like the iPad Pro M2, offer incredible speed and visual clarity that make them a favorite for work, school, and everything in between. However, to take full advantage of everything an iPad offers, you’ll need the right iPad apps. Your work and lifestyle will influence the apps that offer the most convenience and functionality for you. We’ve put together a list of the best iPad apps in a range of categories, from those that keep you organized to apps for editing, drawing, and taking notes.

1. Best for note-taking: Microsoft OneNote

The home page of the OneNote app, which shows a bike build list and an image of a bike on an iPad screen.
Need some help getting organized? Screenshot: Microsoft

OneNote, made by Microsoft, offers excellent note-taking features that stand out for ease of use and top-notch organizational features. The app is available in free and paid versions that come with Microsoft Office 2019 or a Microsoft 365 subscription. (Office 2019 costs $149.99 and Microsoft 365 costs $9.99 for a monthly subscription or $99.99 annually with a yearly subscription) The free version can do everything the paid version can except for storing files locally on Windows and a few stickers, which are pictures that offer another way to express yourself visually.  

The app’s organizational structure includes Notebooks, which break down into Sections, Pages, and Sub-Pages. The Notebooks display as colored tabs on the left of the screen, giving you easy access. The app takes a freeform approach to writing by allowing you to write anywhere on the page, like you would on a piece of physical paper. It automatically opens in text mode to type using an iPad keyboard or the on-screen one, but you can easily change to “draw” and use an Apple pencil to sketch pictures or leave handwritten notes. You can then tag lines of text so you can search for them later. 

A huge pro for OneNote for the iPad is the ability to draw along with taking text notes. You can add sketches, handwritten notes, or graphs to and over the top of text. The ability to draw around and through text within the same document is unique and separates OneNote from heavy competition by popular note-taking apps like Evernote and Joplin. You can also add attachments anywhere in the text so they show up where you need them to. 

The only real downside to OneNote is that there’s only local storage on Windows, yet it’s available in macOS, iOS, Android, and desktop versions. For an iPad, you’ll store your notes in Microsoft’s OneDrive, which means you’ll need a (free) OneDrive account

Microsoft OneNote is available on iOS, iPadOS, watchOS, and Android.

2. Best for drawing: Pixelmator Pro

The homepage for the Pixelmator Pro app, which features an editing app with a photo of a woman with artistically drawn text in the background.
Take your images to the next level with this powerful editing tool. Screenshot: Pixelmator

Among the many drawing apps for iPad, Pixelmator Pro rises to the top for its balance of simplicity, versatility, and price. The app offers over 100 brushes, pencils, and other tools that will let you build variety into your sketches. You can paint with watercolor or use sponge brushes to build texture in sketches in ways you can’t when drawing on paper without a bucket full of supplies. 

Pixelmator also has a photo editing system, which includes features that you can add to original drawings. For example, you can use layers, apply effects, and fine-tune colors to build depth and character to your work. You can also add shapes from Pixelmator’s library or add text with varying effects. Beyond drawing, the latest version also lets you work with RAW images, edit PDFs, and create iPhone 15 mockups.

[Related: How to unlock the hidden, more powerful camera on the iPhone 15]

We also like that you can easily export your drawings in different formats and send them directly to cloud storage like Dropbox or Google Drive. Overall, the app puts incredible creative power into your hands and gives you multiple ways to share your creations on other devices. However, the learning curve can be steep for those with little graphic experience. Pixelmator Pro doesn’t have a huge library or tutorials, so some learning will have to come from trial and error. 

Pixelmator Pro is available on iOS and iPadOS.

3. Best for planning: Todoist

The homepage of the Todoist app, which features abstract illustrations of flowers, mountains, and a man in a fedora.
Now you’ve got no excuse for procrastinating on that side project. Screenshot: Todoist

Todoist falls somewhere between the ultimate to-do list and project management. This cloud-based service syncs with any device on which you have the app, so you can access your lists from your iPad or a desktop as long as both have the app. An incredibly well-designed interface makes it easy to use despite the fact that it’s packed with features. 

You can schedule due dates, create tasks, and build lists. You can organize projects by tasks and subtasks. There are options to manually reorder tasks or set sorting options for the project. And Todoist lets you add labels so you can search among your projects later on. 

Plus, you can share it with multiple users, which is where the project management aspect comes in. The free version lets users organize five personal projects, provides space for 5MB file uploads, and keeps one week of activity history. The pro version, which costs $4 per month billed yearly, offers 300 personal projects, 100MB file uploads, and unlimited history with task reminders and task duration options. Businesses may want the business subscription, which costs $6 per month billed yearly, to get 500 team projects, unlimited collaborators, and the option to limit access and control with admin and member roles.

[Related: How to use split screen on iPad and conquer multitasking]

With the paid version, you can assign people tasks or add due dates, making it a robust way to manage a family schedule or small business team. Todoist is powerful, and the free version works well for personal organization. However, if you want to manage a family or small business using Todoist, it’s worth upgrading to either of the paid versions.

Todoist is available on iOS, iPadOS, watchOS, and Android.

4. Best for photo editing: Adobe Lightroom

The homepage for Adobe Lightroom, which features the black logo with the blue letters L and R inside and three phots of a sailboat on the water, a portrait of a woman, and a editing a photos of a mountainous area.
Lightroom makes it easy to make pro-level adjustments on the go. Screenshot: Adobe

Adobe Lightroom is a top choice when it comes to photo editing power. You upload your photos to Adobe’s Cloud, and once there, they’re available to edit on an iPad. The iPad version of Lightroom isn’t quite as robust as the desktop version, but it still offers excellent photo editing tools. You can download it for free with in-app purchases to unlock the features you need. The monthly prices for premium upgrades range from $4.99 to $49.99 per month. 

The app now has more advanced photo editing features like local adjustments, lens-profile-based corrections, and noise reduction, too. We like the local adjustments feature, which is fairly new to the iPad version. With this feature, you can select an oval or linear area in which to apply your edits rather than to the entire image. You’ve got 17 adjustment features to apply within the area, like graduated or radial filters and softness and strength adjustments. Of course, there are more traditional editing tools like photo adjusters and adjustments for clarity and shadows. You’ve also got the option to shoot photos directly in the app, which is more tempting now that iPads come with higher-quality cameras.

The downside with the app is that there currently aren’t great options to batch-edit a large number of photos, say for a wedding, which is odd considering that the features are geared more toward pros than beginners. But for individual photos, you can do everything you need from your iPad and send them to the desktop app when you’re done.

Adobe Lightroom is available for iOS, iPadOS, and Android.

5. Best for calendar: Google Calendar

The homepage for Google Calendar on a desktop, which features a Get Started button and a sample calendar with entries pulled out as an example.
This calendar can help you avoid double-booking. Screenshot: Google

Google Calendar’s versatility and collaboration options make it one of the best iPad apps for those who have a Google account. If you don’t have one, you’ll need to get one, and it’s worth considering for the range of features this calendar offers. 

You can create several calendars and view them separately or together. Organize a family calendar with your spouse and children or keep one for extended family to coordinate events. Google Calendar can be particularly helpful when working with teams because everyone can share their work calendars and schedule meetings using the app. There are options to create tasks, reminders, and recurring events. Within each, you can set times, invite participants, change colors, and add locations. Plus, you can share specific events if you don’t want to share your entire calendar. 

[Related: 5 Google Calendar tips to ensure you never miss a date]

All of that is with the free version, which, really, is all most people need unless you’re working with a large team. The premium version offers analytics and insights as well as the ability to schedule appointments or allow others to schedule appointments with you. Plus, you can sync all of your calendars to keep your life organized in one space.

Google Calendar is available on iOS, iPadOS, and Android.

The post The best iPad apps for making the most of your device appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to increase your WiFi speed https://www.popsci.com/speed-up-wi-fi/ Sun, 03 Oct 2021 01:37:40 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/speed-up-wi-fi/
A person using a phone with a WiFi signal icon on the screen, while sitting outside.
No, you cannot speed up your WiFi by tapping on the screen. georgejmclittle / Depositphotos

Boost your internet without buying a bunch of new tech.

The post How to increase your WiFi speed appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A person using a phone with a WiFi signal icon on the screen, while sitting outside.
No, you cannot speed up your WiFi by tapping on the screen. georgejmclittle / Depositphotos

No one likes slow WiFi—it’s right up there with creaking doors and leaking taps as one of the most frustrating household problems. To increase your WiFi speed back to where it should be, try making these tweaks to your router and other devices.

We’ve already covered some of the hardware upgrades you can invest in to remove dead spots and boost your home upload and download speeds. So in this guide, we’ll focus on software fixes and changes you can make to your existing gear. If those adjustments don’t work, switching to a mesh network or buying a WiFi extender can also improve your wireless internet speed.

Upgrade your router software

A Netgear router connected to a lot of cords, on a wood floor.
That looks like a pretty old router you’ve got there—have you updated its firmware recently? Stux / Pixabay

Just like your laptop and cell phone, routers run their own software. In this case, it’s called firmware because it’s so tightly tied to the hardware—the manufacturer installs and configures it before shipping the device. Companies don’t often issue updates for their routers’ firmware, but many do make new versions of their software available for download. These updates fix bugs and may also include performance upgrades, as well as extra support for newer devices on the market.

The best way to find new firmware for your router is to head to the manufacturer’s website or the internet service provider that gave you the router. If you can’t find a download link, run a web search using “firmware” followed by your router’s make and model.

The exact process for installing firmware varies from router to router. Typically, you open the device settings on your computer and look for the option that lets you install an update from a downloaded file (often a ZIP archive) on your hard drive. The downloaded package usually includes installation instructions, but if you’re still not sure how to do it, consult the router instruction manual or look up the instructions online.

Change the wireless channel

The options for changing your router's wireless channel.
Most routers let you switch to a different wireless channel. David Nield for Popular Science

Here’s another trick to try with a slow router: change the wireless channel it uses. This means slightly adjusting the wireless frequency that your WiFi signal is broadcast on. Your router should have a setting that lets you modify the channel, likely listed under a heading like Wireless or Advanced. If you can’t find it immediately, look up instructions online or in the router manual.

Most routers use channel 6 by default. Change this to 1 or 11 (to minimize interference with channel 6), and you might notice better WiFi performance. All of your connected devices will also need to connect to this new channel, but the majority of your gear will do so automatically, with no need to adjust the WiFi name or password. You might have to play around a bit before you arrive at the best channel, but stick to 1, 6, or 11 for the best chance of getting the fastest speeds.

[Related: 6 router settings you should change right now]

In a related trick, some more advanced routers offer two frequency bands: the standard 2.4GHz band and the faster 5GHz band. These bands follow the same principle as the channels mentioned above, but when you switch bands, you’re shifting the frequency much further. That means WiFi-enabled devices you connect to different bands won’t interfere with each other.

If your router supports dual bands (check your model’s documentation for details), you’ll usually see two different WiFi networks you can connect to. Divide your devices across both networks, depending on the speed and range each piece of hardware needs from your WiFi. For example, the 5GHz band typically offers faster speeds but shorter range, so devices closer to your router should use that one. It’ll stream your Spotify tunes more reliably to your gaming console, but it’s not as good at blasting through walls and doors as the older 2.4GHz standard. Use the latter for devices you move around your home, such as phones, or those located farther away from the router, and you should see increased WiFi speeds on all your devices.

Not every router can handle both bands, but most manufactured in recent years support these standards. On either band, if you’re getting sub-optimal WiFi speeds and seeing buffering wheels more often than you’d like, you can still change the wireless channel used in the 5GHz range or the 2.4GHz one. Check out your router’s help pages for more information on your options.

Control the bandwidth

Speedtest.net's internet speed testing interface.
Speedtest.net will tell you the download and upload rates you’re getting. Screenshot: Speedtest.net

Internet use can quickly eat up your available bandwidth, especially on slow connections or those shared among multiple people. So if you’re struggling to get a decent speed, try investigating what else is happening on your network. For example, running Netflix alongside Hulu while you take multiple video calls probably isn’t the best way to maximize your streaming speed.

As you work, visit a site like Speedtest.net to check your internet speed and see what you’re currently getting. But taking steps to increase those speeds means you’ll have to patrol the specific use of your home WiFi network—which is up to you and the people you live with. The easiest solution for maximum speeds is turning off devices not currently in use. This will not only save you money on your energy bill, but will also make sure that those computers, televisions, and tablets can’t possibly be wasting the bandwidth you need for another application. You can also dig into individual device settings to see which apps are using up the most WiFi.

[Related: Find the perfect internet speed for you]

At the same time, you’ll want to make sure no unwelcome visitors or invasive neighbors are lurking on your home network. Your router should have come with WiFi password protection already enabled. Changing this password on a regular basis—not to mention keeping it secret—will help you keep your network to yourself and your invited guests.

Another option is to specify which internet uses you value most. Some routers include a feature called Quality of Service, or QoS, which lets you prioritize certain applications (like Netflix) or types of content (like video) over others. You could use it to make sure your video calls stay stable even if that makes the Spotify stream spotty. Some routers also let you prioritize certain devices (maybe your computer) over others (maybe your roommate’s). If your router has a QoS feature, look on the manufacturer’s website or in the supplied manual for instructions on setting it up and telling the router what you’d like to prioritize.

Avoid the fish tank (and other large, dense objects)

A Netgear router near a PlayStation video game console and headphones.
Ideally, you’ll want to keep your router as close to your devices as possible. Netgear

Plenty of innocuous household objects will slow down your WiFi—including the water inside fish tanks. Now you know why your laptop never gets a signal when it’s behind the aquarium in your study. Even if you keep a fish-free home, try moving your furniture to put as few objects as possible (including walls) between your devices and your router.

In addition to bulky objects, anything that emits a wireless signal can interfere with the WiFi your router broadcasts. That includes wireless baby monitors, wireless landline phones, microwaves, Bluetooth keyboards and mice, and even string lights. All of these generate electromagnetic interference that can reduce your upload and download speeds. In most cases, the disruption should be minimal, but it’s worth bearing in mind if you’re experiencing problems. Rearranging the aforementioned items can help boost WiFi speed throughout your home, but if that solution is inconvenient, just switch your router to its 5GHz channel: Most microwaves and other wireless gear use the 2.4GHz frequency, so the higher band should be less congested.

This story has been updated. It was originally published in 2017.

The post How to increase your WiFi speed appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best audiobook apps for books and podcasts https://www.popsci.com/diy/best-audiobook-apps/ Sat, 21 Oct 2023 00:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580987
A stack of six hardcover books on a wood table with headphones around them and a blackboard in the background.
Catch up on the latest fiction and revisit your summer reading from high school. Depositphotos

Get access to your favorite titles and shows and sync between devices with an audiobook app that works for you.

The post The best audiobook apps for books and podcasts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A stack of six hardcover books on a wood table with headphones around them and a blackboard in the background.
Catch up on the latest fiction and revisit your summer reading from high school. Depositphotos

If you struggle to fit reading into your day, the best audiobook apps let you multitask and listen to the latest releases while driving, exercising, or even making dinner. Audiobooks are increasingly popular, and by 2022, more than 140 million Americans had listened to one, according to Publisher’s Weekly

Audiobook apps vary in features and the breadth of their libraries. Many require a monthly or yearly subscription, and some offer media beyond audiobooks, such as podcasts. Voracious listeners may prefer a subscription service where you can indulge in as many audiobooks as you want in a month. But if it takes you a month or two to get through an audiobook, a pay-per-book platform will probably be more economical. 

Ultimately, the operating system of your devices, your listening preferences, and budget will all factor into the app that’s right for you as you discover your next great adventure.

1. Best overall: Audible

The homepage for Audible, which features two rows of book titles.
Audible isn’t just books, it’s home to podcasts and original programming. Screenshot: Audible

Founded in 1995 and acquired by Amazon in 2008, Audible is one of the pioneers in the audiobook space. The service lets you get your hands on almost any title that’s in audiobook form. You’ll also get access to podcasts, exclusives, and originals that are only available on the platform. 

Audible offers two membership tiers, and both provide access to the Audible ‘Plus’ catalog, which contains more than 10,000 audiobooks. The Audible Premium Plus membership adds one credit per month, so you can buy books outside of the Plus catalog, giving you access to an additional 470,000 audiobooks. Without the premium membership, you can purchase credits to listen to more audiobooks.

The platform also lets you keep access to your Audible books even if you cancel your subscription. In contrast, similar apps, like Scribd, only provide access to purchased books as long as you subscribe to the app. Others, like Hoopla and Libby, let you peruse your local library’s list of audiobooks. But they only provide access for a few weeks before you have to get on the reading list again. 

With Audible, you can leisurely listen or hop between books with no fear of losing access disappearing before the end of your novel. It also ensures that you have access to the audiobooks whether you’re subscribing or not. Not sure Audible is right for you? No worries. You get a free 30-day trial period before committing to either Audible Plus at $7.95 per month or Audible Premium Plus at $14.95 per month.

Audible is available on iOS, iPadOS, watchOS, and Android.

2. Best for iPhone: Apple Books

The home page for Apple Books, which displays an iPad and iPhone featuring titles.
You don’t have to commit to a subscription. Screenshot: Apple

Apple Books is a convenient way to get digital reads and audiobooks that sync to all of your Apple devices. Unlike many audiobook apps, Apple Books isn’t a subscription service. It works more like a digital bookstore, where you pay for each book. 

For those who only listen to a book or two a month, Apple Books might cost less than a subscription service. Plus, if you have months where you don’t have time to listen at all, you won’t be paying for an unused subscription. There’s also a decent selection of free audiobooks that includes classics such as Pride and Prejudice if your budget gets tight. 

Beyond the monetary pros and cons, the app itself offers a robust library that’s easy to navigate, thanks to effective categorization. You can browse thousands of titles by popular genres, but you can also search by other categories such as free books, new and trending, book club picks, and Apple recommendations. And you can sample short snippets before you make your final decision. 

The library goes beyond audiobooks to digital titles as well. In theory, you could do most of your reading, audio or otherwise, in this single app. Your Apple devices will require iOS 10 or later, but you can sync across the board, including iPads, iPhone, some iPods, and some Apple Watches. Bonus—you also have the option to download and import Audible titles, so add that to your Audible tips and tricks list if you find yourself moving between the two.

Apple Books is free for iOS, iPadOS, and watchOS.

3. Best for nonfiction: Blinkist

The home page for Blinkist, which displays an iPhone and Android phone and headphones and explains the subscription model.
It’s the modern-day equivalent of Cliff Notes. Screenshot: Blinkist

Blinkist isn’t just an audiobook app. It’s not even just a book app. This unique app focuses on all things learning, from podcasts and book summaries to audiobooks. It’s some of the best value you’ll get if you’re focused on nonfiction, even more so if you’re usually short on time. 

The app offers book summaries in manageable 15-minute chunks, and includes popular books like Atomic Habits by James Clear. You can download titles to access them offline or send them to Kindle. Books are arranged by topics, including love, self-help, memoirs, autobiographies, and more. Popular new releases and classics are readily available. The goal is to “feed your brain” and improve your mind and body with content that fits a busy lifestyle. 

[Related: Tips for learning two languages at once]

Blinkist is an easy way to access facts and books you might not have time to get to otherwise, and it doesn’t take long before you get personalized recommendations based on your preferences and habits. You get a seven-day free trial, then it costs $15.99 per month for the monthly plan or $8.24 per month if you opt to pay yearly.

Blinkist is available on iOS, iPadOS, and Android.

4. Best free: LibriVox

The home page for LibriVox, which is divided into two boxes that explain how users can access public domain books for free.
If you want free audiobooks, LibriVox might be the app for you. Screenshot: LibriVox

Subscriptions and monthly purchases can quickly add up. For those on a tight budget, LibriVox offers free (and legal) audiobooks. Their catalog consists of more than 40,000 books available in the public domain, read by volunteers. 

You won’t find the latest releases, but you can catch up on classics. The books are DRM-free so you can download audiobooks as many times as you’d like and listen when you’re offline or on other devices. This matters because DRM (Digital Rights Management) prevents unauthorized copying of copyrighted content, but can cause problems on your devices, too. No need to worry about all that with LibriVox, though, because every bit of its content is in the public domain. 

The interface isn’t sleek or fancy, but it offers bookmark and timer features to support your basic listening needs. If you’re up for a bit of out-loud reading, you can volunteer to read a book yourself. However, the quality of the narration varies by volunteer, so you may skip some books because the storytelling doesn’t do it justice. Still, you can’t beat free audiobooks and a platform that celebrates the love of literature. 

LibriVox is available for iOS, iPadOS, and Android.

5. Best budget: Chirp

The homepage for the audiobook app, Chirp.
Screenshot: Chirp

Chirp is where thrift store meets audiobooks. It’s owned by BookBub, an author promotion site. Thousands of subscribers scramble to get deals on new or popular books, like $5 for a Harlan Coben audiobook. The deal on any one particular book usually lasts a few days and listings show a countdown for how much longer the deal will last. Authors vie for the best promotions because of Bookbub’s extensive reach.

Chirp fits into the picture by offering discounted audiobooks. For listeners, Chirp is a win for the savings, and for authors, the platform is a great way to  find new readers. You pay by the book rather than a subscription fee. And the depth of the discounts vary.

On the downside, deals are limited, so you have to act fast when you see a book you want. The app itself is free, and you get to keep the audiobooks you purchase, so it’s a great way to build your library on a budget.

Chirp is free for iOS, iPadOS, and Android.

The post The best audiobook apps for books and podcasts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to unlock the hidden, more powerful camera on the iPhone 15 https://www.popsci.com/diy/iphone-15-camera-48mp/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 16:04:21 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581288
A man wearing a white hoodie stands outside and smiles as he looks as his iPhone 15
Make sure you're aware of the photo options on your iPhone 15. Apple

Your iPhone 15 has even more pixels than you can imagine.

The post How to unlock the hidden, more powerful camera on the iPhone 15 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A man wearing a white hoodie stands outside and smiles as he looks as his iPhone 15
Make sure you're aware of the photo options on your iPhone 15. Apple

The rear camera on your iPhone 15 (also present on the iPhone 14 Pro and iPhone 14 Pro Max) is more powerful and versatile than you might have realized. It features a 48-megapixel sensor but default settings only allow it to take 24MP snaps.

The good news is that you can delve into your iPhone’s settings to switch your camera to full capacity and get more detail in your photos. There are some trade-offs you should know about, and the exact options vary depending on the iPhone you’re using. But if you’re serious about your smartphone photography, you should learn about the modes available to you and how they work.

How the iPhone 15 cameras work

iOS menu showing image formats for iPhone 15
All iPhone 15 models let you choose between HEIF and JPEG formats. Apple

When you take a photo on your iPhone 15 without the ultrawide or zoom sensors, iOS uses  the main 48MP sensor to create a 24MP shot. There are two reasons for that—first, it keeps file size down, and second, it allows pixel binning, which means the camera combines multiple pixels to capture more light and produce a better image.

However, if you have the room on your iPhone to store the resulting snaps, you can switch to 48MP photos. Professional photographers often make the switch because capturing more pixels provides more flexibility over the final shot by letting you take control over how those pixels are processed. 

[Related: Check out some of the winners of the latest iPhone Photography Awards]

But you should know there are differences depending on the iPhone you’re using.  The dual-lens on the iPhone 15 and the iPhone 15 Plus, has a slightly inferior 48MP sensor than the triple-lens on the iPhone 15 Pro and the iPhone 15 Pro Max—the number of pixels is the same, but the pixel-capturing tech isn’t quite as good.

The other key difference is that the iPhone 15 Pro and Pro Max can capture RAW images, which Apple calls ProRAW photos. This format provides all the raw data from a digital image, providing photographers even more control and options over their work. RAW snaps take a little longer to process, use up a lot more storage space, and need some photo know-how to optimize, which is why the average smartphone photographer doesn’t bother with them.

iOS Pro image format menu on iPhone 15
The iPhone 15 Pro and Pro Max models offer a ProRAW option, which offers even more flexibility to smartphone photographers. Apple

The iPhone 15 and iPhone 15 Plus don’t have the processing grunt to manage RAW snaps, but they can still capture 48MP images in either HEIF or JPEG format. The result is still 48MP-size pictures but they’ll be slightly compressed, which takes away some of the manual post-processing control you get with RAW images. In certain ways, using a HEIF or JPEG format (which you can also do on the Pro models) goes halfway between shooting 24MP snaps and 48MP ProRAW, with the added benefit of significantly cutting down file sizes.

If you’re considering making the switch to 48MP photos, bear in mind that means a slightly longer time between tapping the shutter button and seeing your image on screen. What’s more, the dynamic range (the spread between the darkest blacks and the whitest whites) won’t be quite as good without pixel binning. 

How to change the iPhone 15 camera settings

iOS camera app on iPhone 15
Once you activate 48MP photos, the iPhone 15 lets you switch between shooting modes directly in the Camera app. Apple

Having absorbed all of that information about photo formats, you’re ready to start making changes. Head to Settings in iOS, then tap on Camera. Unless you’re already shooting in RAW, your first choice will be between High Efficiency (HEIF) or Most Compatible (JPEG) for the image format.

Which one you pick is really up to you and will depend on what you’re doing with your snaps after you’ve taken them. HEIF tends to result in smaller file sizes, but JPEG is generally compatible with a broader range of software on desktop and the web. There’s plenty of information about both online.

[Related: The easiest ways to back up iPhone photos without iCloud]

To unlock the 48MP photos, turn on Resolution Control (on the iPhone 15 and iPhone 15 Plus) or ProRAW & Resolution Control (on the iPhone 15 Pro and iPhone 15 Pro Max). On the latter models you can also tap Pro Default to pick your preferred format: The list includes HEIF Max (up to 48MP), JPEG Max (up to 48MP), ProRAW 12MP, and ProRAW Max (up to 48MP). Underneath these options, Apple lists the average file size for each format, so you have an idea of how much space each picture will take up—10MB for a 48MP JPEG, for example, and 75MB for a 48MP ProRAW.

Launch the camera on your iPhone, and the new 48MP option will appear in the corner. It’ll be crossed out to begin with, so tap the icon to turn it on and choose which format you want to shoot—HEIF Max, JPEG Max, or RAW Max. On the iPhone 15 Pro and Pro Max, press and hold on the icon to switch between HEIF/JPEG and ProRAW. Note that you won’t get the option to switch to ProRAW on the iPhone 15 and iPhone 15 Plus.

iOS camera options for iPhone 15
If you want to keep the 48MP option enabled, you can tweak the settings for the Camera app. Apple

By default, the Camera app will forget that you enabled 48MP photos when you switch to another app, so the option will be crossed out again when you come back to it. To tell the camera to keep the 48MP enabled, open the iOS Settings screen, tap Camera, Preserve Settings, and then either Resolution Control or Apple ProRAW & Resolution Control, depending on your iPhone model.

Note that because of the way the iPhone 15 produces photos, it will default back to 24MP whenever you’re taking Live Photos or macro shots, or using Night mode or the flash. This will happen no matter what settings you’ve changed simply because those different modes require different types of image processing.

The post How to unlock the hidden, more powerful camera on the iPhone 15 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to edit photos on an iPhone—a detailed guide https://www.popsci.com/diy/how-to-edit-photos-on-iphone/ Fri, 20 Oct 2023 12:10:15 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581093
An iPhone on a wooden table, with the Photos app open to an image of shoes that someone is about to edit.
Those shoes are so clean, we're not even sure that photo needs editing. Le Buzz Studio / Unsplash

Get ready to impress with your iPhone photo editing skills.

The post How to edit photos on an iPhone—a detailed guide appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An iPhone on a wooden table, with the Photos app open to an image of shoes that someone is about to edit.
Those shoes are so clean, we're not even sure that photo needs editing. Le Buzz Studio / Unsplash

Editing photos on an iPhone may seem intimidating, given all the options and settings, but it’s accessible to all skill levels. Thanks to its user-friendly interface and intuitive controls, you can easily enhance your images with preset effects or manually adjust settings to achieve the desired look. No expensive editing software necessary.

The iPhone’s photo editor also offers advanced features such as selective editing, which allows you to make precise adjustments to specific areas of your images. Additionally, you can easily share your edited photos directly from the app by posting them to social media platforms or sending them to friends and family. 

How to edit photos on an iPhone

Since most of us snap pictures on the fly, we are not thinking about the composition or lighting when we take the photo. We are trying to capture a moment as quickly as possible. Thankfully, that’s where post-editing comes in. Like icing a cake, editing images gives them a finished look. And editing photos on an iPhone might be even easier than messing around with gloopy buttercream.

Crop, rotate, or flip your photo

Was your selfie interrupted by a random bystander? No worries; that’s why there’s the crop tool. Cropping is one of the easiest and fastest ways to remove unwanted elements or distractions from the frame. Trimming the edges can also help improve a photo’s composition by adjusting the placement and balance of elements within the frame. In Photos, tap any thumbnail to view it in full screen. To start making changes, tap Edit, then tap the crop icon to choose one of three ways you can crop a photo.

The iPhone's Photos app, with an image open for editing, showing where to find the Edit button and crop tool.
“Edit” might be easy to find, but you may not be familiar with what the crop icon looks like. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

1. Manual crop: With the crop icon selected, drag the rectangle’s corners to enclose the area you want to keep in the photo. Tap Done to crop.

The iPhone Photos app, showing how to crop a photo by dragging the corner of the crop outline while editing.
Just drag and crop. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

2. Zoom crop: Alternatively, you can crop iPhone images by activating the crop tool and pinching them to zoom in. When the photo appears as you want it cropped, hit Done to save.

3. Use a preset ratio: Tap the aspect ratio icon in the upper right corner (a small rectangle with other rectangles stacked on top), then choose one of the cropping options, including square, wallpaper, 9:16, and 5:4. Hit Done to save the change.

  • Pro tip: If you choose a ratio crop, such as 9:16, you can select a vertical or horizontal orientation by tapping the two rectangles below the image.
The iPhone Photos app, showing where to find the aspect ratio crop tool and other crop settings while editing.
It’s hard to freehand a perfect square, but thankfully the iPhone can do it for you. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe
How to rotate a picture on iPhone

Tap the rotate icon (a square with an arrow curving around one corner) to turn the photo 90 degrees at a time. Keep going until you get the orientation you desire. Hit Done to confirm the changes.

The iPhone Photos app while editing a photo, showing where to find the picture rotation button.
Just keep tapping until you get the rotation you want. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe
How to flip a photo on iPhone

Touch the flip icon (mirrored triangles with an arrow above them) to reverse the image horizontally. Tap Done to save your edits.

The iPhone Photos app, while editing a photo, showing where the mirror flip option is.
Use this icon to get a mirror image of your photo. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

Just know that if you don’t like your crops, rotations, and/or flips at any time during the editing process, you can tap Cancel in the lower left corner of the screen, then hit Discard Changes

Straighten your image and adjust the perspective

Sometimes, you don’t notice tilted or skewed lines in a photograph until after you take it. Fortunately, altering the perspective is simple with the iPhone’s editing software. Open a photo on your iPhone, tap Edit, then hit the crop icon.

Under the photo, you will see three options for straightening the horizontal lines in the photo and adjusting the vertical and horizontal perspectives. When you choose the one you want to use, drag the slider underneath to make precise changes. There is also an Auto option at the top of the screen, which will automatically adjust the photo based on the selected adjustment.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing where to find the options for straightening the image.
You can hit “Auto” if you want iOS to do the straightening for you. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

1. Straighten: This adjustment, well, straightens out horizontal lines within a photograph.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to straighten a photo.
No more tilt. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

2. Vertical perspective: Corrects or modifies the perceived height or angle of objects in a photo, straightening vertical lines that may appear tilted or distorted.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to adjust vertical perspective.
Stretch! Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

3. Horizontal perspective: Changes horizontal lines and angles in photos, ensuring parallel lines and your desired alignment. 

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing where to find the option for adjusting the horizontal perspective.
Expand! Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

After editing the perspective, select Done to save your changes; if unsatisfied, hit Cancel, followed by Discard Changes.

Adjust light and color

Light and color are important factors when editing photos on an iPhone—and anywhere, really—because they affect an image’s overall mood and visual appeal. The right lighting will bring out the subject’s features, add depth, and make important details stand out. In the same way, changing a photograph’s colors can make the viewer feel certain emotions, set a particular mood, or even send a message. Your phone’s Photos app has several tools that will let you adjust the light and color of your pictures.

[Related: How to take better selfies]

To begin, open the photo you want to alter. Tap Edit, then swipe left under the image to view the effects you can edit. The quickest and easiest way to make adjustments is to tap on Auto, and the slider under the Auto tab will allow you to adjust the intensity of the iPhone’s suggested edit.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to auto edit a photo.
This one button will make multiple changes to your photo. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

If you prefer complete edit control, though, the iPhone photo editor lets you adjust each effect individually for a custom edit. The effects you can alter are:

  • Exposure: Increasing exposure can make an image brighter, while decreasing it can create a darker and more dramatic effect. 
  • Brilliance: Enhances an image’s overall clarity and vibrancy, making it more visually striking.
  • Highlights: Brings out the brightest areas of an image, adding a sense of brightness and contrast.
  • Shadows: Darkens the darker areas of an image, creating depth.
  • Contrast: Makes the difference between light and dark areas more pronounced.
  • Brightness: Changes how light or dark the photo is overall, but not as dramatically as adjusting exposure.
  • Blackpoint: Adjusts the darkest point in an image, allowing for greater control over the overall tonal range.
  • Saturation: Affects the intensity and richness of colors in an image.
  • Vibrance: Similar to saturation, but designed to enhance the colors more subtly and naturally. 
  • Warmth: Adjusts the color temperature of an image, making it appear either warmer (more yellow/orange) or cooler (more blue). 
  • Tint: Adjusts the overall color balance of an image, adding a subtle hue to the entire picture. 
  • Sharpness: Enhances the clarity and detail of an image, making edges and fine textures more defined.
  • Definition: Improves an image’s overall sharpness and clarity by enhancing the distinction between different elements and adding depth. 
  • Noise Reduction: Reduces digital noise in an image, resulting in a smoother and cleaner appearance. This helps minimize the grainy or speckled effect that can occur in low-light settings. 
  • Vignette: Darkens the corners and edges of the image, creating a subtle or dramatic spotlight effect.

To use an effect, tap on its icon and drag the slider underneath to make precise adjustments. The outline around the button indicates the degree of adjustment, and you can toggle between the edited effect and the original to see how much you’ve changed the photo.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing where to find all the editing tools to adjust the light and color effects of a photo.
The more you use the iPhone’s editing tools, the more familiar you’ll be with how they change a photo. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

Apply filters

Filter effects enable you to easily add creative and artistic elements to your photos, resulting in more visually appealing and captivating images. To apply a filter, open a photo, tap Edit, then tap the Filters button (the three overlapping circles) to pull up the filter effect options. There are nine to choose from. Use the slider underneath your chosen effect to adjust its intensity, and if you need to remove a filter, tap Original. Hit Done to confirm the edit.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing where to find filters for your photos, and how to apply them.
Filters can be subtle or dramatic. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

Portrait mode editing tips

If you’re someone who likes to use Portrait mode, you’ll need to be familiar with the iPhone’s Portrait mode-specific enhancements. These allow you to adjust the depth of field (also known as bokeh), which is the range of distance within a photograph that appears in sharp focus and makes the subject stand out. Portrait mode’s editing tools also include studio lighting effects for added flexibility and creativity. 

When you open a photo taken in Portrait mode, you will see two editing options not available in the regular photo mode. The effect at the top with the little “f” is f-stop, or depth of field. The circles at the bottom of the screen are lighting effects.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing Portrait mode-specific editing tools, like f-stop and lighting effects.
Portrait mode makes your photos look a little advanced, so the editing tools are a little advanced too. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

Adjusting the f-stop will increase or decrease blurring in the background. The smaller the f-stop, the more blur you’ll see. A larger f-stop will mean less blur. Tap the f-stop icon, and a slider will appear at the bottom of the screen, allowing you to adjust the effect.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how the background of a photo gets less blurry as you adjust the f-stop setting.
You can see the background of these photos change as you adjust the f-stop setting. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

To adjust the lighting, tap one of the effects. You can choose from natural, studio, contour, stage, stage light mono, and high-key light mono. Move the slider to the left or right to increase or decrease the effect. 

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to edit Portrait mode lighting effects.
Messing around with the Portrait mode lighting effects can give your photo the look you want. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

Write or draw on a photo

It can be fun to write or draw on a picture, and the iPhone makes it easy to do so. Choose a photo, then go to Edit and tap the pen-shaped button. Use the various drawing tools and colors to draw on the picture.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing the options for writing on or drawing on a photo.
Time to scribble all over that perfectly crafted pic. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

You can tap the plus button to magnify or add a caption, text, shapes, or even your signature. Tap Done to save your changes, or tap Cancel if you don’t like them.

How to undo photo edits on an iPhone

Don’t worry if you make an editing mistake—the iPhone’s Photos app gives you plenty of opportunities to undo your edits.

Undo and redo edits: While editing a photo, tap the left and right arrows at the top of the screen to undo and redo multiple edit steps.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to undo photo edits.
You’re probably familiar with the “undo” and “redo” icons in other programs, and they’re essentially the same here. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

Revert an edited photo: If you save changes and decide you do not like the edit, you can open up the photo, select Edit, and then hit Revert to restore the original version. 

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to revert changes to any photo.
It’s OK, we all make mistakes. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

Copy and paste edits to multiple photos

The iPhone allows you to copy edits from one photo and paste them onto one or more others, an ability that is particularly useful when you’re trying to edit a series of similar photos. Start by opening the photo that contains the edits you want to copy. Then tap the More Options button (three dots), followed by Copy Edits. Hit Cancel, then the back button to return to your photo library.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to copy edits from one photo.
Your edits were just so perfect on this one. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

From there, tap Select, then touch the thumbnails of the photos to which you want to apply the edits. Finally, select Paste Edits from the More Options menu.

The iPhone Photos app, showing how to paste edits to multiple photos in your library.
We love a good time-saving tip. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

How to remove the subject from a photo on an iPhone

Although you can’t edit the background of a photo with the iPhone’s Photos app (you’ll need to install a separate app for that), you can cut and paste one part of the picture—the subject.

To do so, the photo’s subject and background should be clearly distinct, and the background shouldn’t be too busy or similar to the subject. Start by opening an image, then pressing and holding the subject. You should see a white glow around the subject, and a window should pop up asking you to Copy or Share. If that doesn’t work, move your finger around and try again—sometimes, it takes more than one attempt to select a subject.

The iPhone Photos app in editing mode, showing how to remove the subject from a photo.
That white glow means the subject is about to ascend (out of the photo). Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

When it does work, your iPhone will automatically separate the subject from the background, and you’ll be able to copy and paste it into another app, or share it using standard sharing options.

The iPhone Photos app with a subject that has been separated from its photo.
You can now share this object anywhere. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

If necessary, change the date, time, or location

Your iPhone stores the date, time, and location in the photo’s metadata. If you need to alter this information, you can. Open the photo you want to change, then tap the More Options button (three dots) in the upper right corner. Touch Adjust Date & Time or Adjust Location, enter the new information, and hit Adjust.

The iPhone Photos app, showing how to edit image metadata.
You have your reasons. Screenshot: Apple; Debbie Wolfe

To change the date, time, or location of multiple photos at once, tap Select, touch the thumbnails of the images you want to change, and follow the steps above. Don’t worry if you change your mind, either—you can undo your metadata edits by tapping the More Options button, followed by Adjust Date & Time or Adjust Location, then Revert.

FAQ

Q. Can you erase objects on iPhone photos?

You can only erase objects from iPhone photos with third-party editing apps from the App Store. These programs offer object removal tools and other features that allow you to easily remove unwanted elements from your photos with just a few taps. 

Q. Can my iPhone edit blurry photos? 

Your iPhone can help enhance blurry photos with its sharpening tools and filters. However, the iPhone cannot make an image completely clear if the photo is severely out of focus.

The post How to edit photos on an iPhone—a detailed guide appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Finally, a smart home for chickens https://www.popsci.com/technology/smart-home-for-chickens-coop/ Thu, 19 Oct 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=581394
rendering of coop structure in grass
Coop

This startup uses an "AI guardian" named Albert Eggstein to count eggs and keep an eye on nearby predators.

The post Finally, a smart home for chickens appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
rendering of coop structure in grass
Coop

For most Americans, eggs matter a lot. In a year, an average American is estimated to eat almost 300 eggs (that’s either in the form of eggs by themselves or in egg-utilizing products like baked goods). We truly are living in what some researchers have called the Age of the Chicken—at least geologically, the humble poultry will be one of our civilization’s most notable leftovers.

Food systems in the US are fairly centralized. That means small disruptions can ratchet up to become large disturbances. Just take the exorbitant egg prices from earlier this year as one example. 

To push back against supply chain issues, some households have taken the idea of farm to table a step further. Demand for backyard chickens rose both during the pandemic, and at the start of the year in response to inflation. But raising a flock can come with many unseen challenges and hassles. A new startup, Coop, is hatching at exactly the right time. 

[Related: 6 things to know before deciding to raise backyard chickens]

Coop was founded by AJ Forsythe and Jordan Barnes in 2021, and it packages all of the software essentials of a smart home into a backyard chicken coop. 

Agriculture photo
Coop

Barnes says that she can’t resist an opportunity to use a chicken pun; it’s peppered into the copy on their website, as well as the name for their products, and is even baked into her title at the company (CMO, she notes, stands for chief marketing officer, but also chicken marketing officer). She and co-founder Forsythe invited Popular Science to a rooftop patio on the Upper East side to see a fully set up Coop and have a “chick-chat” about the company’s tech. 

In addition to spending the time to get to know the chickens, they’ve spent 10,000 plus hours on the design of the Coop. Fred Bould, who had previously worked on Google’s Nest products, helped them conceptualize the Coop of the future

The company’s headquarters in Austin has around 30 chickens, and both Barnes and Forsythe keep chickens at home, too. In the time that they’ve spent with the birds, they’ve learned a lot about them, and have both become “chicken people.” 

An average chicken will lay about five eggs a week, based on weather conditions and their ranking in the pecking order. The top of the pecking order gets more food, so they tend to lay more eggs. “They won’t break rank on anything. Pecking order is set,” says Barnes. 

Besides laying eggs, chickens can be used for composting dinner scraps. “Our chickens eat like queens. They’re having sushi, Thai food, gourmet pizza,” Barnes adds.  

Agriculture photo
Coop

For the first generation smart Coop, which comes with a chicken house, a wire fence, lights that can be controlled remotely, and a set of cameras, all a potential owner needs to get things running on the ground are Wifi and about 100 square feet of grass. “Chickens tend to stick together. You want them to roam around and graze a little bit, but they don’t need sprawling plains to have amazing lives,” says Barnes. “We put a lot of thought into the hardware design and the ethos of the design. But it’s all infused with a very high level of chicken knowledge—the circumference of the roosting bars, the height of everything, the ventilation, how air flows through it.” 

[Related: Artificial intelligence is helping scientists decode animal languages]

They spent four weeks designing a compostable, custom-fit poop tray because they learned through market research that cleaning the coop was one of the big barriers for people who wanted chickens but decided against getting them. And right before the Coop was supposed to go into production a few months ago, they halted it because they realized that the lower level bars on the wire cage were wide enough for a desperate raccoon to sneak their tiny paws through. They redesigned the bars with a much closer spacing. 

The goal of the company is to create a tech ecosystem that makes raising chickens easy for the beginners and the “chicken-curious.” And currently, 56 percent of their customers have never raised chickens before, they say.

Agriculture photo
Coop

Key to the offering of Coop is its brain: an AI software named Albert Eggstein that can detect both the chickens and any potential predators that might be lurking around. “This is what makes the company valuable,” says Barnes. Not only can the camera pick up that there’s four chickens in the frame, but it can tell the chickens apart from one another. It uses these learnings to provide insights through an accompanying app, almost like what Amazon’s Ring does. 

[Related: Do all geese look the same to you? Not to this facial recognition software.]

As seasoned chicken owners will tell newbies, being aware of predators is the name of the game. And Coop’s software can categorize nearby predators from muskrats to hawks to dogs with a 98-percent accuracy. 

“We developed a ton of software on the cameras, we’re doing a bunch of computer vision work and machine learning on remote health monitoring and predator detection,” Forsythe says. “We can say, hey, raccoons detected outside, the automatic door is closed, all four chickens are safe.”

Agriculture photo
Coop

The system runs off of two cameras, one stationed outside in the run, and one stationed inside the roost. In the morning, the door to the roost is raised automatically 20 minutes after sunrise, and at night, a feature called nest mode can tell owners if all their chickens have come home to roost. The computer vision software is trained through a database of about 7 million images. There is also a sound detection software, which can infer chicken moods and behaviors through the pitch and pattern of their clucks, chirps, and alerts.

[Related: This startup wants to farm shrimp in computer-controlled cargo containers]

It can also condense the activity into weekly summary sheets, sending a note to chicken owners telling them that a raccoon has been a frequent visitor for the past three nights, for example. It can also alert owners to social events, like when eggs are ready to be collected.  

A feature that the team created called “Cluck talk,” can measure the decibels of chicken sounds to make a general assessment about whether they are hungry, happy, broody (which is when they just want to sit on their eggs), or in danger. 

Agriculture photo
Coop

There’s a lot of chicken-specific behaviors that they can build models around. “Probably in about 6 to 12 months we’re going to roll out remote health monitoring. So it’ll say, chicken Henrietta hasn’t drank water in the last six hours and is a little lethargic,” Forsythe explains. That will be part of a plan to develop and flesh out a telehealth offering that could connect owners with vets that they can communicate and share videos with. 

The company started full-scale production of their first generation Coops last week. They’re manufacturing the structures in Ohio through a specialized process called rotomolding, which is similar to how Yeti coolers are made. They have 50 beta customers who have signed up to get Coops, and are offering an early-bird pricing of $1,995. Like Peloton and Nest, customers will also have to pay a monthly subscription fee of $19.95 for the app features like the AI tools. In addition to the Coops, the company also offers services like chicken-sitting (aptly named chicken Tenders). 

For the second generation Coops, Forsythe and Barnes have been toying with new ideas. They’re definitely considering making a bigger version (the one right now can hold four to six chickens), or maybe one that comes with a water gun for deterring looming hawks. The chickens are sold separately.

The post Finally, a smart home for chickens appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-snow-blowers-for-elderly/ Mon, 19 Sep 2022 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=470538
Best snow blowers for elderly sliced header
Tony Ware

Don’t let the snow ruin your day.

The post The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best snow blowers for elderly sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall The SnowMaster 824 QXE will power through rough snow with ease. Toro SnowMaster 824 QXE
SEE IT

Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE includes the power and features to clear out the roughest snowfall.

Best single-stage Clear your driveway before breakfast. Toro Power Clear 721
SEE IT

The Power Clear 721 can easily blast through fresh snow and throw it up to 35 feet.

Best two-stage The snow has got to go with the Storm 2420. Troy-Bilt Storm 2420
SEE IT

The two-stage design, self-propelled drive, and 24-inch clearing width make the Storm 2420 a monster snow-clearing machine.

Snow blowers can make quick work of clearing snowy walkways and long driveways after a major snowstorm. They make snow removal easier for everyone but can be especially helpful for older homeowners struggling with shoveling. Using one takes less time, strength, and stamina than using a shovel, which can be especially risky for anyone with joint and/or back problems. The best snow blowers for elderly people will ensure you can safely clear snow accumulation to access your car and walkways quickly.

How we chose the best snow blowers for elderly people

I’ve been writing about gear and gadgets for over a decade for sites like TechnoBuffalo, CNN Underscored, and Popular Science. During that time, I’ve covered everything from the best gallon water bottles to the best smoke detectors.

To determine how to select snow blowers for elderly people specifically, we contacted medical experts, including Dr. Claire Ankuda, assistant professor of Geriatrics and Palliative Medicine at the Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai hospital in New York, to understand what qualities, if any, might make a snowblower better or worse for older people. We found that snowblowers are easier to use than shovels when clearing large areas.

From there, we drew on our past research when recommending the best snow blowers and best snow shovels to find the most reliable options from the best brands. We also drew on recent reviews from experts and user impressions to ensure our recommendations are up to date before the coming winter season.

The best snow blowers for elderly people: Reviews & Recommendations

It can be hard to balance picking a snow blower that’s powerful enough to handle any situation and one that will actually make clearing snow safer and easier. There are a lot of variables at play, from the size of your property to the amount of snowfall you get annually, so you’ll have to use your best judgment when choosing what works best for you. That said, we think our picks for the best snow blowers for elderly people will make it easier to clear snow no matter what.

Best overall: Toro SnowMaster 824 QXE

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE includes the power and features to clear out the roughest snowfall.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 55.4 x 25.4 x 43 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 131 pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Clearing width: 24 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Wide clearing width
  • Comparable to some two-stage models
  • Personal Pace system

Cons

  • Expensive

Toro’s SnowMaster 824 QXE is a single-stage gas-powered snow blower that features a clearing width of 24 inches and a push-to-start button. We like this model because of its “Personal Pace” system, which matches your walking speed with the speed of the blower’s wheels. It sounds unnecessary, but it allows you to set the tempo of your snow blowing and keep your footing. Personal Pace also makes it easier to stop the snow blower instantly. 

The SnowMaster 824 QXE is also relatively light at 131 pounds, making it easy to maneuver, and features a 252 cc engine for plenty of power. Meanwhile, Toro’s snow blower offers an adjustable chute and a unique auger design capable of throwing snow up to 40 feet.

Best budget: Greenworks 13 Amp 20-inch Corded Snow Thrower

Greenworks

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: This snow thrower from Greenworks will keep your walk clear and won’t cost a fortune.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 31 x 21.6 x 37 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 30 Pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Width: 20 inches
  • Power source: Corded electric

Pros

  • Corded electric design means unlimited runtime
  • Adjustable chute
  • Easy push-button start

Cons

  • Cord could get in the way

Snow blowers can be expensive, especially if you need something heavy-duty. If you live somewhere that only gets light snowfall, the GreenWorks 13 Amp is a more affordable snow blower with a clearing width of 20 inches that can throw snow up to 20 feet. For small walkways and driveways, it’s enough to keep things clear. It also includes a push-button start, an adjustable chute, and LED lights. Best of all, it’s only 32 pounds, so it’s very easy to move around. At around $200, it’s a solid deal.

Best single-stage: Toro Power Clear 721

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Power Clear 721 can easily blast through fresh snow and throw it up to 35 feet.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 48 x 21 x 42 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 84 pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Clearing width: 21 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Simple, effective design
  • Push-button start
  • Adjustable chute

Cons

  • Only works well on pavement

Like our best overall pick, the Power Clear 721 gets high marks because of Toro’s Personal Pace system, an adjustable chute, and an electric start button. The gas-powered engine is a less powerful 212cc, but it also weighs slightly less at 125 pounds. Even with a little less power, it can still easily clear wet, heavy snow and toss it up to 40 feet. 

Best two-stage: Troy-Bilt Storm 2420

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The two-stage design, self-propelled drive, and 24-inch clearing width make the Storm 2420 a monster snow-clearing machine.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 49 x 25 x 33 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 191 pounds
  • Type: Two-stage
  • Clearing width: 24 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • More powerful two-stage design
  • Self-propelled drive
  • Larger tires

Cons

  • Big and heavy

The Troy-Bilt Storm 2420 combines a 12-inch serrated steel auger and a 12-inch impeller, enabling it to plow through deep, heavy snowfall. It has a clearing width of 24 inches, so users should be able to clear a driveway quickly. The machine also comes equipped with 13- by 4-inch X-Trac tires, giving it better traction and mobility over heavier, icier snow. Plus, of course, it has some of our favorite quality-of-life features, including an adjustable chute and an electric start button.

Best electric: Ryobi Brushless 18-inch Single-Stage Snow Blower

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The cordless design, compact size, and additional features make the Ryobi Brushless Whisper an electrifying option. 

Specs

  • Dimensions: 51.5 x 18.5 x 38.25 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 46 pounds
  • Type: Single-stage
  • Clearing width: 18 inches
  • Power source: Battery

Pros

  • Cordless operation
  • Folds up for compact storage
  • Adjustable chute

Cons

  • Narrower clearing width

Electric snow blowers aren’t as powerful as gas-powered models, but they require much less maintenance and run quietly. (It also means you don’t need to keep gas cans around in case it snows.)

Ryobi’s compact electric single-stage blower features an 18-inch clearance width and 10-inch clearance depth, making it the perfect size for lighter snowfall. It’s cordless, powered by a 40-volt (V) battery, so it’s just as maneuverable as a gas-powered model. (There are, in fact, plug-in electric snow blowers.) It has an adjustable chute for controlled snow throwing, a push-button start, and an LED light for increased visibility at dusk or dawn. The Ryobi 18-inch snow blower can also throw snow about 25 feet and, as a bonus, its battery is compatible with other 40V products in Ryobi’s lineup.

Best gas-powered: Toro Power Max HD 828

Homedepot

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: With a 28-inch clearing width, adjustable chute, and two-stage design, the Power Max HD 828 was born to clear snow.

Specs

  • Dimensions: 58 x 29.5 x 31.5 inches (DWH)
  • Weight: 310 pounds
  • Type: Two-stage
  • Clearing width: 28 inches
  • Power source: Gas

Pros

  • Anti-clogging system
  • 28-inch clearing width
  • LED headlights

Cons

  • Very expensive

With a wide 28-inch clearing width, gas-powered engine, and adjustable chute, the Toro Power Max HD 828 is a monster snow blower built for clearing large areas after big storms. The two-stage operation can toss snow up to 45 feet, and the machine is self-propelled, so all users need to do is guide the Power Max over the areas that need clearing. It also includes features that make it easier to use, including an electric start button and an LED headlight. As with all gas-powered models, the Power Max is loud. That said, its wide clearing width and self-propelled engine ensure you’ll get the job done quickly.

Snow removal is serious business

Snow removal is a normal part of life for homeowners in large swaths of North America, so it’s easy to dismiss the fact that it’s a very taxing activity that can become quite dangerous for people with health issues. The combination of cold temperatures and intense physical exertion while shoveling a driveway can lead to an increased risk for a heart attack, according to the American Heart Association, particularly if you have high blood pressure or cholesterol. Your risk of a catastrophic health event is also higher for people with conditions like diabetes, smokers, and those of us who don’t get to the gym enough.

Ideally, older adults diagnosed with heart or physical health issues should avoid snow removal entirely. If you can, hire someone to shovel your driveway and walkway. According to Dr. Claire Ankuda, clearing snow is always a risky move for older people with physical limitations.

If that’s not an option, use a snow blower to remove as much snow from your walkways and/or driveway as possible. It minimizes the risk of muscle and back strain (or worse) and can clear a large area more efficiently while limiting your exposure to the elements. Best of all, it doesn’t require as much physical exertion as a shovel. Even then, Ankuda still advised caution:

“It’s important to physically warm up with stretching, to wear appropriate boots to reduce the chance of slips, and to take frequent breaks,” She said. “The majority of injuries that are related to snow blowers have been due to hand or finger injuries, from people reaching in to clear blockages in the discharge chute. This can be avoided by using a tool or a stick to unclog the machine.”

What to look for when picking the best snow blowers for elderly people

A good snow blower is fast, effective, and easy to use—but that’s just the baseline, the bare minimum. There are a few technical factors to keep in mind when picking out the gear that will help you get through every winter storm for the foreseeable future. For starters, there are three kinds of snow blowers; you should know which one you want. From there, keep an eye on its size and weight to ensure you can easily move them around. You should also note its clearing dimensions, which describe the swatch of snow you can remove in a single pass.

Types of snow blowers

Snow blowers come in three categories, divided by the number of mechanisms they use while clearing snow. “Single-stage,” “two-stage,” and “three-stage” snow blowers each have their advantages and disadvantages.

Single-stage snow blowers are compact, easy to maneuver, and feature simple controls, making them better suited for elderly people. They feature a spinning metal auger at the front of the machine that scoops up light-to-moderate snowfall and discharges it through a chute. Single-stage snow blowers are simple, making them the ideal option for people with physical limitations. That said, their auger blades may skim the ground during operation, which could pick up rocks and toss them out of the chute, possibly damaging nearby vehicles. You should definitely avoid single-stage mowers if you have a gravel driveway.

Two-stage snow blowers have a fan-like mechanism called an impeller, which helps throw snow out of the chute, as well as the auger found in a single-stage blower. The combination amps up the power, making a two-stage blower capable of clearing up to 23 inches of snow and ice over all types of terrain (even gravel driveways). They also feature a self-propelled transmission with forward and reverse speeds, which assists with pushing the snow blower through thick, icy snow accumulation.

A three-stage snow blower features an auger, an impeller, and adds an accelerator, which grinds chunks of ice into slush and spits it out with the snow. It’s best for moving heavy, compacted snow and ice up to 23 inches deep. In addition to being more powerful than one- and two-stage models, a three-stage snow blower should work well over unpaved surfaces and/or steep inclines. While you can find them for sale at hardware stores, three-stage snow blowers are generally considered commercial machines. We’d consider them overkill in most situations.

If you’re looking to minimize physical exertion, a single-stage snow blower is a logical choice. It’s the easiest to use and should be able to handle light-to-average snow. If your health is a concern, you should call a professional when you get heavy snow overnight, regardless of what gear is in your garage.

Size and weight

To ensure the snow blower is easy to use, we recommend looking at its size and weight. A heavier snow blower may be harder to set up and put away at the start and end of the season.

Single-stage blowers are more compact, lightweight, and easier to handle, making them an excellent choice for elderly people. Likewise, electric snow blowers tend to be light, between 30 and 65 pounds. Gas-powered models can weigh a lot more—100-300 pounds. While these models are more capable of clearing large areas of snowfall and ice, they’re also some of the biggest, heaviest snow blowers on the market, so they’re not ideal for older adults.

Clearing width and depth

Clearing width and depth indicate how much snow a blower can clear in one pass. Clearing width describes how wide a path the snow blower will create, while clearing depth tells you how high a snow pile it can process. A typical single-stage blower can clear a path that’s 11-22 inches wide through up to 8 inches of snow. A two-stage snow blower can clear a patch up to 23 inches deep and 30 inches wide in a single pass, which is great for longer driveways. 

We recommend most people use a single-stage blower for its more compact size, but a two-stage snow blower’s greater clearing width and depth might be necessary if you get a lot of snow each season. A two-stage snow blower makes sense if you need to clear a larger area with denser and possibly icy snow. 

Surface type

The surface you’re clearing will affect the type of snow blower you need. A single-stage blower is excellent for clearing flat, paved walkways and driveways. However, as we mentioned, they’re not suited for clearing gravel surfaces because they tend to pick up and throw loose rocks. A two-stage snow blower can clear diverse terrain and generally feature larger, more durable wheels that can gain better traction on icy snow. Two-stage blowers may also feature engine-driven wheels capable of handling uneven and sloped surfaces, making them far easier to push in challenging conditions.

Extra features

Beyond the core mechanisms, snow blowers can come with lots of bells and whistles that can make your experience easier and/or safer. Some of them, like an automatic safety cutoff, can prevent injuries. Others, like an adjustable throw chute, may make it easier to move snow efficiently.

Older adults may specifically want to look for a snow blower with features that make it easier to handle. Some snow blowers have power steering to reduce resistance when turning. Many electric snow blowers have a power button instead of the traditional ripcord found on gas-powered models. Some even have headlights for increased visibility at dusk or dawn. These features aren’t standard, so you’ll likely find them on more expensive models, but we think it’s worth the extra expense if they may make clearing snow easier.

FAQs

Q: How much do snow blowers cost?

Snow blower prices vary greatly depending on what you’re looking for. A single-stage snow blower generally costs around $500, with prices going up or down depending on whether you get one that’s gas-powered, electric, corded, or cordless. Two-stage snow blower prices start at around $1,000. Remember that snow blowers are heavy-duty appliances, on par with a lawn mower, which is mostly to say that they are expensive but built to last.

Q: Is an electric snow blower better than gas?

Electric snow blowers are easier to maintain and generally lighter than gas-powered models. They’re also smaller and lighter, making them easier to handle. That said, you must either charge a battery before using them or plug them into an outlet, potentially limiting their range (unless you have a portable power station). They’re also generally less powerful, so you may be unable to move as much snow.

Q: What is the difference between a snow blower and a snow thrower?

There’s no difference! A “snow thrower” is another name for a single-stage snow blower.

Final thoughts on the best snow blowers for elderly people

Older adults with health issues should avoid clearing their own snow. If you have to do it yourself, however, using one of the best snow blowers for elderly people will make digging out much easier and safer. Besides, who wants to actually shovel snow, anyway?

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best snow blowers for elderly people in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best video cameras for 2023 as chosen by experts https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-video-cameras/ Wed, 08 Mar 2023 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=516942
The best video cameras
Stan Horaczek

The best video cameras for filmmakers, vloggers, and content creators.

The post The best video cameras for 2023 as chosen by experts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best video cameras
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Sony FX30 camera on a plain background with no lens. Sony FX30
SEE IT

This compact and relatively affordable camera is ready for serious filmmaking.

Best compact DJI Pocket 2 camera on a plain background DJI Pocket 2
SEE IT

Despite its small size, this camera shoots super-smooth 4K video.

Best for vlogging Cameras photo Sony ZV-1
SEE IT

This compact camera offers just about everything you need to get started.

Having a quality video camera will upgrade the production value of whatever you may be shooting. Whether working on a short film, a YouTube channel, or video content for social media, having more than your phone to capture your footage will ultimately make your final product look more professional. Although most modern cameras can shoot 4K video, when selecting a video camera, you should also consider specs like resolution, frame rate capabilities, sensor size, and bit-depth. The video cameras in this buying guide should appeal to a diverse group of videographers and fit various budgets. Of course, you can spend Michael Bay money and get true cinema rigs, but those fall outside the scope of this article because of their cost and complexity. Keep reading to learn more about the best video cameras currently available.

How we chose the best video cameras

When selecting the cameras that appear in this buying guide, we considered video cameras that fit a variety of budgets, experience levels, but also a variety of needs based on the kinds of videos that might get created. We evaluated cameras that would be a good fit for filming documentary films, capturing events, and for YouTube creators. The cameras in this buying guide were selected through hands-on experience, user feedback, and trusted editorial reviews.

The best video cameras: Reviews & Recommendations

Your phone has a video camera baked into it, but these dedicated cameras all offer something the device in your pocket can’t. Here are our specific picks to meet your cinematic (or social media) needs.

Best overall: Sony FX30

Sony

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This 4K APS-C sensor camera is optimized for video and offers a wide variety of capture formats, making it our pick for best overall video camera.  

Specs

  • APS-C sensor 
  • 10-bit 4:2:2 S-Log3 capture
  • Shoots oversampled 4K up to 60p

Pros 

  • In-body image stabilization 
  • S-Log3 capabilities with uploadable custom LUTs and S-Cinetone color profiles
  • Rig-ready body 

Cons 

  • No mechanical shutter 

The compact Sony FX30 was built with small-scale filmmakers in mind. The 4K APS-C camera features excellent in-body image stabilization, five thread holes for attaching mounts, and three command dials for straightforward operation. The FX30 can shoot oversampled 4K up to 60p, features the same Log shooting modes found inside Sony’s high-end cinema cameras, and can upload customized LUTs (Look Up Tables, which work like visual styles you can apply to footage) to judge what final image quality will look like. Although it can technically shoot stills, the lack of a mechanical shutter doesn’t make it the ideal camera for the job because moving subjects can look distorted due to sensor readout. However, since it’s a camera designed with filmmakers in mind, we wouldn’t count that as a drawback. 

Best for filmmaking: Blackmagic Design Pocket Cinema Camera 6K Pro

Blackmagic

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Blackmagic Design Pocket Cinema Camera combines a high dynamic range, excellent low light performance, and a massive sensor to offer Hollywood-style production value at a fraction of the price. 

Specs

  • Super 35 sensor
  • 13 stops of dynamic range
  • Records in 12-Bit Blackmagic RAW 

Pros 

  • Built in ND filters
  • External controls make it easy to adjust settings while rolling
  • USB-C port allows you to record to external drives
  • EF lens mount makes it compatible with Canon lenses

Cons

  • Have to build out with accessories 

The Black Magic Pocket Cinema Camera makes it easy to capture Hollywood-style video thanks to its high dynamic range capabilities and ability to record in 12-bit  Black Magic Raw. Although it’s pricey compared to many of the 4K and 6K mirrorless cameras currently on the market, it’s a much more affordable option than the ARRI and Red rigs typically found on big-budget film sets. You can shoot 50 fps at 6K and 120 fps at 2.8K. USB-C expansion ports allow you to record directly to external drives. The external controls make it easy to change settings while rolling, plus it has an extremely intuitive interface for easy operation. 

The integrated Canon EF mount gives the camera native access to Canon’s DSLR lenses. Since Canon is phasing out cameras with that mount, there are a ton of great deals out there on the secondary market for extremely high-end lenses.

Best for photo and video: Canon EOS R6 Mark II

Abby Ferguson

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This second-generation Canon EOS R6 is an excellent choice for shooting stills and video, thanks in part to a design that keeps video and still settings clearly separated from one another. 

Specs

  • Full-frame 24-megapixel CMOS sensor 
  • Shoots oversampled 4K up to 60p
  • 10-bit C-Log3 

Pros 

  • Supports ProRes RAW workflow with an Atomos recorder
  • Dedicated switch for stills and video settings
  • Offers false color displays

 Cons 

  • Unreliable AF in video mode
  • Histogram unavailable when recording video 

The Canon EOS R6 II made some substantial improvements to video features compared to the original, which is why it’s our pick for best hybrid camera. It’s built around a 24-megapixel full-frame CMOS sensor, a comfortable hand grip, and an intuitive control system that keeps video and photo settings separate. It can shoot oversampled 4K video up to 60p and has an improved system for thermal management—meaning it won’t overheat while shooting. Although the autofocus isn’t always reliable when shooting in video mode, this is still an excellent option for the creator looking for something that can shoot both video and stills.

Best for vlogging: Sony ZV-1

Why it made the cut: A compact camera designed specifically with vloggers in mind, the SV-1 has excellent autofocus and a simple touchscreen interface that makes it easy to control while doing a walk and talk. 

Specs

  • 20-megapixel 1” BSI CMOS sensor
  • Shoots 4K up to 30p
  • 8-bit Log and ‘HLG’ shooting modes

Pros 

  • Has a directional 3-capsule mic for audio 
  • Supports HLG and S-Log2/3 for easy color grading
  • Real-time Eye AF 

Cons 

  • No headphone jack for audio monitoring
  • Limited zoom range

The ZV-1 is a compact, easy-to-use camera that makes it easy to start vlogging without much technical know-how. It has a clever directional three-capsule mic that makes it easy to capture quality audio while recording. It can shoot 4K up to 30p and Full HD video up to 120fps. There is a giant record button on the top of the camera and a simple touchscreen interface that makes operating the ZV-1 extremely intuitive. 

Its autofocus is fast and accurate, and settings like background de-focus and product-showcase mode are aimed specifically at content creators. If you are looking for an easy-to-use, compact camera with 4K capabilities, the ZV-1 has much to offer. 

Best compact: DJI Pocket 2

DJI

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This pocket-sized all-in-one gimbal and 4K camera is great for capturing stabilized footage. 

Specs

  • 1/1.7-inch CMOS sensor 
  • Shoots 4K video at 60fps
  • Built-in 3-axis gimbal for smooth, stabilized footage

Pros 

  • Pocket-sized and easy to travel with
  • Offers 140 minutes of recording time on a fully charged battery
  • Fast f/1.8 lens 

Cons 

  • Difficult to operate when attached to smartphone
  • Subpar zoom quality 

This clever all-in-one gimbal and camera makes it easy to capture 4K stabilized footage. As the name suggests, the DJI Pocket 2 is compact enough to fit inside a pocket easily. The Pocket 2 features four mics with directional audio and a feature called soundtracking. The Pocket 2 is great as a secondary camera on a shoot or for capturing BTS footage from the day. Ultimately the Pocket offers an extremely easy way to grab some stabilized footage while shooting video.

Things to consider before buying a video camera 

Before purchasing a camera, it’s important to consider what your goals are and what kind of videos you are trying to create. You should also consider where your final video will be displayed. Streaming services like Netflix and Hulu have specific requirements for video specs that often require shooting on higher-end cameras. If you want to create video content primarily displayed on YouTube or other social media platforms, a mid-range video camera might be a more appropriate choice. Ultimately a person working on a full-length film or a short documentary will have very different needs than someone creating video for a YouTube channel. 

Camera types

One of the most important things to understand before buying a video camera is the different types of cameras available on the market. At the high-end, there are cine-cameras. Cine-cameras are some of the most expensive and largest cameras on the market because they often have the largest sensor, can shoot at very high resolutions, and allow for more flexibility when color grading. 

There are currently several mirrorless cameras aimed at videographers who don’t necessarily need a high-end cine camera. These cameras are great for creating videos that will primarily live on YouTube, making them a nice choice for vloggers, event videographers, and content creators. The nice thing about this set of cameras is that they also can shoot high-quality stills. 

Resolution

You’ll likely want to export 4K footage when you’re done editing, and you’ll need at least 4K capture for that. That’s table stakes at this point. Some cameras offer higher-res shooting which allows creatives to shoot over-sampled 4K footage to provide more detail.

Lens mount

If the camera doesn’t have an integrated lens, you’re going to have to provide some glass, and that plays a huge part in how your productions look. Camera manufacturers (like Sony and Canon) typically offer their first-party lenses to go with their bodies. Other manufacturers like Blackmagic equip their cameras with mounts that can accept lenses from a third party. Many filmmakers also use vintage manual focus lenses on their video cameras because they provide a unique look, and they typically cost a lot less than their modern high-end counterparts.

Heat management

True cinema cameras offer robust cooling because the electronics inside can get very hot as they pull in high-res footage. Dedicated video cameras are better equipped to deal with these issues than most hybrid-oriented mirrorless cameras. Manufacturers often indicate in the specs how long you can expect a camera to go before it runs into heat issues. It’s also worth noting that some modes heat things much more quickly than others. If you’re maxing out resolution and framerate while capturing a data-hungry format, things will get toasty a lot faster than if you’re shooting basic 4K footage.

FAQs

Q: What cameras do YouTubers use for videos?

YouTubers use a variety of cameras to create their videos, but most opt for compact mirrorless cameras when shooting. If there is a particular YouTuber whose style you want to emulate, take a look at the description of their videos, it’s not unusual for YouTubers to explicitly say what gear they are using and include affiliate links to purchase it.

Q: Do I need a 4K video camera for filmmaking?

Having a camera that can shoot 4K is a great tool for filmmaking because it gives you more flexibility with your footage. If your end goal is to have your film streaming on a platform like Netflix, it’s best to shoot in the highest resolution possible. For example, Netflix currently requires content streamed on the platform to be shot on a camera with a true UHD 4K sensor with a minimum of 3840 photosites across.

Q: What cameras do professionals use?

Professional filmmakers working on big-budget projects will typically be shooting on a high-end cine camera. A professional YouTuber is more likely to be shooting video on an advanced mirrorless camera. Professionals who are filming events might use a mixture of the two. Ultimately, the camera that a professional is using on the job depends a lot on the delivery requirements of said job.

Final thoughts on the best video cameras

Choosing the best video camera ultimately depends greatly on what you are shooting and where the final video will end up. It’s not unusual for videographers to shoot on various gear, depending on what a project calls for. When selecting the best video camera, you should always consider what type of gear is the best for getting the job done. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio, to video games, to cameras, and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best video cameras for 2023 as chosen by experts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best tire chains of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-tire-chains/ Tue, 07 Mar 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=517417
The best tire chains will help you prepare for the storm.

Protect yourself from getting caught in a snow or ice storm.

The post The best tire chains of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best tire chains will help you prepare for the storm.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Peerless Auto Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Chains are the best tire chains overall. Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain
SEE IT

Peerless Auto-Trac chains offer excellent traction while being one of the easiest sets of tire chains to install.

Best for trucks Security Chain Company Quik Grip are the best tire chains for trucks. Security Chain Company Quik Grip
SEE IT

These large chains offer maximum durability to support the weight of heavy duty pickup trucks.

Best budget The Security Chain Company SUper Z6 is the best tire chain at a budget-friendly price. Security Chain Company Super Z6 Cable Tire Chain
SEE IT

These large chains offer maximum durability to support the weight of heavy-duty pickup trucks.

When driving on snowy and icy roads, often the one thing that can keep you from getting stuck is a good set of tire chains. These vehicle accessories consist of metal chains that install around the wheels of your vehicle to maximize traction in snowy and icy conditions, making them a necessity for those who live in regions that see extreme winter weather each year. In fact, some states even require snow chains if traveling in certain mountainous areas during extreme winter weather. Finding the right set can be challenging, as not all tire chains are identical. They come in different sizes, materials, and tread patterns to suit different types of vehicles and varying severities of winter weather. Many models are designed to be easy to install, reducing the time one has to spend out in the cold. Learn what features are vital to consider when shopping for these winter weather vehicle accessories and find out why the models below are some of the best tire chains on the market.

How we chose the best tire chains

In reviewing more than 25 sets of tire chains for this article, we considered what sets best suit vehicles ranging from smaller cars to large SUVs and heavy pickup trucks, keeping the following considerations in mind:

Traction: Although traction isn’t the only thing, it’s clearly the most important factor in tire chains. We chose only models that provided ample traction.

Durability: I only included chains made from steel alloys that could hold up to supporting the weight of a vehicle in difficult weather conditions. This included traditional tire chains and those that use steel rollers or coils.

Installation: Tire chains are typically installed in extreme winter weather on the side of a road or in a snow-covered driveway. With this in mind, we only chose tire chains that one could capably install in these conditions. Tire chains with self-tightening features outranked those that required manual tightening.

The best tire chains: Reviews & Recommendations

Whatever kind of vehicle you drive, you don’t want to go out in the winter without the best tire chains, because even the best heated gloves, socks, and vests (even a battery-powered electric blanket) don’t keep you as comfortable as getting home and out of the storm safely. We’ve rounded up the best options on the market. from heavy-duty to budget-friendly picks.

Best overall: Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain

Peerless Auto Trac

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: This pick eliminates the major headache with tire chains—putting them on—with an innovative design that essentially automates the installation process, making them one of the most user-friendly options on the market.

Specs

  • Material: Manganese alloy chain
  • Shape: Diamond
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • Easy to install
  • Excellent traction with a diamond-shaped pattern
  • Durable steel alloy construction

Cons

  • A little on the heavy side

Tire chains generally aren’t user-friendly. Most require you to jack the car up to properly tighten them to the wheel, which often involves paying someone else to do the work. That’s not the case with Auto-Trac’s Peerless tire chains, which use a tensioning system that automatically tightens the chains to the wheel. To install, simply attach the internal cable to the tighteners that run around the outside sidewall of the tire and begin driving to activate the ratcheting system that tightens the chains.

The diamond pattern of this set of chains not only facilitates the automatic ratcheting system, creating a tight grip around the tires, but it also makes for better performance by creating more surface area and improving traction.

In addition to being easy to install, this set is durable, thanks to its manganese steel alloy construction and heavier gauge chain links. Of course, that gauge also makes these chains on the heavy side at 15 pounds for the set. With sizes ranging from 14 to 20 inches, this set of chains is one of the more versatile options on the market, capable of fitting light trucks, SUVs, and cars.

Best heavy-duty: AutoChoice 6 Packs Car Snow Chains

AutoChoice

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: The thickness and coverage of these chains take the traction one can get from a set of tire chains to another level. And while the installation may take longer, it’s less complicated.

Specs

  • Material: Steel
  • Shape: Squares
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • Heavy-gauge chains provide optimal traction
  • Separate pieces make them easier to install
  • Fits a wide variety of tire sizes

Cons

  • Installation is more time-consuming
  • Expensive

One look at this set of tire chains from AutoChoice, and one can see that they are much beefier than other models, thanks to sets of six thick chains for each tire. With their thicker gauge and square design, these chains dig into snow and ice to provide ample traction. The chains are divided into six separate pieces per wheel—a six-pack—which attach independently. The chains have thick straps that consist of tendon material that thread through the rims and tighten to the wheel in a similar fashion to ratcheting tie-down straps.

This design has both positives and negatives. By having separate pieces, they’re easier to install, as there is no need to untangle and line up a single stretch of chain or jack up the wheel. Simply apply one set, then move on to the rest. On the flip side, attaching six separate sets of chains to each wheel is time-consuming.

While this set of tire chains is on the pricier side—you’ll need to buy a set of six per wheel—it does include some useful extras, including two pairs of gloves, a long hook to help with mounting, and a fiber-absorbent towel.

Best low-profile: Glacier Passenger Cable Tire Chain

Glacier

SEE IT


Why they made the cut: Although there is a trade-off in traction, we love the low-profile design of this set of chains, which makes them suitable for most cars.

Specs

  • Material: Steel rollers
  • Shape: Square
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • Fits type S low-profile vehicles
  • Lighter weight makes them easier to install
  • Affordably priced

Cons

  • Traction isn’t as good as standard tire chains

Tire chains can be tricky with passenger vehicles with S clearance, which means there is limited space between the wheel well and the tire. Adding the additional thickness of snow chains can damage the car as the chains scrape against the wheel well when the suspension flexes. In fact, some car manufacturers will even void warranties if they find that a car has used chains that are too bulky for the wheel well.

Glacier solves that problem by creating tire chains that aren’t really chains at all. Glacier’s tire chains actually consist of a set of hardened steel rollers that run perpendicular to the tire treads and secure to a thick gauge wire cable that runs the circumference of the tire’s outer sidewall.

The result is a tire chain with a low enough profile that it can fit S-clearance passenger vehicles. And, at 6 pounds, these chains are also easier to install than heavier sets. Keep in mind that there is a trade-off. While these roller-style chains will improve vehicle traction for snowy weather, they don’t provide the same traction as a set of traditional tire chains.

Best for trucks: Security Chain Company Quik Grip

Security Chain

SEE IT


Why they made the cut: Though they may be tougher to install, you can’t argue with the fact that these chains offer the superior traction and durability that heavy-duty trucks driving on snow-covered roads require.

Specs

  • Material: Alloy steel chain
  • Shape: Square
  • Size options: 15-20 inch

Pros

  • Durable all-chain construction
  • CAM tightening system makes installation easier
  • Thicker gauge chains provide superior traction

Cons

  • Harder to install than other types
  • Won’t work with low-clearance vehicles

Larger trucks and SUVs require heavy chains that won’t break under intense weight or extreme conditions. Thanks to their durability, these thicker steel alloy manganese chains are one of the best options for full-size trucks. They’re even rated to work with farm equipment and dual-wheeled trucks.

Security Chains’ tire chains have a square configuration design, which provides maximum start-up traction. We like this set in particular because of the integrated CAM tightening system that eliminates the need to use tensioners to tighten the chains. The Quik Grip chains that don’t have this feature are less expensive, but we think it’s worth the additional cost to save the hassle of purchasing tensioners separately.

Even with the CAM tightening system, these chains are more difficult to install than other options, but the superior durability and traction they offer make them a must-have for heavy-duty trucks that face severe winter weather. Remember that these chains won’t fit trucks with S-class clearance requirements.

Best budget: Security Chain Company Super Z6 Cable Tire Chain

Security Chain

SEE IT

Why they made the cut: These tire chains are inexpensive and versatile, capable of fitting most cars, trucks, and SUVs. We also like the design, which makes them easier to install than other tire chains by eliminating the need for manual tightening.

Specs

  • Material: Alloy steel coils
  • Shape: Diagonal
  • Size options: 14 to 20 inches

Pros

  • No need to manually tighten
  • Low profile makes them compatible with most vehicles
  • Affordably priced

Cons

  • Steel coils do not provide as much traction

This versatile set of tire chains from Security Chain is easy to install, affordably priced, and will fit vehicles with restricted clearance around the wheels. They consist of alloy steel traction coils thinner than standard chains, making them compatible with most cars. They only require a quarter-inch of sidewall clearance, so they’re suitable for most cars and SUVs as well as trucks.

These tire chains are also easier to install than other models thanks to rubber connectors that hold the coils taught, eliminating the need to tighten the chains manually.

This set of chains also preserves handling better than bulkier chains while preserving such important safety features as anti-lock brakes, traction control, and all-wheel drive. Keep in mind there is a trade-off. The low profile and limited coverage of the coils do provide less traction than larger sets of tire chains.

Things to consider before buying tire chains

Traction

Perhaps the most important trait to consider is how well the chains will keep you from getting stuck. The rule of thumb is rather straightforward when it comes to traction. The thicker the chain and the more coverage on the tire tread, the better the traction. Chains with heavier gauge steel links will dig into snow better than coils or rollers, providing better traction. Keep shape in mind as well: Square-shaped chains may provide better traction for getting started but diamond-shaped chains provide better directional traction, which means better handling.

Material

Please pay attention to what the chains are made from, which will determine their durability. Generally speaking, a steel alloy with manganese is considered “high strength” steel, which can better withstand the pressures exerted on it when functioning as a tire chain. While chains may have superior strength, steel alloy rollers and coils are also quite strong. In addition to the chains, pay attention to other materials they use to hold them in place. While rubber and thick nylon straps may be durable enough for cars and light trucks, heavy-duty trucks require all-chain construction.

Size

Size is important because the tires must be compatible with the size of the tires on your vehicle. Tire chains are not one size fits all. Most models of tire chains come in a broad range of sizes to suit different tire sizes. Tire chain manufacturers include size charts that correspond to the model numbers of their products. Check the size of your tires (printed on the sidewall of each tire) and match that size to the right model tire chain.

Installation

Most likely, you’ll be installing tire chains in inclement weather, so it’s important to purchase chains that you can install as quickly as possible. If you have a car or small truck, consider purchasing a set of tire chains that are self-tensioning. Self-tensioning chains take a little more work to install initially, but they don’t require you to tighten (and retighten) the chains manually.

FAQs

Q: Do you need tire chains for all four tires?

Legally, you only need to have one set of tire chains to travel in mountainous areas during the wintertime. However, if you have a 4×4 vehicle, it’s a good idea to have two sets. Even with a two-wheel-drive vehicle, two sets of chains can improve traction.

Q: Do chains damage tires?

When there is ice and snow, tire chains dig into them and don’t put pressure on your tires. However, driving on bare roads for long stretches can cause the chains to dig into your tires and damage them (as well as the road itself). Chains can also damage tires if they are not properly installed.

Q: Is it hard to drive with snow chains?

Although snow chains will improve traction and help prevent your car or truck from getting stuck, it is still hazardous to drive in snowy conditions. When driving with snow chains, you should never exceed 30 miles per hour.

Final thoughts on the best tire chains

Choosing the right tire chains requires finding a product balancing good traction and easy installation. The Peerless Auto-Trac Light Truck/SUV Tire Traction Chain excels on both fronts, making it one of the best all-around tire chains you can put on your car or truck. If you’re looking for a set of chains to outfit your heavy-duty pick-up truck, then consider going with Security Chain Company Quik Grip, which offers superior traction and durability.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio, to video games, to cameras, and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best tire chains of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The Opt Out: Cars are spying on us, and we’re letting them https://www.popsci.com/diy/car-data-privacy/ Thu, 19 Oct 2023 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580441
Car with a license plate saying "data hog"
When buying a new car you probably check for features like milage and size, but never privacy. Lauren Pusateri for Popular Science

Your ride is definitely not the private sanctuary you think it is.

The post The Opt Out: Cars are spying on us, and we’re letting them appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Car with a license plate saying "data hog"
When buying a new car you probably check for features like milage and size, but never privacy. Lauren Pusateri for Popular Science

You are more than a data point. The Opt Out is here to help you take your privacy back.

AMERICANS SPEND A LOT of time in cars. Whether you have a long commute, enjoy riding with friends as they drive around, or just like sitting in the parking lot for a bit of solo time, a car might feel like an extension of your home—an intimate space for you to sing out of tune or seek silence in the middle of your day.

Unfortunately, if you’re in a car that was manufactured within the past few years, that environment isn’t as private as you think it is. Carmakers have been adding sensors, cameras, and microphones to their vehicles to improve safety and usability, but these bits of tech are also collecting a hefty amount of data that the automotive industry and other companies are selling and sharing. And don’t think this applies only to car owners: Your privacy is also at risk if you rent a car or are simply sitting in a passenger seat.  

These newer cars know what you say, where you go, and possibly even whom you’re sleeping with and how often. It’s scary, but what’s scarier is that consumers currently have little choice but to consent. 

More than computers on wheels

Cars have been equipped with onboard computers and sensors for a while now. The tools’ applications have always been rather practical—letting you know when your fuel tank is close to empty or when your machine is due for an oil change, even allowing you to get full system diagnostics via Bluetooth. But as technology advanced, so did the role of electronics within every vehicle. Now cars can help you master parallel parking, respond to your voice commands, and even alert you to the presence of other drivers as you change lanes.

“A lot of this can be used as safety features, but [car companies] are not going to let the opportunity to collect data and make money off of that slip away. They’re not just doing it for safety,” says Jen Caltrider, program director for Privacy Not Included, a series of privacy-focused consumer product reviews, at the Mozilla Foundation. 

The same navigational tool that guides you to your destination, for example, is collecting your location data, and the sensors that show which passenger hasn’t buckled up can tell if you’re alone or not, where people are sitting, and if there’s any movement. Those capabilities alone provide hundreds, if not thousands of data points every day that go straight to the car manufacturer’s servers. It’s hard to tell if any of that information is encrypted or not, Caltrider says.

Other than what your car’s sensors and cameras track, manufacturers also learn about you from other sources. If you’re buying a car, the data harvesting starts with every visit to the dealership or the brand’s website, and it continues when you enlist the help of a bank or some other type of financial institution to pay for your car. Then, when you drive home in your new ride, manufacturers keep gathering data through the car’s app. You can choose not to use the app, but it’s likely you’ll lose access to any vehicle features that require it, such as remote ignition. And then there’s what Caltrider and her team call “connected services,” including insurance companies and navigation and entertainment apps like Here and Sirius XM, which have basically become data brokers in the vehicle data industry. The bad news is that it’s unclear exactly how the information flows, how it’s shared, and where and how it’s stored. 

Your car might know too much about you

In September, Caltrider and her research team at the Mozilla Foundation launched an in-depth analysis of the privacy policies of 25 car companies doing business in the US, including the most popular ones: Toyota, Ford, Chevrolet, and Honda. The results? The Mozilla team labeled cars the worst product category it has ever reviewed for privacy.

When you read the privacy policy for any app or device, it’s common to feel confused. Tech companies have been writing privacy policies for decades, and they generally include broad or vague terms that make you feel as if they care about your data—or at least don’t make it obvious that they don’t. Car privacy policies are different: way more explicit and entirely absurd.

“Car companies are moving into the tech company world,” Caltrider says. “But they’re so inexperienced at it and it really shows.”

One of the wildest privacy policies in the Mozilla Foundation’s report is Nissan’s, which requires users to consent to the collection of sensitive information including sexual orientation, sexual activity, health diagnosis data, and genetic information. The document also says this data can be sold or disclosed to third parties for targeted advertising. It’s not clear how exactly Nissan is collecting this data or if it’s currently capable of doing so, but the fact that you’re agreeing to all of this by simply buying a Nissan is problematic enough. 

And these requirements don’t affect only drivers and car owners, as consent is murky territory in the land of vehicle privacy policies. For one thing, cars don’t grant the same control over data collection that your phone does. Most of the time, car owners will see a request for permissions on a single screen that pops up when they first set up their new car, and they may not be able to go back to it and revoke those permissions later on. 

That also means there’s assumed consent from anybody who steps inside the vehicle. Privacy policies like that of Subaru make it clear that terms and conditions affect everyone on board, regardless of whether they’re the vehicle’s registered owner or not. This means that the company burdens Subaru owners with the responsibility of informing all their passengers about the privacy policy and assumes that people are agreeing to it just by stepping into the car. It’s a safe bet that no ride-share driver or courteous coworker has ever read you a long list of types of data collection you needed to consent to before they’d give you a ride home. 

Car manufacturers, vehicle data hubs, and other actors in the industry, like insurance companies, calm concerned drivers and passengers by promising that the data they collect and save is anonymized, meaning it cannot be traced back to specific people. While anonymizing data is a common practice that’s meant to protect individuals’ privacy, research has shown that it’s not always effective and that the owner of any anonymized data can be easily re-identified when the information is combined with other datasets. This is especially true when location data is involved, Caltrider says. 

As we’ve mentioned, targeted advertising is one of the main uses car companies and third parties have for collecting data with vehicles, but it’s not the only one. More than half of the manufacturers analyzed in the Mozilla Foundation’s report say they can “share your information with the government or law enforcement in response to a ‘request.’” This leaves a lot of room for abuse, as there are no details about whether this request can be as informal as a call or an email to the right person, or if it must be a powerful document, like a court order. 

Unlike with home security cameras, it’s hard to tell exactly how many times these companies have responded to requests from police and other law enforcement agencies. But a 2021 Forbes investigation revealed that both Customs and Border Protection (CBP) and Immigrations and Customs Enforcement (ICE) had been requesting information from three companies in the vehicle data industry, including General Motors, which is the parent company of Buick, Chevrolet, Cadillac, and GMC. 

Regulation is the answer

The automotive industry in the US is huge—it brought more than $156 billion to the US economy in 2022, and more than 75 percent of Americans own a car. You’d imagine that such a rich market would include several car brands privacy-savvy users can choose from, but the Mozilla Foundation report is categorical: When it comes to data protection, they’re all bad

This leaves people who need to buy a new car with little choice but to consent to data collection. And it leaves their passengers with even less choice. Because it’s not only luxury vehicles that come equipped with sophisticated sensors and cameras—classic sedans like the Toyota Corolla and family SUVs like the Ford Escape also have them. As much as we’d like to say there’s an individualistic DIY way to snatch back your privacy, there’s not. You’ll have to appeal to the powers that be.

“Get mad and contact your elected officials,” says Caltrider. “It’s past time the US had a strong federal privacy law.”

She also recommends not using your car’s app, but acknowledges that this is a bandage solution and might not be an option for some people. Some of the features people need, like being able to warm the car in cold weather by turning it on remotely, require the use of the software. 

Using our power as constituents and asking our elected officials for laws that protect our data is the best chance we have of taking back the intimacy we once found inside our vehicles. Car companies simply aren’t going to change on their own—just like tech companies, they have no incentives to do so.

“And it’s not like they have a long history of ethical behavior,” Caltrider says. “They have quite the opposite.”

Read more PopSci+ stories.

The post The Opt Out: Cars are spying on us, and we’re letting them appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
You can easily turn your iPhone into a Mac mic https://www.popsci.com/diy/use-iphone-as-mic-mac/ Thu, 19 Oct 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580924
An iPhone on a wooden desk showing the menu to use the device as a microphone.
If you own a Mac and an iPhone, you don't have to splurge on a USB mic to have people hear you clearly in your next meeting. Tyler Lastovich / Unsplash

Living in Apple's gadget ecosystem has its perks.

The post You can easily turn your iPhone into a Mac mic appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An iPhone on a wooden desk showing the menu to use the device as a microphone.
If you own a Mac and an iPhone, you don't have to splurge on a USB mic to have people hear you clearly in your next meeting. Tyler Lastovich / Unsplash

Video calls are a part of life now, but they can be a nightmare if your hardware is not up to par. You can upgrade your setup with a USB microphone (which can come in real handy if you’re putting up video calls on your TV) but if you’re a Mac user with an iPhone, you already have all you need. 

You can use your phone as a microphone when you make video calls from your Apple computer. This functionality is part of a feature called Continuity Camera, and it’s easy to set up. Any iPhone made after 2018 and running iOS 16 or newer will work, while all Macs running macOS Ventura or newer will fit the bill.  

How to set up Continuity Camera in macOS

To use your phone as a microphone on desktop video calls, you’ll need a Mac and an iPhone signed into the same iCloud account. 

Start by making your computer recognize your handheld device as an available sound source. On the Mac, click the Apple logo in the top-left corner of the screen and open System Settings. In the left-hand panel, go to Sound, and under Output and Input, click the Input tab. 

[Related: 7 tips and tricks to get more out of Apple’s newly updated Messages app]

You will see your iPhone as an audio source—select it. You’ll automatically see a full-screen pop-up on your phone with a couple of buttons. The Pause button on your phone to temporarily mute yourself when on a call, while Disconnect will completely remove your iPhone from your Mac’s audio inputs list. Don’t hit this button unless that’s what you want, otherwise you’ll have to go through the setup all over again. 

Mac audio input settings showing how to setup an iPhone as a microphone.
Before using your iPhone as a mic, you need your Mac to recognize it as an audio input. Screenshot: Apple

Once your computer recognizes your iPhone as a microphone, you can select it as the preferred audio source from most video call apps, including Zoom, Microsoft Teams, and Google Meet. 

  • In Zoom, find the audio settings by clicking zoom.us in the upper left corner of your screen, then go to Preferences, and click the Audio tab. You can choose your iPhone under Microphone. 
  • In Google Meet, click the three dots left of the hangup button in the bottom toolbar and go to Settings. You’ll be able to choose your iPhone in the Microphone options. 
  • In Microsoft Teams, click the three-dot menu to the left of your name, click Settings, and head over to Devices. You can select your iPhone in the Microphone drop down menu. 
Zoom settings showing how to choose an iPhone as an audio input
It’s easy to choose an alternative audio source on most video call apps, including Zoom. Screenshot: Zoom

I’ve found using an iPhone as a microphone during video calls comes in very handy, particularly if I’m part of a group of people taking the call on a single device. I put the phone on the table, between everyone, while my laptop sits far enough so that we all fit into the camera frame. That usually means the microphone is too far away to pick up our voices, so the iPhone is extremely helpful—the speaker can even hold it while they talk and pass it along when they’re done, if necessary. 

[Related: 6 great features to try out in the iOS 17 public beta]

You can also use this feature to turn your laptop into a karaoke machine: your iPhone instantly becomes a wireless microphone. 

The post You can easily turn your iPhone into a Mac mic appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best smart home security systems of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-smart-home-security-systems/ Thu, 02 Feb 2023 18:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=509217
A lineup of the best smart home security systems on a white background.
Amanda Reed

How smart is a home that doesn’t feel secure? Here’s how to feel safer in 2023 with the help of intelligent protective tech.

The post The best smart home security systems of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best smart home security systems on a white background.
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A white SimpliSafe 10-piece smart home security system on a blue and white background. SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System
SEE IT

Comes with everything you need for security inside and outside your home.

Best customer service A Ring 14-piece security system on a blue and white background Ring Alarm Pro, 14-Piece
SEE IT

Talk to a real person and get your questions answered fast.

Best budget A Tolviviov smart home security system on a blue and white background Tolviviov Wi-Fi Door Alarm System
SEE IT

Easy to use for people of all technical skill levels.

If you’re worried about crime impacting your household, it makes perfect sense to buy one of the many smart home security systems that have popped up over the past few years. However, with abundance comes analysis paralysis. To what system should the savvy, safety-conscious consumer turn? We investigated the market to bring you the best smart home security systems so you can pick the best choice for your living situation and loved ones.

How we chose the best smart home security systems

While nearly every product you buy enters your home at some point, there is something particularly intimate about inviting in a smart home security system. Unlike shoes—something that only needs to function well enough when called upon—your smart home security system needs to function perfectly 24/7/365. That’s why one of the bigger ranking factors this time was brand satisfaction. Cybersecurity and data protection were other key factors because, while less is often more, in the world of security more really is more. You’re only as strong as your weakest entry point.

This guide was compiled after many hours of careful research; facts and opinions were cross-examined by editors. Ordinary users were asked about their experiences using these devices, and we interacted with customer service agents throughout the course of compiling this guide. Each company’s personal website and plan information were thoroughly checked for the most up-to-date service plan information possible.

The best smart home security systems: Reviews & Recommendations

Our selection of smart home security systems comes from a wide variety of well-known and trusted brands with a broad array of attached services. While kits differ, they all typically include sensors for your doors and/or windows and an alerting mechanism. One of our picks is sure to match your budget and lifestyle.

Best overall: SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System

SimpliSafe

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The SimpliSafe 10-Piece system is a very complete kit that starts the security before your door is opened.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 4 door/window sensors, 2 motion sensors, 1 indoor camera, 1 outdoor camera
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: $28/mo. (Optional)
  • Smart protocols: N/A, but Alexa- and Nest-compatible

Pros

  • Outdoor cam so your security starts before an intruder enters your home
  • Comes with one free month of 24/7 professional monitoring service
  • The variety of parts gives you a more complete sense of security
  • Optics and branding

Cons

  • Must learn to set up each part correctly

If you’re looking for a system that is essentially complete directly out of the box, the SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System is the kit for you. It includes a variety of sensors and indoor and outdoor cameras, meaning you should feel fully protected in your home. While each piece is easy to install in and of itself, you’ll have to learn and think about the placement of each part—however, you’ll be able to handle it on your own if you can handle a strip of 3M tape or a screwdriver. Let’s review each part individually to get a good picture of how they will function together in your home:

The SimpliSafe base can hold up to 100 SimpliSafe security devices and is the central hub for your equipment. It is also capable of emitting a 95dB alarm. The push-button keypad lets you arm and disarm the system with a PIN. Having four entry point door/window sensors will allow you to protect the primary entryways to your home, while the two motion sensors—which are designed to be pet friendly and decorative—protect the areas of your home with too many entry points or windows.

What makes the SimpliSafe 10-piece system better than the 12-piece version is the inclusion of both an indoor and an outdoor camera. Suppose you’re used to the grainy, near-worthless security cam footage often seen in local news coverage. In that case, you’ll be particularly happy with the full colors, 1080p quality, and night vision offered by SimpliSafe. For those concerned with privacy, the indoor camera comes with a stainless steel shutter, so you won’t have to worry about having your private moments enter someone’s data tables.

Finally, the package set comes with an official SimpliSafe flag that declares your home protected by SimpliSafe. While no one can guarantee that this will deter all criminals, there will be at least a few that will back down.

Best customer service: Ring Alarm Pro, 14-Piece

Ring

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Go from dialing a number to “Hello” in 1 minute, 18 seconds.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 8 door/window sensors, 2 motion sensors
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: Between $4-$20/mo. (Optional)
  • Smart protocols: Z-wave

Pros

  • Fantastic phone technical support
  • Dual keypads for increased flexibility
  • Provides range extender for large homes
  • Multiple 24/7 monitoring plans to choose from

Cons

  • Overhyped WiFi functionality

The Ring Alarm Pro 14-Piece set has fantastic customer service and is a great smart home security system for larger homes. Its impressive networking and dual keypad design (some home security systems only allow for one keypad) allow for larger coverage areas than some of the best smart home security systems. With customizable ringtones, you’ll always know which door is being opened in your home. The Ring Alarm Pro even comes with Wi-Fi 6 functionality via its hub. This feature is handy but gets a bit overhyped, sometimes eclipsing what counts—there are better Wi-Fi 6 routers out there.

What should you get excited about with the Ring Alarm Pro? A very approachable DIY setup where a real human is there to help you quickly. After just a few button taps to specify exactly what we wanted, we could—right here, right now—contact a customer service agent 1 minute and 18 seconds after dialing Ring’s customer service.

Best monitoring: ADT 8-Piece Wireless Home Security System

ADT

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: ADT is amongst the most experienced and best professional monitoring companies.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Intermediate
  • Sensors: 4 door/window sensors, 1 motion detector 
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: $19.99/mo. (Optional)
  • Smart protocols: Z-wave

Pros

  • Highly experienced monitoring team
  • Perfect size for families
  • Optics and branding

Cons

  • Occasional installation snags
  • Only works in the U.S.

The ADT 8-Piece Wireless Home Security System is all you need to get started with the highly regarded ADT security model. It’s a brand that takes itself seriously, providing a yard sign to let customers proudly display their security status on the lawn. Sure, it is part marketing, but it’s also part confidence in the ADT name alone being able to ward off potential neighborhood thieves.

The package itself includes door/window sensors and a motion sensor, with the kit being targeted to owners of two- or three-bedroom homes. While not difficult, installing the sensors can take some time as you manually pair and label each one within your system. You can install them using the included adhesive backing or a more traditional screw-in technique. The time investment should feel closer to “weekend project” than “plug’n’play” for the typical first-time user.

When combined with the optional professional monitoring from ADT, it can almost feel as if you have a dedicated housesitter while you’re away.

Best modular: Wyze Home Security Core Kit

Wyze

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Wyze’s Home Security Core Kit is just that, a quality core kit that can be easily added to as needed.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 2 door/window sensors, 1 motion sensor
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: $9.99/mo
  • Smart protocols: N/A

Pros

  • Very affordable and complete starter kit
  • Comes with three months of free professional monitoring
  • Can easily add on more sensors or cameras
  • Guided setup via Wyze app

Cons

  • Service plan essential
  • Only works in U.S.

If you prefer to wade through new technology instead of diving directly into the deep end, the Wyze Home Security Core Kit will be the best smart home security system for you. For starters, the core kit itself is very affordable, covers two entry points plus a room of your choice, and provides months of complimentary professional monitoring service to give you a taste of how Wyze works.

Once you’ve decided how much you like the system, you can start adding more components immediately. Finish off the rest of your home’s entry points with more door/window sensors, or transform your setup into a video surveillance system by adding a Wyze cam. Leak and home climate sensors are also available.

The modularity, as well as the stick-on setup guided by the Wyze app, gives the Wyze Home Security Core Kit a very DIY air to it. You can be confident that you, by yourself, should be able to install it. Unfortunately, the rugged individualism this inspires is dropped down a notch—it requires a 24/7 monitoring subscription for the device to truly shine. You’ll just have sensors, but the keypad won’t work after the three-month free trial runs out. The Wyze Cam add-on will also lose smart features and extended storage. Still, the service is cheaper than market averages, you probably wanted it anyway.

Most compatible: Abode Security System Starter Kit

Abode

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Abode goes way beyond just Z-wave and Zigbee.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 1 door/window sensor, 1 motion sensor
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: Between $7-$22/mo. (Semi-optional)
  • Smart protocols: Zigbee, Z-wave, Homekit, IFTTT

Pros

  • Connects and works with just about anything
  • Variable professional monitoring options
  • Sub-30-minute total setup time
  • Easily expandable

Cons

  • Limited sensors in starter kit
  • Reviews note poor customer service

Can’t decide between Zigbee and Z-wave, so want access to both? Not sure if you want to use Alexa or opt for a Google home security system? Need HomeKit or IFTTT support? It’s time to look at an Abode Security System, a home security system that connects with all of these in some way.

The Abode Security System Starter Kit is a perfect way to get set up with the system, as it includes the main hub, a couple of sensors, and a key fob. You’ll find it surprisingly easy to set up and get going—even technological turtles report installation times of under 30 minutes—but will quickly find yourself wanting other pieces if you don’t have, for example, home security cameras from an existing, compatible system. If you decide to stick with Abode products, you can choose from glass break sensors, water leak sensors, smoke alarms, and indoor/outdoor cameras to tailor the system to your needs.

While all owners have access to alerts and live video feeds, more “advanced” features—such as video storage—require you to subscribe to one of Abode’s plans, either the Standard (self-monitoring) or Pro (professional monitoring).

Best budget: Tolviviov Wi-Fi Door Alarm System

Tolviviov

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is the best smart home security system under $100.

Specs

  • Installation difficulty: Easy
  • Sensors: 5 door/window sensors
  • 24/7 professional monitoring: No
  • Smart protocols: N/A

Pros

  • Simple to use system with keychain fob and app control
  • Very loud alarm
  • Affordable for all pricing
  • No monthly payments

Cons

  • Supported by 2.4GHz Wi-Fi network only
  • Lower brand recognition

If you’re wanting to avoid overly techy solutions to your problems and save money in the long run while doing so, the Tolviviov Wi-Fi Door Alarm System is worth checking out. Tolviviov systems, in addition to being budget-friendly, also happen to be the best smart home security systems for elderly people due to their extremely loud alarm systems and manual keychain controls. It still has app functionality, including Alexa support, for those wanting a more modern feel.

Considering the price range, it shouldn’t be surprising that the Tolviviov system doesn’t have a professional monitoring system. However, this lack comes with a silver lining, as systems with professional monitoring on a recurring monthly subscription often tie other features into it. With the Tolviviov, what you see is what you get. A loud siren to alert you to entries, app alerts that tell you what sensor was disturbed, and the option for Alexa voice support. It’s simple, but it works.

The main concerns for the Tolviviov system are its connections and brand recognition. The Tolviviov only works with the 2.4GHz Wi-Fi band. Be prepared to isolate the 2.4GHz band. Lastly, the brand recognition just isn’t there yet. Sure, the super loud alarm will make burglars scram, but you won’t get the same response from the name “Tolviviov” that you will from an “ADT” sign in your yard or a Ring video doorbell near your front door.

What to consider when buying the best smart home security systems

From the surface, the best smart home security systems appear to be quite similar, just different collections of the same parts. This is compounded by the fact that, when things are running smoothly, our residential security systems blend into the background of our lives. However, if you do even a tiny amount of digging, you’ll see that there is more complexity in both the hardware and the included customer service plans than meets the eye.

Options for 24/7 professional monitoring

If you have a smart home security system that alerts you when intruders come into your home, or when your house faces other problems, you are all in the clear, right? While it is a nice thought, it is potentially untrue if you are incapacitated or unable to reach your phone to assess the threat (such as while out at work or on vacation).

Typically, 24/7 professional monitoring services come as part of a subscription fee, usually around $30 per month. While all systems retain some functionality without the subscription, others only provide limited service without the full subscription.

Zigbee and/or Z-wave connection

Much like Wi-Fi, Zigbee and Z-Wave represent frequency bands that can connect the pieces of your smart home security system together. Zigbee systems typically run faster, but burn through batteries quicker, while Z-Wave systems can have a bit of response delay but require less battery maintenance work.

In reality, which of the two systems is better depends on your overall network. If you have a lot of Z-Wave products already, going with another Z-Wave device is great because they are all mandated to work together. Zigbee devices can usually “find” each other but don’t always interconnect in a fully functioning way, sorta like pairing non-Apple headphones to your iPhone via Bluetooth. 

Another possibility includes using neither system and operating solely through Wi-Fi and the system’s own proprietary hub. If you are looking for a smart home security system and not a full smart home network, this should be fine. Alternatively, super-compatible systems can connect to both networks and have other connection options as well. Whether you want to go with Zigbee or Z-Wave or both is entirely up to you.

Branding and flags

Some smart home security systems have a flag to stick in your lawn to scare potential thieves away. Some customers are happy to see it, but others are skeptical about the usefulness of a sign to deter thieves, who might use the info to “crack” through the system.

What does the science say? Our friends at Bob Vila took a deep dive into the research on security signs and crime deterrence. Here are some of their findings:

  • ~25% of criminals will skip a home with a security sign.
  • ~50% of criminals will skip a home with a security sign and a visible camera.
  • The optimal locations for such signs are in a place visible from the street and in the backyard.
  • Branding matters. A recognizable or easily searched-for brand name works best to convince thieves your home is really protected.

Privacy

Whenever you bring something into your home, you want to feel comfortable about your privacy. This goes doubly so for home security products that can record and monitor the inside of your home. As such, you should pay particular attention to a brand’s privacy track record.

Take, for instance, the recent controversy over Anker’s eufy brand, which promised end-to-end encryption but didn’t deliver. If that wasn’t damaging enough, the company’s initial response was to merely change their privacy commitment statement. They’ve since come clean, but the sour taste still lingers.

For full transparency, this is not the only brand to have publicly suffered a privacy breach. In 2021, a former ADT technician pleaded guilty to charges of criminal spying while employed at the company. Important things to note here are how well ADT handled the situation compared to eufy, that their internal procedures and systems have since been changed to reduce the likelihood of a similar situation happening in the future, and that this was an incident involving a single employee and not the company at large. The ADT system in this guide does not include a camera.

FAQs

Q: How much does a smart home security system cost?

A smart home security system can cost anywhere from under $80 to over $400. You should also leave room in your budget for a monitoring subscription, which typically costs between $20 and $40. Overall, smart home security systems are highly affordable and shouldn’t outprice other smart gear for your home.

Q: What is the highest-rated home security system?

The highest-rated home security systems come from SimpliSafe and Ring. With new products and bundles being released regularly, as well as shifting prices, consumer ratings for individual bundles may fluctuate over time. That being said, highly regarded product bundles from both companies can receive a coveted 4.7 stars or higher on Amazon after hundreds (or even thousands) of reviews.

Q: Is smart home security worth it?

Smart home security is worth it if you are nervous about the safety of your home or neighborhood. Some systems can check for flooding and fires as well. With 24/7 professional monitoring, you also have access to a team that is ready to help you and alert authorities in case of an emergency. People wanting smaller, less extensive security should consider smart doorbells as a potential alternative.

Q: Is SimpliSafe better than Wyze?

It depends on what you want in a system. SimpliSafe is among the highest-rated smart home security systems, and the SimpliSafe 10-Piece Wireless Home Security System is our personal pick for the best smart home security system due to its high-quality performance and complete coverage. This isn’t to say that Wyze systems are bad, as the Wyze Home Security Core Kit is a premium choice for those that want a custom, modular system.

Final thoughts on the best smart home security systems

Getting one of the best smart home security systems in 2023 is not as difficult as in years past. Installation should be smoother due to the simplicity of wireless Zigbee, Z-Wave, and Wi-Fi connections that can integrate these systems with the existing smart home gadgets you already own. With app integration and voice support, you can get the truly convenient home security you desire.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best smart home security systems of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
7 tips to get the most out of your Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 https://www.popsci.com/diy/z-fold-5-tips/ Wed, 18 Oct 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580473
Person taking a selfie using a Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5
A foldable phone gives you double the screens and double the options. Samsung

Make sure you're making the most of your folding phone.

The post 7 tips to get the most out of your Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Person taking a selfie using a Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5
A foldable phone gives you double the screens and double the options. Samsung

If you’re splurging on a foldable phone like the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5, make sure you’re getting your money’s worth by exploring all the options and features the handset has to offer.

When you’ve got twice as many screens as normal, you get a lot more functionalities and flexibility: From quickly getting apps running side by side, to dragging and dropping texts and images between them.

1. Customize full screen apps

Unfortunately, not every Android app is developed to run on a screen as large as the main display of the Galaxy Z Fold 5. You might see black bars at the side of certain apps, as well as other odd behavior.

But you can fix this by going to Settings, then Display and Full screen apps. Pick an tool, and choose how you’d like it to show up. Full screen is the option to go for if you don’t want any black bars, though it may cause some distortion on certain apps.

2. Drag and drop between apps

With two apps open on screen, the Z Fold 5 is very adept at transferring content between them. Try tapping and holding an image in your web browser, for example, then dragging it across to an email you’re composing on the other side of the screen. The system will drop the picture right into the message—no copying, pasting, or saving required.

[Related: 7 Samsung phone hacks you need to try right now]

Note that this feature doesn’t work in every single app, but it will run smoothly in a lot them: Google’s Gmail and Chrome, Samsung’s Gallery and Notes, and Microsoft’s PowerPoint and Outlook, are some of the apps that support dragging and dropping.

3. Bring up the Flex panel

Menu for activating flex mode on Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5
Setting up your Z Fold 5 in a right angle will give you a full screen menu with shortcuts and other utilities. Screenshot by Samsung

Flex mode is when you make a 90-degree angle with the Z Fold 5, so you have one half laying flat on a surface while the other is propped up straight. This allows certain apps to display different content on each side. Try opening the Camera app to see what we mean— you’ll see the shutter window at the top and the camera controls underneath.

There’s also the Flex panel, which will work with any app that supports multi-window use (most now do). Open Settings and then go to Advanced features > Labs > Flex mode panel, and enable the feature.

Now, when you turn your phone to landscape mode, you’ll get a little Flex panel icon (a gray diamond shape) in the lower left hand corner. Tap the icon to make the panel pop up: you’ll get a little touchpad to use with the app that’s on the top half of the screen, as well as quick access to certain features and the screenshot tool.

Try using the Flex panel with a web browser to see how useful it can be: You’ll be able to select links and elements on screen just as you would on a desktop operating system.

4. Get more content on screen

Make your way to Settings and go to Display and Screen layout and zoom. This page lets you change the size of the fonts and other elements on screen, which means you can get more content on your Z Fold 5 display at the same time—whether you’re working with one or multiple apps on the screen.

5. Switch seamlessly to the cover screen

Menu for transferring apps to the cover screen of the Galaxy Z Fold 5
Not all apps go straight from the extended screen to the cover one, but you can customize it. Screenshot by Samsung

By default, the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 treats the larger main screen and the smaller cover screen separately, so apps that you’re using on the big display won’t automatically switch over to the outer display when you close the phone.

But if you would like to transfer apps seamlessly, open up Display from Settings, then tap on Continue apps on cover screen. You’ll be able to have this happen with all apps, or only with specific ones.

6. Change how multi window works

One of the key advantages of a foldable device like the Z Fold 5 is how easily you can get multiple apps and windows up alongside each other. Most of the time the Z Fold 5 handles this perfectly well on its own, but you can make some tweaks by heading to Settings, and then going to Advanced features and Multi window.

For example, you can enable Swipe for split screen. This feature will let you swipe in with two fingers from the left-hand edge of the main display to go from full screen mode to split screen mode. When you do, the Z Fold 5 will prompt you to choose another app to go alongside the one you’re already looking at.

7. Customize the taskbar

The taskbar at the bottom of the screen is crucial for getting around your foldable phone and the apps on it, so make sure it’s set up the way you want it. From Settings, pick Display and Taskbar, and choose how many recent apps you want to see at the bottom of the screen. You can also completely hide the taskbar, if you prefer.

[Related: Samsung Galaxy Z Flip4 review: Powerful vibes]

From the Display screen you can also select Navigation bar and choose whether you want to navigate your phone using gestures or the traditional back, home and recent buttons. If you’re not sure about the differences between these two options, you’ll see explanations for them on screen. Just keep in mind that using gestures will free up more space on the taskbar for you.

Note that the apps on the left of the taskbar are the same as those in the dock on the home screen. You can drag apps in and out of the dock if you want to change this selection.

The post 7 tips to get the most out of your Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 5 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to start hiking barefoot, if you’re into that kind of thing https://www.popsci.com/diy/barefoot-hiking/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580076
A person walking barefoot across a fallen tree trunk in a forest.
When you're hiking barefoot, you may decide to take the smoother, narrower path, than the rough wide one. Michał Parzuchowski / Unsplash

Hear us out: no shoes in the forest.

The post How to start hiking barefoot, if you’re into that kind of thing appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A person walking barefoot across a fallen tree trunk in a forest.
When you're hiking barefoot, you may decide to take the smoother, narrower path, than the rough wide one. Michał Parzuchowski / Unsplash

Modern adults are rarely without footwear, all too eager to cover their feet for everything from walking to the mailbox to relaxing on the back porch. And while shoes are, of course, frequently required (like for your morning coffee run, grocery shopping, and dinner out with friends), the outdoors offer a stellar opportunity to kick off your shoes and free your feet for a change.

Yes, despite the presence of dirt, sticks, mud, and uneven surfaces, you can—and perhaps should—ditch your shoes for your next ramble in the woods. Because going barefoot offers holistic health and wellness benefits, strengthens your feet, improves balance, and is just plain fun. Here’s how to do it safely and why you might want to consider hiking barefoot on your next outing.

The benefits of walking barefoot

There have been numerous studies documenting the benefits of walking barefoot, including strengthening foot and leg muscles, improving balance, and potentially reducing inflammation.

The physical effects stem from the fact that when barefoot, the small bones, muscles, and ligaments in your feet can move more freely than they would in typical footwear that reduces natural movement. This restriction can lead to physically weaker foot muscles, less stabilization when walking, and even flat arches.

The potential anti-inflammatory effects may be attributed to the practice of grounding or earthing, which involves your bare skin touching natural surfaces—as it would when walking barefoot. Grounding has been shown in small studies to reduce pain and inflammation, but more research is needed.

There are also more immediately tangible results to hiking in unshod feet, explains Paul Thompson, a podiatrist and founder of The Barefoot Movement, who specializes in barefoot neuromuscular training in New South Wales, Australia. “Traditional shoes often encourage compensations in our natural gait,” he says. “By returning to a barefoot state, we can utilize our entire body in a more balanced and efficient manner. This not only improves the efficiency of walking but also allows us to adapt more effectively to varying terrains.”

Translation: hiking barefoot could improve your balance and reduce your risk of injury. Thompson says that’s because the “heightened sensitivity translates into improved reaction times, enabling hikers to swiftly respond to terrain changes and avoid potential discomfort or injuries.” 

[Related: Learn how to use trekking poles]

But strengthening your feet, just like other parts of your body, takes time, so if you’re new to barefoot hiking, take it slow to protect your soles.

Transition wisely

Much like transitioning to barefoot-style shoes, slow and steady is the way to go when attempting barefoot hiking. After all, if you’ve spent most of your life in cushioned, overbuilt footwear, walking barefoot on any surface is likely going to take some getting used to.

So start with short barefoot walks on soft surfaces like grass. Then incorporate foot exercises into your daily routine. Perform heel raises by planting the balls of your feet and lifting your heels off the ground while squeezing a tennis ball between your heels. Or a technique called “short foot,” where you stand up straight with bare feet, spread your toes, and strive to raise your arches while keeping your heels and the balls of your feet firmly planted.

All of this will strengthen your feet and condition them to the novel feeling and workload of being barefoot for extended periods of time. When you’re ready to hike, Thompson says one short stroll a week is plenty at the start. As your feet become stronger and your soles toughen, you can progressively increase hike duration.

Safety first

When you hike, bring along a first aid kit and a pair of shoes or sandals in case you come to a section of trail you’re not comfortable traversing without foot protection. Slide them on when you need to and back off again whenever you’re ready.

[Related: First aid basics for your adventure in the wilderness]

Then, take it slow. You’ll likely need to pay more attention to where you’re planting your feet than you do while wearing shoes. That means you may end up hiking a bit more slowly than you’re used to, but it also means you’ll be experiencing your surroundings in a more immersive way. So take your time and enjoy the journey.

Find a trail

When it comes to picking the perfect trail for a barefoot hike, some destinations can be more accommodating than others. In Celerina, a small town located in the Swiss Alps, for example, there are dedicated trails specifically for barefoot hiking.

But those are few and far between in the US, so depending on where you’re located, you may have to do a bit of research. One way is to find a local barefoot hiking group, several of which are scattered around the US. If there’s not an official club near you, check websites like Meetup or Facebook for barefoot-friendly hiking events. Even if you don’t want to join a group hike, you can ask for trail recommendations in your area.

If you’re searching on your own, focus on finding trails with ideal surfaces for hiking barefoot, at least when you’re starting out. These include grass, soft dirt, and sand. Even mud is often more fun barefoot than in shoes—plus, going shoeless keeps your boots clean.

Though there aren’t many high moors left in the world, Katharina Moosbrugger, hiking guide and founder of Naturerfahren, a nature-focused tour company in Austria, says these landscapes are an excellent place to walk barefoot thanks to the soft, spongy surfaces. But because these open tracts of land can hide deceptively deep bogs, you’ll want to opt for a guided hike through such areas if you’re not familiar with them. Otherwise, you could easily sink up to your shoulders in wet mud.

Once you’ve found a few ideal spots and are ready to liberate your feet from shoes, have at it. Just remember to take it slow, pick trails wisely, and enjoy the experience of being outdoors as nature intended.

The post How to start hiking barefoot, if you’re into that kind of thing appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best search engines for finding results and securing your privacy https://www.popsci.com/diy/best-search-engines/ Tue, 17 Oct 2023 09:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=580097
A bearded man with glasses looking at a desktop computer screen with a search function displayed.
The best search engine is definitely not the one this guy's using. Depositphotos

Find what you need online and protect your privacy.

The post The best search engines for finding results and securing your privacy appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A bearded man with glasses looking at a desktop computer screen with a search function displayed.
The best search engine is definitely not the one this guy's using. Depositphotos

Your choice of search engine makes a big difference in the relevance (and privacy) of your search results. The first search engine, known as Archie, was developed by a student at McGill University and released in 1990. Today, there are more than 20 search engines that range from powerhouses like Google to lesser-known, more specialized options

Some search engines, such as Google, highlight their AI assistants, but the truth is that artificial intelligence has been behind search engines for years. But if you want an assistant to winnow search results, AI can help you get more relevant results. 

Even if you use a browser with a built-in search engine, you’re not beholden to it. You can, for example, add search engines to Google Chrome, giving you extra options when you want to perform photo searches or need extra privacy. Before you set your default search engine, though, consider how you use searches and how you feel about data privacy. These factors can direct you toward the top search engine for your inquiring mind.

1. Google

The Google search engine in a Google Chrome browser window.
The undisputed leader of search. Screenshot: Google

Google is the No. 1 search engine used today, handling more than 83 percent of searches, according to Statista. That number may rise or fall depending on the month, but needless to say, Google’s got the majority of the market when it comes to searches. 

Google is a robust search engine that powers sites like YouTube and integrates full-service features like Google Workspace. It’s much more than a search engine that allows you to gather everything from your latest curiosity to professional collaboration in one place. 

In February 2023, Google introduced Bard, an AI-powered search assistant. Search engines have used AI algorithms for years to identify patterns and customize search results and ads to individual users, but we’re entering a new age of heavy focus on AI. If you’re hoping Bard will hold up to OpenAI’s ChatGPT, though, it’s got a ways to go. That said, with the speed that AI adapts, it may not be long before Google has a leading assistant for generative as well as search purposes. 

This engine also gets high marks for the layout and variety of features like snippets, knowledge panels, and “people also ask” sections that can help you further refine results. On the downside, Google is a data hog and hangs onto your information to customize your experience. On one hand, you’ll see ads and results that are more relevant to your likes and preferences. On the other hand, privacy issues and data usage are real concerns. Some people find Google more than a little invasive.

2. Bing

The Bing search engine in a Google Chrome browser window.
Earn rewards for all that search time. Screenshot: Bing

If you’re looking for search engines other than Google, Bing is a top contender. Bing doesn’t have nearly Google’s market share, but it’s second in popularity worldwide. Microsoft created Bing in 2009 and has developed it into an impressive search engine, especially when it comes to the integration of AI. 

[Related: Ditch Google for good with these apps and gadgets]

ChatGPT powers Bing Chat, Bing’s search bot, which remembers query context to help you refine searches. It also includes sources in search results, helping you assess the validity of your results. That said, Bing can give short, almost nonsensical answers at times. 

The Bing search results pages on Bing look eerily similar to Google’s. Many users may have a hard time telling the difference between the two. However, Bing’s image, video, and map searching abilities are some of the best, with the video and image features topping the market.

Bing also offers a rewards program, which earns you points every time you shop or search with Bing. After you’ve accumulated enough points, you can redeem them for gift cards or use them to donate to your favorite charity. You earn about five points per search, so doing a lot of online research could earn you a few bucks each month. 

Like Google, Bing collects data to customize the ads and searches that appear, which you may or may not appreciate. Consequently, Bing, like Google, might not be the best choice if privacy is your top concern.

3. DuckDuckGo

The DuckDuckGo search engine in a Google Chrome browser window.
Increased tracker blocking and encryption on DuckDuckGo help protect user privacy. Screenshot: DuckDuckGo

If all that data collection has your skin crawling, DuckDuckGo is worth a try. If you compare Google vs. DuckDuckGo vs. Bing, DuckDuckGo might not be as comprehensive, but it puts privacy over pure search power. It doesn’t store your data, track you, or collect cookies. You’ll still see ads, but they won’t be customized based on your searches. 

This search engine uses its own crawler and incorporates a few other search engines, but not Google. The company skips the monster search engine in an effort to provide a different user experience. It’s organized similarly to other search engines, with search categories at the top for images and videos that match your search.

[Related: 7 ways DuckDuckGo can help you find exactly what you need]

However, there’s only one results page per search, which is kind of nice if you’re easily overwhelmed by Google’s millions of results when all you’re doing is looking for the best WiFi routers. While DuckDuckGo isn’t set to dethrone Google, it’s gained a steady following with the privacy it offers.

4. Startpage

The Startpage search engine in a Google Chrome browser window.
Skip the targeted ads when you search with Startpage. Screenshot: Startpage

Startpage approaches search with a philosophy that’s similar to DuckDuckGo by focusing on security and privacy. It keeps prying eyes (and advertisers) from following your every virtual move by refusing to log your search history or save your personal data. That does mean some searches take a little longer. But some users find it worth it for the privacy that remains after they hit exit. 

Startpage uses Google to populate results, which means you’ll get robust results without the targeted ads. The uncluttered search page is a breath of fresh air from some of the larger engines, which can feel like ads are slapping you in the face while you scroll.

This engine also offers an Anonymous View that lets you visit pages without sharing any information about yourself. The process works by removing your IP address before sending the query. Startpage also offers the option of StartMail, a secure email platform.

5. Yahoo

The Yahoo homepage and search engine in a Google Chrome browser window.
Yahoo is powered by Bing, so they may display similar results. Screenshot: Yahoo

Yahoo has been around since 1994 and uses Bing’s search engine to create results, so expect similar groupings, but it uses its own tech for certain searches, including trending ones. Though not as elegant as Bing or Google, Yahoo’s search page offers categories like weather, news, sports, and trends as well as access to Yahoo’s email service. Yahoo Finance is another big draw and provides quick access to the latest in what’s happening on the stock market. 

If you’re primarily after news and finance info, Yahoo’s got it in spades. You don’t even have to do a Yahoo web search to see the latest headlines with eye-catching photos to boot. Yahoo Maps is another place that sets this engine apart, thanks to an open-source Open Maps service. 

Yahoo also offers subscription-based services like Yahoo Finance Plus for even more insight into the market, investments, and companies on the rise. And, of course, it includes free features like Yahoo Mail.

The post The best search engines for finding results and securing your privacy appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best dual-monitor stands of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-dual-monitor-stands/ Fri, 17 Jun 2022 12:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=449578
The best dual monitor stands
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

Double the screens, double the fun, but take up less of the desk space with the best dual monitor stands.

The post The best dual-monitor stands of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best dual monitor stands
Brandt Ranj / Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Mount-It! (MI-1772) Dual Monitor Arm Mount-It! (MI-1772) Dual Monitor Arm
SEE IT

Full articulation and ease of use are what make this dual monitor arm stand out—especially if you don’t have a lot of desk space.

Best wall-mounted The Mountup Dual Monitor Wall Mount conveys is a more affordable choice if you’re okay installing a more permanent dual monitor setup. Mountup Dual Monitor Wall Mount
SEE IT

The Mountup Dual Monitor Wall Mount conveys is a more affordable choice if you’re okay installing a more permanent dual monitor setup.

Best budget VIVO Dual Monitor Desk Mount VIVO Dual Monitor Desk Mount
SEE IT

VIVO’s Dual Monitor Desk Mount has more features than its modest price suggests.

With so many people working from home, many of us are furnishing our offices on our own dime or with a small work budget rather than requesting equipment at the office—and that can mean some real makeshift monitor stands, etc. Ergonomics, however, is just as important at home as in a cubicle. Using a dual-monitor stand, whether it’s something you put on your desk, a mounted monitor arm, or a bracket you mount on your wall, gives you the freedom to place your screens as you please for both maximum comfort and efficiency. There are many ways to optimize your two-monitor setup: The best dual-monitor stands ensure maximum flexibility, regardless of your approach.

How we chose the best dual-monitor stands

To make our selections, I paired my own personal testing and experience with professional reviews and consumer feedback on Amazon. Our favorite monitor arms and monitor stands for dual-display setups provide a wide range of use cases, installation types, and prices. We also kept brand credibility in mind: Among monitor arm manufacturers, there are a handful of respected companies, and a very large number of lesser-known brands that often offer cheap prices but without the reputation or warranty to back them up.

Best dual-monitor stands: Reviews & Recommendations

So you have two monitors, and you want to put them up on a single adjustable stand. Now that you know the basics of what to look for, we have a few recommendations for the best dual-monitor stands, including desk-mounted, wall-mounted, and freestanding options. No matter your home office or PC gaming setup, there should be a decent option for you among these picks.

Best overall: Mount-It! (MI-1772) Dual Monitor Arm

Mount-It!

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: Mount-It’s monitor arm makes it very easy to maneuver two big displays without any friction.

Specs

  • Mount type: Desk
  • Compatible VESA mount sizes: 75mm x 75mm, 100mm x 100mm
  • Adjustment mechanism: Gas-spring mount/free moving
  • Weight range: 20lb per arm
  • Display size range: 19-32 inches
  • Available colors: Black, Silver

Pros

  • Requires very little desk space
  • Offers fine-grain control over the monitors
  • Easy-to-move displays

Cons

  • Price

We’ve had great success in our tests of Mount-It!’s single monitor arms, and feel very comfortable recommending this dual-display version to anyone who needs a lot of extra digital real estate to work. The arms can hold large, heavy displays, and each one can be twisted, tilted, and turned in several directions. This level of control can accommodate many work styles: video editors who want to see how their color grading tweaks are affecting the look of footage in real time, office workers who want to dedicate a vertically oriented monitor to their e-mail or messaging client, or gamers who want to monitor their Twitch chat.

Two features have impressed us with Mount-It!’s other monitor stands that apply to this one: The ease at which they allow you to control your monitor and how well their clamping mechanism keeps it firmly attached to your desk. We’ve had no issues moving a 27-inch monitor with one hand, and the ability to move your displays closer and further from your face comes in handy more frequently than you’d expect. If you don’t have a lot of physical desk space, this monitor’s clamp will be incredibly helpful. A monitor stand’s feet can take up a lot more room than you think, and having more area back for your go-to tech accessories is very useful.

Best desk-mounted: Ergotron LX Dual Monitor Arm

Ergotron

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Ergotron LX Dual Monitor Arm is a slick desk mount that balances great build quality and the price that comes with it.

Specs

  • Mount type: Desk
  • Compatible VESA mount sizes: 75mm x 75mm, 100mm x 100mm
  • Adjustment mechanism: Gas-spring mount/free moving
  • Weight range: 7-20 lbs
  • Display size range: 27 inches
  • Available colors: Black/white/silver

Pros

  • Superior build quality
  • Plenty of ergonomic options
  • Easy to install
  • Lots of color options

Cons

  • Expensive

When you think of monitor mounts, free-moving gas-spring arms typically come to mind. They offer smooth action that allows you to move your screens with precision easily. Though it costs more than many other brands, Ergotron’s LX Dual Monitor Arm dual-monitor arm has a higher quality that justifies the price. Plus, it comes with a 10-year warranty, so you know the company stands behind its product. The Ergotron LX Dual Monitor Arm doesn’t do anything flashy. It just does the basics very well.

Best wall-mounted: Mountup Dual Monitor Wall Mount

MOUNTUP

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Mountup Dual Monitor Wall Mount looks sharp, and strikes a balance between price and features.

Specs

  • Mount type: Wall mount
  • Compatible VESA mount sizes: 75mm x 75mm, 100mm x 100mm
  • Adjustment mechanism: Gas-spring arms/free moving
  • Weight range: 3.3 – 17.6 lbs
  • Display size range: Up to 32-inch
  • Available colors: Chrome/Black

Pros

  • Great price
  • Very adjustable
  • Detachable VESA plates

Cons

  • Requires tools to install
  • Requires brick, concrete, or wood anchor

If you’re ready to commit to a specific home, spot, and desk setup, you can save a lot of money on a really great dual-monitor arm with the Mountup Dual Monitor Wall Mount. It looks sharp, carries a lot of weight, and costs less than half as much as our desk-mounted pick. That said, this is a heavy dual-monitor arm. Not only do you need to attach it to the wall, the manufacturer specifically calls for you to anchor it on a brick, concrete, or wooden stud. Drywall alone may not hold it up. That’s a huge limitation, but if you have the right setup, this is arguably the most stable way to mount your monitors.

Best freestanding: ErGear Freestanding Dual Monitor Stand

ErGear

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: If you don’t want to mount your monitors on arms, ErGear makes a more conventional dual-monitor stand that’s sturdy and offers strong adjustability.

Specs

  • Mount type: Desktop stand
  • Compatible VESA mount sizes: 75mm x 75mm, 100mm x 100mm
  • Adjustment mechanism: Pole-adjusted height/static arm
  • Weight range: Up to 22 lbs
  • Display size range: 17-32 inches
  • Available colors: Black

Pros

  • Glass base
  • High weight tolerence
  • No “install” time
  • Price

Cons

  • Fewer placement/ergonomic options
  • Base takes up space on your desk

We often recommend desk-clamping or wall-mounted monitor arms for their great adjustability and their ability to free up desk space. However, not all of us can use those options: We can’t all drill holes in our walls, and some desks aren’t clamp-friendly. Whether your options are limited, or you simply don’t want to install anything, a desktop or “freestanding” monitor stand is the way to go.

ErGear’s Dual Monitor Stand features a static base column with adjustable spokes for both monitors. It is as adjustable as a dual-monitor arm, but you can still adjust height, tilt, swivel, and rotation to get very good, ergonomically mind positioning. It’s all held down by a large, sturdy black glass base that has enough room under it to route some cables. While it doesn’t free up as much space as a desk-mounted stand, putting both of your monitors on a single stand still opens up your workstation quite a bit.

Best vertical: Hemudu HT05B-002 Dual Monitor Stand

Hemudu

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: The Hemudu HT05B-002 allows you to set up a vertical stacking configuration without sacrificing stability.

Specs

  • Mount type: Desktop stand
  • Compatible VESA mount sizes: 50mm x 50mm, 75mm x 75mm, 100mm x 100mm
  • Adjustment mechanism: Static mount
  • Weight range: 44 lbs per arm
  • Display size range: 13-34 inches
  • Available colors: Black

Pros

  • Can handle very large and heavy displays
  • Has plenty of ergonomic options
  • Easy to move

Cons

  • Fewer adjustment options compared to free-moving arms
  • Still takes up desk space

Ergonomics are, ultimately, the core advantage of using a dual-monitor arm. Putting your displays on a single, adjustable mount allows you to position your displays to reduce the number of neck movements you have to do in your daily work. No matter what you do, though, putting two widescreen displays right next to each other ensures that you will need to turn your head to focus on one screen or the other. Suppose you are the kind of person who uses one display most of the time and only occasionally glances at screen number two. In that case, a stacking monitor stand, which mounts the two monitors in a single column, might be useful. Craning your neck to look up isn’t great, ergonomically speaking, but if you only look at that second monitor every once in a while, it may lead to a net reduction in strain.

If you want to set up a vertical stack, we recommend a desktop mount like the Hemudu HT05B-002, rather than a desk-mounted one. With a vertical setup, you’re putting a lot more stress on the stand arm, and a flat stand handles that extra weight better. The HT05B-002 can handle two 34-inch, 44-lb. screens. It features removable VESA plates for easy installation as well. A wide base limits your desk real estate gains, but you can rest easy knowing that the stand will support your monitors’ weight(s). It’s a small consolation, but the feet under the base raise up enough to fit some of your other cabling underneath.

Best premium: Ergotron HX Desk Dual Monitor Arm

Ergotron

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: If you’re willing to pay a premium for a reliable brand, the Ergotron HX is as sturdy as they come.

Specs

  • Mount type: Desk-mounted
  • Compatible VESA mount sizes: 75mm x 75mm, 100mm x 100mm (More available with optional bracket adapter kit)
  • Adjustment mechanism: Gas-spring arms/free moving
  • Weight range: 35 lbs per arm
  • Display size range: Up to 32-inch
  • Available colors: White, Silver, Black

Pros

  • Killer looks
  • 15-year warranty
  • A trusted name in ergonomics

Cons

  • Very expensive

It’s easy to find a monitor arm for under $100, but they’re almost always a gamble. You’re buying a relatively untested design from a brand with little to no reputation, which can be a risky proposition with a dual-monitor stand that holds and protects two pieces of equipment that cost hundreds or even thousands of dollars. If you have a pair of very expensive displays, you may want to consider spending a similarly luxurious amount on your stand. 

Ergotron is one of the oldest and most reliable names in the monitor stand game, and its HX dual-monitor arm is a deluxe desk-mounted stand. It has some of the flourishes from our other top picks, including a 15-year warranty and detachable VESA mounts for easy mounting. It also features a unique handlebar beneath the screens that allows you to adjust both displays at once. Those things are all just gravy, though. In this case, you’re spending a lot of extra money on the peace of mind that comes with buying a trusted luxury brand.

Best budget: VIVO Dual Monitor Desk Mount

VIVO

SEE IT

Buy it used or refurbished: eBay

Why it made the cut: VIVO managed to make its dual-monitor stand comparable to more expensive models without many compromises.

Specs

  • Mount type: Desk
  • Compatible VESA mount sizes: Gas-spring arms/free moving
  • Adjustment mechanism: 75mm x 75mm, 100mm x 100mm
  • Weight range: up to 22lb per arm
  • Display size range: 13-30 inches
  • Available colors: Black, White

Pros

  • Gives you a fair amount of control over your monitors
  • Won’t take up a lot of room on your desk
  • Price

Cons

  • No automatic height adjustment

If you’ve invested most of your home office improvement budget on your new displays, it makes sense to save a little bit on a dual-monitor stand. This model from VIVO has most of the features found in our best overall pick, but at a quarter of the price. Each monitor can be tilted and twisted individually, but you can only adjust their height by loosening and tightening a screw on the back. Both monitors have to be set at the same height, which may matter depending on the type of work you do. This stand works with monitors up to 30-inches wide, but VIVO offers a model that can handle displays up to 32 inches if necessary.

We like monitor arms that can be clamped onto a desk rather than sit on top of it because of the space savings, which is why VIVO’s is especially appealing to us. We’re also impressed that it can control monitors up to 22 pounds, which means the arms on this stand are stronger than the ones on our best overall pick. If the lack of height adjustability isn’t a dealbreaker, there’s no reason to spend more money on a dual-monitor stand.

Things to consider before buying one of the best dual-monitor stands

Even if you know exactly which dual-monitor stand or arm to buy, it helps to know a bit about the basic mechanics involved. Different stands require varying amounts of installation at setup, and not every monitor can be mounted on a third-party stand. Understanding these basics will help you pick the right stand for your displays, and ensure you’re ready to install your stand (or call someone who can.)

Why should I use a dual-monitor stand?

There are many reasons to mount your monitors, ranging from purely cosmetic to enabling better ergonomics. The stands with PC monitors vary widely in construction quality, appearance, and features. Some stands take up tons of desk space without offering any additional utility. Others may not allow you to adjust them properly, forcing you to twist or crane your neck to look at them, which could lead to long-term strain. And some of them may just look ugly. When you buy a monitor for its great specs, which you should, it potentially opens the door for you to end up with a huge, ugly stand that gives you a sore neck. Luckily, most monitors allow you to remove the actual display from its stand and mount them on a third-party stand. 

A monitor stand, whether it sits on your desk, clamps on at edge of it, or bolts onto the wall behind it, can solve all of these issues at once, giving you the ability to place your monitor exactly where you want it, reclaiming your desk space for more useful tools, and swapping out what may be garish design for something more subtle and clean.

Stand, clamp, or wall mount?

When moving to a dual-monitor stand, you must choose between a conventional desktop form factor, a clamping desk-mounted design, or a wall-mounted one. Often, picking one versus another comes down to what kind of desk you have, how important it is to reclaim desk space, and the likelihood that you’ll need to move your setup.

If you have a flat desk with an edge or lip, we like clamping monitor stands that clamp to the rear edge of your desk. They’re sturdy, highly adjustable, and easy to install or remove without damaging the desk. (Some offer an option to drill a hole into your desk as an anchor, but it isn’t necessarily mandatory.)

That said, if you have a glass desk, an executive-style desk, or something with lots of cable guides built into the back, a clamp might not be a good fit. In most cases, there’s just no spot to install the clamp. With glass, it could literally shatter the desk. In those cases, a desktop stand makes more sense. Though you won’t get as much space back, a desktop with a dual-monitor stand still consolidates two screens onto a single stand, reclaiming some desk real estate. Also, desktop stands are very sturdy, so it makes sense to use them for larger, heavier screens.

Finally, there’s the wall mount. Whether you use a set of monitor arms or a bracket similar to what you’d use when mounting a TV, the wall mount is an extremely sturdy choice but requires serious installation. To install it, you’ll need to find a stud, drill some holes, and bolt your monitor stand to your wall. Once you install it, your monitor stand isn’t going anywhere, which means your desk setup isn’t going anywhere, either. That lack of flexibility makes it a very niche choice. You don’t want to have to spackle and repaint your walls every time you think your desk would look better over by the window.

Before you buy: Make sure all your monitors have VESA mounts

If you peek around the back of most computer monitors, you’ll notice that the stand for your display probably attaches via four screws in a square configuration. This is a standard configuration maintained by the Video Electronics Standards Association, commonly known as VESA, meant to make stands as close to universal as possible so users can buy new stands easily. 

VESA mounts can come in many sizes, but most PC monitors fall into one of two options, 75mm x 75mm or 100mm x 100 mm. That makes everyone’s life easier: All of our picks support both sizes, as should most third-party monitor stands of any shape and size. That said, you should still double-check your monitors’ specs to see VESA mount sizes you’ll need before buying a dual-monitor stand, if only to make sure that your monitor can be mounted at all. Some very cheap monitors (and a few very expensive ones) build their monitors permanently attached to their stands.

Double-check the weight of both of your displays

Monitors are heavy and expensive. Before mounting them, you should ensure your stand can support their weight. Make sure that your monitors are within the stands’ specified weight limit—don’t risk going above or below whatever limits the manufacturer sets. Most monitor manufacturers include the weight of the displays both with and without stands on their product pages. You have a little wiggle room on the size of the monitor, but consider the weight tolerances to be inviolable laws of nature in this case, or risk breaking hundreds or even thousands of dollars worth of monitors.

FAQs

Q: Does a dual-monitor arm save space?

Desk- and wall-mounted monitor arms do double duty, clearing off desktop space and improving your PC setup’s ergonomics. With your monitor on a desk-mounted stand, you can remove the original stand from your desk, giving you back some desk space. You can leave that space open for a cleaner, more minimalist look, use it as a spot to store a laptop, or maybe take advantage of it as a home for some powered speakers? The sky’s the limit.

Q: How much weight can a dual-monitor stand hold?

The maximum weight your dual-monitor stand can hold will vary from stand to stand. The mounts we’ve selected for this list max out at anywhere from 17.6 lbs to 44 lbs per monitor, influenced by the build material, the type of arm, and mounting style. 

This is one of the most important things to check out before picking out an arm. Do not buy a stand unless you are sure it can support your monitors’ weight.

Q: Can you use a monitor arm on a glass desk?

You can use some dual-monitor arms on a glass desk. Avoid using desk-mounted monitor stands, which apply a large amount of clamping force to your desk. A clamping monitor stand may very well crack or shatter the desk. So long as your desk can handle the weight of two monitors, a desktop monitor stand should work fine. If weight is also a concern, consider a wall-mounted stand.

Q: How much should a dual-monitor stand cost?

This will vary based on the features you need, but you shouldn’t have to spend over $50 on a monitor stand if your needs are modest.

Final thoughts on the best dual-monitor stands

With so many options for mounting your monitors and such a wide range of prices, the best dual-monitor stands are a very affordable and useful upgrade for anyone using two monitors. Whether you’re rocking one display in landscape mode and one in portrait mode, pairing an ultrawide monitor with a standard one, mounting to a desk or a wall, there are dynamic stands for every type of home setup.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best dual-monitor stands of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best cable management for desks in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-cable-management-for-desks/ Thu, 29 Sep 2022 11:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=473480
best cable management for desks sliced header
Tony Ware

Turn that chaotic cacophony of cords under your desk into an organized system that’s easy to manage and easy on the eyes.

The post The best cable management for desks in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
best cable management for desks sliced header
Tony Ware

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Alex Tech 10ft - 1/2 inch Cord Protector Wire Loom Tubing Cable is the best overall cable management for desks. Alex Tech 10ft – 1/2 inch Cord Protector Wire Loom Tubing Cable
SEE IT

An easy-to-use option that keeps cords hidden.

Best for standing desks Stand Up Desk Store Under Desk Cable Management Tray is the best for standing desks. Stand Up Desk Store Under Desk Cable Management Tray
SEE IT

Made for standing desks, so you know it works.

Best hub Anker Cable Management Box and Desk Cord Organizer is the best hub cable management for desks. Tessan Power Strip with Cable Management Box
SEE IT

Ditch the surge strip and go for something more discreet.

Most people don’t think about cable management for desks until cords get impossibly tangled. And, it doesn’t help that all cords and cables look the same—unplugging the wrong one could lead to an “Indiana Jones”-esque disaster cutscene in your office. Instead of running away from a boulder falling from the ceiling, you run to the surge strip to re-plug in the printer so you can spend the next five minutes waiting for it to turn back on. However, taking your desk from Medusa’s lair to something you’d find on life-hack TikTok is possible. The best cable management for desks will make your home office easier on the eyes and ensure that a snag doesn’t send your expensive computer equipment flying.

How we chose the best cable management for desks

Many of us on the PopSci gear team currently work from home, having ditched a regular office cubicle long ago. Having a way to organize our cables and wires gives us more room for neat things to review. And, hiding the mess of cables prevents us from going crazy looking at tangles of wires. To find the best cable management for desks, we looked at critical reviews and peer recommendations, performed personal testing, and conducted heavy research into real-world user impressions. 

The best cable management for desks: Reviews & Recommendations

Our choices for the best cable management systems cover a wide range of budgets, functionalities, and can fit multiple kinds of desks. After searching far and wide, here are our favorite options and ideas for desk cable management.

Best overall: Alex Tech 10ft – 1/2 inch Cord Protector Wire Loom Tubing Cable

Alex Tech

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A simple and effective cable management system that can be utilized in multiple ways.

Specs

  • Material: Polyethylene
  • Size: ½”-10 feet to ⅜”-25 feet
  • Desk attachment: N/A
  • Kind of cable management: Protective split sleeving

Pros 

  • Can be combined with an under-desk organizer
  • UL-recognized
  • High operating temperature

Cons 

  • Self-wrap can get loose at certain angles
  • Keep out of the reach of animals

If you’re new to using cable management systems, or if you’re a seasoned cable management vet looking to up their set-up, this protective split sleeve is versatile enough to use alone or with an under-desk organizer. You can even use them to manage the few unsightly wires behind the soundbar or AV receiver in your home theater setup. You receive 10 feet of it for $8.99, making it incredibly price-friendly, and sizing goes from ½” diameter/10 feet long to ⅜” diameter and 25 feet long. They have a melt temperature of 446 degrees Fahrenheit and are recognized by Underwriters Laboratories (UL), a consumer safety organization. What does this mean? You don’t have to worry about sitting near a potential fire hazard (like an overclocked gaming computer). Putting them around wires is easy: Fit the cables in the sleeve, cut off the excess, and you’re done. Plus, it’s easy to “split” wires thanks to the design—just separate the wire you want to take out of the bundle and let the sleeve self-wrap. Although the manufacturer says that it protects against kitty cats’ claws and teeth, we recommend keeping this sleeving away from animals just in case.

Best for standing desks: Stand Up Desk Store Under Desk Cable Management Tray

S Stand Up Desk Store

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This cable management system was built for stand-up desks and doubles as a modesty panel.

Specs

  • Material: Alloy steel
  • Size: 48” and 60”
  • Desk attachment: Screws
  • Kind of cable management: Under desk tray

Pros 

  • Doubles as a modesty panel
  • Comes with a 5-year warranty
  • Sturdy

Cons 

  • Won’t work on non-wood desks
  • Can only attach using screws

Standing desks help with productivity. However, worrying about wires can mess with your ability to focus on the task at hand. Stress no more with the Stand Up Desk Store Under Desk Cable Management Tray. As the name suggests, it’s built specifically as cable management for standing desks. The tray can fit a surge strip and then some, and it doubles as a modesty panel. It’s incredibly sturdy, and the lip on the inside prevents cables and wires from spilling over when taking your standing desk sky-high. It’s worth noting that it only attaches using screws—you’ll have to flip your desk and have an electric screwdriver handy to make the process easier. It comes with a five-year warranty in case you’re not happy with your purchase. However, we think you, your knees, your focus, and your expensive electronics will thank you.

Best hub: Tessan Power Strip with Cable Management Box

Tessan

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: A surge strip, but make it discreet, have USB-A ports, and be wall-mountable.

Specs

  • Material: Plastic, electronic component
  • Size: 11.38 x 5.87 x 5.71 inches
  • Desk attachment: N/A 
  • Kind of cable management: Desk hub

Pros 

  • Holds cables and chargers
  • Great warranty
  • Can fit large AC plugs

Cons 

  • No USB-C ports

This hub is like a surge strip that hides the outlets with a plastic privacy hood. Unlike some surge strips, it comes with two USB-A ports so that you can save the four AC outlets for things with AC outlets. You can set it below or on your desk. If you’re looking to keep your desk area more clutter-free, you can even mount it to the wall. An angled flat plug keeps your second outlet open for another device. The only downside of this great hub is the lack of USB-C ports.

Best magnetic: Smartish Cable Wrangler

Smartish

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Charging cables are an essential-but-disorganized tech accessory, but Smartish’s Cable Wrangler makes them easy to keep in line.

Specs

  • Material: N/A
  • Size: 3.24 x 3.24 x 1.3 inches
  • Desk attachment: Rubber base
  • Kind of cable management: On desktop

Pros 

  • Small size
  • Easy to move
  • Grippy bottom

Cons 

  • Only useful for charging cables

If charging cables are giving you trouble, Smartish’s Cable Wrangler is a great solution. The cable organizer has a magnetic top that’ll keep all your charging cables aligned and at the ready. It won’t work with larger cords, though. A big part of the Cable Wrangler’s appeal is its small size. You can easily pick it up and move it around on your desk when you’d like, but it won’t slip around on its own, thanks to a rubberized base. While the cords will attach to this organizer’s magnetic top, Smartish also includes magnetized “cable collars” to wrap around them to ensure an even stronger connection.

Best for glass desks: Scandinavian Hub Store Under Desk Cable Management Tray

Scandinavian Hub

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This no-drill option takes the focus off of a mound of wires and keeps the focus on your gorgeous glass desk. 

Specs

  • Material: Carbon steel
  • Size: 17 x 3.5 x 4.3 inches
  • Desk attachment: Adhesive stickers or screws
  • Kind of cable management: Desk tray

Pros 

  • Designed to accommodate surge protectors
  • Can attach to the wall
  • Velcro straps are included for more organization

Cons 

  • Can only be mounted on top of the desk using the adhesive option
  • One size

Glass desks can handle an entire computer set-up—unfortunately, you can’t screw in an under-desk tray to organize your wires. With the Scandinavian Hub Store Under Desk Cable Management Tray, this no-drilling-holes problem comes with a solution for glass desks: adhesive stickers that allow you to attach the desk tray without damaging your table. You can even use the adhesive to mount it on a wall, making it a renter-friendly option. It’s roomy enough to accommodate a surge strip to prevent tripping. And, it comes with two velcro straps that allow you to bundle your cords for an even cleaner look. Although the tray comes in one size, you can purchase multiple and set them up however you’d like. If you do decide to switch up your set-up and get a wood desk, the set comes with a set of screws to attach it four other ways.

Best clips: Gadgetklip Garden Clips

Gadgetklip

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This simple clip can keep a tight grip on all of your cables.

Specs

  • Material: Stainless steel and plastic
  • Size: 6.02 x 3.11 x 1.73 inches
  • Desk attachment: Clip-on
  • Kind of cable management: Clips

Pros 

  • Sturdy
  • Can accommodate thicker cables
  • Fun colors

Cons 

  • Clips must be attached somewhere

If you’d like to organize the cables on your desk in the simplest way possible, Gadgetklip’s Garden Clips are a great solution. Don’t be put off by their name, these clips can be used to organize cables anywhere, but were designed to be durable enough to survive the elements. This is the most basic type of cable management: feed the cords through a clip, then clamp them to the side of your desk. The Garden Clips are large enough to keep hold of a bundle of power, networking, and charging cables, and you can continue threading more through them over time as your needs change. You’ll need a desk that’s thin enough for a clip to clamp onto, but that’s the only concern you should have with this cable organization tool.

Best budget: Newlan Reusable Cable Ties

Newlan

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: You don’t have to spend much to organize your cables with these simple, easy-to-use velcro strips.

Specs

  • Material: Velcro
  • Size: 7.48 x 4.4 x 0.5 inches
  • Desk attachment: N/A
  • Kind of cable management: Cable ties

Pros 

  • Reusable
  • Versatile
  • Come in a large pack

Cons 

  • Best for medium bundles of wire

Getting the cables around your desk doesn’t need to cost a fortune—in fact, you only need about $6 and some change to get started. These velcro reusable cable ties are flexible and versatile—you can use them to bundle a group of wires together, or you can use them to gather excess cable into a suitable length. You can also use them to keep rogue cables neat and tidy since they have a tendency to magically tangle when not in use. Using them with other cable management systems, like the ones above, can take your desk organization to the next level: For example, instead of letting your wire bundle flop around, stow them in an under-desk tray. Plus, you can use them anywhere. Got a guitar cable that you’re not using? Velcro strap! Holiday lights? Velcro strap! Colored pencils? Velcro strap! And, with 60 in a pack, you won’t feel guilty about using them all up or losing a few.

What to consider when buying the best cable management for desks

No one wants to hang a cable management tray and have it come tumbling down from the weight of your wires. The best cable management for desk systems are sturdy, easy to use, and can fit a variety of desks if you decide to change your set-up. Here’s what else you should know when shopping for cable management for your desk:

Amount and style of cables

If you’re trying to organize thicker cables like the ones that power your monitor or desktop, you’ll need stronger solutions, like trays, velcro straps, and protective sleeves. Something meant for smaller wires, like phone and laptop chargers, won’t stand a chance against something meatier. 

Office set-up

Where your desk is in your office will determine the best cable management system. A desk against the wall can hide a bundle of cables compared to one facing out or a workstation located in the middle of the room. A combo desk skirt and cable management sleeve can keep your set-up looking clean and wireless. If your desk is against the wall, you can better get away with a simple tray or protective sleeve. 

Desk style

Many cable management systems are installed with screws. This is perfect if your desk is made of wood or particle board. However, it’s harder—or almost impossible—to screw into a glass, plastic, or metal desk. If you’re in the latter camp, choose an option that uses strong adhesive strips to attach a tray to your desk. No holes and no hassle equals a bunch of happy cables and one happy customer (you). Additionally, some clamp onto the table part of your desk. Ditch these if your desk isn’t clamp-friendly. 

Budget

Cable management systems can start at $5 and go into the hundreds. Most casual cable management systems cap at around $75. If you don’t work with huge bundles of cables and wires, something from the $5-$75 range is perfectly suitable. 

FAQs

Q: How much does cable management for desks cost?

It can be less than $100 to create a cable management system, depending on what you decide to include. A set-up that only includes velcro straps and sleeves will be cheaper than ones that involve trays. However, putting together a system that includes velcro straps and a tray will give you an organized set-up and keep your cords off your office floor.

Q: How do you arrange wires neatly?

Cable clips can keep phone chargers off the floor and close to your person. If you’re storing wires, use a twist tie or velcro strap to keep each wire together so they don’t tangle in storage. If you’re using a sleeve, ensure the wire is kink-free before putting it in the sleeve. 

Q: How can I manage my cables above my desk?

You can attach a cable management tray or racks to the wall using screws or adhesive strips, or you can use a cord cover to keep them tidy. Some cord covers come with adhesive strips to attach to the wall, and many can be painted over. Plus, they’re easy options that don’t create a hole in the wall and allow for easy access to the cables. 

Final thoughts on the best cable management for desks

The best cable management for desks doesn’t have to be pricey. And they aren’t limited to one thing: you can mix and match different kinds of items to create a cable management system that works for you. From under desk trays to simple velcro straps, there are plenty of options to choose from. The best cable management for desks not only keeps your space organized but keeps you safe. It stops you from tripping over a cable and potentially wrecking your expensive equipment. And, if you have a standing desk or a glass desk, you don’t have to miss out on the organization fun—there are options for you. Now get arranging and assembling!

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best cable management for desks in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
It’s a great day to secure your Apple and iCloud accounts https://www.popsci.com/secure-your-apple-and-icloud-accounts/ Mon, 27 Sep 2021 18:23:52 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/secure-your-apple-and-icloud-accounts/
An iPhone and a Mac computer keyboard illuminated under a pink light.
We hope this lighting is ominous enough to get the point across. felipepelaquim / Unsplash

Apple is pretty good at security, but you should put up your own walls too.

The post It’s a great day to secure your Apple and iCloud accounts appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An iPhone and a Mac computer keyboard illuminated under a pink light.
We hope this lighting is ominous enough to get the point across. felipepelaquim / Unsplash

If you’re an Apple user, you probably have an iCloud account and several devices filled with your personal information. Whenever high-profile data leaks and hacks hit the headlines, you may think that Apple’s known dedication to security will keep you safe, but that’s no reason to get complacent. There’s plenty you can do on your own to ensure it’s extra-hard for people to snatch up your data.

Once you’ve taken some time to enable two-factor authentication, strengthen your passwords, and work through the security tips listed below, you may want to stay in the same headspace and continue with other important accounts. For starters, check out our guides to locking down your Facebook and Google accounts.

Apple security basics

You should be putting up strong barriers at every door into your Apple world. That means a long, unique password on your MacBook, a lengthy PIN on your iPhone, and a long, unique password for your iCloud account. Passwords should contain a mix of lowercase and uppercase letters, plus special characters and numbers, to make them as difficult to crack as possible. (And no, “Passw0rd!” isn’t good enough.) Don’t base your passwords on your address, birthday, or pet’s name, either—a savvy attacker might research this information in order to get past your defenses. Finally, avoid using the same password for both your Mac and iCloud. That way, even if one gets cracked, the other still has some protection.

[Related: All the ways you can customize your iPhone lock screen]

One of your best defenses will be your common sense. Hackers often trick people into revealing their login details, rather than running a sophisticated brute force attack. Be wary of phishing links in emails and on social media, and be suspicious of any that immediately ask you to log in with your Apple ID credentials.

When it comes to Apple device security, Apple is your best ally. Its operating systems (macOS, iOS, and iPadOS) all encrypt data by default. This means nothing can be pulled from your iPhone, iPad, or MacBook without the right password or PIN code.

Enable Apple’s two-factor authentication feature

Apple's Two-factor authentication screen on the web.
Two-factor authentication adds an extra layer of protection to your account. Screenshot: Apple

Apple accounts can be better protected with two-factor authentication (TFA). This feature is available for most major online accounts and means that entering your account will require an extra code beyond your username and password.

In the case of Apple’s two-factor authentication, attempting to log in will trigger a message sent to your phone number or a code that displays on another device associated with your Apple ID. For example, if you’re setting up a new iPhone, you’ll see the code on your existing MacBook.

To turn on two-factor authentication on iOS or iPadOS, open the Settings app and tap your name at the top of the screen. Then choose Password & Security to find the two-factor authentication option. On macOS Ventura or later, click the Apple menu, head to System Settings, and click your name. Then click Sign-In & Security and hit Turn On next to Two-Factor Authentication. Follow the instructions to set everything up.

[Related: 7 sweet new features in macOS Ventura]

If you’re using macOS Monterey or an older version of Apple’s operating system, you’ll find the TFA settings by opening the Apple menu, choosing System Preferences, selecting Apple ID followed by Password & Security, and turning the feature on from that screen.

Once you’ve logged into a device with your Apple ID, password, and TFA code, that device will be marked as trusted, which means you won’t need to log in using TFA again. It’s therefore important that you do have passwords, PIN codes, and other types of protection on your computers and phones to prevent unauthorized access.

Manage Apple security in your web browser

To configure other parts of your security setup, open your Apple ID account page in a web browser. Make sure your registered email addresses and trusted phone numbers are up to date and secure, because you might need them if you ever lose access to your account.

Under the Devices heading (in the menu on the left), you can see the iPhones, iPads, and computers associated with your account. Use this opportunity to remove any devices you no longer use or don’t recognize. It’s a good idea to check this list fairly regularly, just in case your account has been compromised or you’re signed in somewhere you shouldn’t be.

Any web browser on any computer will also let you access the iCloud suite of web apps and services. If you’re on a public computer or a machine you share with others, be sure to sign out after you’ve finished. Some browsers may ask to remember your password. You can allow this on your personal computer, but make sure that something else will prevent a guest from accessing the browser. For example, set up a user account password for getting into the operating system.

When you’re on iCloud.com, you can also sign out of all browsers where you’re currently signed in. To do this, click your Apple ID avatar in the top right corner, hit iCloud Settings, select Sign Out Of All Browsers, and click Sign Out. This way, you’ll ensure no one’s using your iCloud account with any other browser except the one you have open.

Other Apple security tips

The Find My app screen on an iPhone, showing the location of David's iPhone.
Apple’s Find My app can lock and wipe your devices remotely. Screenshot: Apple

The app stores Apple has built into iOS, iPadOS, and macOS do a very good job of keeping you safe from dangerous software and viruses. On your phone or tablet, you shouldn’t have to install anything from outside the iOS App Store. On your computer, however, you may need to venture outside the walls of the macOS App Store every now and again. If you do, read user reviews and web write-ups to double-check the safety of any program you install.

As for your devices’ physical security, you definitely want to hope for the best, but plan for the worst. So take the time now to consider what you’ll do if, despite all your precautions, your iPhone, iPad, or computer are compromised. We recommend turning on the Find My feature on your devices. This will let you locate and remotely wipe your device via the web if it falls into the wrong hands, but if you’ve simply lost your tech inside your own home, you can use Find My to get it to play a sound.

On iOS or iPadOS, tap your name in the settings to find the Find My app, and on macOS Ventura or later navigate through Apple menu > System Settings > Privacy & Security > Location Services > Find My. If you’re using macOS Monterey or earlier, you’ll need Apple menu > System Preferences > Apple ID > iCloud > Find My Mac > Allow.

[Related: How to turn off your location on an iPhone]

Meanwhile, if you’ve gone all-in with your Apple products and got yourself an Apple Watch, you can use the wearable gadget as a secure way to unlock macOS, saving you the trouble of typing out a password each time. To set up the feature on macOS Ventura or later, open the Apple menu, click System Settings, hit Login Password, and choose Use Apple Watch to unlock apps and your Mac. On macOS Monterey or older, work through Apple menu > System Preferences > Security & Privacy > General to find the same Apple Watch unlock setting.

This story has been updated. It was originally published in 2017.

The post It’s a great day to secure your Apple and iCloud accounts appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Save up to $101 on a Celestron x PopSci telescope with this post-eclipse sale at Amazon https://www.popsci.com/gear/celestron-popsci-telescope-eclipse-amazon-deal/ Mon, 16 Oct 2023 15:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=579855
Two Celestron telescopes on a white background
Celestron

The October solar eclipse is over, but there's still a ton of interesting stuff going on in the sky. Save on a new telescope and check it out.

The post Save up to $101 on a Celestron x PopSci telescope with this post-eclipse sale at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Two Celestron telescopes on a white background
Celestron

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

We had a great time checking out the Oct. 14 solar eclipse, but the next one that’s visible here in the U.S. won’t be until April 2024. Lots of interesting things will be happening in the sky between then and now, and you’ll need a good telescope to check them out. Right now, Amazon has substantial discounts on Celestron x PopSci telescopes that were already a solid value. There are three different options currently available depending on your star-gazing needs. Then, when the next eclipse rolls around, you can buy a dedicated solar eclipse filter and get a better look than all those jealous people with their (still pretty cool) pinhole cameras.

This is the biggest and most powerful scope in the Celestron x PopSci lineup, and it’s just over $100 off right now. Its five-inch aperture and high-end coatings provide a clear, low-aberration image of the night sky. More importantly, it’s compatible with the Celestron app, which can help you find cool things going on in the sky above you and then help you locate them with your scope so you don’t have to go blindly hunting around the heavens. That’s especially important with a scope this powerful.

This 100mm refractor provides a very solid field of view for astrophotography. It’s light and easy to move around, and it’s compatible again with Celestron’s app to guide you around the night sky. Plus, the integrated hood helps combat errant light from hitting the front element of the scope and causing image-ruining glare.

This model is meant specifically for beginners, and the price makes it very appealing with this discount. The short tub provides a relatively loose view of celestial objects, so beginners won’t get frustrated trying to find specific areas. Plus, the short tube design keeps it small and light, so this is a great scope to keep as a backup for quick jaunts out into dark sky country without lots of gear.

EDITOR’S NOTE: Popular Science has teamed up with Celestron on a line of products. We do earn a commission on its sales—all of which helps power Popular Science.

The post Save up to $101 on a Celestron x PopSci telescope with this post-eclipse sale at Amazon appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
6 ways you can use Google Chrome offline https://www.popsci.com/chrome-browser-offline/ Sat, 11 Sep 2021 20:02:36 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/chrome-browser-offline/
A tablet with Google Chrome and no internet connection.
A temporary setback. Jonathan Kemper / Unsplash

No internet, no problem.

The post 6 ways you can use Google Chrome offline appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A tablet with Google Chrome and no internet connection.
A temporary setback. Jonathan Kemper / Unsplash

Internet access, whether wired or wireless, has become one of the most precious commodities of our time. But that leaves us singularly unprepared when we lose that access—such as when we travel to the signal-free middle of nowhere or a storm knocks out power to our home router. There are plenty of ways you can avoid being completely cut off from your work and entertainment, though, and using Google Chrome offline is one of them.

The catch, however, is that you’ll have to set up offline access before your internet connection dies. We recommend activating the settings below as you read this article, so you don’t forget and regret it later. When you’re done, consider poking around the settings within your other most-used programs to see what offline features they offer, or download some of the best offline apps. Then, no matter what type of computer you’re on, Chromebook or not, you won’t have to completely give up when those WiFi bars disappear.

Access Gmail offline

If you use Gmail in your browser, you can get into your inbox without a web connection. While you’re still online, simply click the cog icon in the top right, select See all settings, open the Offline tab, and check the box next to Enable offline mail. Doing so will sync recent emails to your computer’s hard drive. Unfortunately, this function can’t make new emails magically appear when your internet is down. But it will let you browse through messages you’ve already cached, and compose new replies that Gmail will automatically send when you get back online.

Keep working

The Google Chrome browser showing Google Drive's offline setting.
Google Drive can work offline if you need to keep messing with your files. Screenshot: Google

Google Drive and the three online apps within it—Docs, Sheets, and Slides—have an offline mode you can activate when there’s no internet available. You’ll need to set it up before you lose your web connection: From the main Google Drive interface, click the cog icon in the top right, followed by Settings, and finally tick the box under Offline.

This will sync your recent documents, spreadsheets, and presentations to the local storage on your hard drive. It will let you create new documents and edit existing ones in your Drive account, although you won’t be able to access big files like videos and music (unless you download them separately first). Offline Chrome will save all your changes to disk, just as they would normally be saved to the web. Once your browser detects an internet connection again, it will sync everything to bring your files back up to date.

Check your schedule

Beyond Gmail and Google Drive, Google has made most of its web apps work offline—including Google Calendar. You can’t create new events when you’re offline, but you can browse your schedule and respond to invitations. Google Calendar will send those responses when you’re back online.

[Related: Supercharge your scheduling with these 5 Google Calendar tips]

To set it up, load the app in your browser, click the cog icon in the top right, followed by Settings. Choose Offline from the menu on the left, then check the box next to Turn on offline calendar. As with the offline modes in Google’s other apps, this synchronizes some of your data to your device, where Chrome can find it even when you’re not connected to the web.

Stay entertained

Google Chrome playing a video file offline.
Chrome can play files you’ve saved to your device. Screenshot: Google

It doesn’t matter whether your favorite music or video streaming service works offline—Chrome can play downloaded files in many popular formats, including MP3 tracks and MP4 movies. So as long as you saved your preferred entertainment options to your device ahead of time, you can rock out or kick back no matter what your internet connection looks like. Just drag a file from your hard drive into an empty Chrome window, and it will start to play.

If you’re looking for a place to start, the platforms you use want to keep you engaged and are more than willing to help. Both Spotify and Netflix, for example, have detailed instructions for how you can access their content without internet access. Once you’re all stocked up, you can enjoy accessing the files via Chrome.

Catch up on your reading

Losing your internet connection gives you a great opportunity to catch up on all that reading you’ve been meaning to get around to. But if all that reading happens to be on the web, you’re stuck. The free Pocket Chrome extension can help. Open an article that you’d like to read in Chrome, and Pocket will let you save it for later perusal, when you have more time to do so.

[Related: How to manage your digital read-it-later list]

Crucially, Pocket comes with an offline mode so you can see those articles without any web access. Most types of articles, except videos, will sync up as soon as you save them. So, if your internet connection goes down, fire up Pocket and to do some reading until you’re back online. The only downside is that you’ll have to wait to share any links of note on social media.

Play games

Freecell Solitaire computer game
While away the minutes before the internet comes back. David Nield

You can even enjoy certain online games while Chrome’s offline. From the physics-based puzzler Cut the Rope to the all-time classic FreeCell Solitaire, you should be able to find something to while away the time until the internet returns. As long as install your favorite games while you still have internet access, you’ll be good to go.

In fact, the Chrome Web Store has a lot of apps that are accessible offline. There used to be a “runs offline” category visible on the list to the left, but you may no longer be able to see it. In that case, follow the link under this text to see all the offline-enabled Chrome extensions. You’ll find utilities, productivity apps, games, and more.

On top of standard apps and games, Chrome has a hidden game that only works while the internet’s down. If you load a page and get the old “There is no internet connection” message with the dinosaur icon, you can tap Space, and then hit Space again to hop the dinosaur over the obstacles. See how far you can get!

This story has been updated. It was originally published in 2017.

The post 6 ways you can use Google Chrome offline appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best stud finders for 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-stud-finders/ Wed, 02 Aug 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=560644
The best stud finders composited
Stan Horaczek

Every good tool box should include a stud finder to save your walls from destructive guessing games.

The post The best stud finders for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best stud finders composited
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Zircon MultiScanner A250c on a plain background Zircon MultiScanner A250c
SEE IT

It’s excellent at finding studs, but also provides other functions to add versatility.

Widest scan area Franklin Sensors ProSensor T13 on a plain background Franklin Sensors ProSensor T13
SEE IT

Speed up your search for studs with help from 13 sensors.

Best budget Craftsman Stud Finder Craftsman Stud Finder
SEE IT

You can regularly find this basic finder for under $10.

A stud finder is the sort of thing that feels totally forgettable until you need one. In practice, they’re like the x-ray vision you might’ve imagined using as a kid, but instead of being made to see through walls and gleam hidden secrets, they pretty much exclusively stick to lumber, along with nails and possibly even live wires. Here, we’ll explore this wall-scanning technology for what it really is and, of course, help you pick out the best stud finders for your next project.

How we chose the best stud finders

You’ll find that even the best stud finders are relatively simple devices. Even in 2023, you shouldn’t expect apps, smart AI, or other technologies you’re used to seeing in almost everything nowadays. You should expect batteries—the kind that need to be physically removed and replaced.

Still, even in this world of relatively tame older products, the best stud finders each find a niche to fill or have bonuses that just make sense for you. This could be because the batteries they use also go well with some of your older tools, they get the wide range you want, or they throw in something extra, like a leveler. This is definitely a category where you should avoid overthinking. As a result, we’ve focused on quality products—with a large (and happy) customer base—that fill their niches well and come out at a reasonable price.

The best stud finders: Reviews & Recommendations

The best stud finders for you will typically fill one or more of a few distinct types. Widely used—and customer-approved—products tested repeatedly in practical environments with high margins of success are obvious inclusions. Premium “kitchen sink” varieties that throw in a lot of extras (such as levelers), have tons of sensors over a wide range, and use superior UIs can be attractive options as well. Finally, niche picks and those covering a wide variety of battery requirement options were considered throughout to give everyone a high chance of finding a viable product that meets their standards. Finding the right value for the output helps tremendously as well. Taking all those factors into consideration, these are the stud finders we suggest you put in your tool box.

Best overall: Zircon MultiScanner A250c

Zircon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: When your mind thinks “modern stud finder,” this is probably what you’re picturing—and it works well, too.

Specs

  • Sensors: 1 Stud/metal/wire, Center
  • Battery requirements: 1 x 9-volt
  • Interface: Graphical UI

Pros

  • Incorporates tech to correct user errors
  • “All-in-one” tool
  • Notch for marking at top

Cons

  • More expensive than most
  • No battery included

When you think of a single-sensor stud finder, you’re probably thinking of something in a form factor very similar to that of the Zircon Multiscanner A250c. It’s got a handle and head not too unlike what you’re used to seeing, as well as that orange-ish yellow that just screams stud finder or similar tool.

The Zircon Multiscanner A250c stands out from the crowd of “typical stud finders,” however, for its multiple scanning modes and special features. In other words, it is way more of an all-rounder than you’re expecting.

It has multiple scanning modes, including the ability to look for studs through varying depths of drywall, and a metal mode capable of searching through more dense materials.

The ACT (Auto Correcting Technology) eliminates errors from common user “problems.” For example, if you start directly over a stud that can cause issues with other stud finders, you’ll be impressed with the Zircon Multiscanner A250c. And it makes sense because why should we be punished for starting out in the right spot?

Ultimately, the Zircon Multiscanner A250c is going to be the best stud finder for just about any situation, but it is more expensive than any of the others on this list. It is also a single-sensor finder, which means it lacks the versatility others offer. So, if you’re looking for something a bit more singular in purpose or with more sensors, you can find that for cheaper elsewhere on the list. However, if you want the best and are willing to pay (just a bit) extra for it, go ahead and grab the Zircon Multiscanner A250c.

Widest scan area: Franklin Sensors ProSensor T13

Franklin Sensors

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This offering from Franklin is one of the widest stud finders available.

Specs

  • Sensors: 13 edge/center
  • Battery requirements: 2 x AA (disposable only)
  • Interface: Multi-LED lights

Pros

  • Wide 9.7-inch span
  • 1.7-inch scan depth
  • Bonus features include bubble leveler, ruler, and pencil caddy
  • Rare AA battery user

Cons

  • Doesn’t work with rechargeable AA batteries

To get the job done quickly, you need something with some width. That’s the thinking, at least, when it comes to the Franklin Sensor ProSensor T13, which is over 9.7 inches wide and sports a 13-sensor array.

The Franklin Sensor ProSensor T13 uses one-button sensing, with the machine picking the best scanning mode automatically. Just move it over the wall, and the sensors’ associated LED lights will shine, giving you a full mental picture of the target stud. It also has a built-in ruler, bubble leveler, and a spot for your pencil so you have nearly everything you need when it is time to get started working.

It is nice to see a stud finder that uses AA batteries, regarded as the most popular battery style. However, there is an unusual quirk with the AA batteries that you can use with the Franklin Sensor ProSensor T13. They must be of the disposable type; rechargeables may still work, but they will likely die very quickly.

Best for plaster walls: Zircon MetalliScanner m40

Zircon

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: It’s like a metal detector for your walls, even the dense ones.

Specs

  • Sensors: 1 metal detector
  • Battery requirements: 1 x 9-volt
  • Interface: LED lights

Pros

  • Locates metals through plaster and plath
  • Works with cement, concrete, stucco, and drywall as well
  • Ignores density, looks for metal

Cons

  • Detects metal, not wood.

The Zircon MetalliScanner m40 handles an increasingly rare situation—dense plaster walls—better than its competition. Plaster walls, which fell out of usage after the 1940s, present a unique situation for other stud finder sensors as these walls are intensely dense all the way through. That makes studs hard to locate with typical methods.

The Zircon MetalliScanner m40 detects the metal nails or screws in the studs themselves to help you locate them without relying on density measurements.

It also has this metal sensing through other materials as well, making it the best for ceramic tile as well. However, this still stands as the best stud finder for old homes, not newer ones, due to the way it works. Of course, if you have an unusual material your home is made from, it is always worth a try.

Best magnetic: The StudBuddy Magnetic Stud Finder

StudBuddy

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This classic magnetic stud finder has an easy grip and hangs to the wall.

Specs

  • Sensors: N/A
  • Battery requirements: N/A
  • Interface: N/A

Pros

  • Comfortable grip
  • No batteries needed
  • Cheap and always functional

Cons

  • In some ways, just a magnet

Despite its simplicity, the StudBuddy is one of the higher-rated stud finders you’ll find in stores. In so many words, it is “just” a (neodymium) magnet. In more flattering terms, it uses “old school tech” and sensibilities of the highest order. The StudBuddy uses magnetism to locate nails already in studs in your wall. It will even stick to the wall in the spot near a detected nail, showing you the line where you should pull out one of your favorite cordless drills and get busy. If one nail went in that vertical space, the thinking goes, so should yours.

It goes without saying that the StudBuddy is not the perfect machine. There are reasons we’ve updated the technology from magnets to sensors. However, it remains one of the best stud finders for its charms: the elegantly designed handle, its ability to stick to the wall, and its no-battery forever-ready design. It can go anywhere and might’ve earned itself a place in your bag for that reason alone.

Please note that there is also a StudBuddy Plus, which includes rubber grips, two bubble levelers, and inch and centimeter rulers along its small perimeter. At nearly twice the price of the original StudBuddy (which is nearly always ~25% off), it is harder to recommend, though. So, unless you’re trying to build the ultimate minimalist kit of battery-free tools, the ‘Plus’ is a pass while the original StudBuddy stays in.

Best budget: Craftsman Stud Finder

Craftsman

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This is a relatively straightforward stud finder without the frills (or the price) of premium-grade finders.

Specs

  • Sensors: 1 edge detection
  • Battery Requirements: 1 x 9-volt
  • Interface: LED light

Pros

  • Works simply
  • Great value for the money
  • Once you get the hang of it, easy to execute

Cons

  • Low documentation
  • No battery included

The Craftsman Stud Finder is a low-cost but often misunderstood stud finder of the edge detection variety. There are a couple of tips and tricks for it, which we’ll discuss shortly, but once you get the hang of it, you’ll probably be happy with it. If you don’t need something intensely feature-rich, this could be the best stud finder for you.

One issue with the Craftsman Stud Finder is that it doesn’t necessarily present itself in the most straightforward manner. There isn’t a ton of hand-holding. For instance, the most upsetting find for most people is that they get the Craftsman only to find out they needed to pick up the not included, but very necessary, 9-volt battery to operate it.

And operating it, too, can be an issue due to low levels of instruction. However, once you know its secrets, you can use it easily. The Craftsman Stud Finder detects edges only and doesn’t work well when started on a stud. Move the Craftsman Stud Finder from the left of the stud you want to the right. It’ll light up when the left side of the stud is found. Then, do the same from the right side, moving to the left.

What to consider before buying the best stud finders

Choosing a stud finder should be a relatively straightforward affair, but there are still a few things that you need to take into consideration before choosing one. The number of sensors and width of your stud finders’ effective area will affect the convenience of use, as will the stud finder’s interface. Lastly, because even the best stud finders are relatively simple, they can come filled with extra features that are worth exploring.

Number of sensors

One of the quickest ways to add speed to your stud finding is to increase the number of sensors. One common form factor that works this way is the “array of sensors” style. It’s like having extra stud finders tied together, all working at once. Additionally, as each one scans at the same time, these multi-sensor stud finders are the best stud finders for real-time visualization of the stud. As they usually spread wider than the stud, you can “see” the full stud all at one time.

Style of sensor

Another factor to consider here is the styles of sensors on the stud finder. Edge finders will help you find the edge of the stud, while center finders will help you find the stud itself.

Typically, you’ll just see sensors capable of detecting changes in density just beyond the width of a typical piece of drywall. It won’t necessarily matter what that change in density is. However, some sensors can detect more. This includes stud finders that can distinguish iron pipes, detect through ceramic tile and other materials, and even find livewires.

Remember that stud finders can be wrong, including with livewire detection. Don’t trust your life with one. If there is even the slightest chance of a livewire being in the area you’re driving nails into, take extreme caution. Instead, use these only to help you find the best place to knock into and ensure the power is out before proceeding. When in doubt, contact a real electrician.

Interface

As has already been stated, stud finders are not incredibly complex. As a result, there are only two types of interfaces you’ll see, neither of which are incredibly modern in appearance.

The first style is a simple detection and light system. When a sensor gets a reading, a light brightens. This style is incredibly simple and quite common for stud finders with an array of sensors. This contrasts highly with the second common style, which is a simple LED graphical UI. Think more TI-80 calculator (or worse) than any UI you’ve seen in recent years, but still serviceable enough to give you any required information.

In actuality, neither system is better than the other, and the best stud finders will include those of both interface types. Sometimes, even for a simple single-sensor stud finder, a simple light is best as there is such a thing as overcomplicating the simple.

Additional features

To stand out, manufacturers will add features of varying degrees of usefulness. These bonus features can vary from being neigh-on essential (at least, for you) to being expensive price boosters. If you already have one of the best home tool kits, you will likely find yourself not needing too many extras on your stud finder.

The most common appendage to a stud finder, a leveler—a tool that finds a gravitationally level surface—is a logical choice. Much like putting a bottle opener on a corkscrew, it makes sense to plop a leveler on a stud finder.

This is especially true when it is the serviceable but simple water-and-bubble type leveler. They’re cheap and an obvious throw-in. When offered a stud finder with a more advanced laser leveler, be wary of falling for two mediocre products as one when you just wanted one good product. If you choose to go the route of getting a stud finder with a laser leveler, ensure that both are quality or get them separately.

Other stud finder bonuses include tape measures, lights, pencil caddies, and other easily attachable gadgets.

FAQs

Q: How much does a stud finder cost?

A stud finder costs anywhere from $10 to over $50, depending on functionality. A simple magnetic stud finder should only be about $10, while a successful multi-tool with multiple scan modes can easily go over $50. Expect to pay about $30 for a decent stud finder.

Q: Can you trust a stud finder?

You can trust a stud finder for the most part, but you shouldn’t do so blindly. As basic stud finders detect changes in frequency—and the most typical kinds are really only rated to do so through drywall—anything behind the wall can trigger one. More advanced stud finders can detect different substances and even live wires. Still, this doesn’t mean a stud finder will be 100% accurate. Few things are! Whenever dealing with electricity, ensure that all power in the area is out before proceeding.

Q: What kind of battery does a stud finder take?

A stud finder typically takes a 9-volt battery, AAA, or even a AA battery. Typically, stud finders (even the best stud finders) do not have the built-in batteries we’re becoming increasingly used to in our other machines (but you can still buy exchangeable rechargable ones).

Final thoughts on the best stud finders

Getting a good stud finder should not be difficult. Generally, the best stud finders come in very few distinct form factors. This means that picking one that suits your needs, has quality hardware, and a consistent customer experience, should be simple if your research is done correctly. As a result, any of the above stud finders could be the best stud finder for you.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best stud finders for 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best furnace filters of 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-furnace-filters/ Thu, 02 Feb 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=509032
The best furnace filters will help keep your home warm and cut down on dander.

Keep your furnace humming and improve the air quality in your home with these filters.

The post The best furnace filters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best furnace filters will help keep your home warm and cut down on dander.

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall Nordic Pure makes the best furnace filters overall. Nordic Pure MERV 12 Pleated AC Furnace Filter
SEE IT

Filter airborne pollutants with this efficient MERV 12 furnace filter.

Best for allergies The AirX Allergy Filters are the best furnace filters for allergies. AIRx ALLERGY MERV 11 Pleated Air Filter
SEE IT

Trap dust, dirt, pollen, pet dander, and other allergens with this pleated fiberglass furnace filter.

Best budget The Aerostar Pleated Air Filter is the best furnace filter at a budget-friendly price. Aerostar MERV 11 Pleated Air Filter
SEE IT

Save with this affordable six-pack of furnace filters that use electrostatic material to attract particles and improve air filtration efficiency.

Your HVAC system is responsible for heating and cooling your home, but it can’t function properly without a working furnace with a fresh furnace filter to heat the air and blow it cleanly through the ventilation system. A furnace filter is necessary to help prevent the furnace from overheating and keep it efficiently trapping airborne particles, allergens, and pollutants. Filters can be either disposable or reusable (if you don’t mind washing them when they become clogged), and they range in size and thickness. Different furnaces require specific filters, so the furnace filter for your home depends on the make and model of the furnace. Check the user’s manual and inspect the old furnace filter to find the appropriate size and thickness before taking a look at this list of top products. Then, keep reading to understand better the various types, sizes, thickness, and MERV (Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value) ratings of the best furnace filters.

How we chose the best furnace filters

Many homes have a furnace that needs regular maintenance, including replacing the furnace filter. I applied first-hand experience to selecting these top products from over 40 options. I conducted extensive research, including carefully considering the MERV rating, size, thickness, furnace filter type, and any extra features the filter had to offer.

The best furnace filters: Reviews & Recommendations

I preferred filters with high-efficiency ratings for these selections, though this was balanced against the overall price and value of each furnace filter product. The MERV rating of each furnace filter was a key factor, given that this is a direct measure of the product’s filtration capabilities. I also weighed specialized uses, such as pet dander control or allergen filtration, when deciding between two or more similar products.

Best overall: Nordic Pure MERV 12 Pleated AC Furnace Filter

Nordic Pure

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a MERV rating of 12, this Nordic Pure furnace filter is one of the most effective filtration options for a residential HVAC system.

Specs

  • Type: Electrostatic furnace filter
  • Size: 16 x 16 x 1 inches
  • MERV Rating: 12

Pros

  • High efficiency
  • Six filters in one pack
  • Ideal for trapping allergens
  • Affordable

Cons

  • Must replace every one to three months

This six-pack of Nordic Pure 16x16x1 MERV 12 Pleated AC & Furnace Filters is an excellent option to keep the home HVAC system operating efficiently for up to a year and a half. Simply replace the old furnace filter a minimum of once every three months to keep the air clean and avoid putting unnecessary stress on the heating and cooling system. The electrostatic construction is specifically designed to attract and trap airborne particles, making it easier for this filter to block the movement of allergens through the furnace. 

This filter has nominal dimensions of 16 by 16 by 1 inches, but the actual dimensions are 15.75 by 15.75 by 0.75, so users need to measure the old furnace filter to ensure a proper fit. As long as the furnace filter is compatible with the furnace, users can enjoy the high efficiency of this MERV 12 product. However, it should be noted that the filter may need to be changed monthly in homes with many pets, as it will become clogged faster.

Best for allergies: AIRx Allergy MERV 11 Pleated Air Filters

AirX

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Lint, dust, dust mites, pollen, mold, smog, pet dander, pet smells, and even bacteria can be trapped by this MERV 11 pleated fiberglass furnace filter.

Specs

  • Type: Pleated fiberglass furnace filter
  • Size: 20 by 20 by 1 inches
  • MERV Rating: 11

Pros

  • High-efficiency MERV rating of 11
  • Designed for trapping allergens such as pollen, dander, and other debris
  • Affordable value pack

Cons

  • Filter must be changed every two to three months
  • Not effective for filtering smoke or viruses

The AIRx Allergy 20x20x1 MERV 11 Pleated Air Filter is suitable for users with allergies or who may have difficulty breathing in musty locations. This is a six-pack of filters with an impressive MERV rating of 11, ensuring they can trap a wide range of airborne pollutants. Specifically, these pleated fiberglass filters are made to eliminate allergens from the home, so they can trap lint, dust, dust mites, pollen, mold, smog, pet dander, pet smells, and bacteria. However, it should be noted that these filters cannot trap smoke particles or viruses. 

Each furnace filter has nominal dimensions of 20 by 20 by 1 inches, and actual dimensions of 19.5 by 19.5 by 0.75 inches. Changing the filters once every two to three months is important because they tend to get clogged quickly.

Best odor neutralizer: Flanders NaturalAire Odor Eliminator Filter

Flanders

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: This odor-neutralizing furnace filter takes care of pet odors and the lingering scent of smoke.

Specs

  • Type: Pleated fiberglass furnace filter
  • Size: 20 x 20 x 1 inches
  • MERV Rating: 8

Pros

  • Baking soda-infused to eliminate odors
  • 12-pack lasts a long time
  • Suitable for trapping dust, pollen, dirt, and mold spores

Cons

  • Modest MERV rating of 8

Invest in this affordable 12-pack of filters to ensure your furnace and HVAC system remain in good working order for up to 12 months. Replace the old furnace filter every two to three months to keep the air clean and odor-free. These filters physically trap dust, pollen, dirt, mold spores, and other airborne contaminants. But their real benefit is that they can neutralize offensive odors as they pass through the HVAC system using the odor-absorption quality of baking soda. 

The filters measure 20 by 20 by 1 inches, but have a MERV rating of only 8. While this isn’t the lowest MERV rating available, the efficiency of these filters is modest.

Best smart: Filtrete Smart Air Filter

Filtrete

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Filtrete app connects wirelessly to a chip installed on the furnace filter to track airflow, usage, and filter life.

Specs

  • Type: Electrostatic furnace filter
  • Size: 12 x 12 x 1 inches
  • MERV Rating: 12

Pros

  • Convenient Bluetooth connection
  • High efficiency
  • Traps allergens, bacteria, and even viruses

Cons

  • High price
  • New reporting technology

The Filtrete 12x12x1 Smart Air Filter is designed with a chip that measures airflow, filter usage, and filter life. The chip connects wirelessly via Bluetooth to the Filtrete app, allowing users to check the status of the furnace filter at any time instead of trying to estimate when the filter should be changed. The filter comes more expensive than standard furnace filters and uses relatively new technology. It should be noted that some bugs may still need to be worked out as the reporting technology is perfected.

The pack includes two electrostatic filters with nominal dimensions of 12 by 12 by 1 inches, and actual dimensions of 11.84 by 11.84 by 1 inches. These filters have a MERV rating of 12 and can trap various airborne pollutants, including dust, pollen, dander, mold spores, smoke, bacteria, viruses, and other debris.

Best budget: Aerostar MERV 11 Pleated Air Filter

Aerostar

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Users can update their existing filter with a high-efficiency product from Aerostar that has an impressive MERV rating of 11.

Specs

  • Type: Electrostatic furnace filter
  • Size: 16 x 25 x 1 inches
  • MERV Rating: 11

Pros

  • High efficiency
  • Suitable for trapping a wide range of airborne pollutants
  • Inexpensive six-pack

Cons

  • Must be replaced every two to three months

If you have pets or are just looking for an affordable option, this six-pack of Aerostar 16x25x1 MERV 11 Pleated Air Filters is a great choice. Each filter boasts a MERV rating of 11, which is impressive for a product made to be used in residential furnaces. The filters have nominal dimensions of 16 by 25 by 1 inches, and actual dimensions of 15.75 by 24.75 by 0.75 inches. Unfortunately, the thinness of these filters means they need to be replaced about once every two to three months. The synthetic electrostatic fiber attracts and traps microscopic particles such as lint, dust mites, pollen, smoke, dust, and pet dander, reducing exposure to airborne irritants, pollutants, and allergens. These filters are also helpful in preventing mold by trapping spores before they can be blown through the HVAC system and into the home.

Things to consider when buying a furnace filter

A furnace filter, along with an HVAC filter, is a necessary part of the furnace that must be replaced regularly to prevent premature wear and tear on the HVAC system. However, before choosing a furnace filter, it’s important to understand the various filter types, sizes, and MERV ratings to find the best furnace filter for your home.

Furnace filter types

Finding the right furnace filter can save you money, improve your home’s air quality, and reduce wear and tear on your HVAC system, so it’s necessary to have an understanding of the various filter types, which include fiberglass, polyester, cotton, electrostatic, and HEPA.

Fiberglass furnace filters are the most basic option available, usually with a 1-inch thickness and a low MERV rating of just 2 to 3. While these filters are low in cost, they have little effect on air filtration and must be changed frequently. However, pleated fiberglass filters have a significantly increased efficiency that can reach a MERV rating between 8 and 11.

Polyester furnace filters come in flat and pleated versions with an average MERV rating of 6 to 8. They are better than fiberglass and relatively inexpensive. Also, the thickness of polyester filters can range from one to five inches, allowing them to be used for a longer period before needing to be replaced.

Cotton furnace filters can also be called high-efficiency pleated filters, and they are usually four to five inches thick. These filters have a high MERV rating between 14 and 16 and are even suitable for hospital use, though cotton filters cost more than either fiberglass or polyester.

Electrostatic furnace filters are also typically made with cotton, though they can sometimes be made with paper fibers. What sets these filters apart is that the material is self-charging, which automatically generates a static charge to attract small particles and improve filtration. They tend to be thinner than high-efficiency cotton filters and have a MERV rating of about 10.

HEPA (high-efficiency particulate air) furnace filters are the most impressive options, with MERV ratings usually falling between 16 and 20. They can trap up to 99.7% of airborne pollutants, but these filters are not commonly made for residential furnaces, so they may be hard to find in the correct size.

Also, keep in mind that there are disposable filters and reusable filters. So, if you don’t mind scrubbing the filter every few months, investing in a reusable filter may be more cost-effective.

Size and thickness

The size of the furnace filter is a key measurement you need to know before finding a replacement filter. Keep in mind that filters come in a wide range of sizes, so check the size of your current furnace filter so that you know exactly what size you need. Also, a filter’s actual dimensions may differ from its nominal dimensions, so be sure to carefully confirm both your existing furnace filter’s measurements and those of any replacement filter.

The thickness of the filter is another important measurement. In general, the thicker the filter the less often it will need to be changed; however, thicker filters can also be more difficult to push air through and can cause overheating if the HVAC system is not meant to work with them. This is why you need to consult the user’s manual to see whether thicker filters can be used in your system without negatively impacting the functionality.

MERV rating

To better understand the capabilities of an individual furnace filter, check the MERV rating. MERV stands for Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value and refers to the ability of the filter to trap airborne particles and pollutants. The MERV scale ranges from low-efficiency fiberglass filters with MERV ratings between 1 and 3 to high-efficiency HEPA filters with MERV ratings ranging from 16 to 20.

The typical MERV rating for a residential furnace filter falls between 6 and 12. It should be noted that the more efficient the filter, the more often it should be changed, as high-efficiency filters tend to clog faster than less efficient products.

FAQs

Q: How often should furnace filters be changed?

It’s important to replace the furnace filter regularly to prevent problems with the HVAC system. On average, filters should be replaced every 3 to 12 months, depending on the thickness of the filter. A one- to two-inch thick filter should be replaced about once every 3 months; those three- to four-inches thick should be replaced once every 6 to 9 months; and filters with a thickness of five to six inches should be replaced once every 9 to 12 months.

Q: What happens if you don’t change your furnace filter?

Furnace filters are an important part of the HVAC system that help to trap dust, dirt, hair, allergens, and other debris. However, when the furnace filter becomes partially or fully clogged with debris, it limits the flow of air, causing the furnace to operate for a longer period to increase or decrease the temperature in the home. This increased operation strains the system and can cause the furnace to overheat and wear out quickly, so it’s necessary to change the furnace filter regularly.

Q: Can a dirty furnace filter make you sick?

The purpose of a furnace filter is to trap airborne pollutants such as dust, dirt, hair, and other debris. If the filter becomes clogged, its ability to do so is severely limited, leading to a potential increase of allergens in the air. A clogged filter can also contribute to mold growth within the system. While a dirty filter does not directly affect your health, the unfiltered pollutants, allergens, and mold can cause your body to react negatively and may lead to illness.

Final thoughts on the best furnace filters

A furnace filter may not be top of mind, but keeping yours in good working condition will improve the air you breathe daily. Keep the air in your home fresh and allergen-free with the Nordic Pure MERV 12 Pleated AC Furnace Filter, our pick for the best overall furnace filter. Pet owners may prefer our budget pick, the Aerostar MERV 11 Pleated Air Filter, which is specifically made to trap pet dander and other allergens.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best furnace filters of 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
One quick way to automatically save space on your phone https://www.popsci.com/diy/offload-unused-apps/ Sat, 14 Oct 2023 15:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=579563
A person holding an iPhone with a bunch of apps on the home screen. A cup of coffee is behind their hand on a white table.
If you don't use some of those apps, you should offload them to save space. Yura Fresh / Unsplash

Your phone can automatically tidy up apps that are gathering digital dust.

The post One quick way to automatically save space on your phone appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A person holding an iPhone with a bunch of apps on the home screen. A cup of coffee is behind their hand on a white table.
If you don't use some of those apps, you should offload them to save space. Yura Fresh / Unsplash

How many of the apps on your phone are you actually using on a regular basis? It’s not uncommon to have a bunch of apps you installed and eventually forgot about, each of them taking up precious space on your device and making it more difficult to find the tools you actually want to use.

Apple and Google know about their users’ struggles with unused apps, and they’ve built features into iOS and Android to try and handle it. You should know how your phone’s operating system handles forgotten apps behind the scenes, how these features benefit you, and how you can disable them if you want to.

How to offload unused apps on iOS

The iOS Settings app, showing the iPhone Storage screen and the option to offload unused apps.
You can enable and disable automatic app offloading from the iPhone’s Settings app. Screenshot: Apple

Apple’s iPhones have a feature called Offload Unused Apps that can help you with your app-hoarding problem, and it’s been around since iOS 11 launched in 2017. It’s sort of a middle ground between having an app installed and uninstalled: The bulk of the app is gone, but data and documents relating to it—like your settings and any files you’ve created in it—remain on your phone. The app icon will also stay on your home screen, with a small arrow next to its name, and you can fully reinstall it by tapping this icon.

This feature is off by default, but you can enable it by opening the Settings app and selecting General, iPhone Storage, and Enable next to the Offload Unused Apps heading. It will then run automatically, so you might notice apps you haven’t opened in a while being offloaded in the background without any input from you. You can follow the same steps to turn the feature off.

[Related: All the ways iOS lets you edit your lock screen]

On the iPhone storage screen, you’ll see how much space you can free up by offloading apps, but Apple doesn’t offer a whole lot of detail about how this works—how long an app has to remain unused for to qualify, for example, or whether your iPhone starts offloading apps once you reach a threshold of remaining storage. You’ll have to try it to see if you like it, but remember that you can easily restore offloaded apps if it isn’t for you.

If you don’t want iOS to automatically offload apps, you can do so manually and individually whenever you want. From the same iPhone Storage screen in Settings, scroll down to the app you want to offload and tap on it. Then choose Offload App on the next screen to partially remove it from your phone. The same screen will let you reinstall the app if and when you need to, or delete it entirely.

Offloading unused apps on Android

The Android settings screen, showing options for automatically archiving apps when they've been unused for a while.
Android’s tool for offloading unused apps is fairly new. Screenshot: Google

Android’s built-in feature for managing unused apps is called Auto Archive. It’s still relatively new, and it works a lot like the offloading iOS does: Auto Archive will free up to nearly 60 percent of an app’s storage space, without removing the app itself or your data from the device, Google says. After being archived, the app will still be there, but a lot of its data and files will have been removed until you need it.

Auto Archive isn’t enabled by default, but Android will prompt you to turn the feature on if you try to install an app and there’s not enough room left on your phone. If this happens, tap Turn on to enable Auto Archive and install the app, or No thanks if you want to try to clear some space manually.

[Related: 9 hidden Android features you’re missing out on]

You can also enable Auto Archive from the Play Store app on your phone: Tap your Google account avatar (top right), then choose Settings and General to find the Automatically archive apps toggle switch. Even when this is on, the process only kicks in when your device starts to run low on available storage.

Google isn’t specific about which apps it archives first, but “infrequently used apps” are apparently first in line. There’s no option to manually archive individual apps, as there is on iOS, but you can wipe all the data stored by an app. To do so, open Settings and head to Apps, tap on an app, choose Storage and cache, and hit Clear storage. Depending on the app, the data you remove could include messages, emails, or playlists that have been synced to your phone.

The post One quick way to automatically save space on your phone appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Brother sewing machines in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-brother-sewing-machines/ Thu, 16 Jun 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=449198
The best Brother sewing machines
Stan Horaczek

The best equipment yields the best results, and Brother sewing machines are well-known in the world of sewing, quilting, and crafting for their quality and innovative features.

The post The best Brother sewing machines in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
The best Brother sewing machines
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best Overall Brother XM2701 Sewing Machine is the best overall. Brother XM2701 Sewing Machine
SEE IT

This model is a solid, mechanical sewing machine that offers automated functioning for multiple sewing purposes.

Best Budget Brother LX3817 Sewing Machine is the best for the budget. Brother LX3817 Sewing Machine
SEE IT

Here’s a mechanical model that won’t stress the wallet while it offers versatile functioning and ease of use.

Best Computerized Brother XR9550 Sewing and Quilting Machine is the best computerized. Brother XR9550 Sewing and Quilting Machine
SEE IT

A computerized machine with 165 built-in stitch options along with push-button stitch selection and automated functions.

A great Brother sewing machine meets users’ needs and provides years of dependable service. Throughout its 115-year history, Brother Industries has developed into a global leader in sewing machine design, innovation, and manufacturing. Currently, the company offers one of the most advanced line-ups of innovative machinery for home-sewing pursuits. Its models include reliable sewing machines for basic projects and state-of-the-art, computerized models designed for advanced embroidery, quilting, and crafting. Consumers rely on the best Brother sewing machines to provide quality, value, and features for both utilitarian and creative purposes. Here are our picks of the best Brother sewing machines in the company’s impressive line-up.

How we chose the best Brother sewing machines

We drew on personal experience, peer suggestions, and public opinion in selecting six Brother sewing machines for our recommendations. We then narrowed it down to 11 different models and accessed the in-depth product details and specifications available on the Brother-USA company website. Then, we selected Brother products that are easily available and read the product descriptions, user impressions, and FAQs on retailer sites. Knowing that various readers bring an array of needs, preferences, and monetary resources to the search, we tried to assemble a diverse assortment of Brother sewing machines for our list.

We considered both computerized and mechanical sewing machines. Although the computerized models exhibit advanced technological features, many users prefer simple operating procedures and easy maintenance of mechanical machines. Additionally, we looked for both computerized and mechanical models that provide automated processes such as needle threading and buttonhole making, as these features make sewing easier and more pleasurable.

The best Brother sewing machines: Reviews & Recommendations

Brother Industries Ltd. (the company that manufactures Brother sewing machines) traces its history back more than 100 years. In 1908, Kanekichi Yasui founded the Yasui Sewing Machine Company, working at his home in Nagoya, Japan. He repaired industrial sewing machines and manufactured machine parts for local use. When Yasui’s sons inherited his company, they changed the name to Yasui Brothers’ Sewing Machine Company, and the company title was eventually shortened to Brother.

With such a long history, Brother has engineered a sewing machine to suit every user and use case. So, to narrow them down, we searched for Brother sewing machines to meet the needs of beginning sewers, those who engage in basic sewing projects, and those with more advanced skills and experience in quilting, crafting, and fashion design. We endeavored to present Brother machines that meet the requirements of these various types of sewists. 

Best overall: Brother XM2701 Sewing Machine

Brother

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Brother XM2701 sewing machine offers versatility as it provides automated features and numerous built-in stitches for advanced sewists, along with ease of operation for beginners. 

Specs

  • Weight: 12.6 pounds
  • Product dimensions: 12.1 x 5.9 x 15.3 inches
  • Number of built-in stitches: 27

Pros

  • Automatic buttonhole function
  • Automatic needle threader
  • Both decorative and straight built-in stitches
  • 6 interchangeable feet included

Cons  

  • Not computerized

The Brother XM2701 sewing machine is easy to operate, making it a viable choice for beginners. On the other hand, it boasts a wide array of stitch options and automated features that appeal to experienced sewing enthusiasts. Stitch options include multiple decorative and quilting stitches along with basic, straight stitches for seams and basting. With 27 built-in stitches and 63 stitch functions, users can create crafts, fashions, home decor items, and quilts. 

Although not a computerized machine, the XM2701 offers several automated features to make sewing projects go more smoothly and quickly. For example, the automatic needle threader eliminates the frustration and eye strain of threading the needle by hand. An automatic, 1-step buttonhole function saves time and ensures consistent, professional-looking results. Additionally, the task of winding the bobbin is an automatic process.

Several convenient features make the XM2701 a popular and versatile sewing machine. The jam-resistant, drop-in bobbin is located on the top of the machine to speed up the sewing process. An LED light brightly lights the work area. The free arm feature also makes it easy to manipulate the fabric when sewing cuffs, sleeves, and pants. 

The XM2701 model includes six interchangeable feet to accomplish multiple sewing tasks: Buttonhole foot; Zipper foot; Zigzag foot; Narrow hemmer; Blind stitch; and Button-sewing foot.

Best computerized: Brother XR9550 Sewing and Quilting Machine

Brother

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With computerized, push-button stitch selection and automatic functioning, the Brother XR9550 sewing machine offers advanced features for quilters, crafters, and hobbyists, as well as sewing artists. 

Specs

  • Weight: 10.14 pounds
  • Product dimensions: 20 x 13.5 x 17.9 inches 
  • Number of built-in stitches: 165

Pros

  • Extra-wide sewing surface for large projects
  • Push-button stitch selection, including decorative stitches and alphanumeric fonts
  • Automatic needle threader
  • Protective hard case included

Cons

  • Not the best choice for beginners

For the avid sewist who is ready to take their craft to a more sophisticated level, the Brother XR 9550 computerized sewing machine provides numerous features to spark the imagination and facilitate creative success. The machine offers 165 built-in stitches. These include utilitarian and decorative stitches along with heirloom stitches. Choose from among eight different buttonhole styles, and the machine will automatically sew a tailored buttonhole around any button. For monogramming and personalizing projects, a selection of 55 alphanumeric stitches facilitates automatically sewing letters, numbers, and symbols onto fabrics. 

Numerous features of this machine provide ease of operation, taking the stress and frustration out of sewing. The built-in stitches are clearly marked on the front of the machine. Simply push a button for the computerized stitch-selection function, and a backlit LCD display shows the appropriate choice. Additionally, this machine includes an automatic needle threader and a jam-resistant, top drop-in bobbin.

Quilters appreciate the drop-feed feature that facilitates free-sewing for quilting. The work surface is illuminated with a bright LED light, and the extra-wide table allows quilters to handle bulky fabrics and large projects. Alternatively, sewists can use the free arm to sew sleeves, cuffs, and trouser legs.

The XR9550 includes seven interchangeable sewing feet along with accessories: Zigzag foot; Buttonhole foot; Button-sewing foot; Overcasting foot; Blind stitch foot; Monogramming foot; Quilting foot; Protective, hard cover; and an Instructional DVD.

Best for embroidery: Brother SE1900 Sewing and Embroidery Machine

Brother

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Sewists can achieve artist-quality results in creative DIY projects by choosing from 138 built-in embroidery designs in the Brother SE1900 sewing and embroidery machine.

Specs

  • Weight: 22.1 pounds
  • Product dimensions: 23.19 x 11.54 x 13.43 inches 
  • Number of built-in stitches: 138 embroidery designs + 240 built-in stitches

Pros

  • Large number of built-in embroidery designs and stitches
  • Built-in memory for imported embroidery designs
  • Built-in memory for personal, custom-designed stitches
  • LCD touchscreen display

Cons

  • Not the best choice for beginners

Take your sewing and crafting projects to the artist level with the Brother SE1900 computerized sewing and embroidery machine. Select from among 138 built-in embroidery designs and see them displayed on the large-size, full-color, LCD touchscreen. Alternatively, users can import new designs and save them to the machine. Additionally, the machine can combine designs and store them in its memory. Measuring 5 inches by 7 inches, the embroidery field provides ample versatility for creative sewists. A hoop is included to facilitate larger embroidery designs, so users are limited only by their imaginations.  

The 240 built-in stitches inspire customizing many crafting, quilting, and garment-making activities. Among the stitch options, the SE1900 offers 11 built-in fonts for monogramming and personalizing the original projects. Additionally, 10 styles of buttonhole stitches facilitate automatic sewing of precisely sized buttonholes.

Several convenient features of this computerized machine take the effort and frustration out of sewing pursuits. The advanced, automatic needle threader eliminates threading the needle by hand. Instead, the thread inserts precisely through the eye of the needle with a simple press of a lever. The jam-resistant feature facilitates a consistent thread feed from the top drop-in bobbin, preventing the work delays that come with tangled threads. With a maximum speed of 850 stitches per minute and labor-saving features for smooth operation, sewing on the SE1900 is an enjoyable and inspiring experience.

To facilitate a broad array of sewing tasks, this machine includes eight interchangeable sewing feet: Blind stitch foot; Buttonhole foot; Button fitting foot; Zipper foot; Zigzag foot; Monogramming foot; and Overcasting foot.

Best for beginners: Brother CP60X Computerized Sewing Machine

Brother

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The easy-to-use Brother CP60X computerized sewing machine is a top choice for beginners to embark on a learning adventure in sewing, quilting, and crafting.

Specs

  • Weight: 14 pounds
  • Product dimensions: 16.26 x 6.65 x 12.21 inches 
  • Number of built-in stitches: 60

Pros

  • Utilitarian and decorative stitches built-in
  • Automatic needle threader
  • Durable metal frame
  • Capable of sewing denim and thick fabrics

Cons

  • Not capable of monogramming

Use the Brother CP60X computerized sewing machine to embark on a lifelong hobby of sewing, crafting, and quilting. It offers straightforward, easy-to-use operating procedures, suitable for beginning sewers. An array of 60 built-in stitch options is prominently displayed on the front of the machine. Choose by simply pressing a button, and the information shows up on the clearly visible LCD screen. In addition to decorative and heirloom stitches, the machine offers a selection of seven auto-size, buttonhole stitches. 

With a fixed needle bar, this machine is particularly well-suited for beginning sewers. The needle remains fixed in place to ensure clean stitching and even seam lines. Additionally, the 2-step, automatic needle threader accurately pushes the thread through the eye of the needle. It saves time and frustration so that beginners can enjoy their sewing activities. 

The CP60X is a versatile sewing machine for multiple purposes. With its heavy-duty frame and exceptionally smooth feed system, the machine handles denim and other thick fabrics without snagging. A favorite feature of quilters, the drop-feed system allows free-motion sewing. Additionally, the machine facilitates free-arm sewing for constructing shirts, cuffs, and trousers. 

This CP60X provides an ample collection of accessories to get started with a sewing hobby. These include a 3-piece needle set, bobbins and a bobbin cover, a quilt guide, and a bilingual instruction manual. The included supply of seven interchangeable feet facilitates multiple types of sewing tasks: Blind stitch foot; Zigzag foot; Buttonhole foot; Button sewing foot; Overcasting foot; Zipper foot; and Monogramming foot (used for decorative stitches only).

Just starting out and interested in other options? Check out our dedicated guide to the best sewing machines for beginners.

Best for quilting: Brother XR3774 Sewing and Quilting Machine

Brother

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With built-in stitches for utilitarian and decorative applications, automatic features, and an extra-wide table that accommodates quilts, the Brother XR3774 is a standout machine for quilters.

Specs

  • Weight: 15.87 pounds
  • Product dimensions: 15.3 x 5.8 x 12 inches 
  • Number of built-in stitches: 37

Pros

  • Wide work surface for bulky quilts and large sewing projects
  • One-step buttonhole function
  • Automatic needle threader
  • Jam-resistant, drop-in bobbin

Cons

  • Not computerized

Here’s a mechanical sewing machine with automated features and a large workspace for bulky projects. The large throat area and the extra-wide work table make the Brother XR3774 sewing and quilting machine a viable choice for quilters. For projects other than quilts, sewists may utilize the free arm. This feature facilitates sewing sleeves, cuffs, trousers, and skinny jeans. 

In addition to providing ample space for quilting, this machine offers ease of use through several automated functions. The 1-step buttonhole stitch automatically turns out perfectly sized buttonholes. An automatic needle threading system eliminates the frustrating task of threading the needle by hand. Simply press a lever on the side of the machine and the thread inserts precisely through the eye of the needle. Additionally, the top drop-in bobbin winds automatically, and it’s jam-resistant to ensure a smooth, continuous feed of thread. 

The XR3774 includes 37 built-in stitches that produce 74 stitch functions when applied to various sewing tasks. These include both utilitarian and decorative stitch options for multiple sewing and quilting purposes. The 37 pre-set stitches are prominently displayed on the front of the machine. Select a unique stitch pattern by simply turning a dial to the appropriate number. 

This machine includes an ample supply of accessories to facilitate varied sewing and quilting activities: Walking foot; Blind stitch foot; Zigzag foot; Zipper foot; Buttonhole foot; Button sewing foot; Spring-action quilting foot; Narrow hem foot; Wide table, detachable work surface; Hard cover to protect the machine when not in use; and an Instructional DVD. Here are more of our picks for the best sewing machines for quilting.

Best budget: Brother LX3817 Sewing Machine

Brother

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Brother LX3817 is an affordable machine for the sewing hobbyist, offering ease of operation and versatile features for basic sewing tasks and creative projects.

Specs

  • Weight: 10.36 pounds
  • Product dimensions: 17x 7 x 14 inches 
  • Number of built-in stitches: 17

Pros

  • 17 built-in stitches
  • 4-step buttonhole function
  • LED light for well-lit workspace
  • Jam resistant bobbin

Cons 

  • Not computerized
  • Not as many built-in stitches as other machines

Available at a budget-friendly price, the LX3817 sewing machine provides an array of features to suit the needs of beginners, as well as experienced sewing hobbyists. It’s a full-size machine with 17 built-in stitch options. These include straight stitches, zigzag stitches, blind hem stitches, and couching stitches. The stitch choices are clearly marked on the selection dial, located on the front of the machine. Simply turn the dial to choose the desired stitch patterns for constructing garments, sewing crafts, and embellishing home decor creations. 

In addition to the 17 stitch options, the LX3817 provides a 4-step buttonhole function. With a quick turn of the dial, users may select the appropriate stitches to produce consistent, auto-size buttonholes, lending a professional look to finished projects. 

Several features make this machine a pleasure to use. The work area is well-lit with an LED light and the bobbin cover is transparent for visually monitoring the thread supply. The jam-resistant feature means that the thread on the drop-in bobbin does not become entangled. A convenient control dial lets users adjust the upper tension to avoid loose stitches or fabric puckering. The machine’s design also facilitates free-arm sewing for cuffs, sleeves, and trouser legs. 

This machine includes four interchangeable feet: Zigzag foot; Zipper foot; Buttonhole foot; and Button-sewing foot. The LX3817 includes all necessary parts to ensure success on multiple sewing and crafting projects, including: Darning plate; Bobbin cover; Bobbins; Set of 3 needles; and an Instructional DVD.

What to consider when buying the best Brother sewing machines

With many options to choose from, it can be daunting for any consumer to select the most appropriate Brother sewing machine for their purposes. Here are several factors to consider before making a selection:

Computerized or mechanical?

Brother Industries manufactures both mechanical and computerized sewing machines. The mechanical models tend to be easier to operate and maintain. They’re durable and reliable, offering basic sewing features for beginners and hobbyists. As an added bonus, many of the mechanical models include automatic functions for ease of use. On the other hand, some sewists prefer the advanced technological capabilities of computerized sewing machines. Especially for embroidery, crafting, and quilting projects, computerized machines can’t be beat.

Built-in stitches

As a standard feature, all Brother sewing machines include varying arrays of built-in stitches. These range in style from straight, utilitarian designs for basting and sewing seams to complex, decorative stitches for the artistic embellishment of garments, quilts, home decor, and crafts. The built-in stitches offered by the Brother sewing machines reviewed here range from as few as 17 to as many as 240 options. Advanced, computerized machines include alphanumeric fonts among their built-in stitches to facilitate monogramming and customization of sewing projects. Additionally, the Brother sewing-and-embroidery machines include built-in embroidery designs with memory capability for importing or creating additional options. 

Automatic features

In addition to computerized and mechanical operating systems, shoppers might consider the availability of automatic functions on various Brother sewing machines. These features make the machines easier to use and increase the enjoyment of sewing as a pleasurable activity. Many of the Brother machines offer automatic needle threading. This function saves time, frustration, and eye strain, eliminating the need to thread the needle by hand. Additionally, including a 4-step or 1-step buttonhole function is a time-saver for sewists as it tailors a buttonhole of the precise size and shape for every button.

FAQs

Q: How do you thread a Brother sewing machine?

You thread a Brother sewing machine by following the steps in the instruction manual. First, turn off the machine. Then raise both the presser foot and the needle. Pull up the spool pin on top of the machine and place a spool of thread on it. Pass the thread toward you in the groove on the thread guide, and a spring will catch the thread. Pass it through the take-up lever from right to left. Bring the thread behind the guide above the needle. Thread the needle from front to back.

Q: Are Brother sewing machines good for beginners?

Several models of Brother sewing machines are good for beginners. A beginner might enjoy learning to sew on the XM2701, the LX3817, or the CP60X models. These machines offer versatile features with easy-to-use operating procedures. Prefer another brand? Check out the best Singer sewing machines.

Q: How do you use a Brother sewing machine?

A Brother sewing machine may be used for sewing garments and home decor items from original designs or from commercial patterns. Alternatively, it can be used for creating and embellishing craft projects or making quilts. Select a Brother sewing machine that exhibits the qualities to meet your needs, Then, follow the directions in the instruction manual or DVD that comes with the machine. 

Q: How do you set up a Brother sewing machine?

You set up a Brother sewing machine by following the steps in the instruction manual or DVD that comes with the machine. Reading the manual or watching the DVD before setting up the machine is a good idea. Place the sewing machine on a clean, flat work surface to get started. Attach the power cord and the foot pedal cord. Place a spool of thread on the thread pin and follow the markings for the thread path, culminating in threading the needle automatically or by hand. Wind thread onto the bobbin and drop the bobbin into its case. 

Q: What’s the easiest sewing machine to use?

The easiest sewing machine to use is a mechanical model with clearly marked stitches, thread guides, and stitch-selector dial. Computerized models with numerous stitch options and advanced, automatic features may be more complex in their operating procedures.

Q: How do I choose a good sewing machine?

You can choose a good sewing machine by deciding the type of sewing projects you wish to undertake. Perhaps you’re a beginner who wants to learn basic sewing techniques. On the other hand, you might be an experienced quilter or crafter who needs a more advanced machine. After determining your needs, research sewing machines on the manufacturers’ websites. Investigate options at a local dealer’s store, if possible. Additionally, it helps to read consumer reviews and ratings.

Q: How much does a Brother sewing machine cost?

Brother sewing machines vary in cost from approximately $130.00 for a basic, mechanical machine to $900.00 for an advanced, computerized sewing machine that creates colorful, artistic designs on fabric. Computerized machines that provide versatile features for sewing, crafting, and quilting range in price from approximately $200.00 to $400.00.

Final thoughts on the best Brother sewing machines

Many sewists appreciate the straightforward operating procedures and simplified maintenance of a non-computerized sewing machine such as the Brother XM2701 model. It’s a popular, mechanical machine that provides an ample selection of built-in stitches, automatic needle threading, and buttonhole making. Overall, the XM2701 offers value and versatility for multiple sewing and crafting activities.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best Brother sewing machines in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best Singer sewing machines in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-singer-sewing-machines/ Wed, 15 Jun 2022 13:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=448954
Best Singer sewing machines sliced header
Stan Horaczek

For your next creative project, trust the company that’s been manufacturing high-quality sewing machines for 172 years.

The post The best Singer sewing machines in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Best Singer sewing machines sliced header
Stan Horaczek

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall SINGER Quantum Stylist 9960 Sewing & Quilting Machine is the best overall. SINGER | Quantum Stylist 9960 Sewing & Quilting Machine
SEE IT

A computerized machine with convenient, automatic features.

Best budget SINGER | MX60 Sewing Machine With Accessory Kit is the best for the budget. SINGER | MX60 Sewing Machine With Accessory Kit
SEE IT

A basic, mechanical machine that offers straightforward operating procedures.

Best for beginners SINGER | Start 1304 Sewing Machine is the best for beginners. SINGER | Start 1304 Sewing Machine
SEE IT

An optimal choice for teens and adult beginners or sewing hobbyists who want a simple-to-use machine.

A good Singer sewing machine is the one that meets the needs of the individual. With many models to choose from, beginning hobbyists and experienced sewing artists alike can find appropriate models to facilitate their creative sewing efforts and produce pleasing results. In the almost 175 years since its first patent, the Singer company introduced the first electronic sewing machines, the first zigzag-stitch machines, and the first sewing-assistant app for mobile devices. Today, Singer offers a plethora of sewing machine models for a wide range of sewing purposes. These include quilt-making, garment construction, embroidery, crafts, and fabricating home decor items such as curtains and toss pillows. Shoppers have many options when selecting the best Singer sewing machine for each sewer’s needs.

How we chose the best Singer sewing machines

To assemble our list of recommended products, we took into account personal experience, peer suggestions, and user impressions to identify 13 top Singer sewing machines intended for home use. Although our selections are all available on Amazon, we did not limit our research to standard specs and basic product descriptions. Instead, we went to the source by consulting the Singer company website. There, we found more in-depth information to bring greater clarity to the selection process for our readers.

First, we distinguished between the best sewing machines with computerized or mechanical operating systems and focused on products in both categories. Then, we looked for basic and advanced features to suit the varying needs of shoppers. For example, we considered machines with a great quantity of pre-set stitch choices and programmable functions such as automatic needle threading, one-step buttonholes, and push-button stitch selection. Alternatively, we considered simple machines with basic mechanical functions that meet the needs of many sewists and crafters, including beginners. Additionally, we considered machines in the mid-to-upper price range, as well as more budget-friendly choices. We did not consider industrial or professional machines, such as those that perform serging and overlocking functions. 

The best Singer sewing machines: Reviews & Recommendations

Since 1851, when Isaac Singer patented the first practical sewing machine, the Singer company has been serving the public with reliable sewing machines manufactured from high-quality materials and featuring precisely functioning components. Innovation and creative product development mark the company’s history and current machines, the best of which are presented here. 

Best overall: SINGER | Quantum Stylist 9960 Sewing & Quilting Machine 

SINGER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Singer Quantum Stylist 9960 machine offers computerized operation with a vast array of optional functions to turn out creative, personalized sewing projects.

Specs

  • Weight: 20 pounds
  • Dimensions: 17.25 x 8.25 x 12 inches
  • Computerized or mechanical: Computerized

Pros

  • 600 built-in stitch applications
  • Automatic needle threader
  • Five alphanumeric fonts for monogramming and personalizing projects
  • High speed, up to 850 stitches per minute

Cons

  • Somewhat expensive
  • Occasional issues with the automatic tension

Creative sewists find that this machine meets and exceeds their versatility and ease-of-use needs. With the outstanding features of Singer’s Quantum Stylist 9960 machine, users are limited only by their imaginations. The machine simplifies the processes needed to turn out beautiful quilts, crafts, home decor, and fashion projects. 

With its up-to-date, computerized operating system, the Quantum Stylist provides numerous options for sewing speed, precision, and multipurpose functioning. It offers 600 built-in stitches, ranging from basic to stretch and decorative options. The stitch choices include five alphanumeric fonts for monogramming or personalizing projects and 13 alternatives for 1-step buttonholes. For ultimate ease, the machine includes a specialized underplate to create perfect tailoring on every buttonhole successfully.

The Quantum Stylist can produce 850 stitches per minute, facilitating the quick completion of sewing projects. Additionally, the automatic needle threader speeds up the tedious task of threading the machine’s needle. Within seconds, users can have the entire machine automatically threaded, from the spool to the eye of the needle. This feature eliminates the frustration and eye strain associated with threading the needle by hand.

To facilitate a broad range of creative crafts and sewing projects, the Quantum Stylist 9960 includes a sizable array of accessories. These include the following attachable, working parts: All-purpose foot; Zipper foot; Buttonhole foot; Open toe foot; Overcasting foot; Darning and embroidery foot; Rolled hem foot; Cording foot; Straight stitch and quilting food; and Even-feed or walking foot.

Singer’s Quantum Stylist 9960 is suitable for creative types who design and fabricate their own fashions, as well as those who turn out heirloom-quality quilts and custom-craft handiwork. Additionally, it serves users who simply want to make clothing from commercial patterns or construct simple toss-pillows and curtains for their home decor. Overall, it’s a high-quality, multifunctional, and dependable machine.

Best heavy-duty: SINGER | 4423 Heavy-Duty Sewing Machine

SINGER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: With a motor that is 60 percent more powerful than most, the Singer 4423 sewing machine handles thick seams and heavy-duty fabrics such as denim and canvas. 

Specs

  • Weight: 14.5 pounds
  • Product dimensions: 15.5 x 6.25 x 12 inches
  • Computerized or mechanical: Mechanical

Pros

  • Heavy-duty, interior, metal frame
  • Extra-powerful motor
  • High-speed performance
  • Sews lightweight, sheer fabrics as well as heavy-duty materials

Cons

  • Not the best choice for thick leather and thick canvas

Sew through denim, canvas, and heavy wool fabrics with the Singer 4423 machine. It boasts a motor that is 60 percent more powerful than standard sewing machine motors, making this model a workhorse for multiple sewing projects. Additionally, the heavy-duty metal frame and the stainless-steel bedplate assure operation stability and long-wearing durability. Yet, this machine also handles lightweight, sheer materials. The smooth, stainless-steel bed plate along with the adjustable pressure for the presser-foot allow sheer fabrics to glide across the bed’s surface without snagging.

With its powerful motor, the Singer 4423 sewing machine boasts exceptional sewing speed. It’s easy to complete sewing projects in record time when the machine produces up to 1,100 precision stitches per minute. A clearly marked dial allows users to select from a variety of preset stitches to create up to 97 stitch applications. Select the 1-step buttonhole feature to save time and frustration by producing consistent buttonholes every time. Simply place the button in the buttonhole foot, and the machine automatically sews a precision buttonhole around it.

On the outer casing surface, clear markings indicate the procedure for threading the machine from the top-loading, drop-in bobbin to the needle. Then, the built-in, automatic needle threader takes over to thread the needle, thereby saving the user from annoyance and eye strain. 

The Singer 4423 heavy-duty machine includes a package of four interchangeable feet along with multiple accessories such as bobbins, needles, a quilting guide, and more. Additionally, a soft-sided dust cover is included to protect the machine when it’s not in use.

Best portable: SINGER | Stitch Quick + Handheld Mending Machine

SINGER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Singer Stitch Quick + is a battery-operated, handheld sewing machine that delivers meticulous results on quick repairs and hems, eliminating the need to set up a full-size machine.

Specs 

  • Weight: 1.45 pounds
  • Dimensions: 9.7 x 4.1 x 6 inches
  • Computerized or mechanical: Mechanical

Pros 

  • Ultimate portability
  • May be used in locations without electricity
  • No need to set up a full-size machine
  • More precise results than hand-sewing on hems and repairs 

Cons

  • Not suitable for constructing garments and full-size projects
  • Not for heavy-duty use

Save time and effort when you use this mini, handheld, cordless mending machine. With the Singer Stitch-Quick +, there’s no need to set up a full-size sewing machine when it’s time to repair garments and home decor items rapidly. Use it to quickly hem a pair of pants, a skirt, or household curtains. Grab this handheld tool when it’s time to mend a ripped seam in a hurry. Weighing only 1.45 pounds, the diminutive machine is easy to store and transport. Take it along wherever necessary to complete a minor sewing task. It requires only 4 AA batteries (may we suggest rechargeables).

On the other hand, the Stitch Quick + might be the ideal learning tool for an older child or teen to get started with sewing. A convenient switch on the front of the machine allows the user to choose either desktop or handheld operating modes. From there, the beginning sewer can learn many of the same procedures that pertain to standard sewing-machine operation. 

Singer designs this machine with attention to ergonomic considerations for handheld use. The handle grip is designed to offer the most advantageous balance and control. A safety lock prevents accidental operation. 

Use the Stitch Quick + for sewing paper as well as fabric. It’s useful for making crafts. The machine uses two threads to produce permanent, interlocking stitches. Replace the upper bobbin with the large spool pin to facilitate using standard-size thread spools. This diminutive machine contains many of the working parts of a standard sewing machine. These include the following: Built-in thread cutter; Drop-in bobbin compartment; Bobbin winder; Presser foot; Needle; Adjustable tension control dial; Handwheel; and Built-in storage compartment for notions.

Best for embroidery: SINGER | Legacy SE300 Sewing and Embroidery Machine

Singer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Singer Legacy SE300 comes with 200 embroidery designs and 250 stitches, making this an ideal choice for people who love to embroider and embellish their work.

Specs

  • Weight: 20.5 pounds
  • Dimensions: 17.25 x 8.25 x 12 inches  
  • Computerized or mechanical: Computerized

Pros

  • 200 included embroidery designs
  • Fast sewing speed of 800 stitches per minute
  • Six fonts included

Cons

  • Expensive
  • Software only available for Windows

If embroidery is your thing, consider the Singer Legacy SE300. The machine has a large and small embroidery hoop, plus 7.25 inches of space to hold your project. The included 200 embroidery designs and six fonts will give you plenty of options. The SE300 provides basic stitches and a wide range of decorative stitches and will automatically set the length, width, pressure, and more. It also has memory to save four individual stitching sequences. 

Capable of up to 800 stitches per minute, the SE300 can move through projects fast. To convert it from sewing to embroidery mode, just attach the embroidery foot. The LCD and touch screens help simplify the job, and the machine has online training as part of the package. It also comes with software, but it’s only compatible with Windows. It’s also one of the pricier models on the list. 

Best for quilting: SINGER | Quantum Stylist 9985 Computerized Sewing Machine

Singer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Singer Quantum Stylist 9985 computerized sewing machine includes automatic functions and attachable working parts that facilitate many of the specialized sewing procedures for quilt-making.

Specs

  • Weight: 20 pounds
  • Dimensions: 8.5 x 17.25 x 12.5 inches
  • Computerized or mechanical: Computerized

Pros 

  • Includes four bonus feet designed for quilting
  • 960 built-in stitches
  • Automatic needle threader
  • Drop-feed lever for free-motion sewing

Cons

  • Bobbin cover not transparent, making it hard to track thread supply

Many quilters, crafters, and avid sewists appreciate the push-button operating ease of a computerized sewing machine. When it comes to quilting, the Singer Quantum Stylist 9985 does not disappoint. Several features of this machine make quilting easier and more enjoyable, yielding creatively inspiring results.

These features include: Electronic twin needle settings; a 7-segment feeding system; automatic locking stitch function; built-in reverse; horizontal threading; automatic bobbin winding clutch; direct select stitch selection buttons; automatic tension settings; extra-high presser foot lift; center zigzag taper; automatic presser foot pressure control; and optimum power control. Select from 960 built-in stitches for basic and decorative sewing and quilting projects. All stitches and fonts are accessible on the built-in LCD screen, and the machine itself has a maximum sewing speed of 850 stitches per minute. 

Several convenient features of this computerized machine are designed to save time and effort for sewists. The drop-in bobbin system eliminates the need for raising the bobbin thread before sewing. Simply drop in the bobbin and start sewing immediately. For added fun, the bobbin cover is a lovely shade of purple. Additionally, the machine offers an automatic needle threader to save the user time and frustration while working.

Sewing buttonholes is a breeze with the Quantum Stylist 9985’s one-step buttonhole function. Simply place the button in the buttonhole foot, and the machine sews a perfectly tailored buttonhole around it. 

Best for beginners: SINGER | Start 1304 Sewing Machine

SINGER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Older children, teens, and adult beginners might use the Singer Start 1304 machine to embark on a journey of creative discovery and productivity through sewing.

Specs

  • Weight: 9.8 pounds
  • Product dimensions: 13 x 7 x 11.5 inches
  • Computerized or mechanical: Mechanical

Pros 

  • Lightweight and portable
  • Full metal frame
  • Six built-in stitches for 57 stitch applications
  • Includes a quick-start guide and an instruction manual

Cons

  • Not for quilting
  • Not for heavy-duty fabrics

The simplified operational procedures of this mechanical sewing machine make it ideal for casual hobbyists and beginning sewers. Older children and teens might use this machine to launch a lifelong fascination with the arts of sewing, quilting, and crafting. The Singer Start 1304 offers basic features with enough variable options to facilitate creativity and versatility in sewing projects. 

A manual dial on the front of the machine displays six clearly marked stitch choices. With a simple turn of the dial, users can employ these stitches with pre-set lengths and widths to accomplish up to 57 stitch applications. In addition to straight stitches for seams and hems, beginners can experiment with decorative scallops and zigzag stitches to embellish their work.

In addition to straight and decorative stitches, the Start 1304 boasts a simple, 4-step buttonhole system with clearly marked designations on the stitch selector dial. Even beginners can turn out tailored buttonholes every time. Although the machine is lightweight, compact, and portable, it features a full metal frame inside the plastic outer casing. This construction ensures durability for years of service and stability on a tabletop or work surface.

For versatile use on various sewing projects, the Start 1304 includes numerous attachable working parts and other helpful accessories. These include the following: All-purpose foot; Zipper foot; Buttonhole foot; Darning plate; Pack of needles; Bobbins; Needle plate; Screwdriver; Spool pin felts; Seam ripper and lint brush; Power line cord; Foot pedal control; Quick-start guide; and Instruction manual.

Curious about other options for those just getting started? Check out our dedicated guide to the best sewing machines for beginners.

Best budget: SINGER | MX60 Sewing Machine With Accessory Kit

SINGER

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Available at an affordable price, the Singer MX60 sewing machine is a solid choice for a lightweight, portable tool that provides reliable service for basic sewing and craft projects.

Specs

  • Weight: 12.17 pounds
  • Product dimensions: 13 x 7 x 11.5 inches
  • Computerized or mechanical: Mechanical

Pros

  • Lightweight for portability and storage
  • Full metal frame
  • 57 stitch applications
  • 4-step buttonhole function

Cons

  • Not computerized
  • Not for heavy-duty fabrics such as denim or canvas

Here’s a mechanical sewing machine that offers solid, basic features for a wide variety of sewing projects. Many users prefer mechanical machines like the Singer MX60 because the manual controls are simple to use, and the machine is easy to maintain over time. Offering an array of useful features, this machine is suitable for beginners and experienced sewists.

With a choice of 57 stitch applications, the MX60 can produce decorative sewing and basic seams. The stitch choices vary in both length and width. Various stitch options are suitable for piecing quilts, sewing garments, or creating crafts with decorative stitching. Moreover, the stitch selector dial is uncomplicated to use, eliminating mistakes and frustration. 

The MX60 does not boast an automatic needle threader but provides easy-to-follow threading guides that are clearly marked on the machine’s outer surface. Additionally, the LED lighting saves users from straining their eyes while threading the machine. With a front-loading bobbin, the machine can be threaded and ready for use in only a few seconds. A simple lever switches from forward to reverse sewing for finishing off seams, and the tension adjustment allows users to fine-tune the machine for a variety of fabric types.

Weighing in at only 12.7 pounds and exhibiting a compact size, the Singer MX60 is ideal for users who want a portable machine. It’s easy to lift, carry, and store, making it a practical choice for those who work in small spaces. Despite its small size and minimal weight, the MX60 boasts a full metal frame inside the plastic outer shell. This substantial frame provides stability that allows the machine to sew smoothly, without skipping.

What to consider when buying the best Singer sewing machines

Before investing in a Singer sewing machine, shoppers might consider their individual sewing aspirations. For example, a beginner who wants to create simple crafts and home decor items will have needs different from those of an experienced quilter or a sewist who aspires to develop their personal fashion line. Based on the extent and complexity of their anticipated sewing projects, shoppers might consider several factors in the selection process. 

Computerized or mechanical?

Computerized sewing machines offer convenience to sewers via their programmable features and push-button operating ease. However, computerized machines are more expensive than mechanical models. Avid sewing artists and quilters might be willing to pay additional costs for the convenient, computerized functions and the precision results they facilitate. On the other hand, beginners and hobbyists might prefer the simplicity of mechanical sewing machines. The mechanical models offer more straightforward operating procedures and easier maintenance.

Built-in stitches and stitch applications

Both computerized and mechanical sewing machines include varying quantities of built-in or pre-set stitches. These fall into three categories: straight stitches for seams, decorative stitches for embellishments, and buttonhole stitches. With a number of built-in stitches, machines offer a broad range of stitch applications. These applications involve various sewing techniques that can be accomplished with built-in stitch selections. For example, a machine with 98 built-in stitches might facilitate up to 600 stitch applications. Alternatively, a machine with six built-in stitches may facilitate 57 stitch applications. 

Size, weight, and portability

Tabletop sewing machines vary in size from around 13 inches to 17 inches in length and 11 inches to 12 inches in height. Most are around 7 inches to 8.5 inches in width. Similarly, they vary in weight from approximately 10 pounds to 20 pounds. All of the tabletop machines included in this round-up may be considered portable. However, the smaller and lighter-weight machines are easier to set up, move, and store. For sewers who live in small spaces, a small and lightweight machine might be the most convenient for moving from place to place in the home as well as for storage. 

FAQs

Q: What is the best Singer sewing machine to purchase?

The best Singer sewing machine to purchase is the Singer Quantum Stylist 9960. This computerized machine offers multiple automatic functions, making sewing procedures easier and more convenient. Features such as push-button stitch selection, automatic needle threading, and one-step buttonholes make this machine a top choice for quilters, crafters, and sewing enthusiasts.

Q: Are Singer sewing machines good?

Singer sewing machines are good choices for home use. Many crafters, sewists, and quilters rate Singer machines as their top choices. The Singer company has earned a reputation for manufacturing reliable, high-quality sewing machines for more than 170 years.

Q: How much does a Singer sewing machine cost?

Singer sewing machines range in price from $84.99 for a simple mending machine to $1,099.99 for a sewing and embroidery machine. Mid-range prices include mechanical and heavy-duty sewing machines for around $200 to $300. Computerized machines and sergers are available in the $200-to-$500 range.

Q: What is the most reliable brand of sewing machine?

Singer is considered by many consumers to be the most reliable brand of sewing machine. With a 171-year history, the Singer company has built a reputation for selling high-quality, durable machines that the public can rely on. 

Q: Which is the best sewing machine for home use?

The best machine for home use is one that suits the purposes and level of experience of the user. For example, a sewer who creates quilts might choose the Singer Confidence 7469Q machine. It offers specific features that make quilt-making procedures easier. On the other hand, a shopper who wants to begin a new sewing hobby might be better served by choosing the Start 1304 model. It’s designed to deliver positive results to beginning sewists as they create basic sewing and craft projects. 

Q: Is Singer better than Brother?

Singer is better than Brother, according to many consumers. With a 171-year history, the Singer brand has been around for longer than the Brother brand. However, the brands are certainly competitive. For many consumers, the choice between the two brands is dictated by the distinct features of individual machines. Shoppers looking for machines with specific features might choose a Singer machine over a Brother machine. Those looking for a different set of features might select Brother over Singer.

Final thoughts on the best Singer sewing machines

The Singer Quantum Stylist 9960 is our best Singer sewing machine choice. It’s a computerized sewing machine with advanced features to make sewing easier. It’s suitable for serious and experienced quilters, crafters, and sewists, but the clearly marked design facilitates beginners’ use. Multiple automatic functions take the guesswork out of sewing procedures and produce consistently excellent results in finished sewing projects. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best Singer sewing machines in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
You can help measure the ocean’s health with this homemade gadget https://www.popsci.com/diy/secchi-disk-how-to/ Fri, 13 Oct 2023 17:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=579497
A Secchi Disk and a measuring tape on a gray wooden floating pier next to a moored boat.
Never heard of a Secchi Disk? Well, this is what one looks like. Courtesy of Richard Kirby

A Secchi disk is a simple device that can help citizen scientists gather crucial data.

The post You can help measure the ocean’s health with this homemade gadget appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A Secchi Disk and a measuring tape on a gray wooden floating pier next to a moored boat.
Never heard of a Secchi Disk? Well, this is what one looks like. Courtesy of Richard Kirby

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

There’s no better indicator of the health of the oceans than the amount of phytoplankton that resides in them. That’s not only because this microalgae produces at least 50 percent of the oxygen we breathe, but also because it’s the start of the marine food chain, determining what other creatures live and thrive in any given area.

The changing seasons and the climate crisis may play a big role in the presence of phytoplankton over time, so it’s of the utmost importance for researchers to know what levels look like in oceans around the world. Sailors, boaters, and interested sea-faring travelers can help track and study this microorganism by using one simple tool: the Secchi disk. You can contribute to important citizen science by building one and taking it with you the next time you head to the ocean.

What is a Secchi disk?

A Secchi disk is an impressively low-tech piece of scientific equipment invented in 1865 by Italian astronomer Angelo Secchi to measure water transparency and turbidity. In deep-water ocean environments, these factors are determined by biological material like phytoplankton, explains Verena Meraldi, chief scientist for HX Hurtigruten Expeditions, a cruise line that invites passengers to participate in scientific data collection.

The tool itself is usually a round piece of white plastic with a diameter of 30 centimeters (about 12 inches), that is attached to the end of a tape measure or line marked at 20 centimeters (about 8 inches) and 1-meter intervals (a little more than 1 yard). 

We’ll explain in more detail below, but using a Secchi disk is easy: just lower the disk on a line into the water and record the depth at which you lose sight of the contraption. This measurement is called Secchi depth. Deeper measurements mean there’s less phytoplankton in the water, whereas shallow measurements indicate an abundance of the microalgae and therefore, a healthier environment.

Once you have a reading, you can log your findings in the Secchi app (available for iPhone and Android). The platform is part of the Secchi Disk Study citizen science program launched in 2013 by marine biologist Richard Kirby after a controversial 2010 report published in Nature that claimed phytoplankton levels had declined 40 percent between 1950 and 2008. Kirby’s initiative collects data to track the presence of this crucial microalgae worldwide.

Researchers have long collected data on phytoplankton by measuring ocean surface color using satellites. But this information is not enough, so this is where citizen scientists come in.  

“You need some means of determining in situ measurements, and the simplest way to do that is to measure the clarity of the water with a Secchi disk,” Kirby explains.

How to make a Secchi disk

There are two kinds of Secchi disks: the ones made to measure clarity in freshwater are painted in black and white, and are smaller than the white-only Secchi disks designed for the ocean. To participate in Kirby’s study, you’ll need the latter.

You can order a Secchi disk online, but you can also make your own, as they are easy to make and much cheaper, too.

[Related: How to become a citizen scientist]

Please note that some of the measurements in this project are in metric units. This is important because the Secchi Disk Study measures depth in centimeters, so the data you provide must be measured accordingly.   

Stats

  • Time: 30 to 60 minutes
  • Cost: about $8
  • Difficulty: easy 

Materials

Tools

1. Cut a disk with a 30-centimeter diameter. You can craft your Secchi disk from just about any material, including metal or wood, though plastic is most common as it’s often easier to cut to size. A trimmed 5-gallon paint bucket lid, a thick signboard, or even a cutting board will work well. Just make sure that whatever material you choose won’t break easily and end up polluting the waters you’re trying to study and protect. 

2. (Optional) Paint your disk matte white. If the material you chose is already matte white, you can skip this step. If it’s not, paint your disk with matte-finish white paint and let it completely dry. You can use whatever you have at hand—just keep in mind that you may need more than one coat to get the required opacity.

3. Drill a small hole in the center of the disk. Use a ruler to find the center and drill a hole that’s just a bit bigger than the width of your cord.

4. Thread your cord. Thread your cord through the hole you just drilled, measure 16 inches down the cord, and make a secure knot there to keep the disk in place. It doesn’t have to be exact—you want enough of a tail below the disk to tie several knots and secure your weight.

  • Pro tip: You can also affix a 50-meter (165-foot) or longer fiberglass surveyors tape to the top of the disk by screwing an eye bolt into the center and clipping the tape on with a sturdy carabiner. 

5. Securely attach the weight to the bottom side of the disk. The weight can be a 2-pound fishing weight, repurposed link of mooring chain, or anything else that will help the disk sink. 

  • Pro tip: “Be creative—you just need a lump of heavy metal,” Kirby says.

6. Mark your line. Once everything is knotted securely, use a permanent marker to draw lines on the cord at 20-centimeter intervals. Use the contrasting color to make marks at 1-meter intervals.

How to use a Secchi disk

Once you have your disk, head for the ocean. Make sure it’s at least partly sunny and that you embark ideally between 10 a.m. and 2 p.m., as the angle of the sun will affect light penetration. Don’t set sail unless you’re accustomed to being on a boat, wearing proper safety equipment (like a life jacket), and know how to swim.

If you’re not comfortable on the water or don’t have a way to leave shore, no data is uninteresting, Kirby says. That means you can still join in and if you can only take readings once from a jetty or pier near shore where you live, you can still join in. Although the instructions below require a boat, you should be able to adapt them to wherever you are.

To pick a good reading location, Kirby says to find a spot at least 1 kilometer (0.62 miles) from shore where you can’t see the ocean floor, so around 25 meters deep (82 feet) deep. This depth and distance from shore will help reduce the amount of tannins and sediment obscuring visibility that could alter the measurement. 

Take off your sunglasses if you’re wearing them, and drop your clean disk into the water on the shady side of your boat. Keeping a firm grip on your measuring tape or rope, slowly let out the line. If you think it might slip from your fingers, tie it off to a secure surface for extra peace of mind. Watch carefully as your disk descends, and make sure it sinks vertically. If it doesn’t, the sinking weight might be off-balance or the current may be too strong, in which case you may have to make some adjustments and try again later.

Stop when you can no longer make out the disk beneath the surface. Raise and lower the disk a few times to pinpoint exactly the point where you lose sight of it. This will help you get the most accurate reading and make sure your eyes aren’t playing tricks on you. When you’re ready, record your Secchi depth by looking at your measuring tape at the point where it touches the water, or counting the submerged interval markers. You’ll need the average measurement when you use the app. Finish by opening the Secchi app at the drop site—follow the prompts and instructions to record your GPS location and enter your data.

You can repeat this procedure anytime you’re on the ocean. In fact, if you visit far-flung destinations or regularly return to the same spot, all the better: repeated readings from various times of the day, different seasons, and from hard-to-reach locales are extremely valuable for helping scientists understand how phytoplankton levels change over time and around the world.

The Secchi Disk Study has published two research papers on phytoplankton, with more in the works. That’s thanks to citizen science contributions: cruise passengers, avid sailors, recreational kayakers, and anyone who even occasionally takes to open water and wants to contribute to important and quantifiable environmental science. You can add yourself to that list now too.

The post You can help measure the ocean’s health with this homemade gadget appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best sewing machines in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/reviews/best-sewing-machine/ Mon, 11 Oct 2021 13:26:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=384295
Home photo
Amanda Reed

Free-motion quilting, preloaded alphabets, and hundreds of stitches—today’s sewing machines do more than stitch in a straight line.

The post The best sewing machines in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Home photo
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall SINGER 7258 Sewing Machine SINGER 7258 100-Stitch Computerized 76 Decorative Stitches
SEE IT

This versatile machine with automated features offers ample functionality for diverse sewing projects.

Best value The Brother GX37 Sewing Machine is the best for beginners. Brother GX37 Sewing Machine
SEE IT

This sewing machine is an optimal choice for beginners and hobbyists, providing basic mechanical features for myriad sewing projects.

Best computerized A Brother sewing machine on a blue and white background Brother CS7000X Computerized Sewing and Quilting Machine
SEE IT

For committed sewists and quilters, this computerized machine offers multiple automated features as well as ample workspace.

A resurging interest in sewing is fueled by sewing machines that let you do amazing things with a needle and thread. Whether you’re making your own custom window treatments, repairing a shirt, or DIY-ing your own formal wear, a sewing machine with the right stitches and features can breeze through delicate or heavy-duty fabrics like tissue paper. Finding the best sewing machine depends on your sewing skills and what you hope to make. Beginners don’t need a plethora of stitches, free-motion capabilities, or specialized presser feet. Advanced sewists, on the other hand, may need a wide range of stitches, a long free arm, and an extended sewing table to make their creations. If you’re somewhere in the middle, there’s a model for you, too. Here are our recommendations for the best sewing machines.

How we chose the best sewing machines

Sewing machines available on today’s market vary from simple, no-frills models to computerized machines that offer state-of-the-art automated features. Newbies and seasoned sewists deserve a machine that treats them right, so we considered several factors. Although mechanical, electric sewing machines work well for basic tasks, the computerized models offer a variety of memory functions that save time and produce consistently positive results. We also considered how easily you can adjust the thread tension, thread the machine, whether the manual is helpful, and if an instructional DVD is included, etc. We looked for machines with a greater selection of stitch options (both decorative and utilitarian) so they can extend the possibilities for creativity in sewing. A presser foot holds the fabric flat as it moves through the machine, and manufacturers deliver added value by including specialized presser feet for various sewing tasks. These are just some of the things we looked for in models that delivery versaliity—from quilting to embroidery for beginners to pros.

The best sewing machines: Reviews & Recommendations

Whether you’re new to sewing and don’t know your hands from your feet or you’re a longtime quilter looking for a computerized machine that can save your stitch patterns, there’s an option for you in our recommendations. We looked at these machines for frame durability, overall versatility, wealth of features and accessories (such as extra bobbins, screwdriver, and other tools needed to care for the machine), their work capacity, but also their overall value.

Best overall: SINGER 7258 Sewing & Quilting Machine

Singer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Manufactured by a company with a long-standing reputation for high-quality sewing machines, the SINGER 7258 offers automated features and an exceptionally large range of stitch options.

Specs

  • Machine weight: 14.6 pounds
  • Machine dimensions: 14.5 inches long by 7.5 inches wide by 12 inches tall
  • Material: plastic and metal

Pros

  • Push-button stitch selection with 100 built-in stitches
  • One-step buttonhole foot
  • Programmable up/down needle stopping position
  • Speed control

Cons

  • Soft-sided dust cover, not a hard-sided case

The SINGER 7258 sewing machine offers a heavy-duty, durable metal frame as well as convenient features that make it versatile and easy to use. Simply push a button to choose from 100 stitches, including 9 basic, 8 stretch, 7 buttonhole, and 76 decorative choices. The machine automatically sets the stitch length, width, and tension, or users may customize the stitch length and width for specific sewing projects. Stitch specifications are visible on an LCD screen. 

With threading instructions printed on the machine, a built-in needle threader, and a drop-in bobbin holder with a transparent cover, the machine is ready to go in mere seconds. You can program the needle’s up/down position for different sewing tasks. Quilting and appliqué jobs are made easier when the needle is programmed to stop in the down position, or users may program the needle to stop in the up position for straight seams.

The built-in LED light with a 100,000-hour bulb stays cool to the touch, and speed controls allow the user to specify slow speeds for intricate sewing projects or faster speeds for straight seams. Remove the storage compartment to access the free arm, making it easy to sew around trouser hems, sleeves, and cuffs, or small pieces such as children’s clothing.

The simple, one-step buttonhole foot offers a selection of 6 buttonhole styles. A built-in storage compartment is loaded with additional accessories, including an all-purpose foot, a zipper foot, a blind hem foot, bobbins, thread spool caps, a spool pin, a soft-sided dust cover, and more.

There are many more high-quality SINGER sewing machines, but we also love the Brother CS6000i Sewing and Quilting Machine. It brings a little bit of everything to the sewing table with a wide table, hard case, nine presser feet, and 60 built-in stitches that easily let you expand your sewing abilities. For more options, here are the best-rated Brother sewing machines.

Best value: Brother GX37 Sewing Machine

Why it made the cut: It gives a simple way to build skills with reliable performance and enough stitches for beginners to expand their abilities as they learn and master the art of sewing.

 Specs

  • Machine weight: 10.14 pounds
  • Machine dimensions: 12.48 x 7.01 x 16.26 inches
  • Material: Metal

Pros

  • Automatic needle threader
  • Includes instructional DVD
  • Small footprint and lightweight

Cons

  • Durability

The Brother GX37 sewing machine is a dependable model available at a modest price. Although it is not computerized, the Brother GX37 offers numerous features for convenience and versatility. 

A dial on the front of the machine facilitates selecting from among 37 built-in stitches, including decorative and utilitarian choices. Stretch, zigzag, and straight stitches are clearly marked on the selection dial. Additionally, the one-step buttonhole stitch and the included buttonhole foot increase the versatility of this machine. The free-arm feature accommodates sewing trouser hems, shirt cuffs, or other projects that require maneuvering around tight spaces in the fabric.

An optimal choice for beginners and experienced sewists, the GX37 includes an automatic needle threader and a jam-resistant drop-in bobbin. These features smooth the way to a pleasurable sewing experience. If assistance is needed, Brother offers free technical support via live chat online or by phone.

Included accessories such as the zigzag foot, buttonhole foot, zipper foot, button-sewing foot, blind stitch foot, narrow hem foot, free arm, and instructional DVD add to the versatility and functionality of this machine.

Best computerized: Brother CS7000X Computerized Sewing and Quilting Machine

Brother

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Brother CS7000X sewing machine provides automated features and built-in stitches that make it an optimal choice for sewists who engage in specialized projects such as embroidery, quilting, and appliqué.

Specs

  • Machine weight: 10.5 pounds
  • Machine dimensions: 12.2 x 6.65 x 16.26 inches
  • Material: Metal

Pros

  • Automated needle threading and stitch selection
  • Accommodates large projects and bulky materials
  • Wide range of stitch choices
  • Hard-sided, protective storage case

Cons

  • May have issues with bobbin and tension
  • May not sew well through thick layers of fabric

Computerized sewing machines offer several advantages over their mechanical counterparts. The automation of functions—including needle threading, bobbin winding, tension adjustment, and seam securing—provides time-saving convenience for sewists. Additionally, computerized sewing machines make it possible to engage in specialized projects such as appliqué, embroidery, quilting, and heavy-duty sewing tasks.

For quilting and sewing, the Brother CS7000X machine offers the precision, automation, and convenience of computerized features. Stitches can be selected with the touch of a button, with a read-out on the LCD screen. Users may select from among 70 built-in stitches that include decorative, heirloom, and quilting choices as well as straight and utilitarian stitches. 

The one-step buttonhole feature offers a choice of seven styles along with automated sizing to produce consistent results. For added convenience, the drop-in bobbin casing is jam-resistant. Brother includes numerous accessories with this sewing machine, including ten sewing feet, a quilting guide, and a hard-sided storage case.

The Brother CS7000X is constructed with durability and work capacity in mind. The metal frame is built to facilitate heavy-duty sewing projects, and a larger needle-to-arm workspace makes room for bulky materials such as quilts. The detachable quilting table provides an extended flat surface accommodating large projects.

Best heavy-duty: SINGER | Heavy Duty 4452 Sewing Machine , Gray

Singer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Constructed with a strong, reinforced, metal frame and a powerful motor, the Heavy Duty 4452 by SINGER can sew through thick fabrics, multiple layers, leather, and vinyl.

Specs

  • Machine weight: 14.6 pounds
  • Machine dimensions: 15.5 x 6.25 x 12 inches
  • Material: Metal

Pros

  • Powerful motor
  • Strong metal frame
  • Stainless-steel bed plate
  • Even-feed walking foot for thick, heavy materials

Cons

  • Less portable than other machines due to heavier weight
  • Not computerized
  • Soft-sided dust cover, not hard-sided

For heavy-duty sewing projects, the average machine simply does not provide the required capacity to sew through thick, heavy fabrics. Projects such as upholstering furniture, sewing through leather and vinyl, and fashioning heavy draperies may require a heavy-duty sewing machine. The SINGER 4452 machine offers a strong, interior metal frame along with powerful features to facilitate sewing jobs that might exceed the capacity of other machines.

The motor in the SINGER 4452 is 60 percent stronger than standard sewing machine motors, providing the power to sew through heavyweight fabrics, leather, and vinyl. Additionally, the strong motor functions at a maximum speed of 1,100 stitches per minute, facilitating the swift completion of big jobs.

This machine offers a selection of 32 stitches, including 6 basic, 7 stretch, and 18 decorative stitch choices. Additionally, users may choose the fully automated one-step-buttonhole stitch to create uniform buttonholes with ease. With the variety of stitch choices, users may fashion clothing, crafts, home decor items, and gifts for friends.

SINGER optimizes several features of this machine for heavy-duty service. The stainless-steel bed plate keeps heavy fabrics moving smoothly. A specialized even-feed walking foot makes it easy to sew through thick layers of fabric, and the nonstick foot is specially made for sewing leather and vinyl.

Best for quilting: Janome MC6650 Sewing and Quilting Machine

Why it made the cut: A breathtaking number of stitches, 20 memory banks, a high-presser foot lift, and an aluminum body make this the best sewing machine for quilting. Get your hands on a machine that will make quilts for years. 

Specs

  • Weight: 25 pounds
  • Machine dimensions: 8.6 x 20.3 x 11.8 inches
  • Material: Aluminum

Pros

  • 20 memory banks store stitch sequences
  • Nine one-step buttonholes
  • Needle up/down memory
  • Extra-long free arm and sewing table

Cons

  • Expensive

Janome is well-known for the quality of their machines, and their machines come with the price to prove it. Quilters will love the 172 stitch options, two alphabets, and extra-long free arm and sewing table. A large LCD display makes it easy to see the settings and make adjustments as needed. This model also features 20 memory banks to store stitch sequences for quilting.

Among the plentiful stitch and accessory options are nine one-step buttonholes, 12 presser feet, and two easy-change needle plates. This model also features an up/down needle memory to help make precise turns. This model gives sewists the power of choice and creativity. However, the high price is a commitment not meant for the beginner or casual user. For additional options, here are some good sewing machines for quilting.

Best professional machine for home use: SINGER Professional 14T968DC Serger Overlock

Singer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: For serious hobbyists and cottage-industry sewists, the SINGER Professional 14T968DC fits neatly into the home setting while producing the polished results associated with expert craftspeople.

Specs

  • Machine weight: 18.6 pounds
  • Machine dimensions: 13.5 x 10.5 x 11.5 inches
  • Material: Metal

Pros

  • Serger produces professionally finished seams
  • Self-adjusting tension
  • 2-3-4-5 thread capability

Cons

  • Fewer decorative stitches than other machines
  • Not as portable as other machines due to heavier weight

When sewing becomes a serious hobby or a side hustle that might provide income for the avid sewist, a professional machine might be the ideal choice. Small enough to fit neatly in a craft room or home setting, the SINGER Professional 14T968DC sewing machine offers 2-3-4-5 thread capability to produce overlocking stitches for professional results on a plethora of sewing projects.

The outstanding advantage of a serger machine such as the SINGER 14T968DC is that it sews, finishes, and trims seams in one step. Frayed seams and raw edges are a thing of the past, as the machine delivers professionally finished outcomes every time. Choosing from among 14 built-in stitch choices, users may select decorative as well as utilitarian finishes.

Turn a simple dial to access a selection of varied stitch styles, and the machine will automatically adjust the tension setting. This self-adjusting feature takes the guesswork out of sewing, as the machine delivers consistent results on cover hems, chain stitching, rolled hems, flat locking, and more. With a maximum speed of 1,300 stitches per minute, users may turn out completed projects in record time.

Best for kids and beginners: Magicfly Mini Sewing Machine with Extension Table

Magicfly

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Magicfly Mini sewing machine’s diminutive size and lite weight, along with basic functionality and simple operation, will produce satisfying results for children and beginners.

Specs

  • Machine weight: 2.2 pounds
  • Machine dimensions: 10.43 x 7.48 x 9.06 inches
  • Material: Metal

Pros

  • Lightweight and portable
  • Tutorial videos for beginners
  • Included sewing supplies
  • Finger guard for safety

Cons

  • Not suitable for large sewing projects
  • Offers only one basic stitch
  • No automated features

Many sewing enthusiasts and professionals learned to love the craft as children. After starting with hand sewing, children around ages 7 to 9 and older beginners may be ready for a sewing machine. A small, lightweight machine with sufficient capacity to deliver results on basic sewing projects may be the optimal choice.

The Magicfly Mini sewing machine is a mechanical, electrical machine that works on AC power or on batteries. With its small size and 2.2-pound weight, it’s conveniently portable, even for children. An included extension table attaches easily to the machine, providing an enlarged work surface. Additionally, the included sewing kit contains 42 pieces of sewing supplies to get beginners started with their new hobby.

This machine offers a double-thread design that automatically reinforces the stitches and allows users to stop seams neatly without tying off the thread. Threading the needle becomes a simple job with directions imprinted on the front of the machine. To keep procedures uncomplicated, the machine offers one stitch that accommodates most basic sewing projects.

The Magicfly Mini starts with either a button or the foot pedal, and a speed button allows users to choose between fast or slow stitching paces. As an important safety feature, the transparent plastic finger guard keeps kids and beginners from experiencing painful needle punctures. Check out our guide for more beginner-friendly picks.

Best budget: SINGER Mechanical MX60 Sewing Machine

Why it made the cut: This Singer sewing machine has the durability of much more expensive models but keeps things simple with an automatic stitch length and width, making it an excellent budget-friendly choice. 

Specs

  • Weight: 12.12 pounds
  • Machine dimensions: 14.57 x 7.12 x 13.6 inches
  • Material: Metal

Pros

  • Six most common stitches, including buttonhole
  • Durable full-metal frame
  • Lightweight and portable

Cons

  • Cannot adjust the stitch length and width

The Singer MX60 saves dollars on extra stitches and features but provides excellent durability and only the most used six stitches. It even has a four-step automatic buttonhole stitch and a buttonhole foot as one of the three included presser feet. 

With a full-metal interior frame, this machine is made to last, yet its compact size remains lightweight and portable. It’s the kind of machine you can take to a friend’s house or a sewing class. If you’re looking for a cheap sewing machine, it’s reasonably priced as well.

This small sewing machine has a feature that’s both a pro and a con. It automatically adjusts the stitch length and width, which is to say you can’t change them. That’s one less step for you to worry about, but there are times when you’ll miss that feature. For example, sewing thick fabrics often works better with some extra stitch length. A zigzag stitch may need to be narrower or wider for different fabrics, too. So, for beginners, it’s one less thing to worry about, but you might miss it when you get more experience.

Things to consider before buying the best sewing machines

Purchasing a sewing machine is not an offhand decision. With numerous options available on today’s market, shoppers may consider several criteria before making a choice. Avid sewists with advanced skills may select a sewing machine with advanced, high-tech capabilities, but a beginner or occasional user might prefer a simple model with straightforward operating procedures. Here’s what to consider before choosing a machine for yourself:

Mechanical vs. computerized

Hobbyists who learned to sew on mechanical models feel more comfortable with these types of sewing machines. However, computerized models offer time-saving and convenient automated functions.

Mechanical sewing machines have mechanical dials, levels, and buttons that control stitch selection, stitch length, stitch width, and tension settings. These models cost less, weigh less, and offer simplicity of use. Mechanical models are also easier to maintain and clean because there’s no computer involved. However, they have a smaller stitch selection and may not offer as many functions. 

Computerized sewing machines have a digital display and hundreds of stitch options. The most advanced machines may also have a touchscreen to scroll through menus or download embroidery patterns. The more common ones have buttons that let you scroll through the stitches and make adjustments to length and width. These machines offer more of everything, including dollar signs on the price tag. The downside is they aren’t always the easiest to use, and there is the possibility of computer problems, which take more than a good cleaning to fix. 

Number of built-in stitch choices

Highly creative and complex sewing projects require a wide array of decorative and utilitarian stitches. On the other hand, a limited selection of stitches will suffice for most sewing tasks.

The array of included accessories

Sewing machine manufacturers include functional accessories with their products. For example, an array of accessory presser feet allows users to accomplish a variety of sewing tasks. Shoppers may consider the accessory packages included with various sewing machine options.

Weight, size, and portability

Shoppers may consider where the machine will be used, how often it must be transported from one location to another, and the size of an available storage area. Lightweight machines are more portable, but heavy-duty sewing projects may require heavier sewing machines.

Purpose 

What do you plan on sewing? Making garments is different from quilting or embroidery. Some models let you do it all from a single machine, while others are more specialized. A standard sewing machine can do embroidery and quilting, but it won’t have presser feet and stitch settings that make quilting or embroidery easier and more precise. 

Skill level

The majority of sewing uses two stitches—a straight stitch and a zigzag stitch. Beginners don’t need more than that either, which makes buying a machine with hundreds of stitches unnecessary. A simple model with a few basic stitches and a buttonhole stitch will take care of the majority of sewing needs. However, as you gain skills and expand your sewing repertoire, you may want a more advanced set of stitch options. Advanced sewists may want to download their own patterns directly onto the machine, a feature that’s only found on the most advanced embroidery or quilting sewing machines. 

Automatic buttonhole

It might seem strange to base your sewing machine choice on a single feature. But if there’s one feature most people find they miss, it’s an automatic buttonhole feature. Buttonholes are notorious for their difficulty. A machine with this automatic feature does the work for you. It’s still a process and takes some practice, but if you are doing any sewing with a buttonhole, you’re going to need this feature. You might have to do a couple of practice rounds to get the right placement, but an automatic buttonhole and buttonhole foot will do the rest of the work for you. 

FAQs

Q: How much does a sewing machine cost?

The cost of a sewing machine can range from less than $130 for basic models to more than $1,600 for sewing machines that perform many functions. Options like The Brother CS6000i Sewing and Quilting Machine are good for both beginners and will continue to be useful for people as they develop their sewing skills.

Q: Can you embroider with a sewing machine?

You can embroider with a sewing machine. It’s not as easy, exact, nor will a standard machine have as many options as an embroidery machine. You’ll need an embroidery hoop, embroidery thread, and a tutorial (there are many free ones online) to create your first embroidered creation with a standard machine. 

Q: Who invented the sewing machine? 

Thomas Saint invented the first sewing machine in 1790. However, there’s only evidence of the first sewing machine, not an actual model still in existence. Saint’s original design wasn’t widespread for many years until improvements in the design made it practical for widespread use in the clothing industry. 

Q: How to set up a sewing machine? 

Sewing machine designs vary from model to model. However, there are some universal features involved in the setup process. First, place the sewing machine on a sturdy, flat surface. Plug the pedal into the machine. Some models have the electrical cord and pedal on the same cord, while others have separate cords for each. Before turning on the machine, thread the needle following the instruction manual or guide imprinted on the machine (a common feature on modern sewing machines). Drop the bobbin in, pull its thread through, and choose your stitch. From there, you should be ready to go. 

Q: What are the best sewing machine brands? 

SINGER and Brother emerged as the most reliable brands on the U.S. market, demonstrating quality over many years of service. BERNINA is also a dependable and well-known brand offering high-end sewing machines at more expensive prices.

Q: What is the oldest sewing machine brand? 

The SINGER brand started in 1851, when Isaac Singer patented his sewing machine invention.

Q: What are the basic types of sewing machines? 

Mechanical sewing machines are electrical machines with simple dials and knobs for making adjustments. Electronic and computerized sewing machines offer many built-in stitch options, automated functions, touch screens, and LCD displays as well as programming for intricate embroidery projects.

Final thoughts on the best sewing machines

When selecting a sewing machine, shoppers may begin with an assessment of their personalized sewing needs. Numerous product options available at various price points suit those who sew occasionally for clothing repairs and simple home decor, as well as those who complete large, complex sewing projects on a regular basis. Shoppers may evaluate their level of competence and interest in advancement in the art of sewing before investing in a sewing machine. The Brother CS6000i Sewing and Quilting Machine provides a balance of features with ease of use that make it our top choice. Beginners can grow and use it for years, while advanced sewists will get a high-quality machine with an array of stitches and a wide sewing table. However, if you’re looking for the best sewing machine that can take heavy use daily, including heavy fabrics, look no further than the SINGER 4423 Heavy Duty Sewing Machine.

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best sewing machines in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best sewing machines for beginners in 2023 https://www.popsci.com/gear/best-sewing-machine-for-beginners/ Thu, 12 Oct 2023 21:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=579253
A lineup of the best sewing machines for beginners on a white background
Amanda Reed

Sewing is a popular hobby that enables you to make your own apparel, even as a beginner.

The post The best sewing machines for beginners in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A lineup of the best sewing machines for beginners on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Best overall A Singer MX 231 Sewing Machine on a blue and white background Singer MX 231 Sewing Machine
SEE IT

Here’s a dependable machine with convenient features to launch your new sewing hobby.

Best high-end A Janome Sewist 725S with VIP package on a blue and white background Janome Sewist 725S with VIP package
SEE IT

This higher-priced, mechanical machine offers expanded features along with ease of operation.

Best budget A Brother XM2701 Sewing Machine on a blue and white background Brother XM2701 Sewing Machine
SEE IT

This frugal choice facilitates success in sewing projects, even for beginners. 

Kudos to you for deciding that you’ll learn how to sew and taking your first step toward picking from the wide range of sewing machines for beginners. It’s a creative hobby that millions of people engage in. Once you learn how to sew, you’ll be able to make fashionable and utilitarian items, including apparel, accessories, craft projects, and home decor pieces. One of the first steps is to acquire a machine that offers ease of operation and maintenance while assisting you in turning out successful sewing projects, even as a beginner. We’ve done the work to delineate an array of excellent choices, giving you a headstart on selecting one of the best sewing machines for beginners.

How we chose the best sewing machines for beginners

Our preparation for this buyers’ guide is based on personal sewing experience and research into the attributes that make a sewing machine suitable for beginners. We began by reading 10 articles written by sewing experts regarding the top choices. Then, we read the product information for 18 likely machine options and narrowed our picks to six models that suit the varying needs of beginning sewists. We researched the product descriptions and specifications included on the manufacturers’ websites and the information retailers provide. And we spent hands-on time with as many models as possible. Recognizing that not all beginners have the same requirements and goals, we endeavored to select an array of beginner-appropriate machines to satisfy varying budgets and purposes.

The best sewing machines for beginners: Reviews & Recommendations

We’ve assembled a list of recommendations for sewing machines that will meet the needs of beginners while providing room for growth in sewing expertise. The machines featured here offer durability, versatility, and ease of use.

Best overall: SINGER MX 231 Sewing Machine 

Singer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The SINGER MX 231 offers ease of use along with versatility to provide beginners with successful outcomes on their sewing projects.

Specs

  • Weight: 11.79 pounds
  • Dimensions: 15.16 x 7.35 x 10.9 inches
  • Number of built-in stitches: 23

Pros 

  • Built-in needle threader
  • One-step buttonhole maker
  • Adjustable presser foot
  • 97 stitch applications
  • SINGER Sewing Assistant App provides 24/7 help

Cons 

  • Not a heavy-duty machine for extra-thick fabrics

As a beginner sewing enthusiast, you’ll want a simple machine yet sophisticated enough to give you pleasing results on your projects. With clearly marked options for stitch adjustments, as well as suitability for use on a wide array of fabrics, the SINGER MX231 mechanical sewing machine is ideal for starting out on your new hobby. 

Several features of this machine will save you time and effort. Using the built-in needle threader, you’re ready to sew in seconds. Then, you can choose from 23 built-in stitches that produce 97 stitch applications. For added customization, the stitch lengths and widths are adjustable.  Use this machine for a variety of sewing projects, as the presser foot adjusts to accommodate thick or thin fabrics. When you’re ready to add buttons to a project, the one-step buttonhole maker is a handy, time-saving feature. 

As a beginner, you’ll want the necessary components to get started. The MX 231 package contains a foot pedal with an electrical cord, bobbins, needles, a thread spool cap, and a darning plate. Additionally, the machine includes three interchangeable presser feet, including a general-purpose foot, a buttonhole foot, and a button sewing foot.

Best high-end: Janome Sewist 725S with VIP package

Janome

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: The Janome Sewist 725S, along with the VIP Package of accessories and interchangeable components, sets you up for sewing success right from the start. 

Specs

  • Weight: 14.8 pounds
  • Dimensions: 16 x 11.9 x 7 inches 
  • Number of built-in stitches: 23

Pros 

  • Snap-on presser feet with high foot lift for thick fabrics
  • Built-in needle threader
  • Jam-proof bobbin system
  • 1-step buttonhole maker
  • Hardcover for storage and portability

Cons 

  • Somewhat expensive

If your finances allow a more high-end purchase, the Janome Sewist 725S offers simple and straightforward operation for beginners combined with ample features for growing your craft. It’s a mechanical machine with well-marked and conveniently located levers and dials to adjust multiple machine functions for enjoyable sewing. 

Select from among 23 built-in stitches, and then fine-tune the stitch length and width with the turn of a dial. An additional dial allows you to adjust the tension and the presser-foot pressure to ensure smooth sewing with various types of fabric. With free-arm capability, you can sew hard-to-reach areas like cuffs and sleeves. Additionally, a drop-feed system facilitates the type of free-motion sewing necessary for quilting. The see-through bobbin cover shows your bobbin thread and the jam-proof system keeps the bobbin from becoming snarled. 

The VIP package includes a hard cover to protect the machine for transport and storage. Additionally, the package contains an assortment of needles, bobbins, large and small spool holders, a quilt guide, a seam ripper, a screwdriver, and more. The pack of six included presser feet includes a seam foot, zigzag foot, overedge foot, zipper foot, blind hem foot, and automatic buttonhole foot. 

Best for kids and teens: SINGER MX60 Sewing Machine

Singer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: Tweens and teens just learning to sew can operate the SINGER MX60 mechanical machine to produce rewarding outcomes on their creative projects. 

Specs

  • Weight: 12.12 pounds
  • Dimensions: 14.57 x 7.12 x 13.6 inches
  • Number of built-in stitches: 6

Pros 

  • 57 stitch applications
  • Simple, easy to operate
  • Pre-set stitch lengths and widths
  • 4-step buttonhole maker

Cons 

  • Does not feature an automatic needle threader
  • Does not feature a one-step buttonhole function

Many sewing enthusiasts trace their roots in the craft back to their childhood and teenage years. When kids are learning to use a sewing machine, it’s best to keep the operating procedures basic and simple, and that’s exactly what the SINGER MX60 does. In fact, we chose this model as the best budget option in our roundup of SINGER sewing machines

Start by threading the machine, following the guidelines that are clearly marked on the machine’s surface. Then, turn a prominent dial to select your desired stitch pattern. The six built-in stitches produce 57 stitch applications, ranging from straight seams to decorative stitches and buttonholes. Lengths and widths of the stitches are pre-set, so there’s no guesswork. However, beginners can fine-tune the thread tension to produce smooth lines of stitching on various types of fabrics. A four-step buttonhole function yields consistent results every time. 

This machine is simple enough to make maintenance tasks easy. Although it’s lightweight and portable, the inner frame is fabricated from sturdy metal. It remains stationary on your work surface to prevent stitch skipping. Complementary accessories include an all-purpose foot, a buttonhole foot, a zipper foot, bobbins, needles, and a seam ripper. 

Best computerized: Janome C30 Sewing Machine

Janome

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’re comfortable with technology, you might want a computerized machine like the Janome C30 for your beginner sewing experiences. 

Specs

  • Weight: 10.4 pounds
  • Dimensions: 15 x 6.4 x 11 Inches
  • Number of built-in stitches: 30

Pros 

  • One-step buttonhole maker
  • Jam-proof, drop-in bobbin
  • LCD display is easy to read
  • Lightweight and portable
  • Strong, aluminum inner frame

Cons 

  • Not as easy to maintain as a mechanical machine
  • Extensive options may be confusing for beginners

Many sewing experts advise beginners to start on mechanical sewing machines. They are more straightforward to operate as well as easier to maintain. However, some new sewing hobbyists like a computerized machine’s versatility and wide-ranging creative possibilities. The Janome C30 computerized sewing machine is a good choice for beginners who enjoy technology. An array of included presser feet and accessories facilitates your success right out of the box.

Choose from among 30 built-in stitches with numbers that appear brightly on the LCD screen.  You can thread this machine with one hand and let the automatic needle threader handle the hard part. The bobbin drops in from the top and features a clear cover to monitor your thread. Additionally, the bobbin system is jam-proof to prevent frustrating snags. 

With the C30, you’ll find push-button ease of operation at your fingertips—the locking-stitch button ties off the end of your thread. Then, you can hit the reverse button to reinforce the seam. A needle up/down button instantly positions your needle for pivoting the fabric. The drop feed mechanism lowers the feed dogs to allow free-motion sewing, and the storage compartment detaches to allow free-arm sewing of sleeves, cuffs, and pants legs. 

Best for beginner quilters: SINGER 9960 Sewing and Quilting Machine

Singer

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: If you’re learning to sew to make quilts, the SINGER Quantum Stylist 9960 will aid you in developing the necessary skills.

Specs

  • Weight: 20 pounds
  • Dimensions: 17.25 x 8.25 x 12 inches
  • Number of built-in stitches: 600

Pros 

  • Computerized with LCD display screen
  • 13 one-step buttonhole styles
  • Large selection of stitches, including alphanumeric fonts
  • Automatic needle threader
  • Top drop-in bobbin

Cons 

  • Heavier than many other sewing machines
  • May be overly complex for some beginners

Most beginners start with a simple, mechanical sewing machine. But if you have your heart set on quilt-making, you might want to start with a machine to help you realize that dream. The SINGER Quantum Stylist 9960 combines ease of use and multiple computerized features for quilting artistry and routine sewing and crafting projects. In fact, we featured it as the best overall choice in our roundup of sewing machines for quilting.

This machine offers 600 built-in stitches that produce 1,172 stitch applications, including lettering for monograms. The built-in stitches include five alphanumeric fonts and 13 versions of one-step buttonholes. With the touch of a button, you can choose decorative as well as straight stitches that present possibilities for sewing on a wide range of fabrics, including stretchy types. 

A top drop-in bobbin is easy to monitor, and the automatic needle threader saves time and eye strain. This machine will sew at a maximum speed of 850 stitches per minute so that you can turn out projects quickly. The accompanying accessories include 13 different presser feet to accomplish a wide array of sewing tasks ranging from quilting to embroidery and button sewing. 

Best budget: Brother XM2701 Sewing Machine

Brother

SEE IT

Why it made the cut: While you’re a beginner, it’s wise to invest frugally in a straightforward and reliable piece of equipment like the Brother XM2701 mechanical sewing machine. 

Specs

  • Weight: 12.6 pounds
  • Dimensions: 12.1 x 5.9 x 15.3 inches
  • Number of built-in stitches: 27

Pros 

  • Budget-friendly price
  • Clearly marked stitch selection dial
  • 63 stitch applications
  • Drop-in bobbin
  • Automatic needle threader

Cons 

  • Plastic construction
  • Not for extra-thick, heavy fabrics

In our roundup of Brother sewing machines, we selected the XM2701 as best overall. If you’re just getting started in sewing, you may want a reasonably priced machine that offers user-friendly operating procedures. The Brother XM2701 features a clearly marked dial on the front, showing the 27 built-in stitch choices for various decorative and utilitarian sewing needs. With these available stitches, the machine produces 63 stitch applications. 

Additionally, there’s an automatic threader that saves time and eliminates eye strain as you thread the needle. For added convenience, the drop-in bobbin is easy to see, and its jam-resistant functioning prevents frustrating snags and snarled threads. The automatic bobbin winding system lets you get to work quickly without wasting time on a tedious set-up task. 

The work area on this machine is well-lit with an LED bulb. To increase its versatility, you can add the detachable free arm for hemming pants, sewing sleeves, and other in-the-round projects. The package includes six interchangeable feet to facilitate numerous sewing tasks. These include a narrow hemmer, a zigzag foot, a zipper foot, a blind stitch foot, a buttonhole maker, and a button sewing foot.

What to consider when buying the best sewing machines for beginners

As a beginning sewist, you’ll want to start with a machine that is simple enough to operate conveniently without confusion or frustration. On the other hand, you don’t want to outgrow your machine in a short period of time. As a result, you might consider a sewing machine that offers enough advanced features to provide room for growth as you take on expanded projects. 

Portability, size, and storage

Now that you’re starting a sewing hobby, you’ll want to consider where you’ll use the machine and how you’ll store it. The weight will be an important factor if you need to move the machine every time you use it. The average weight of a sewing machine ranges from 10 pounds to 20 pounds. You’ll need a soft or hardcover to store the machine and keep it dust-free. A hard-sided cover is best for protecting the machine from damage.

Built-in stitches and automated functions

The built-in stitches in sewing machines range from straight seams to decorative zig-zags and buttonholes. Each machine offers a number of built-in stitches that may be modified in length and width to produce an even larger number of stitch applications. Special features like an automatic needle threader and a one-step buttonhole function save time and effort to make sewing more pleasurable.

Presser feet and other accessories

As you shop for a sewing machine, take note of the included components and accessories. Machines with multiple stitch functions will include various presser feet for specific actions like making buttonholes or attaching zippers. Additionally, you’ll need the necessary tools for your new hobby, including bobbins, needles, a seam ripper, and more.

FAQs 

Q: Which type of sewing machine is best for learning to sew?

Look for a machine that offers basic, straightforward operating procedures and easy maintenance steps. On the other hand, you want enough advanced functions to make sewing pleasurable and to produce attractive results on your projects. 

Q: What is the difference between SINGER and Brother sewing machines?

Both companies enjoy excellent reputations, with more than 100 years of experience in the sewing machine business. SINGER is reputed to be more solidly constructed, durable, and long-lasting than Brother.

Q: What’s the best way to learn how to sew?

You can learn how to sew from a friend or family member or take an in-person sewing class. Online learning options include sewing classes, YouTube videos, and self-paced tutorials. 

Q: Can I do my own sewing machine maintenance?

Mechanical machines are more DIY-friendly than computerized models. Pay attention to dusting, lint removal, cleaning, oiling, and lubricating. You should perform these tasks on a regular schedule.

Q: What type of sewing project should I attempt as a beginner?

Get started with a simple project requiring straight seams and not including buttons or zippers. A square or rectangular pillow cover is a great first project.

Final thoughts on the best sewing machines for beginners

To meet the needs of beginning sewists, the SINGER MX231 sewing machine offers easy-to-use functions along with durable construction and simple maintenance requirements. Additionally, it provides enough advanced features to satisfy beginners who are expanding their skills in sewing. 

Why trust us

Popular Science started writing about technology more than 150 years ago. There was no such thing as “gadget writing” when we published our first issue in 1872, but if there was, our mission to demystify the world of innovation for everyday readers means we would have been all over it. Here in the present, PopSci is fully committed to helping readers navigate the increasingly intimidating array of devices on the market right now.

Our writers and editors have combined decades of experience covering and reviewing consumer electronics. We each have our own obsessive specialties—from high-end audio to video games to cameras and beyond—but when we’re reviewing devices outside of our immediate wheelhouses, we do our best to seek out trustworthy voices and opinions to help guide people to the very best recommendations. We know we don’t know everything, but we’re excited to live through the analysis paralysis that internet shopping can spur so readers don’t have to.

The post The best sewing machines for beginners in 2023 appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to watch Saturday’s ‘ring of fire’ eclipse from wherever you are https://www.popsci.com/diy/how-to-watch-annular-solar-eclipse-2023/ Thu, 12 Oct 2023 12:05:56 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=579091
A young Black person with short dyed-blonde hair wearing a yellow jacket and eclipse glasses while looking up at an eclipse in front of some residential buildings.
Always make sure you protect your eyes when you look at an eclipse. LeoPatrizi / Getty Images

Thanks to livestreams, anyone can watch the most dramatic scenes from the upcoming solar eclipse.

The post How to watch Saturday’s ‘ring of fire’ eclipse from wherever you are appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A young Black person with short dyed-blonde hair wearing a yellow jacket and eclipse glasses while looking up at an eclipse in front of some residential buildings.
Always make sure you protect your eyes when you look at an eclipse. LeoPatrizi / Getty Images

On Saturday, October 14, you’ll be able to watch an annular “ring of fire” eclipse as the moon passes in front of the sun at a distance where it’s unable to cover all of Earth’s nearest star. But only an exclusive crowd will be able to witness the event in its fully blazing glory—unless you know where to look.

Although it may be too late to travel to one of the best locations to watch this year’s final solar eclipse, nearly everyone in all 50 US states will have a chance to catch at least a glimpse (sorry western Alaska and western Hawaii). The 125-mile-wide path of annularity, however, will stretch from Oregon to Texas and cross just nine states before continuing on to Central and South America. You’ll only be able to see the sun form a fiery halo around the moon along that route. If you’re outside its range, you can simply load up one of several official livestreams to see what you’re missing.

How to watch the October 14, 2023 eclipse in person

The path of annularity will enter the US in Oregon at 12:13 p.m. Eastern Time (9:13 a.m. Pacific Time) and leave Texas at 1:30 p.m. ET (12:03 p.m. Central Time). The “ring of fire,” will pass over 29 national park sites and dozens of other pieces of public land. Worldwide, about 33 million people will be able to see it firsthand, while everyone else will have to settle for a less dramatic experience.

No matter where you are, make sure you’re wearing protective glasses to avoid damaging your eyes if you plan to look directly at the eclipse, or make a pinhole camera to project the event onto a sheet of paper. And of course, weather conditions may make it hard or impossible to see anything, so take note of the forecast.

If you want to know exactly what to expect where you are, astronomy website Time and Date has an interactive map that will help you set your eclipse-viewing plans. Once you’ve opened the map, click the magnifying glass icon on the left to open the search menu. Type the name of any city or town into the search bar and select it from the list that populates underneath. A pin will appear on the map and a box full of eclipse data will show up under the search bar.

That data will show you how much of the moon will cover the sun at that location, when the eclipse will begin and end there, when maximum coverage will occur, and the weather forecast for that spot on the globe. If you click the play icon next to the duration, you’ll go to another page where you can watch a simulation of what the eclipse will look like at that exact spot.

How to watch the annular “ring of fire” eclipse online

Just because you aren’t part of the 0.41 percent of people in the world who will be able to physically bear witness to the celestial spectacle doesn’t mean you’re stuck with whatever’s happening in the sky above you. All you have to do is turn your eyes away from the wonders of the natural world and look at a screen—there are four livestreams we think will offer an exquisite show.

The Exploratorium’s livestreams

The San Francisco-based Exploratorium will be broadcasting two livestreams starting at 8 a.m. PT (11 a.m. ET), one from their telescopes in Valley of the Gods, Utah, and another from their telescopes in Ely, Nevada. They will also broadcast Spanish-language coverage of the event starting at 9 a.m. PT (12 p.m. ET) on YouTube.

According to Time and Date, annularity—the “ring of fire”— will last 4 minutes and 46 seconds at the Valley of the Gods. There are morning clouds in the forecast, though, so the view might be obscured, but this has the potential to be the most scenic livestream on our list. 

  • Eclipse start: 9:10 a.m. Mountain Time (11:10 a.m. ET)
  • “Ring of fire” start: 10:29 a.m. MT (12:29 p.m. ET)

In Ely, meanwhile, annularity will last for 3 minutes and 38 seconds. The weather is expected to be partly cloudy, so the eclipse could be hard to see.

  • Eclipse start: 8:07 a.m. PT (11:07 a.m. ET)
  • “Ring of fire” start: 9:24 a.m. PT (12:24 p.m. ET)

Time and Date’s livestream

Time and Date’s eclipse chasers will be broadcasting a livestream from Roswell, New Mexico. There, according to the website’s own interactive map, the annularity will last for 4 minutes and 41 seconds. It’s expected to be sunny there, so the view should be clear.

  • Eclipse start: 9:15 a.m. MT (11:15 a.m. ET)
  • “Ring of fire” start: 10:38 a.m. MT (12:38 p.m. ET)

NASA’s livestreams

NASA, of course, will also be livestreaming the eclipse, with feeds from Kerrville, Texas, and Albuquerque, New Mexico, starting at 11:30 a.m. ET. Annularity will last 4 minutes and 14 seconds at Kerrville, according to Time and Date.

  • Eclipse start: 10:22 a.m. CT (11:22 a.m. ET)
  • “Ring of fire” start: 11:50 a.m. CT (12:50 p.m. ET)

At Albuquerque, which is supposed to have sunny skies during the eclipse, annularity will last 4 minutes and 48 seconds.

  • Eclipse start: 9:13 a.m. MT (11:13 a.m. ET)
  • “Ring of fire” start: 10:34 a.m. MT (12:34 p.m. ET)

The space agency will also be broadcasting a live feed of three rocket launches that are part of its Atmospheric Perturbations around the Eclipse Path (APEP) mission to study how Earth’s ionosphere responds to a sudden drop in sunlight. You might want to cue that one up in a different browser window alongside the eclipse, or set up picture-in-picture on your device.

Whatever you do, just know that your scheduling calculations and technological machinations are probably way less complicated than all the math scientists do to predict the paths of future eclipses.

The post How to watch Saturday’s ‘ring of fire’ eclipse from wherever you are appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Get scary big savings on Halloween costumes and decorations thanks to October Prime Day https://www.popsci.com/gear/halloween-amazon-prime-day-deals-october-2023/ Wed, 11 Oct 2023 22:55:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=578945
dinosaur costume
Amazon

The only thing you should be afraid of is missing these Prime Big Deal Days discounts.

The post Get scary big savings on Halloween costumes and decorations thanks to October Prime Day appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
dinosaur costume
Amazon

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Halloween is exactly 20 days away. If you’re a procrastinator like me, you most definitely don’t have a costume yet and haven’t thought about treats or tricks. Stock up on decor items and grab a costume for extra cheap thanks to Amazon’s October Prime Day, which ends today.

Note: You’ll have to be an Amazon Prime member to take advantage of most of these deals, so be sure you’re signed up before making a purchase.

Rubie’s Adult Original Inflatable Dinosaur Costume $50 (Was $81.99)

Rubie’s

SEE IT

Cause an uproar at the next Halloween party you attend with this T-Rex costume. Sure, we don’t know if dinosaurs actually ruled the Earth, but that doesn’t mean you can’t cause an uproar at the next Halloween party you attend with this T-Rex costume. Simply attach the battery, blow it up, step into it, and bam: You have an interesting, fun costume. Bonus points if you grab someone to dress up as Laura Dern or Jeff Goldblum in the OG Jurassic Park.

REESE’S Milk Chocolate Peanut Butter Pumpkins, Halloween Candy Packs, 1.2 oz (36 count) $23 (was $28)

Amazon

SEE IT

You can be the hit of the block when it comes to trick-or-treat candy or you can eat them by yourself while binge-watching horror movies. Both are good options. Plus, you’re saving money, so it’s totally responsible.

Triumpeek Halloween Inflatable Cooler, 56″ Inflatable Jack-O’-Lantern Cactus Ice Bucket $17 (was $23)

Amazon

SEE IT

OK, so this is technically a Halloween decoration, but I can’t imagine why you wouldn’t want to display this all year round. It’s perfect. I love him.

If a Late Cretaceous costume isn’t in the cards, here are more Halloween costumes and decor deals that you can snag during Amazon Prime Big Deal Days:

Costume deals

Decor deals

Halloween candy and treats

Accessorizing other activities? Take a look at our lists of Big Deal Days discounts as well as bargain bin buys.

Want more deals delivered to your inbox weekly? Sign up for PopSci’s Deals newsletter and save money on stuff you’ll really use.

The post Get scary big savings on Halloween costumes and decorations thanks to October Prime Day appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The best October Prime Day tool deals from Ryobi, Craftsman, DeWalt, and more https://www.popsci.com/gear/tools-amazon-prime-day-deals-october-2023/ Tue, 10 Oct 2023 11:20:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=577924
Tools on sale on a white background
Amanda Reed

Change up your living room on the cheap with these tool deals, part of Amazon's October Prime Big Deal Days.

The post The best October Prime Day tool deals from Ryobi, Craftsman, DeWalt, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Tools on sale on a white background
Amanda Reed

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

The temperature is starting to drop, which means you’re about to spend more time in the great indoors. That may sound alluring to introverts (myself included), but looking at the same walls all the time can make you go a little stir-crazy. Thankfully, tools from 3M, DeWalt, and more are on sale as part of Prime Big Deal Days—happening today and tomorrow—to build up your home improvement arsenal.

You’ll have to be an Amazon Prime member to take advantage of most of these deals, so be sure you’re signed up before making a purchase.

CRAFTSMAN 12 Gallon 6 Peak HP Wet/Dry Vac $142.99 (Was $179.99)

Craftsman

SEE IT

Clean-up is the most tedious part of any DIY project—make it easy with a shop vac. This one from Craftsman holds 12 gallons of crust, dust, and crud, and even doubles as a leaf blower. It can suck up wet and dry messes and is incredibly maneuverable. A lid-mounted accessory caddy with hose management keeps everything in line so you don’t lose parts or trip over the hose.

Check out these other tool deals happening during Prime Big Deal Days:

Craftsman tool deals

Ryobi tool deals

Dremel tool deals

3M tool deals

DeWalt tool deals

Here’s a larger list of DeWalt tool deals

Accessorizing other activities? Take a look at our ongoing list of Big Deal Days discounts.

Want more deals delivered to your inbox weekly? Sign up for PopSci’s Deals newsletter and save money on stuff you’ll really use.

The post The best October Prime Day tool deals from Ryobi, Craftsman, DeWalt, and more appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to give more WiFi to the devices that need it the most https://www.popsci.com/diy/prioritize-devices-on-your-wifi-network/ Thu, 19 Aug 2021 14:35:58 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=390625
A WiFi router on a table against a gray wall, behind a plant.
Now you have a reason to love your router. Misha Feshchak / Unsplash

When you need top WiFi speeds, you can give some gadgets a VIP pass.

The post How to give more WiFi to the devices that need it the most appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A WiFi router on a table against a gray wall, behind a plant.
Now you have a reason to love your router. Misha Feshchak / Unsplash

Most modern homes have quite a few WiFi-connected gadgets trying to access the web at the same time. This usually results in strained broadband connections, especially when it comes to demanding activities like online gaming or video streaming

To help you manage the load, some routers (like those manufactured by Google, Netgear, Eero, and many others) offer a feature called Quality of Service (QoS). In simple terms, it lets you prioritize certain devices and types of traffic on your WiFi network, so they’re first in line for a high-speed connection whenever bandwidth becomes limited. 

Your router manufacturer may give it a different name, but a quick dig into the manual or an online search should tell you whether or not your particular device offers QoS. If it does, it’s worth getting familiar with the feature and what it can do, as prioritizing devices on your WiFi network can help reduce buffering times and avoid dropped connections when it’s most important.

What is Quality of Service, and how does it work?

The term “quality of service” has been around for decades, and it applies to all kinds of networks. When used in relation to your home’s WiFi, it means marking certain devices or types of activity as being more important than others. Whenever your router is chopping up your WiFi into individual slices, these marked gadgets and apps get first dibs.

Imagining pie slices is one way to think about QoS. Without it, everything connected to your router gets a similarly sized slice: Your PlayStation 5, the laptop the kids are using, the smart TV in the living room, and so on. When you enable QoS, you can give out bigger slices to that important Zoom call. Consequently, less important tasks, like those Windows updates downloading in the background, get smaller slices.

That said, using QoS to prioritize devices on your WiFi network doesn’t necessarily guarantee that those gadgets will always get a healthy, robust internet connection. It also doesn’t mean that the less important hardware on your network will slow to a crawl. A lot of what actually happens depends on the internet speed in your home.

[Related: 6 router settings you should change right now]

Video calls, online gaming, and streaming video tend to be first in line when you enable QoS. Other online tasks, from checking email to downloading updates, usually get reduced priority. 

Ultimately, how you use QoS is up to you, but your router will determine what type of control you get and how much. Some routers let you prioritize certain devices, such as gaming consoles, while others let you prioritize types of internet traffic, such as video calls. Some let you do both. If you’re shopping for a router upgrade, this is definitely a spec you should look out for.

How to prioritize devices on a WiFi network with QoS

Every router handles QoS differently, but we can provide a few examples so you can see how it works. 

More advanced routers let you prioritize particular devices, apps, and tasks, while simpler ones just offer priority to audio and video streaming. 

If you have a Google Nest Wi-Fi mesh networking setup at home, for example, you can open up the Google Home app on your phone, tap Favorites, then Wifi, and choose Devices to see a list of the gadgets using your network. Select the device you want to prioritize, tap Prioritize device, decide how long you want it to receive VIP treatment, and hit Save to finish. Keep in mind that you can only give priority to one device at a time.

You can also use the Google Home app to choose the types of activity you want the network to put first. First, tap Wi-Fi, hit the cog icon to open Settings, and choose Preferred activities to tell the network what to prioritize. Your choices will include Video conferencing and Gaming, and the router will continue to give your picks bigger slices of the WiFi pie until you turn them off again.

[Related: What to do when your device won’t connect to WiFi]

If you’ve got a Netgear router, on the other hand, you’ll need to open a web browser, head to routerlogin.com, and log in using your router’s admin credentials (check the documentation that came with the router if you’re not sure what these are). From there, head to Advanced, Setup, and QoS setup to start making some changes.

Pick Upstream QoS, then Setup QoS rule, and finally Add Priority Rule. You can choose Online Gaming to make sure your games stay as lag-free as possible, Applications to prioritize a particular web app, Ethernet LAN port to specify a device connected to a router port, or MAC Address to single out a device hooked up to the network via WiFi.

This story has been updated. It was originally published in 2021.

The post How to give more WiFi to the devices that need it the most appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Why you should be eating more pumpkin this fall https://www.popsci.com/health/pumpkin-health-benefits/ Tue, 10 Oct 2023 22:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=578428
Person cooking whole pumpkin and roasting pumpkin seeds to get pumpkin health benefits
That delicious orange flesh packs a lot of beneficial nutrients for the immune system. DepositPhotos

Don't miss out on the healthy benefits of this gourd-geous season.

The post Why you should be eating more pumpkin this fall appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Person cooking whole pumpkin and roasting pumpkin seeds to get pumpkin health benefits
That delicious orange flesh packs a lot of beneficial nutrients for the immune system. DepositPhotos

The next time you’re at the grocery store, make sure to grab an entire pumpkin or two on the way out. Like the changing leaves and weather, this is the perfect opportunity to add some variety to your diet. And what’s more in season now than pumpkins?

“Seasonal eating is really powerful in that the earth controls the type of foods our bodies need at specific seasons of the year,” says Melanie Murphy Richter, a registered dietitian nutritionist and nutrition physiology instructor at the University of California, Irvine. “Pumpkin is one of the top foods with essential minerals and nutrients to support our mental health and immune system as we shift from summer to fall.”

Not only does pumpkin spice up your diet, but the vibrant flavors can turn a bland meal into a festive one for you and the family. But it all depends on how you’re using pumpkin in your meals.

A nutrient-rich food

As fall and winter approach, the cold weather and lack of sunlight can weaken our immune system. It’s also the time when flu, RSV, and other seasonal viruses come into circulation. Even COVID cases seem to increase in the winter with everyone huddled indoors. As part of the gourd family, pumpkins are chock-full of nutrients that support immune function, including maintaining the cells used as your body’s natural defenses. 

Take the iconic orange color of the fruit—it isn’t just for show. The hue is evidence of high amounts of beta-carotene, a precursor to vitamin A. Vitamin A is important for vision, immunity, and keeping organs working properly. As a fat-soluble vitamin, Murphy Richter says it also helps the body better absorb other nutrients we eat from food. 

Pumpkins are also rich in vitamin C, which is a powerful antioxidant that can help neutralize oxidative stress—an imbalance between free radicals and antioxidants in the body that can damage cells and DNA. “These antioxidants help protect the body against free radicals, reducing the risk of chronic diseases, such as heart disease and certain cancers,” says Omaira Ferreira, a functional diagnostic nutrition practitioner and founder of Ferreira Functional Health. While still evolving, wider research on antioxidants has largely found the same benefits.

Another immune benefit of pumpkins is the high dietary fiber content. Murphy Richter says that 70 percent of our immune system is held within our gut, so keeping the gut running smoothly with high-fiber and prebiotic foods like pumpkin ultimately supports our immune health.

Fits with many diets

The end-of-the-year holidays can be a tough time for people who are on specialized diets to manage their health. Fortunately, pumpkin is a great option to add to any meal without worrying about excess cholesterol or blood sugar spikes.

For people with diabetes, Murphy Richter says the main macronutrient to be careful of are carbohydrates. Not only are pumpkins low in carbs, “they’re a great source of dietary fiber, which aids in digestion and helps maintain a healthy weight,” explains Ferreira. “Fiber also helps regulate blood sugar levels and promotes a feeling of fullness, which can prevent overeating.”

Pumpkin is also considered a heart-healthy food for its high potassium content, Murphy Richter says. Potassium is important in regulating blood pressure and keeping a steady heart rhythm.

Pumpkin soup topped with pumpkin seeds and herbs in a blue bowl
Pumpkin soup can satisfy your creamy, savory cravings. DepositPhotos

Think outside the pie box

Not all pumpkin products are created equal. Just because it has the word pumpkin in it, doesn’t mean it carries the same benefits. (I’m looking at you, pumpkin spice latte). Unfortunately, pumpkin pies fall into this category. It’s not so much the pumpkin content, but all the delicious additions for baking purposes. “While pumpkin puree itself is nutritious, the addition of sweeteners and a pastry crust increases the calorie and sugar content. Moderation is key when enjoying pumpkin pie,” advises Ferreira.

Pumpkin candy corn might be an even worse worst offender. Despite the name, these bite-sized sweets have no actual fruit and are instead filled with artificial flavoring and sugars. 

If you’re in a time crunch or don’t want to deal with a lot leftovers and scraps, Murphy Richter says there’s nothing wrong with using canned pumpkin puree. It’s a cheaper and more  shelf-stable alternative for when you want to add pumpkin to a meal. 

The only caveat, warns Murphy Richter, is that canned pumpkin is not going to be as nutritious as a fresh one. That’s because purees usually come from sugar pumpkins, which are smaller and less fibrous alternatives to the big ones you pick at a farm. They’re bred to be denser and sweeter, which makes them easier to use when making baked goods. That said, “the general nutrient profile is still quite good in canned pumpkin,” explains Murphy Richter.

Easy ways to add pumpkin to your diet

The great thing about pumpkin is that it doesn’t take much to incorporate it into your fall diet. Ferreira recommends whipping up a pumpkin soup by blending roasted pumpkin with vegetable broth. For added richness and flavor, try adding cinnamon, nutmeg, and a touch of coconut milk.

Pumpkin smoothies are another tasty and heart-healthy food. Mix the fruit with bananas, apples, and some almond milk or yogurt for a creamy and nutritious fall drink to start the day. A second breakfast option is adding a bit of pumpkin puree when making oatmeal on the stove. Top it off with cinnamon or maple syrup and it’ll taste “like a little delicious pumpkin pie,” says Murphy Richter.

If you’re looking for a side dish, roasted pumpkin is the way to go. Ferreira says to cut the gourds into cubes and season them with olive oil, salt, or other spices such as cumin or rosemary. Throw them in the oven and cook until tender. “Roasted pumpkin makes a delicious side dish or a colorful addition to salads.” 

Finally, when you’re carving out a pumpkin, don’t throw out the seeds. Pumpkin seeds have a host of nutrients with high amounts of zinc and phosphorus. “I’m a huge pumpkin seed fan and I always roast several batches of them throughout the season,” says Murphy Richter. If you’re going for a savory taste, she recommends adding garlic, olive oil, and rosemary. For people with a sweet tooth, a dash of cinnamon and sugar can make for a healthy snack to eat throughout the day. A traditional salsa recipe could be fun to try too.

The options are endless. So whether you’re roasting pumpkin seeds or turning a jack-o’-lantern into the centerpiece of your dinner, make this season a delicious one.  

The post Why you should be eating more pumpkin this fall appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Your Apple TV 4K is secretly good for video games https://www.popsci.com/diy/play-games-on-apple-tv/ Tue, 10 Oct 2023 15:30:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=578213
An Apple TV 4K box with a remote next to it, both on a black reflective surface.
Apple's little TV box may not be a gaming console, but it's a good option for mobile games. Omar Rodriguez / Unsplash

Get your favorite iPhone and iPad games on the big screen.

The post Your Apple TV 4K is secretly good for video games appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
An Apple TV 4K box with a remote next to it, both on a black reflective surface.
Apple's little TV box may not be a gaming console, but it's a good option for mobile games. Omar Rodriguez / Unsplash

Gaming might not be the primary reason you bought your Apple TV 4K box, but it’s a nice extra benefit—there’s a huge selection of games you can play on the device.

The main advantage of doing this is that the connected TV screen is much larger than the one on your iPhone or iPad, and if you’ve already bought games on these mobile devices, you won’t have to pay again to play them on the Apple TV 4K.

For more advanced and involved gameplay, you can even hook up a Bluetooth controller, giving you a true console-like experience, even if the selection of games doesn’t quite match the top-tier titles on the PlayStation 5 and Xbox Series X/S.

Getting started

The Apple TV 4K screen resolution options.
Check the display options for your Apple TV 4K before you play any games. Screenshot: Apple

For starters, you need a physical Apple TV 4K device to play games on a connected television. That means this article doesn’t apply to the Apple TV app you might have on your smart TV, or on a streaming dongle you’ve connected to it. The Apple TV app is for movies and shows only, while the Apple TV 4K box is for movies, shows, music, photos, and games.

Your Apple TV 4K box is already set up and ready to play games—though it’s always worth checking that you’re running the very latest tvOS software, which you can do through Settings > System > Software Updates > Update Software. When up to date, you’ll have the latest bug fixes and performance optimizations installed, so the games you pick should run as smoothly as possible.

It’s also worth checking that the Apple TV 4K is outputting video at the best possible quality: 4K resolution, with HDR, at a 60 hertz refresh rate. You can do this via Settings > Video and Audio > Format, though the available formats you see will depend on the TV you’ve connected your Apple box to.

How to find games for the Apple TV 4K

The Apple TV 4K Games menu showing some available games.
There are plenty of games that work on the Apple TV 4K. Screenshot: Apple

You shouldn’t have any trouble finding games to play: Open the App Store (the icon showing a white “A” on a blue background) from the home screen, then scroll across to Games to see what’s available. The store will only show you games that will work on the Apple TV 4K, so there’s no danger of installing something that’s incompatible. Scroll across to Purchased to see games you’ve bought and installed on other Apple devices.

If you subscribe to Apple Arcade for $4.99 a month, you get access to an additional pool of more than 200 games. To find them, you can switch to the Arcade tab in the App Store or use the Apple Arcade shortcut on the home screen (an icon showing a white joystick on a red background). Select any game to see details about it, including the category it’s in and the age rating attached to it.

[Related: 14 tips for your Apple TV 4K]

Because your Apple TV 4K box is connected to a display far bigger than the one on your smartphone or tablet, the games that work best will be those that make full use of that extra screen space. If you need inspiration, the games we’ve enjoyed on the Apple TV 4K include the endless scroller Alto’s Odyssey ($4.99), the addictive puzzler Donut County ($4.99), and the classic car-dodging adventure Crossy Road (free with in-app purchases).

How to add a game controller to the Apple TV 4K

An Apple TV 4K game menu with a popup dialog box showing that a controller is required.
Apple TV 4K games will tell you if they need a controller. Screenshot: Apple

As you make your way around the App Store and Apple Arcade portal, you’ll notice certain games say a controller is required, others say a controller is optional, and some don’t say anything at all. For simple single-tap games like the aforementioned Alto’s Odyssey, for example, you can play using just the Apple TV 4K remote.

For more advanced titles, you’ll need to connect a controller like the one you might use on your PS5 or Xbox Series X. Just about any standard gamepad will do, as long as it supports Bluetooth—including the ones that came with your PlayStation or Xbox. If you’re going to buy one, though, make sure it supports the Apple TV 4K.

To connect the controller, you’ll need to make sure your controller is in pairing mode (its instructions or a quick web search will tell you how to do this if you’re not sure), then go to Settings > Remotes and Devices > Bluetooth. The controller should appear on this list, but if not, follow the How to Pair Game Controllers link for extra help.

Play Apple TV 4K games from an iPhone, iPad, or Mac

The screen mirroring option on an Apple TV 4K when used with an iPhone.
You can stream games from an iPhone, iPad, or macOS computer to your Apple TV 4K. Screenshot: Apple

If you prefer playing a game on your iPhone or iPad, but still want to take advantage of the larger screen your Apple TV 4K is connected to, you can beam them over from your mobile device—as long as everything’s on the same WiFi network. This uses Apple’s AirPlay protocol for streaming video and audio, which is supported by most Apple devices—it’s not quick enough for super-fast gameplay, but it works fine for slower-paced games.

On the iPhone or iPad you’re using, swipe down from the top right corner of the screen to bring up the Control Center, then tap the Screen Mirroring icon (two overlapping rectangles). Choose your Apple TV 4K from the list, and the display will be duplicated on your TV. This is a good way to play games that aren’t officially supported by the Apple TV 4K, and you can always add a controller to your iPhone or iPad too.

[Related: 24 iPhone settings that feel like secrets]

If you’re on a Mac, click the Control Center icon on the menu bar (it looks like two toggle switches), choose Screen Mirroring, and select the Apple TV 4K box you want to connect to. Click Screen Mirroring again and choose Use As Separate Display to have the Apple TV 4K act as a second monitor, where you can display any games that can run on your Mac, while still controlling them with your computer. Click Screen Mirroring and the name of the Apple TV 4K to break the connection.

The post Your Apple TV 4K is secretly good for video games appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
9 Gmail features to get you out of your inbox and back to work https://www.popsci.com/story/diy/best-gmail-features-hacks/ Mon, 23 Mar 2020 20:00:17 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/best-gmail-features-hacks/
a photo of a laptop with a Gmail inbox open
The more time you spend in that messy inbox, the less time you have to enjoy all that sun. John Kennedy

Email can be a lot. But it doesn’t have to be.

The post 9 Gmail features to get you out of your inbox and back to work appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
a photo of a laptop with a Gmail inbox open
The more time you spend in that messy inbox, the less time you have to enjoy all that sun. John Kennedy

Despite being the central hub for most of our work, email can be a real productivity killer. Everyone is vying for your attention at all hours of the day, and that little unread icon taunts you until you give in and re-open your inbox to see what’s happening. This, of course, interrupts the flow of your actual job.

I’m a slave to the notification icon as much as anyone. In an ideal world, I’d learn to keep pushing forward and deal with email when I actually have time between other tasks. But that’s not as easy as it sounds. So instead of changing my own behavior, I’ve learned some Gmail tricks that will help me spend less time emailing and more time working.

Pause your Gmail inbox to stop the barrage of notifications

Yes, you could just close your email tab, but chances are you actually need access to some messages for work. In that case, you need a Gmail add-on called Inbox Pause. Install the extension in your browser, and you’ll see a big Pause button on Gmail’s left sidebar—click it whenever you need to stop incoming messages. Don’t worry, you won’t miss anything, and you can choose to let certain senders through if you’re expecting something urgent.

[Related: 9 advanced Gmail searches that will dig up stuff you never knew you missed]

If you’d rather not install a third-party extension for this job, there are some other workarounds that may help. If you only need access to old messages and would like to prevent any online distractions, you can use Gmail offline, for example. Just click the cog icon in the top right corner of your screen, hit See all settings, and select the Offline tab. There, check the box next to Enable offline mail and finish with Save Changes. This feature will let you view your email even when you’re completely disconnected from the web. (Of course, this only works if you don’t need the rest of the internet for your work).

Activating Gmail's offline mode
Sometimes turning the entire internet off can be terribly useful to boost productivity. Screenshot: Gmail

You could also set up your Gmail account using a third-party email client like Thunderbird or Apple Mail. This will allow you to open the app and put it in offline mode whenever you want some peace, so you can keep using the web while your email stays frozen. Just head to Gmail’s Settings, go to the Forwarding and POP/IMAP tab, find IMAP access, and check the box next to Enable IMAP. This will allow those desktop programs to access your email. 

Snooze unimportant emails for later

How to snooze email on Gmail
Unread emails sitting in your inbox can be terribly intimidating. Screenshot: Gmail

Despite the advice of productivity experts, my inbox doubles as a to-do list. (Hey, I’m not the only one.) It just works for me: unread emails act as a constant reminder that something requires action.

Not all of these tasks require an immediate response, though, and having them sit unread in my inbox nags at me. Plus, they make it harder to see the urgent stuff that’s mixed in. For that, Gmail’s Snooze button has become my new best friend: on desktop, hover over the message in question and click the little clock icon that appears to the right, or right-click on an email and select Snooze. On mobile, slide an unopened message to the left or right, depending on your personal configuration.

Snoozing banishes an email from your inbox until a time you specify—say, tomorrow morning when you have free time to schedule an appointment with the mechanic. That way, you can keep things clean and anxiety-free while you take care of what’s really important at the moment.

Schedule emails to send at the most opportune time

Send scheduling tool on Gmail
This small arrow next to the Send button is often ignored, but it can make your life easier. Screenshot: Gmail

Dealing with email as it comes in is rarely a productive use of your time. It’s better to batch a few email sessions—say, once every couple of hours—and knock everything out in a single chunk. That way, you aren’t constantly interrupting your momentum with an unrelated task.

The problem is, it’s hard to time those inbox sessions perfectly for every email. Gmail’s Schedule button lets you write the email when you want and schedule it to send later—so it arrives precisely when you mean it to.

Once you’ve written your email and chosen its recipient, click the downward arrow to the right of the Send button, then hit Schedule send. Gmail will suggest three predetermined times for you, including tomorrow afternoon and Monday morning. If none of those work, you can click Pick a time & date, and use the emerging calendar to pick the exact moment you want your message to hit its destination. Finish by clicking Schedule send. On the Gmail app, the process is similar: just tap the three dots in the top right corner of your screen and select Schedule send

Your scheduled messages will sit and wait in the main Gmail sidebar within the Scheduled folder. If you need to make changes or unschedule any of them, you can find them all there. 

Stop wasting your time on typing

Gmail's Duet AI menu
When you sign up for Google’s Woorkspace labs, you’ll see this menu in every new message window. Screenshot: Gmail

It may seem silly to say that “writing email is a waste of time,” but in the age of automation, it’s true. Gmail has a number of features that can help you draft messages more quickly, so you can get back to doing actual work.

Templates have been around for ages, though they used to be known as “canned responses.” These allow you to save certain blocks of text that you use often and insert them into any email with a few clicks. For example, you could use them to enter your address, or ship off a form response to a question you get asked every day.

If you have a Google Workspace account (through your employer or education institution, for example), you can create a template by opening a new message, typing the text you want to save, and clicking the three dots in the bottom right corner of your message. On the emerging menu, hover over Templates and choose Save draft as template. Then, when crafting a reply to an email, you can go to that same menu to insert text from any template—you’ll be able to recognize them by the subject line.

Smart Compose on Gmail is another useful feature, and it’s available for all users. This tool will predict what it thinks you’re about to type and shows the rest of the sentence in gray text. You can press Tab to complete the prediction, and keep on typing. If you disabled this feature—I get it, it’s distracting—you should give it another shot. Once you get used to it, it’s amazing how quickly you can breeze through some messages. If you want to skip the typing altogether, you can choose one of Gmail’s response chips, which you may see when replying to an email. These AI-generated options might be all you need, so you can choose one of three mostly innocuous phrases like “That sounds good!” or “Have a great weekend too!” and hit Send.  

Google recently integrated its AI platform, Bard, into the web version of Gmail. If you signed up for Google Workspace Labs, you can enable Duet AI—an experimental AI-email composer that will write your message for you after you give it a prompt. To sign up, you can visit the Google Labs website and choose to join the Workspace Lab. 

Gmail menu to refine AI generated content
You can ask Google’s artificial intelligence for a more refined or formal text. You can also just ask it to use fewer words. Screenshot: Gmail

Once you do, a multicolor navigation bar will appear when you compose new Gmail messages —click Help me write to get started, and then write a prompt. You can try anything, like “compose a happy holidays message for a potential client,” or “an email apologizing to my kid’s teacher after they bit the classroom pet.” Hit Create to see the results. You can also ask Duet AI to give you a second draft by clicking Recreate, or request changes—click Refine and then choose to Formalize, Elaborate, or Shorten. When you see something you like, click Insert to add the message to the body text. Remember that AI takes a lot of creative and factual liberties, so you’ll need to make sure everything looks good and accurate before you hit Send

Finally, you can use Gmail’s multiple signatures feature to switch between different sign-offs based on who you’re emailing. Just go to Settings, and under General, scroll down to Signature and click Create new. Once you have everything you need, click the pen icon in a Compose window to switch between them.

Mute distracting email threads

Gmail menu to mute email
Sometimes you just need to stop getting notifications about certain message threads. Screenshot: Gmail

I have friends and family that like to start long, multi-person email threads sharing silly jokes, political debates, or other time-wasting nonsense. Unfortunately, there’s no way to leave a thread completely without nagging someone to move you to BCC. But Gmail offers the next-best thing: the Mute feature, which prevents the thread from showing up in your inbox when new messages arrive.

[Related: Gmail’s new email layouts will give a newsletter vibe to all your messages]

To mute a thread in Gmail, right-click on it and choose Mute—that’s it. Further messages will still be marked as unread, but they’ll skip the inbox altogether and enter the bowels of your All Mail tab, never to be seen unless you search for them. That way, you can catch up on those threads later, if you want—and you can even unmute them if they become relevant.

This story has been updated. It was originally published in 2020. 

The post 9 Gmail features to get you out of your inbox and back to work appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
The fastest way to install drawer slides https://www.popsci.com/diy/how-to-install-drawer-slides/ Sun, 08 Oct 2023 14:00:00 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=577713
A drawer inside a cabinet, after someone has installed the drawer slides to hold it in place.
A smooth install means a smooth ride (for you and your drawers). Jean Leavasseur for Popular Science

A few minutes of planning might save you hours of struggling.

The post The fastest way to install drawer slides appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A drawer inside a cabinet, after someone has installed the drawer slides to hold it in place.
A smooth install means a smooth ride (for you and your drawers). Jean Leavasseur for Popular Science

We may earn revenue from the products available on this page and participate in affiliate programs. Learn more ›

Installing drawer slides is a task that can surprise new woodworkers with its difficulty. In theory, it’s super simple: screw the slides in where they need to go, and move on with your life. I believed that right up until the first time I tried it.

As I struggled to keep both slides at the proper height while trying to attach the drawer to the slides in a way that would keep it level and moving smoothly inside the cabinet, I realized how fantastically frustrating the job actually is. Many companies sell jigs and tools that will help with the process, but you can save yourself some cash and time by learning how to install drawer slides with just a couple of pieces of scrap plywood to use as spacers.  

This method only works for side-mount drawer slides, though. If you’re using undermount, Jon Peters of Longview Woodworking has an excellent video that will show you how to build your drawers and install the slides.

Stats

  • Time: 5 to 10 minutes
  • Cost: $15 to $30
  • Difficulty: easy

Materials

Tools

How to install full extension, side-mount drawer slides

Always start with square drawers, whether you bought them, built them, or are doing repairs. If the boxes are wonky, installing slides will be a nightmare. Whatever the case, your drawers should be 1 inch narrower than the opening. It’s better to err on the side of a 16th of an inch smaller rather than too large, because most drawer slides have adjustable tabs that can close gaps, but they can’t get thinner.

1. Determine the height of the slides from the bottom of the cabinet. The easiest way to install drawer slides is flush with the bottom of the drawer. This way, you only have one height measurement to keep track of. The bottom of a drawer should sit about an eighth of an inch above the bottom edge of the opening it’ll sit inside—this will allow it to slide in and out without catching.  

If you have more than one drawer, find this height for each one.

  • Note: You don’t have to install the slides at the bottom of the drawer—they can go at any height. It’s a matter of design aesthetics. If you want to center the slides vertically, for example, you’ll just need to do some math to figure out how high above the bottom of the drawer the base of the slide needs to be. 

2. Cut two plywood spacers to the height of the bottom of the highest drawer. The best plywood for this is ¾-inch because it’s a quarter-inch wider than the slides themselves, giving the drawer a lip to rest on (that’ll be important later). You’ll need two spacers, one for each side of the cabinet. Use a miter saw or table saw to make this cut square, and use a stop block to ensure that both spacers are exactly the same size.  

  • Note: If you’re planning to have the slides sit higher than the bottom of the drawer, cut a second pair of small spacers that are the height of the distance between the bottom of the drawer and the bottom of the slide.

3. Use the spacers to position the slides inside the cabinet. Set your spacers inside the cabinet to find the height of the slides.

  • Note: If the slide should be higher than the bottom of the drawer, place the smaller spacer on top of the tall spacer.
A plywood spacer under a drawer slide to keep it in place while installing the slide.
The plywood spacer holds the drawer slide up, and will also hold the drawer if you use a thick enough piece of plywood. Jean Levasseur for Popular Science

4. Install the drawer slides. Place the slide on top of the spacer and screw the slide in place. Most side-mount drawer slides have bendable tabs cut into them—screw through those holes to start, because they will allow you to make micro-adjustments later if necessary.  

5. Attach the drawers to the slides, using the spacers as a shelf. With the drawer slides screwed to the cabinet, place just the tall spacer board inside (remove the shorter piece of plywood if you used one). Then set the drawer on the lip created by the ¾-inch spacer. Pull the drawer out of the cabinet 3 or 4 inches, then extend the drawer slide until it’s lined up where you want it. I usually position mine about a 16th of an inch from the front of the drawer box so there’s no chance of it interfering with the drawer face.  

[Related: Build your own drawer organizer]

Screw the first hole of the slide into the drawer box. 

Then pull the slide almost all the way out, so the back of the drawer box is still resting on the plywood spacer, and screw in one of the rear screws.  

Your drawer is now installed.

6. Recut the plywood spacers and repeat Steps 1 through 5 for additional drawers. To finish any lower drawers, simply cut the plywood spacer down to the height of the bottom of the next-highest drawer, working through Steps 1 and 2 if you need a refresher. Then repeat Steps 3 through 5.  

  • Pro tip: Take the previously installed drawers out  as you go so they’re not in the way—you can easily slide them back in when you’re done installing everything. 

And that’s it. Once all of the drawers are in place, make sure they open and close properly, and use the micro-adjustments on the slides to fix any minor inconsistencies. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the specifics of those adjustments.

When the drawers are working the way you want, start building those drawer faces if you’re not working with finished drawers. That project is its own special brand of frustrating fun, but I can get you started with a bonus tip: Playing cards make great spacers.

The post The fastest way to install drawer slides appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Make a classic pinhole camera to watch the upcoming solar eclipse https://www.popsci.com/diy/how-to-make-a-pinhole-camera/ Fri, 06 Oct 2023 16:19:21 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=577644
A cardboard pinhole camera to watch an eclipse
Listen, we know this is not the most sophisticated-looking artifact, but it does a great job at protecting your eyes when you want to look at the sun. Sandra Gutierrez

This DIY projector might be the easiest you ever build.

The post Make a classic pinhole camera to watch the upcoming solar eclipse appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
A cardboard pinhole camera to watch an eclipse
Listen, we know this is not the most sophisticated-looking artifact, but it does a great job at protecting your eyes when you want to look at the sun. Sandra Gutierrez

It’s a well-known fact that staring at the sun is… not the best idea. In the same way that the sun can burn your skin, our home star can overwhelm your peepers with UV rays and literally scorch your retina.

That is a huge bummer, especially because watching a solar eclipse (when the moon covers the sun) is an incredibly cool experience. Thankfully, there are several ways to watch an eclipse without risking your vision, and one of them is building a pinhole camera out of a box, a piece of aluminum foil, and lots of tape. This is an easy and incredibly versatile project, and you can turn it into a permanent camera obscura when you’re done watching the eclipse. 

Stats

  • Time: 10 minutes
  • Cost: $1
  • Difficulty: easy 

Materials

  • 1 cardboard box
  • Duct tape (or electrical tape)
  • Aluminum foil
  • White paper

Tools

  • Scissors (or box cutter)
  • Ruler
  • Pencil
  • Thumbtack 
  • (Optional) glue

How to make a pinhole camera

1. Light-proof your box. Leaving one side open, use duct tape or electrical tape to seal the box and prevent any light rays from sneaking in. Pay special attention to the corners and wherever two pieces of cardboard meet. The pinhole will only allow a few rays of light into your box, so the projection of the sun will be dim. That means the darker your camera, the easier it will be to see the image.

As we said, this project is versatile. You can use a wide range of box sizes to make your pinhole camera, but cereal and shoe boxes work exceptionally well. We used the 15-by7 ½-by-5 ½-inch box that carried our neighbor’s latest online shopping spurt. 

Light-proofed box for pinhole camera.
Covering the openings and corners with duct tape is the easiest way to light-proof your box. But electrical tape will also do. Sandra Gutierrez

Likewise, duct tape and electrical tape are the best choices to light-proof your box, but you can use any tape that will block light—dark washi tape or masking tape will also do the trick. Just keep in mind that you may have to apply multiple layers to achieve total darkness inside your box. 

[Related: A ‘ring of fire’ eclipse and Hunter’s Moon will bring lunar drama to October’s skies]

  • Pro tip: Check your work by holding your box up to a light and looking inside. If you still see some shine coming through, apply another layer of tape. 
Arrows pointing to the openings of a box where the light filters in.
Hold your box against a window or a lamp to see where the light comes through. The corners are often problematic spots you’ll need to cover. Sandra Gutierrez

2. Determine your pinhole’s location and cover the inside of the opposite face with white paper. Measure one of the smallest sides of the box, cut a piece of white paper to the same size, and tape or glue it to the inside of the corresponding face. It doesn’t have to be perfect—as long as most of the side is covered, you’ll be good to go. Just make sure that the paper doesn’t have any wrinkles or folds, as they may distort the image of the sun. 

White sheet of paper glued to the inside of a box.
If you don’t want to mess around with glue, you can always just tape the white paper that will be your screen. Do it carefully to avoid wrinkles and creases. Sandra Gutierrez

3. Measure the openings for the pinhole and the viewer. On the side opposite the one you covered with white paper, use your ruler and a pencil to measure two openings. The pinhole opening will be located in the upper left corner (about half an inch from the edges) and will be 2-by-2 inches (we’ll make it smaller later). 

Ruler measuring a square on a cardboard box.
Measurements don’t have to be exact. As long as the aluminum foil covers the entire opening, you’ll be fine. Sandra Gutierrez

The viewing opening will be located in the upper right corner of the box, half an inch from the top edge and an inch from the right edge of the box. This opening will be smaller—only 1 inch square.

4. Cut the openings. Using a box cutter or scissors, cut out the openings you drew. 

  • Pro tip: If the openings end up being too big, don’t sweat it—you can always adjust their size with tape. 

5. Close and seal the box. Use your newly cut openings to make sure there are no other places where light might be sneaking in. Pay special attention to the corners of the box above and below your openings. Cover all the places where pieces of cardboard meet with tape. 

6. Cover the larger opening with aluminum foil. Cut a smooth 2 ½-by-2 ½-inch piece of aluminum foil. With the dull side facing you, carefully cover the big opening with the metallic sheet and tape it in place. Make sure you secure it tightly so no light can get into the box.  

Aluminum foil covering the corner of a cardboard box.
Having a smooth piece of aluminum foil will prevent sunlight from being redirected. Sandra Gutierrez
  • Pro tip: To smooth out any creases, softly rub the top of any fingernail over the foil in a small, circular motion. 

7.  Use the thumbtack to poke a hole in the foil. Find the rough center of the 2-by-2-inch square under the aluminum sheet and gently push the tack through before pulling it back out—you want a clean, round hole. If you don’t have a thumbtack, you can use the tip of a toothpick or an embroidery needle. Just make sure that whatever you’re using has a point (it’ll make a neater hole) and that it’s approximately 0.2 millimeters wide. 

Fingers holding a needle in front of a pinhole camera.
We used an embroidery needle to poke our pinhole. If you find that what you used is too wide, you can just replace the piece of aluminum foil and start again. Sandra Gutierrez
  • Note: The width of your pinhole will determine how much light gets into the box. Too much light and the image will be blurry. If that’s the case, don’t worry—just replace the foil and try making a smaller pinhole. 

8. Put your pinhole camera to the test. Stand with your back facing the sun and look into the box through the viewport. Use your hands to block out as much light as possible and move around until you find the angle where sunlight enters through the pinhole. When this happens, you should see a small projection of the shape of the sun on the white paper you pasted inside the box. 

[Related: Total eclipses aren’t that rare—and you’ve probably missed a bunch of them]

Keep in mind that the weather is crucial in determining the quality of the image you’ll see inside your pinhole camera, and whether you can see the eclipse at all. The October 14 eclipse, in particular, will be annular, so the moon will be smaller than the sun and clouds, rain, or other inclement weather will make it hard to see the event, explains Franck Marchis, a SETI Institute astronomer and the chief scientific officer of Unistellar, a company that manufactures smart telescopes.

How a pinhole camera works

Images are light. Everything we see we perceive because there’s light bouncing off of it, beaming directly through our pupils and into our eyes. All cameras, including the humble pinhole camera you just made, operate under this basic principle. The better they filter the light, the sharper the resulting image will be. 

The sun, of course, is the ultimate light source. On a sunny day, rays from the star travel to Earth and bounce off of every surface they reach. This is a lot of light coming from all directions, so if we want to see only a small portion of the sun’s rays, we have to focus those rays and filter out the rest. That’s why the pinhole in your camera is so tiny or, in more technical terms, why its aperture is so narrow—it only lets a small amount of light into the box, just enough so you can see only a dim projection of the sun when you point the pinhole directly at it. 

The image of an LED lamp with a filter besides the image inside a pinhole camera.
I built my pinhole camera on a cloudy day, so I tested it with my LED lamp and added a very non-professionally made filter I made with aluminum foil to test the sharpness of the image. Sandra Gutierrez

The dimness of the image is not ideal, but it’s the tradeoff we make for sharpness—too much light results in a blurry, out-of-focus picture. This is important during a solar eclipse, as filtering the light will allow you to see the round shape of the sun become a crescent or a ring as the moon moves in and gradually blocks the sunlight. 

When the eclipse is over, use a skewer to widen your camera’s pinhole. When you look inside, you won’t only be able to see the sun, but a slightly brighter and inverted image of your surroundings. A bigger pinhole turns your box into a camera obscura, allowing more light in and projecting an image of the objects around you.  

The post Make a classic pinhole camera to watch the upcoming solar eclipse appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
How to look at the eclipse without damaging your eyes https://www.popsci.com/how-to-not-damage-eyes-during-eclipse/ Tue, 22 Aug 2017 01:02:11 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/uncategorized/how-to-not-damage-eyes-during-eclipse/
Sun photo

It’s always a bad idea to look directly at the sun.

The post How to look at the eclipse without damaging your eyes appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Sun photo

This month, millions of Americans will have a chance to watch an annular eclipse, also known as a “ring of fire” for the scorching halo the sun forms around the moon. If you’re one of them, be careful: looking directly at a solar eclipse without eye protection can permanently damage your vision.

It doesn’t matter if our rocky satellite is blocking all or some of our nearest star—the sun is still an incredibly bright source of light. Don’t risk your eyesight for a quick glimpse or even a once-in-a-lifetime event. Thankfully, it’s pretty easy to protect your eyes while watching an eclipse..

What happens if you look at a solar eclipse

We are able to see thanks to photoreceptors. These cells, also known as rods and cones, are located at the backs of our eyes, and convert the light reflected by the world around us into electrical impulses that our brain interprets as the image we see. But when strong light, like that from the sun, hits our eyes, a series of chemical reactions occur that damage and often destroy these rods and cones. This is known as solar retinopathy, and can make our eyesight blurry. Sometimes, if the damage is too great in one area, you can lose sight completely.

[Related: Every sunset ends with a green flash. Why is it so hard to see?]

On a typical sunny day, you almost never have to worry about solar retinopathy. That’s because our eyes have natural mechanisms that ensure too much light doesn’t get in. When it’s really bright outside, our pupils get super tiny, reducing the amount of sunlight that can hit your photoreceptors. But when you stare directly at the sun, your pupils’ shrinking power isn’t enough to protect your peepers.

This is where your eyes’ second defense mechanism comes into play. When we look at something bright, we tend to blink. This is known as the corneal or blink reflex, and it  prevents us from staring at anything too damagingly bright. 

Just before a solar eclipse has reached its totality, the moon is partially blocking the sun, making it a lot easier for us to look up at the star without blinking. But that doesn’t mean you should—even that tiny sliver of sunlight is too intense for our sensitive photoreceptors.

[Related: Total eclipses aren’t that rare—and you’ve probably missed a bunch of them]

Unfortunately, if you practice unprotected sun-gazing, you probably won’t know the effects of your actions until the next morning, when the damage to your photoreceptors has kicked in.

And while solar retinopathy is extremely rare, it is by no means unheard of. If you search the term in medical journals, you’ll find case reports after almost every popular solar eclipse. Let’s try really hard to do better this time, eyeball-havers.

How to safely watch a solar eclipse

Watching the eclipse with your own two eyes is easy: just wear legitimate eclipse sunglasses. These are crucial, as they will block the sun’s rays enough for you to safely see the eclipse without burning your eyes out.

And if you don’t have eclipse glasses, you can still enjoy the view, albeit not directly. Try whipping up your own eclipse projector or a DIY pinhole camera so you can enjoy the view without having to book an emergency visit to the eye doctor.

This story has been updated. It was originally published in 2017.

The post How to look at the eclipse without damaging your eyes appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>
Hand gesture reactions are one of macOS Sonoma’s coolest new features https://www.popsci.com/diy/mac-hand-gesture-reactions/ Wed, 04 Oct 2023 19:30:59 +0000 https://www.popsci.com/?p=577145
Animated hand gestures on FaceTime
Hand gestures just got more fun on macOS Sonoma. Screenshot: Apple

Make your approval way more evident with animated reactions.

The post Hand gesture reactions are one of macOS Sonoma’s coolest new features appeared first on Popular Science.

]]>
Animated hand gestures on FaceTime
Hand gestures just got more fun on macOS Sonoma. Screenshot: Apple

Reacting to something online is way more fun if there’s an animation involved. Apple seems to understand this, as it included hand gesture reactions in macOS Sonoma. They work on FaceTime, of course, but also on some other video call platforms, including Google Meet, Zoom, and Microsoft Teams. 

Now, if you have a compatible Mac, you’ll be able to celebrate your colleague’s promotion with a dramatic firework effect, or send digital hearts to your significant other without clicking or tapping anything. 

Check if your computer is compatible 

There are two system requirements you’ll need to play around with macOS’s new hand gesture reactions, and you can use one menu to confirm you have both. 

Animated hand gestures are possible thanks to the processing power of Apple’s silicon chips, so you’ll need to start by seeing if you have the right hardware. Click the Apple icon in the top left corner of your screen, then About this Mac, and a small window will pop up. The first item is Chip—if your machine is sporting an M1 or M2, you’re good to go. 

About this Mac information window
To activate animated hand gestures, you need the right hardware and software. Screenshot: Apple

You can use the same window to check your macOS version. If it’s Sonoma, you’re good to go. Otherwise, click More info, which will take you to Settings. There, go to General, then Software Update to have your machine scan for, download, and install newer versions of the operating system. Your computer should automatically tell you if you can upgrade to the latest version of the OS, but you can also check Apple’s official list of compatible devices

[Related: 6 new features in macOS Sonoma you have to try]

If your machine cannot handle macOS Sonoma and is not equipped with Apple Silicon, we’re happy to tell you that there’s still a way to enable hand gestures on your video calls: using the Continuity Camera feature. This capability is available on devices running software as old as macOS 13, and it’ll let you use your iPhone as a webcam for video calls on your computer. You will need an iPhone running at least iOS 16 and signed into the same Apple ID as your Mac machine. 

How to use hand gesture reactions on macOS

1. Open FaceTime or another video call platform that supports the feature. Google Meet, Microsoft Teams, or Zoom will do the trick. 

2. Activate your camera and you’ll see the Video menu button appear on the main macOS navigation bar—it’s a bright green button with a white camera. Click it and make sure Reactions is selected. This will activate the feature.

Video menu on macOS
You’ll see this bright green button whenever your Apple device’s camera is active. Screenshot: Apple

3. Back on your video call, you’ll be able to make predetermined hand gestures to trigger animated reactions. For example, give a thumbs up or a thumbs down and you’ll see a gray bubble with the relevant emoji. 

thumbs up hand gesture on macOS Sonoma
That’s what we call enthusiastic consent. Screenshot: Google

You can also use both hands to make a love gesture, and small red hearts will bubble up on top of your camera feed. 

Heart hand gesture on macOS Sonoma
This is the gesture you make when the meeting is over ahead of schedule. Screenshot: Apple

Or generate a cool laser effect by making a rad rock ‘n’ roll gesture. Just keep in mind that this might be an offensive gesture in some cultures, so be mindful of your audience. 

Person using animated reactions on Google Meet
Are we taking this meeting from an underground techno club? Maybe. Screenshot: Google

Maybe release some celebratory balloons by making a peace sign. 

Person using animated hand gestures on FaceTime
Sure, a peace sign can be incredibly festive. Screenshot: Apple

Beyond these, Apple has a full list of gestures you can make—it’s not long but we would not be surprised if they add more over time. 

Five pro tips when using hand gestures on macOS

Perfecting your hand gesture reactions will take some time, but we have some recommendations that will have your friends and family gasping during your next catch-up.

Make marked gestures

We got the best results when making very neat gestures. For that, how you angle your hands is extremely important. For example, the rock ‘n’ roll gesture triggered the laser animation more consistently if the back or front of our wrist was facing the camera—aiming our indexes and pinkies at the camera resulted in absolutely no reaction. 

Person triggering animated reactions with hand gestures on Google Meet
Fireworks will make it clear to your boss just how much you like working for them. Screenshot: Google

Keep your hands away from your face and body

It’s easier for your Mac to recognize your hand gesture in contrast with your background. If you make a peace sign by partially covering your face, it’s possible you won’t trigger a reaction, or that the animation will take longer to appear. 

[Related: 6 great features to try out on iOS 17]

Give your machine some time to react

Computers are smart and fast—but never as quick as we’d like them to be. When making your hand gesture, hold your pose for a second or two to allow your machine to recognize it and react accordingly. 

Skip the hand gestures altogether

If you like the animated reactions but are not willing to try (and fail) to trigger an effect in front of your colleagues, just skip the gestures. When on a video call, open the Video menu on the main macOS navigation bar. On the emerging menu, click the arrow next to Reactions and you’ll see a quick menu of emojis you can select—these are the same ones you can trigger with hand gestures.   

Apple's Video menu with reactions
You can save yourself the trouble of making a gesture your machine will understand. Screenshot: Apple

Deactivate visual effects and virtual backdrops to better showcase animated reactions

If you use a virtual backdrop or any kind of built-in visual effect on your video calls, it’ll affect how your animated hand gestures show on your camera feed. For example, if you use a blur effect to protect your privacy (or hide whatever mess is sitting behind you) the hearts, balloons or bubbles that emerge when you make a hand gesture might get caught behind the effect and look blurry or low quality. If you use a virtual backdrop, then your machine will only show the animation behind the effect’s overlay, which may not show the reaction at all or make you look, well, interesting.   

Person using hand gestures on Google Meet
Guess we now know what we’re dressing as for Halloween. Screenshot: Google

The post Hand gesture reactions are one of macOS Sonoma’s coolest new features appeared first on Popular Science.

Articles may contain affiliate links which enable us to share in the revenue of any purchases made.

]]>